alias
ve
ey ema
ch
ad aia,
oie
Pret atot Wh
: q Dak . , oe ' bad eh ace nlb th te oe
q on : we se ; Brey eine Ae
‘ . ” ie 6 rome ’ Paren way ee Sinai » bein) ents
ta als Jeter eh oern ‘ Sigh rl F mae. ‘ bepintitnn elds kag
ead. ‘ - . ia ier) blige oa) Cer rn ee) ue ary Sorat 1
X68 ‘ ; en? : ui Newt ter Stack ‘ Bi OF 8: Alga Mort ete
os ‘
. a ene @ +e F ' . Bid oes How ak es s
“+ ‘ ' : oo a . %
x ‘ A fio tar at Be ih ee &
oa : oye ‘ 2 %
. ' 4 “we te ‘ 4 sy fads tae vate
i A | ras , ®
‘
a5 '
i E oes aly
4 a Cat . . BLS Bere
“f 4 ¢ oan , . » se)
‘ : . aes | .
‘ . rhe s er Para
. r ; 1s A + We ak Wy ¥ ee ete re
: ‘ . Pet yeree
» Ath Baty
ont ‘ Sr ans
. he ses ‘ sere de ae
al © aD ae oO Sal fe) —_
) = o — ow = @
; 3 72 S Ps) E ps)
P aa > Ke Pr ke >
Z a z : a a
NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYA!IT_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
n z 2) Zz or 2) z Res ”
: =< = r= We = < \ =
z | 2 wW oie pl z 5
= oO Piers oO &® mS oe fe) Bo
> ” no nw a 22) ” no
> = oO 4% < . 2) a6 Oo
FE z fe XY 2 iS Zz
> = > = > S > Ye
~ ” od w * et (%) a = i
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _ INSTITUTION NOILNIILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S31YV4dIT_ LIBRA
= > Soke n >
; oc = a 4 aX =
4 < 3 Pa < aoe Na a
: 5 3 2 WO 5 :
) = Yi ) — fe) fe)
7 =I 2 a Ze poser z
NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS_S3IYVYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILN
* é : Se uae as
: a =
~ ow ‘ —_ w —_ Yj wo =
> Yes e © Gy -
: a SS > “Yi. >
= Sx WY = Was Y Wy E
2 WHE Z = WY fi 2 =
mn SY 2 7 Teese 1 2
: 7) ey z 7) = 7) =
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3tyvuai7_LIBRA
. « . : * ’
‘.
5
.
Ss :
S NS »
NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS S3!1YVYGI1 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNI
MeeVee FP ere
NVINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
Wj My
li
NVINOSHLIWS
NVINOSHLIWS
NS
\
SMITHSONIAN
SMITHSONIAN
NOILALILSNI
Ge
Vif
LIBRARIES
LIBRARIES
NOILALILSNI
LIBRARIES
NOILNLILSNI
,
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYUSIT LIBRA
- z iz z= re = rs
«] — ‘Oo ° NE ° o
= >) fey SNS. E me)
0 . :
22 A =| \ = =
: Seb pad = is Ps)
b é b m
n m n m
) = (ay z = ra)
NOILNLILSNI
SIJIYVYAIT_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNI
Xs Ks
So\
*
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS saluvudi LIBRA
NVINOSHLINS S31iu¥vuall
NVINOSHLIWS
as
SMITHSONIAN
iY
SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS
INVIINNVOMALIFVO
\e
« .
SMITHSONIAN
= wn” = 2p) =< ” >
2 i Zz - zs Ca ue Zz
3 “3 : Bi OR ie :
. <5 2 < = WS = c
- fea) = o = faa] —
: Pripetos a $ 5 = a ea S
Wj
NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYUSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN_INSTITUTION NOILAL
gs : 5 eal :
=a iss) p= w a Vy wo —
5 co 5 a 5 Jy 5
: Ss = > = OG :
~— 4 te 7°
f) fan ye com - > a yee rel =
Y dP oa,
ea) Lg SWNT ee
: : Ca 2 a a
- E = WA
O = 2 ee
INVINOSHLINS S31YVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN NOILNLILSN!I NVINOS
*
ISMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIJLOALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVWY
NVINOSHLINS S3IYVv4
Y
NVINOSHLINS S31YVvy
NVINOSHLIWS
XY
SMITHSONIAN
Ge
Ya
SMITHSONIAN
SMITHSONIAN
LIBRARIES SMITHS
ra nT Z Zz
«” b SN h =
el es = XK PS “i a. 7
— a NY — t Y
c a e e Uy 2
= Ps 5 A « a a ea
Le 5 ea 5 eo 35 ei 7,
i <2 a nn 5 eae mee 25]
NVINOSHLINS S3!1YVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_NVINOS
im 5 : 3 : : _
‘ — ow — Yf-, ow — wo
WY 2 2 E Gy: E 2 \
S ‘ “ye Ui: =) > S
A \ : © UL : 2
War 3 = YP es = a
S\S 2) au in, ee = ) a SN
; SASS z m > m a m tic
= Ww — (oe) = 2)
“SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOMLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31uvugIT_LIBRARIES SMITH:
; ee o = 7) tsk 7)
z x 4 Zz = Why, = : =
§ NWS , § Ups NN:
zt AW g = SMI fe = KIN?
E \S Z, = Z E NYY 2
is = 7S > = > = SS >
” Ai Fa 7) Fz a) : 2
LNVINOSHLINS Saluvualy LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_ NVINO
= w = “+
ul a Ww = ws a &
o = a 23 a = ba
pe a < ae < ea tS
a = = = = =
a 3 Ea ° pe TS) Saw
| ay 2 ay = ay Zz
| SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31YVYUE!IT LIBRARIES SMITH
r FE mA z ie Zz
z) 2 x S) - o
a = W\ SS = os Ee / yf
= ‘ we BY = =) Oi“
- Ee \ = 2 rf.
= = N - a Ee Ge
a z Z s Zt
NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINO
D
My
NVINOSHLINS S31uvudl)
{ wn ae
< = os « z 2 &
| “Ss ‘ — _ , y ipa
O z zs 1e} NN SS ‘ a S = i SSL =
iP ae aN 2 i pM ®
ie = Ea WN 2 : “iy S
j= = = = > ; =
| be ” z= ”
Pion eT TTB iN MeILALITSNI NVINOSHLIWS LIBRARIES SMITH
Zz =e : ie = Ai Baines.
= ai es wo &s a oO be
Noe. 2 oc Z NA: Pe = ees
\< 3 = r<@ 4 WS xe x a < ;
Oe = ud) Gu) SOO Ea) Ew)
in GW 3 2 = ae 3 =
i 2 ay = le Gok = aj
j NVINOSHLINS SA2IYVHEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN, INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_NVINC
7 z s
) 23 Se ©
o O <Gil> 30NG 2) 5 30 No fe) <Sil> \
if > (2 = pede fs \ D2 GWDUi-d |F eer tome | Sep
ANNALS OF THE ANNALE VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
_
VOLUME 82 BAND 82
EXIT HSONIAN
| 1981
\V\ [AN os
LIBRARIES
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 82 BAND
THE TRUSTEES OF THE DIE TRUSTEES VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN KAAPSTAD
1980
& SET, PRINTED AND BOUND IN THE REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA BY
THE RUSTICA PRESS (PTY.) LTD., WYNBERG, CAPE
515
LIST OF CONTENTS
Day, J.
Southern African Cumacea. Part 4. Families Gynodiastylidae and Diastylidae.
(Published August 1980.) : ee a Be Sy a
DINGLE, R. V.
Marine Santonian and Campanian Ostracods from a borehole at Richards Bay,
Zululand. (Published June 1980.) . Be:
HENDEY, Q. B. see MUIZON, C. DE
KAUFFMAN, E. G. see KLINGER, H. C.
KENNEDY, W. J. see KLINGER, H. C.
KENSLEY, B.
Marine isopods from Marion, Prince Edward, and Crozet Islands (Crustacea,
Isopoda). (Published August 1980.) a = a : ie
KLINGER, H. C., KAUFFMAN, E. G. & KENNEDY, W. J.
Upper Cretaceous ammonites and inoceramids from the off-shore Alphard Group
of South Africa. (Published September 1980.) Ee a Be
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J.
Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South Africa. A new sextuberculate
texanitid. (Published September 1980.)
MILLARD, N. A. H.
The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude cruises. Part 11. Hydroida. (Pub-
lished June 1980.) ae ae os bes ae bs Be
MUIZON, C. DE & HENDEY, Q. B.
Late Tertiary seals of the South Atlantic Ocean. (Published June 1980.) ..
Ross, G. J. B. see SHAUGHNESSY, P. D.
SHAUGHNESSY, P. D. & Ross, G. J. B.
Records of the subantarctic fur seal (Arctocephalus tropicalis) from South Africa
with notes on its biology and some observations of captive animals.
(Published May 1980.) eh ae ae
Page
155
293
321
12
91
71
NEW GENERIC NAMES PROPOSED IN THIS VOLUME
Page
Haliana Day, 1980 a 215
Homiphoca de Muizon & Hendey, 1980 .. 3 oh ae ae ah ie 94
30
Unicapella Dingle, 1980
lhe
ISSN 0303-2515
"OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author's(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable): ‘
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .”
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...”
“As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’ .
Note: no comma separating name and year
Pagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, 5, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuLLouGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140,
Fiscuer, P.-H., DuvaL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634. ‘
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
TureLe, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. Ja: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges, Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 82 _ Band
June 1980 Junie
Part 1 Deel
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN
OSTRACODS FROM A BOREHOLE AT
RICHARDS BAY, ZULULAND
By
R. V. DINGLE
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.—p.i.), 7-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.-p.i.), 15(4—5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 94 7
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS FROM A
BOREHOLE AT RICHARDS BAY, ZULULAND
By
R. V. DINGLE
Department of Geology, University of Cape Town
(With 33 figures and 4 tables)
LMS. accepted 20 December 1979]
ABSTRACT
36 species, representing 17 genera of ostracods are recorded from Santonian and
Campanian rocks penetrated by borehole BH-9 near Richards Bay, Zululand. 19 of the
species are new, 6 are left in open nomenclature, whilst the remaining 11 species have been
previously recorded from Santonian rocks at Umzamba in Transkei. One new genus,
Unicapella, is erected. The new species are: Cytherelloidea newtoni, C. griesbachi, C. contorta,
Paracypris zululandensis, Bythocypris richardsbayensis, Bairdoppilata andersoni, Amphicytherura
zululandensis, Brachycythere sicarius, Unicapella sacsi, U. reticulata, Cythereis klingeri,
Haughtonileberis vanhoepeni, Hermanites kennedyi, Oertliella pennata, O. africana, Trachyleberis
zululandensis, T. minima, Rayneria nealei, and Gibberleberis elongata.
Population studies reveal five distinctive ostracod assemblages, each dominated by one or
two species, that can be related to the following sedimentary environments (dominant taxa in
parenthesis). In ascending order these are: 1. shallow, restricted water, high energy (Brachy-
cythere longicaudata); 2. shallow, restricted water, low energy (B. longicaudata and Haughtoni-
leberis haughtoni); 3. shallow, open water, low energy (Cythereis klingeri); 4. moderate depth,
open water, low energy (Bairdoppilata andersoni); 5. deep, open water, low energy (B. andersoni
and various Cytherellids). Assemblages 1-3 are Santonian in age, whilst 4-5 correspond
approximately to Campanian I and II, respectively.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction . 1
Summary of the stratigraphy of borehole BH_9, Richards Bay 3
Systematic descriptions . : : : 3
Discussion A : ‘ : : F : : i ¢ . 60
Palaeoecology . ; : ; - . 60
Ostracod assemblages 1- 5 : : : : : . 60
Sedimentary environments . : : : : 05
Biostratigraphy : : : 2 5 p : ee O,
Acknowledgements . : 5 5 ; : : j : . 68
References F ‘ : 2 : ‘ : : 2 : . 69
INTRODUCTION
Although Upper Cretaceous sediments occur extensively on the continental
shelf round southern Africa, onshore exposures of Santonian and Campanian
rocks are confined to small areas along the south-east coast (Dingle 1978). The
best exposures occur in the cliffs at Umzamba (Transkei) and round the shores
1
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 82 (1), 1980: 1-70, 33 figs, 4 tables.
2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
of False Bay (Zululand), whilst other small outcrops and excavations are known
from Igoda (eastern Cape), Itongazi, and Durban. A further locality has
recently been provided by a borehole at Richards Bay on the Zululand coast
(Maud & Orr 1975) (Fig. 1) where the preservation of fossils is so good that
many of the molluscs have retained their original aragonitic mineralogy and
nacreous sheen. In a region where deep Tertiary weathering has decalcified
many of the natural outcrops, the material from this borehole provides an
excellent opportunity to study small and delicate fossils.
Generally speaking, microfossils from the Upper Cretaceous rocks of
south-east Africa have received little attention. Ostracods are one group which
are poorly documented, with only three publications to date, all dealing with
Santonian assemblages from the lower part of the Umzamba section (Chapman
1904, 1923; Dingle 1969). In providing a regionally applicable biostratigraphic
framework, the recently completed thorough revision of ammonite taxonomy
and zonation by Kennedy & Klinger (1975 et seq.) and Forster (1975) has
removed one of the obstacles to further study of the less age-diagnostic micro-
32
False Bay
»*
ae
x d
Cretaceous
j sediments
Lebombo
volcanics
Durban
RICHARDS BAY HARBOUR
“~Itongazi
-Umzamba
31
31
Fig. 1. Location of BH9, Richards Bay, Zululand. Other Santonian-Campanian localities
are indicated: Umzamba, Itongazi, Durban, and False Bay.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 3
fossil taxa, and the author is currently undertaking a comprehensive investiga-
tion of the Barremian to Maastrichtian ostracod assemblages from south-east
Africa. The present paper, in describing material from the well-preserved
section in the Richards Bay borehole, will form a stratigraphic and ecologic
standard for comparison with the other less complete, and widely scattered
Senonian sequences.
SUMMARY OF THE STRATIGRAPHY OF BOREHOLE BH-9,
RICHARDS BAY
The borehole is situated 14 km west of Richards Bay township (Fig. 1)
(shown as Borehole W by Maud & Orr 1975, fig. 1), and passed through 159 m
of Upper Cretaceous sediment before entering granitic basement gneiss. 60 m at
the top of the core were weathered and unfossiliferous, and only the section 82 m
to 159 m was available for micropalaeontological analysis by the author.
Lithologically, the section studied consisted of monotonous dark olive-coloured
shelly silts and silty sands, with small pebbles and clay clasts at some levels near
the base. Pyrite and plant debris form minor constituents.
Klinger & Kennedy (1977) have described the ammonites from the BH-9
borehole and recognized three well-defined ammonite assemblages, which they
were able to compare with those from Umzamba, elsewhere in Zululand, and
Madagascar. On the basis of these faunal comparisons the lower part of the
borehole (159-114 m) is allocated a middle and upper Santonian age, whilst the
upper part (114-65 m) belongs to the lower Campanian. Local assemblages
allow a subdivision of the Campanian sequence into two faunas (Campanian I
and II) with the boundary placed at about 90 m. The succession appears to be
complete.
Thirty-three cored samples were available for microfossil analyses between
82,03 m and 150 m, and these gave good coverage from the base o* the borehole
to the lower part of the Campanian II (Fig. 32, Table 1). Each sample consisted
of half a core, about 25 mm radius and about 40 mm in length. Ostracods were
extracted by the normal washing techniques and are illustrated herein by
SEM photographs taken on a Cambridge Instruments Stereoscan 180 of the
Electron Microscopy Unit at the University of Cape Town. Specimens were
mounted on double-sided sellotape and were gold/palladium coated.
SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTIONS
The ciassification used here is based mostly on the Ostracod Treatise
(Moore 1961), with various additions necessitated by recent work. Morpho-
logical terms have been supplemented by those introduced to cover features
visible at high magnifications (e.g. Sylvester-Bradley & Benson 1971).
TABLE 1
Vertical distribution of ostracod species in the BH9 borehole.
Figures on the left are depths of samples beneath surface in metres. The stratigraphy is based on the ammonite studies of Klinger & Kennedy (1977).
Ostracods
pyvpnoyad vjjadvo2uy
1sops pyjadpaiuy
ipauuay sajupuidayy
WV ‘ds Stuagajojsax
pupo1afo 0)/a1]142O
D140]U0I vaployjasayIaD
Sisuapupjnjnz bansayldorydup
DUlUI Sldaga]AYyods J,
sisuapupjnynz Sldagajdyov. 7,
Juadaoyuva SiiagajiuojYysno Fy
1y9DqSald3 vaplojjasayjaD
Vv “ds 27/2111420
DIDBUO]A S149G2]AIGQID
pjouuad 0112111490
Dplun} vansayido1ydup
DIvIINS DUIOpuoT
J ‘ds pyjasayid a
SIJISSYf SlAagajiuojYysnv FT
Sisuapquipziun vaployjasoyidD
Sisuadogspanyo1a S1Addooy ag
¢€ ‘ds pyjasayidD
1u0S4apubd Div 1ddopalng
1asuly siasayidD
SnuDILALfo S119g2]42gq1D
Sisuapubjopuod asaysdodyoDAg
SNIADIIS AdBYIAIAYIDA
la]Dau DidaUudDYy
py “ds pjjasayidD
7 ds DyjasayidD
1U0]YSnNdY SlAagajuojYysno
Sisuapupjnjnz siaddovivg
Sisuapquipzuin siuddopavg
DIDpPNDIIBUO] asayIAAYyoDA_E
1U0]Mau DaplojjasayjiaD
SisualaysuvA} SiasayjaD
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Borehole
depth
82,0
* * * *
87,0
88,0
89,0
*
92,3
*k Ok *
*
97,5
100,0
102,2
106,0
110,0
115,2
115,9
118,2
119,8
120,2
123,0
123,5
124,0
125,0
125,5
127,8
*
* ke ok
*
*
* * *
*
*
CAMPANIAN
*
SANTONIAN
*
Pe
*
*
x & + *
eee fer eS
22 Yb) eo ee
* ok ke ke
*
*
* oe * * * KF F KK HK HK KH K
* * &£ €
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 3)
Abbreviations
RV _ right valve
LV left valve
MPC marginal pore canals
SCT subcentral tubercle
ATE anterior terminal element
PTE posterior terminal element
ME _ median element
AM anterior margin
PM posterior margin
DM dorsal margin
VM ventral margin
NPC _ normal pore canals
MA_ marginal areas
Subclass OSTRACODA Latreille, 1806
Order PODOCOPIDA Miller, 1894
Suborder PLATYCOPINA Sars, 1866
Family Cytherellidae Sars, 1866
Members of this family constitute one of the main elements of the ostracod
fauna (Fig. 32). They are important in the lowermost few metres of the borehole
(up to 21 %) where the genus Cytherelloidea is well represented, and in the upper
half (up to 28 %) where Cytherella occurs abundantly. Between 152 m and 123 m
(assemblages 2-3) the family forms only a minor component (<10%) of the
population.
Not only does the family occur in relatively large numbers, but it is also
diverse (5 species and 4 morphotypes recognized).
Genus Cytherella Jones, 1849
Four morphotypes have been distinguished in BH-9. These probably
represent separate species, but will not be designated until further samples from
the Santonian/Campanian of Zululand have been studied. All four are found
throughout the borehole, but none is common below the Santonian/Campanian
boundary.
Cytherella Sp. 1
Fig. 2A—C
RV and LV differ considerably in shape. In LV the VM and DM are
straight and the PM asymmetrically curved, with a pronounced dorsal slope.
In the RV the DM is ‘pitched’, but not arched. In both valves the posterior ends
carry puntae with stellate outlines.
Range
Santonian to Campanian JJ, but only common in Campanian II.
6 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 2. Cytherella. A. Cytherella sp. 1, SAM—-K5567, BH9 82,03 m, LV. B. Cytherella sp. 1,
SAM-K5568, BH9 82,03 m, RV. C. Cytherella sp. 1, SAM—K5568, BH9 82,03 m, detail of
ornamentation posterior part of LV. D. Cytherella sp. 2, SAM—K5569, BH9 82,03 m, R.V
E. Cytherella sp. 3, SAM—K5570, BH9 82,03 m, RV. F. Cytherella sp. 4, SAM—K5571, BH9
82,03 m, RV.
Scale bars: C = 10p, others = 100y.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS i
Cytherella Sp. 2
Fig. 2D
This form has an oval outline and a compressed anterior region when seen
in dorsal view. The DM is arched and the VM gently convex.
Range
Santonian to Campanian II, but only common in Campanian [-II.
Cytherella Sp. 3
Fig. 2E
An elongate form with a waisted lateral outline. AM symmetrically rounded,
PM asymmetrically curved.
Range
Santonian to Campanian II, but only common in Campanian I-Il.
Cytherella Sp. 4
Fig. 2F
This morphotype resembles C. Sp. 2, but differs in having a moderately
inflated posterior area and a slightly less arched DM.
Range
Santonian to Campanian II.
Genus Cytherelloidea Alexander, 1929
Cytherelloidea umzambaensis Dingle, 1969
Figs 3A, 4A-B
?Cytherella williamsoniana Jones 1849, Chapman, 1904: 236.
Cytherelloidea umzambaensis Dingle, 1969: 351-353, fig. 3.
This species occurs in small numbers (maximum 9 %) throughout the bore-
hole, but is slightly more abundant and consistently present in the Campanian
part. It is clearly an environmentally-tolerant species, with a preference for
moderate water depths (assemblage 4). In its type section (the Santonian of
Umzamba) it is moderately abundant (5-12 %).
Range
Santonian to Campanian II.
Cytherelloidea cf. C. gardeni Dingle, 1971
Cytherelloidea delicata sp. nov. Dingle, 1969: 353-354, fig. 4.
Cytherelloidea gardeni nom. nov. Dingle, 1971a: 353.
One specimen, possibly referable to this delicately reticulate species, was
found in the Santonian part of the borehole (sample at 139,8 m).
Range
Santonian.
8 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
umzambaensis riesbachi
A Bo 3
Cc newtoni D contorta
CY THERELLOIDEA
Fig. 3. Sketches of Cytherelloidea species right values with positive features shaded.
A. C. umzambaensis Dingle, 1969, BH9 120,22 m. B. C. griesbachi sp. nov., holotype, SAM—
K5575, BH9 88,39 m. C. C. newtoni sp. nov., holotype, SAM-—K5574, BH9 120,22 m.
D. C. contorta sp. nov., holotype SAM—K 5576, BH9 110,0 m.
Scale bars all 100p.
Cytherelloidea newtoni sp. nov.
Figs 3C, 4C
Derivation of name
In honour of Dr R. Bullen-Newton for his contributions to the geological
knowledge of Zululand.
Holotype
SAM-K5574. RV, BH-9, 120,22 m, Richards Bay, Santonian.
Dimensions
Length 0,46 mm, height 0,28 mm.
Diagnosis
Species with a right-angle-shaped ridge in the posteroventral part of the
valve.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 9
Fig. 4. Cytherelloidea. A. C. umzambaensis Dingle, 1969, SAM—K5572, Umzamba cliff, LV.
B. C. umzambaensis Dingle, 1969, SAM—K5573, BH9 106,0 m, LV. C. C. newtoni sp. nov.,
holotype, SAM-K5574, BH9 120,22 m, RV. D. C. griesbachi sp. nov., holotype, SAM—K5575,
BH9 88,39 m, RV. E. C. contorta sp. nov., holotype, SAM—K5576, BH9 110,0 m, RV.
Scale bars all 100z.
10 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
External features. In lateral view AM symmetrically rounded, PM
asymmetrically rounded with a gently sloping posterodorsal part. Greatest
height lies over the posterodorsal angle, giving the valve a hump-backed outline.
VM nearly straight. Surface bears several short, rounded ridges; an anterior
ridge with a scalloped posterior edge, a short, high ventrolateral ridge, a right-
angle-shaped ridge in a posteroventral/posteromedian location, and a sinuous
dorsolateral ridge which terminates anteriorly in a median expansion. All these
ridges are separated, giving the surface a rather knobbly appearance.
No internal features seen.
Remarks
The humped dorsal margin and distinctive rib disposition give this species
easily recognizable characters. It is restricted to the lower (Santonian) part of
the borehole, suggesting that it was environmentally bound to shallow-water
environments. C. newtoni has not been found at Umzamba.
Range
Santonian.
Cytherelloidea griesbachi sp. nov.
Figs 3B, 4D
Derivation of name
In honour of Dr C. L. Griesbach for his contribution to the geological
knowledge of the Cretaceous rocks of south-east Africa.
Holotype
SAM-K5575, RV, BH-9, 88,39 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II.
Dimensions
Length 0,51 mm, height 0,30 mm.
Diagnosis
Species with three longitudinal ridges, the ventromedian one being
upturned posteriorly.
Description
External features. In lateral view, AM symmetrically rounded, PM
asymmetrically and bluntly pointed, being ventrally truncated and gently
sloping dorsally. Highest part of the valve at about mid-length. Surface bears
three longitudinal ridges. The dorsal ridge is slightly sinuous, and joins a wide,
raised anterior area which does not really deserve the description of a ridge.
The median ridge is short and confined to the posterior third, whilst the ventral
ridge is upturned posteriorly, and is separate from the anterior raised area. The
posterior part of the valve is compressed, and there is a conspicuous, flat
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 11
posteroventral area. Several small pustules occur in the posterodorsal part of
the valve surface. No internal features seen.
Remarks
The rib disposition of C. griesbachi is similar to that of C. umzambaensis,
but the two differ significantly in general outline (C. umzambaensis is more
elongate) in the shape of the ridges in the posteroventral area, and in their
posterodorsal outlines (Fig. 3). C. griesbachi is rare in the borehole and first
appears just below the base of the Campanian. One specimen, possibly referable
to this species, has been found at Umzamba.
Range
Uppermost Santonian to Campanian II.
Cytherelloidea contorta sp. nov.
Figs 3D, 4E
Derivation of name
Reference to its rather unusual shape and rib disposition.
Holotype
SAM-K5576, RV, BH-9, 110 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I.
Dimensions
Length 0,50 mm, height 0,28 mm
Diagnosis
Species with a strongly asymmetric and narrow posterolateral outline, a
marginal rim, and subdued ventrolateral and dorsolateral ridges. There is no
ridge.
Description
External features. In lateral view, rounded AM, but a curiously ‘contorted’
posterior outline. The dorsal part slopes gently down, whilst the ventral part is
truncated. Highest part of the valve lies in the anterior third. Ventral outline
concave, DM short and straight. Surface smooth, and ornamented with short,
subdued ridges. There is a narrow marginal rim that extends from the anterior
cardinal angle, to the midpoint of the PM. A short, rounded and rather indistinct
ventrolateral ridge, highest at its posterior end, lies at about midlength, and
there is a sinuous dorsal ridge which has swellings at its posterior and anterior
ends. There is no median ridge.
Internal features not seen.
Remarks
This unusually shaped species occurs in only one sample (110 m,
Campanian I), but is very distinctive in its shape and rib disposition by which
it is easily distinguished from the other species in the borehole. No representa-
12 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
tives of C. contorta have been recorded from Umzamba. Its closest relative is
C. westaustraliensis Bate, 1972, from the Santonian and Campanian of western
Australia. The two species have similar ornamentation, but differ in their
posterodorsal outlines and size (the Australian species is more evenly rounded
posteriorly, and much larger, typically about 0,90 mm in length).
Range
Campanian I.
Suborder PODOCOPINA Sars, 1866
Superfamily BAIRDIACEA Sars, 1888
Family Bairdiidae Sars, 1888
Genus Bairdoppilata Coryell, Sample & Jennings, 1935
Bairdoppilata andersoni sp. nov.
Fig SA-F
Derivation of name
In honour of Dr W. Anderson for his contribution to Zululand stratigraphy.
Holotype
SAM-K5577, RV, BH-9, 88,39 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
Paratypes
SAM-K5578, LV, BH-9, 88,39 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
SAM-K5579, RV, BH-9, 88,76 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
SAM-K5580, LV, BH-9, 88,76 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
SAM-K5581, Carapace, BH-9, 88,39 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
Dimensions
length mm heightmm width mm
K-5577 1,45 0,80
K-5578 1,50 0,90
K-5579 1,48 0,80
K-5580 1,49 0,95
K-5581 1,10 0,59
Diagnosis
Species in which LV and RV differ in shape especially in the lateral outlines
of the AM, PM and DM.
Description
External features. In lateral view, LV and RV differ in shape. The RV has
the classical ‘Bairdia’ outline with upturned posterior and anterior outlines. The
VM is slightly concave about midlength. The LV has a more ‘almond’ shape
with no noticeable upturn of the PM and a more rounded DM. In dorsal view
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 13
Fig. 5. Bairdoppilata andersoni sp. nov. A. Holotype, SAM—K5577, BH9 88,39 m, RV.
B. SAM-K5578, BH9 88,39 m, LV. C. SAM-K5579, BH9 88,76 m, internal RV. D. SAM-—
K5580, BH9 88,76 m, internal LV. E. SAM—K5581, BH9 88,39 m, dorsal view, carapace.
F. SAM-K5580, BH9 88,76 m, muscle scars, LV.
Scale bars: F = 100p, others = 300p.
14 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the LV is more inflated. The valve surface is finely pitted all over, and possesses
numerous large normal pore canal openings.
Internal features. Hinge typical for the genus, with very fine serration on
the bars at the anterior and posterior ends of the RV flange groove. MS in LV
consist of an anteriorly opening semi-circlet of 8 spots enclosing two large and
two small spots, with a further two small spots anterodorsally. All spots are
rounded. MA moderately wide with small anterior vestibules.
Remarks
Bairdoppilata andersoni shows considerable intra-specific variation in
lateral outline and with further study it may be possible to effect further sub-
division. Its distribution in the Richards Bay borehole is remarkably clear cut—
throughout the Santonian section four specimens were recovered (assemblages
1-2), whilst in the Campanian rocks it is the dominant ostracod—up to 40% of
the total fauna. Its appearance in large numbers is sudden and coincides with
the Santonian/Campanian boundary where it marks the establishment of open
ocean low energy conditions (assemblage 4). Towards the top of the section, as
the water deepens further, its total numbers continue to increase although with
the influx of a large population of Platycopina it still maintains about a 40 per
cent level of the total population.
Bairdoppilata sp. (probably andersoni) has been recorded from Umzamba
as rare, single valves.
Range
Santonian to Campanian II.
Genus Bythocypris Brady, 1880
Bythocypris richardsbayensis sp. nov.
Fig. 6A-E
Derivation of name
Locality of type.
Holotype
SAM-K5582, LV, BH-9, 88,39 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II.
Paratypes
SAM-K5583, RV, BH-9, 106,00 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
SAM-K5584, Carapace, BH-9, 88,5 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
Dimensions
length mm height mm
K5582 0,55 0,28
K5583 0,48 0,26
K5584 RV 0,47 0,24
K5584 LV 0,48 0,28
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 15
Fig. 6. Bythocypris richardsbayensis sp. nov. A. Holotype, SAM-—K5582, BH9 88,39 m,
internal LV. B. SAM-K5583, BH9 106,0 m, internal RV. C. SAM-K5584, BH9 88,5 m,
carapace, RV. D. SAM—K5583, BH9 106,0 m, muscle scars, RV. E. SAM-K5583, BH9
106,0 m, hinge, RV.
Scale bars: D-E = 30y, others = 100p.
16 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Diagnosis
An elliptical species with reticulate ornamentation on the inside surface of
the outer lamella.
Description
External features. In lateral view, LV larger than RV, overlaps around
entire margin, but especially along VM. RV : AM asymmetrically rounded,
truncated dorsally, PM rounded, greatest height just in front of midlength.
LV : AM symmetrically rounded, and PM asymmetrically rounded, truncated
dorsally, greatest height at midlength. Surface smooth.
Internal features. Hinge: a smooth bar in RV fits into a shallow groove in
the LV. The bar is downward projecting in lateral view, and is thickest at its
anterior end. MS consist of rosette of four petal-like ventral scars and an
E-—W-elongated dorsal scar. MA: anterior is wide with a prominent, anteriorly
‘tapering vestibule; posterior is narrow. MPC: 12 fine, straight canals radiate
from the apex of the anterior vestibule; 6 very short fine posterior canals. The
inside surface of valve is ornamented with reticulation of polygonal fossae
(mostly hexagonal) and narrow muri.
Remarks
In shape and hinge, B. richardsbayensis is very similar to B. howchiniana
Chapman, 1917, as illustrated by Neale (1975) from the Santonian of Australia.
The MS of the latter are reported to consist of a cluster of 4 large scars, whereas
the illustration (plate 5 fig. 2b of Neale 1975) suggests that 5 are present—in
which case the similarity with B. richardsbayensis would be even closer. The
main outstanding difference is the presence of reticulation in the inner surface
of the outer lamella in the South African species.
B. richardsbayensis occurs sporadically throughout the Richards Bay
borehole but it is most abundant (12%) and consistent in the Campanian (I-II)
and lower Santonian parts, and is absent from the uppermost Santonian rocks
(assemblage 3).
Range
Santonian to Campanian II.
Superfamily CYPRIDACEA Baird, 1845
Family Paracyprididae Sars, 1923
Genus Paracypris Sars, 1866
Of the non-Cytheracean types, this genus is the most consistently present
throughout the borehole. It never occurs in large numbers, however (maximum
of about 11°), and is most abundant in the Santonian section (i.e. prefers the
shallower water, higher energy environments of assemblages 1-3).
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 17
Paracypris umzambaensis Dingle, 1969
Figs 7A-C, 9A
Macrocypris simplex Chapman 1898, Chapman, 1904: 233, pl. 29 (fig. 22).
Paracypris ? umzambaensis Dingle, 1969: 354-356, fig. 5.
This species was provisionally placed in Paracypris by Dingle (1969)
because the MS had not been seen at that time. SEM pictures obtained during
the present study confirm the original assignment. Two varieties of the species
occur—a slender variety with a markedly pointed PM, and a fatter variety with
a less acuminate posterior outline. Both varieties occur in the Richards Bay
borehole and at Umzamba. The species occurs throughout the borehole section
but is most abundant in the Santonian (up to 11 %) and rare (up to 3 %) in the
Campanian. The fatter variety is similar in outline to Paracypris sp. nov.
described by Neale (1975) from the Santonian of western Australia.
Range
Santonian to Campanian II.
Paracypris zululandensis sp. nov.
Figs 7D-G, 9B
Derivation of name
Location of borehole.
Holotype
SAM-K5588, RV, BH-9, 106,00 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
Paratypes
SAM-K5589, LV, BH-9, 110,00 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
SAM-K5590, LV, BH-9, 110,00 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
SAM-K5591, RV, BH-9, 110,00 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
Dimensions
length mm height mm
K5588 0,73 0,37
K5589 0,75 0,38
K5590 0,78 0,42
K5591 0,73 0,35
Diagnosis
A plump species with a tapering, rounded posterior outline.
Description
External features. In lateral view AM is rounded, slightly extended in the
RV, PM tapers but is distinctly round and curves upwards at the posteroventral
corner. DM strongly arched and VM convex in LV and slightly concave in RV.
Surface smooth.
18 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 7. Paracypris. A. P. umzambaensis Dingle, 1969, SAM—K5585, Umzamba cliff, slim
variety, LV. B. P. umzambaensis Dingle, 1969, SAM—K 5586, BH9 88,39 m, plump variety, LV.
C. P. umzambaensis Dingle, 1969, SAM-K5587, BH9 118,22 m, plump variety, RV.
D. P. zululandensis sp. nov., holotype, SAM-K5588, BH9 106,0 m, internal RV. E. P. zulu-
landensis, sp. nov., SAM—K5589, BH9 110,0 m, internal LV. F. P. zululandensis, sp. Nov.,
SAM-K5590, BH9 110,0 m, LV. G. P. zululandensis sp. nov., SAM—K5591, BH9 110,0 m, RV.
Scale bars all 100z.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 19
Internal features. Hinge consists of a thick bar (RV) and a corresponding
groove and dorsal lip (LV). MS: cluster of five scars and a large, elliptical dorsal
scar, MA wide, with a wide anterior vestibule that extends almost to the anterior
margin. Seven anterior and five posterior thin, indistinct MPC.
Remarks
P. zululandensis is difficult to distinguish from the plumper varieties of
P. umzambaensis. The two differ on: degree of acumination of PM, ventral
outline (straighter in umzambaensis), more acutely arched DM of umzambaensis,
and details of MS pattern (Fig. 9).
P. zululandensis occurs in small numbers (up to 5%) sporadically through-
out the Richards Bay borehole. It is most consistently present just above the
Santonian/Campanian boundary (assemblage 4).
Range
Santonian to Campanian II.
Superfamily CyTHERACEA Baird, 1850
Except in the uppermost part of the borehole (above 88 m, assemblage 5)
Cytheracea are numerically the largest part of the ostracod population. They
are the dominant component in the Santonian section (up to 90% of the fauna),
but steadily decrease in importance upwards (between 50% and 38% in the
Campanian section).
Family Xestoleberididae Sars, 1928
Xestoleberis sp. A
Fig. 8
This species occurs in minor amounts (up to 7%) in the upper part of the
borehole (i.e. Campanian II and the upper part of Campanian I). It has a
Fig. 8. Xestoleberis sp. A. A. SAM-K5592, BH9 88,5 m, LV. B. SAM-K5593, BH9 88,5 m,
dorsal view, carapace.
20 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
slightly convex ventral outline in lateral view and a weakly developed antero-
ventral marginal rim. In dorsal view the LV overlaps the RV prominently at the
anterior end, and the carapace is inflated medianly. Until the borehole specimens
can be compared with other material from Zululand (the genus is well repre-
sented in Campanian and Maastrichtian samples) it is not advisable to attempt
to formally designate the new species.
Illustrated specimens
SAM-K5592, LV, BH-9, 88,50 m, Richards Bay, Campanian IT
SAM-K5593, Carapace, BH—9, 88,50 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
Dimensions
length mm height mm width mm
K5592 0,37 0,23
K5593 0,38 0,24
Range
Campanian I-II.
Family Cytherideidae Sars, 1925
Genus Pondoina Dingle, 1969
Pondoina sulcata Dingle, 1969
Fig. 9C
Pondoina sulcata Dingle, 1969: 356-358, fig. 6.
This species occurs as a rare component in the middle part of the Santonian
section of BH-9, where the specimens are poorly preserved. In contrast it
occurs moderately abundantly (10-15 %) throughout the Santonian sequence at
Umzamba. A sketch of MS is included here to supplement the original
descriptions.
Range
Santonian.
Family Schizocytheridae Mandelstam, 1960
Genus Amphicytherura Butler & Jones, 1957
Amphicytherura tumida Dingle, 1969
Fig. 1OA-F
Amphicytherura (A.) tumida Dingle, 1969: 368-370, fig. 13.
This species was first recorded in the Santonian rocks at Umzamba, where
it forms a minor element of the fauna (2-10 %). In the Richards Bay borehole it
occurs in small numbers (up to 10%) and its range extends from the lower part
of the sequence into Campanian I. It is, however, absent from the uppermost
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 21
eee
-
2s
“o
umzambaensis zululandensis
Pondoina sulcata
Fig. 9. Muscle scars. A. Paracypris umzambaensis Dingle, 1969, Umzamba cliff, LV.
B. Paracypris zululandensis sp. nov., SAM—K5589, BH9 110,0 m, LV. C. Pondoina sulcata
Dingle, 1969, Umzamba cliff, LV.
Scale bars all 30y.
Santonian, and across the Santonian/Campanian boundary. Some of the
specimens in BH—9 are very well preserved and are illustrated to supplement the
original descriptions given by Dingle (1969).
Range
Santonian to Campanian I.
Amphicytherura zululandensis sp. nov.
Fig. 11A-G
Derivation of name
Locality of borehole.
Holotype
SAM-K5598, RV, BH-9, 97,5 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
22 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Pave
a rans CePA
Fig. 10. Amphicytherura tumida Dingle, 1969. A. SAM-K5594, BH9 125,0 m, RV. B. SAM—
K5595, BH9 139,8 m, LV. C. SAM-K5596, BH9 128,0 m, internal RV. D. SAM—-K5597,
BH9 128,0 m, internal LV. E. SAM-K5597, BH9 128,0 m, hinge LV. F. SAM-K5596, BH9
128,0 m, hinge RV.
Scale bars: E-F = 30p, others = 100z.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 23
Fig. 11. Amphicytherura zululandensis sp. nov. A. Holotype, SAM—K5598, BH9 97,5 m, RV.
B. SAM-K5599, BH9 97,5 m, LV. C. SAM-K5600, BH9 110,0 m, internal RV. D. SAM-
K5601, BH9 110,0 m, internal LV. E. SAM-K5600, BH9 110,0 m, hinge RV. F. SAM-K5601,
BH9 110,0 m, muscle scars, LV. G. SAM-K5601, BH9 110,0 m, hinge LV.
Scale bars: E-G = 30y, others = 100z.
24 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Paratypes
SAM-K5599, LV, BH-9, 97,5 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
SAM-K5600, RV, BH-9, 110,00 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
SAM-K5601, LV, BH-9, 110,0 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
Dimensions
length mm height mm
K5598 0,53 0,30
K5599 0,42 0,26
K5600 0,42 0,23
K5601 0,55 0,30
Diagnosis
Species with prominent posteroventral alae, the under surfaces of which are
coarsely reticulate.
Description
External features. Quadrate in lateral view. AM symmetrically rounded,
PM bluntly pointed. DM nearly straight, VM strongly upturned posteriorly, but
outline is obscured by a small ala which has a pointed, right-angled posterior
corner. The undersides of the alae are coarsely reticulate. Lateral valve surface
is uneven, with three main irregular, raised areas and a north-south median
depression. A prominent eye spot lies on a short, curved ridge, and there is a
prominent hump below the posterior cardinal angle. Overall, the surface is
smooth, finely punctate (especially in the posterior half), locally faintly reticulate
and bears a few, scattered pustules.
Internal features. Hinge strongly schizodont with the PTE of the RV
undercut posteriorly. MS consist of a curved posterior row of four rounded
scars, and two rounded frontal scars. Internal openings of the NPC are promi-
nent. MA wide with 7-9 anterior and 5 posterior MPC.
Remarks
A. zululandensis is closely allied to A. tumida, but differs in lacking a median
lateral ridge, a SCT, and in having more prominent posteroventral alae. There
are also subtle differences in the hinge structure (e.g. the anterior part of the ME
in LV is elongate and sloping in A. tumida, whilst it is shorter and not inclined in
A. zululandensis).
A. zululandensis occurs in small numbers in the Campanian I section of the
borehole, where its range overlaps with that of A. tumida over a short section
(4-5 m).
Range
Campanian I.
oT eee ooo ———— —
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 25
Family Brachycytheridae Puri, 1954
Genus Brachycythere Alexander, 1933
Numerically this is the most important genus in the borehole. In the lower
(Santonian) half, it commonly forms more than 30 per cent of the total ostracod
population, and near the base reaches 56 per cent at one horizon (Fig. 32).
A rapid decline takes place in the upper part of the Santonian (between 120
and 124 m), above which it reaches >20 per cent at one horizon only (at the
Campanian J-II boundary). A similar distribution was recorded from the
Santonian rocks at Umzamba where the genus made up >30 per cent of the
population in all four samples studied by Dingle (1969).
Brachycythere longicaudata (Chapman, 1904)
Figs 12A—C, 13A—D
Cytheridea longicaudata Chapman, 1904: 234, pl. 29 (fig. 21). Howe & Laurencich, 1958: 279.
Cythere ?drupacea Jones 1884, Chapman, 1904: 234.
Brachycythere longicaudata (Chapman), Dingle, 1969: 358-361, fig. 7.
Dingle (1969) erected a neotype on topotypic material from the Santonian
section at Umzamba, where B. Jongicaudata is the dominant element in the fauna
(about 30%). It is found in two morphotypes, elongate and squat, in addition
to which there is considerable small-scale variation within the population;
S. l-_ fet ae
72 YE is
Fig. 12. Muscle scars of Brachycythere longicaudata (Chapman, 1904). A. SAM-—K5605, BH9
88,39 m, RV. B. Umzamba cliff, RV. C. Umzamba cliff, LV.
Scale bars all 30z.
ornamentation, shape of the ventrolateral overhang, outline of the AM and PM,
and even in the MS pattern.
B. longicaudata occurs throughout BH-9 (mid Santonian to Campanian II),
and, as at Umzamba, it is the dominant element in the lower half of the
Santonian section (up to 50%) and an important element in the rest of the
succession (up 12% in Campanian II and 22% in the Upper Santonian). This
26 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
large, robust species was obviously tolerant of varying environmental conditions,
as indicated by its re-establishment after the faunal break that marks the local
Santonian/Campanian boundary.
Range
Santonian to Campanian II.
Fig. 13. Brachycythere. A. B. longicaudata (Chapman, 1904), SAM—K5602, BH9 88,39 m, LV.
B. B. longicaudata (Chapman, 1904), SAM-K5603, BH9 106,2 m, RV. C. B. longicaudata
(Chapman, 1904), SAM—K5604, BH9 92,27 m, LV. D. B. longicaudata (Chapman, 1904),
SAM-K5605, BH9 88,39 m, internal RV. E. B. sicarius sp. nov., SAM—K5608, BH9 97,5 m,
muscle scars, RV.
Scale bars: E = 30u, B-C = 100n, A, D = 300z.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS Di
Brachycythere pondolandensis Dingle, 1969
Brachycythere pondolandensis Dingle, 1969: 361-362, fig. 8.
This small, rounded, and relatively ornate species is rare in the Richards Bay
borehole, where it reaches a maximum of about 8 per cent at the top of its range.
It is confined to rocks of Santonian age. It is also rare in the Santonian of
Umzamba, its type locality, and may prove to be a good marker fossil for
Santonian rocks in south-east Africa. Its preservation is never good, suggesting
that it may have readily been destroyed in sections that are not completely fresh.
Range
Santonian.
Brachycythere sicarius sp. nov.
Figs 13F, 14A—F
Derivation of name
From the Latin sica (a dagger or dirk), reference to dagger-like alae spines.
Holotype
SAM-K 5606, RV, BH-9, 89,0 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
Paratypes
SAM-K 5607, LV, BH-9, 88,39 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
SAM-K 5608, RV, BH-9, 97,5 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
SAM-K5609, LV, BH-9, 97,5 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
Dimensions
length mm height mm
K5606 0,85 0,40
K5607 0,82 0,42
K5608 0,79 0,40
K5609 0,80 0,42
Diagnosis
Species with pronounced, ventrolateral, keeled alae, coarse circular fossae
on the median lateral surface, and coarse anterior and posterior marginal spines.
Description
External features. Triangular in lateral view. Rounded AM and pointed PM.
DM and VM straight, converging posteriorly, but ventral outline is convex
because of ventrolateral overhang by an ala with a keel-like outer edge. The AM
carries several coarse, stubby spines, whilst the posteroventral area typically
carries two or three posteriorly pointing dagger-like spines. A further large spine
occurs at the posterior end of the ala, although this is retained only on well-
preserved specimens. The lateral surface is covered all over with rounded fossae
which are largest along the inner edge of the alae. There is a prominent anterior
28 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Nvoes Og
Nees
Fig. 14. Brachycythere sicarius sp. nov. A. Holotype, SAM—K5606, BH9 89,0 m, RV.
B. SAM-K5607, BH9 88,39 m, LV. C. SAM—-K5608, BH9 97,5 m, internal RV. D. SAM-
K5609, BH9 97,5 m, internal LV. E. SAM-K5608, BH9 97,5 m, hinge RV. F. SAM—K5609,
BH9 97,5 m, hinge LV.
Scale bars: E-F = 30p, others = 100y.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 29
cardinal angle, on which is situated a rounded, subdued eye spot, with a distinct
post-ocular sulcus (especially in the LV).
Internal features. Hemiamphidont hinge. In RV, ATE is a dentate peg, with
a denticulate dorsal surface, and PTE is an elongate dentate bar with six teeth.
The ME consists of a crenulate bar with an anterior, inclined rectangular peg.
MS consist of four elongate posterior scars and a hooked anterior scar. MA wide
with 20-23 long, slender, irregular anterior and 12 posterior MPC. The latter are
concentrated on the ventral side.
Remarks
Although typical, well-preserved specimens of B. sicarius are easily
separated from examples of B. longicaudata by their spinose, alate outline and
punctate ornamentation, poorly-preserved specimens may be confused with the
more angular varieties of the latter species. A somewhat similar species,
B. angulata Grekoff has been recorded from the Coniacian—Campanian of
West Africa (e.g. Apostolescu 1961). It possesses short keeled alae, but lacks the
coarse reticulation and spines of B. sicarius.
B. sicarius occurs in small numbers (maximum of 11%) throughout BH-9,
but is more abundant in the Campanian section. Rare specimens occur in the
Santonian of Umzamba, although they were not recorded by Dingle (1969) as a
separate species in his original description of the fauna.
A length/height scattergram (Fig. 15) effectively separates the three impor-
tant species of Brachycythere found in the Richards Bay/Umzamba areas.
B. sicarius, whilst having approximately the same length/height ratio as
B. longicaudata, its closest relative, is a smaller species.
Range
Santonian to Campanian II.
se X<
0,8 ee Ne
7 N
EE Ss
7
BRACHYCY THERE Be x
a
0,7 ae 2 Se
Ci e \
4 e \
~ Bea e e \
= A NY
a=) 3G \
®
206 $e }
a 4
© e
. : Tag
PEsh. OE Cee ee een OnE ae
‘ e ee dd
0,5 (Gre) ee an” Dy ak ei ye eee at longicaudata
e e al
. . ‘s Ba aa eaat
sicarius _._. a caer,
nee was ondolandensis
mm wes SA ‘, P
0,4 Ye > I
"0,6 ice +09 1,0 1,1 1,2 1,3 1,4 1,5
4 are length
sr
Fig. 15. Scattergram of length v. height for adults of species of Brachycythere
in BH9 Richards Bay.
30 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Trachyleberididae Sylvester-Bradley, 1948
Unicapella gen. nov.
Type species
Unicapella sacsi sp. nov.
Derivation of name
To commemorate the 150th anniversary of the founding of the University
of Cape Town in 1829: Uni... Cap... + ella.
Diagnosis
A blind, reticulate Trachyleberid with a prominent SCT and spinose/nodose
dorsal and ventral margins.
Remarks
Unicapella belongs to a group of recently-described deep water (>1 000 m)
genera which includes Abyssocythere, Paleoabyssocythere and Atlanticythere
(Benson 1971, 1977). Apparently living in water depths of no more than 500 m,
Unicapella possibly forms a link between the deep-water forms and their
shallow-water ancestors. The group seems to have arisen in the Upper
Cretaceous, with its main centre of development in the South Atlantic/South-
western Indian Ocean areas.
Unicapella is closest to Paleoabyssocythere, which is first recorded from the
Campanian of the Brazilian continental margin (Benson 1977), but it differs in
ornamentation (Paleoabyssocythere is foveolate, not reticulate, and has a
massive anterior marginal rim), in size (Unicapella is typically less than three-
quarters the length of Paleoabyssocythere), and hingement (Unicapella is
holamphidont, Paleoabyssocythere is lobodont).
At the type locality (Richards Bay borehole) the new genus (2 spp) is
restricted to Campanian II strata, but at least one other species occurs in
Maastrichtian sediments farther north (personal unpublished data).
Unicapella sacsi sp. nov.
Fig. 16A-G
Derivation of name
To commemorate the 150th anniversary of the founding of the South
African College Schools (SACS) in 1829, from which developed the University
of Cape Town.
Holotype
SAM-K5610, RV, BH-9, 88,39 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 31
Fig. 16. Unicapella sacsi gen. et sp. nov. A. Holotype, SAM-K5610, BH9 88,39 m, RV.
B. SAM-K5611, BH9 87,0 m, LV. C. SAM-K5612, BH9 87,0 m, internal RV. D. Holotype,
SAM-K5610, BH9 88,39 m, detail ornamentation anterior part RV. E. SAM-K5612, BH9
87,0 m hinge RV. F. SAM-K5613, BH9 87,0 m, dorsal view, carapace. G. Holotype,
SAM-K5610, BH9 88,39 m, detail anterior part RV.
Scale bars: D = 10yu, E = 30p, others = 100p.
32 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Paratypes
SAM-K5611, LV, BH-9, 87,00 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
SAM-K5612, RV, BH-9, 87,00 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
SAM-K5613, Carapace, BH-9, 87,00 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
Dimensions
length mm heightmm width mm
K5610 0,60 0,33
K5611 0,59 0,31
K5612 0,52 0,27
K5613 0,55 0,27
Diagnosis
Species with large, domed SCT and fine surface reticulation.
Description
External features. In lateral view, spinose, symmetrically rounded AM, and
asymmetrically acuminate PM. DM straight, with prominent anterior cardinal
angles that are notched in the RV, and have a projecting ‘ear’ in the LV.
Surface reticulate and spinose. Several short, large, perforate spines lie along the
DM, and an ill-defined ventrolateral clava. Large bullae occur in posterodorsal
and posteroventral positions. The SCT is large, bulbous hemispherical and
smooth, and forms the widest part of the valve in dorsal view. Valve surface
finely reticulate with a few conjunctive pustules, particularly behind the SCT.
The depressed anterior area is coarsely reticulate with delicate secondary retic-
ulation. Secondary reticulation also developed in the posterior part of the LV.
Fossa muri are finely crenulate, both in primary and secondary reticulation.
“Internal features. Hinge amphidont with a narrow terminally widening
groove above the ME in RV. In RV, ATE subdivided, PTE smooth or weakly
subdivided. MS not seen. MA wide with twelve long, slender, straight anterior,
and eight posterior MPC.
Remarks
U. sacsi is close to Paleoabyssocythere cretacea Benson, 1977. In addition
to differing in aspects related to generic status, Unicapella sacsi has less massive
spines and bullae and a less symmetric anterior outline. The known range of
P. cretacea is Santonian/Campanian.
Range
Campanian II.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 33
Unicapella reticulata sp. nov.
Fig. 17A-B
Derivation of name
Reference to coarsely reticulate ornamentation.
Holotype
SAM-K5614, RV, BH-9, 88,76 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II.
Dimensions
length mm height mm
K5614 0,65 0,32
Diagnosis
Coarsely reticulate species with spinose muri.
Description
External features. In lateral view, spinose, rounded AM and acuminate PM.
DM straight, sloping downwards posteriorly. VM slightly convex. Stout spines
Fig. 17. Unicapella reticulata gen. et sp. nov.
A. Holotype, SAM—K 5614, BH9 88,76 m, RV.
B. Holotype, SAM-K5614, BH9 88,76 m,
detail anterior part RV.
Scale bars: B = 30u, A = 100p.
34 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
occur along the DM and on a well-defined ventrolateral clava. Large spinose
bullae occur in posterodorsal and posteroventral positions. Large, reticulate
SCT. Surface coarsely reticulate, with polygonal fossae with small disjunctive
and conjunctive spines and pores, and inward pointing mural spines. Depressed
anterior area contains very large fossae. There is a marked step at the anterior
cardinal angle. Only RV were available for study and no internal features were
seen.
Remarks
Despite the limited amount of material available, the distinction between
U. reticulata and U. sacsi can be confidently made: the SCT are reticulate and
smooth, respectively; and surface reticulation is coarse and spinose in the former,
and fine with crenulated muri in the latter. U. reticulata shows some similarities
to species allocated to the family Pennyellidae by Neale (1975), with species of
both Agulhasina and Pennyella having spinose muri and reticulate sub-central
areas.
U. reticulata is very rare in the Richards Bay borehole (three valves).
Range
Campanian II.
Genus Cythereis Jones, 1849
Cythereis transkeiensis Dingle, 1969
Fig. 18A
Cythereis ?ornatissima Reuss, 1846 var. reticulata Jones & Hinde, 1890, Chapman, 1904:
234 (no illustration).
Cythereis transkeiensis Dingle, 1969: 377-378, fig. 8.
Three poorly-preserved specimens of C. transkeiensis were found in the
basal sample (159 m) of the Richards Bay borehole. In contrast, this species
occurs in small numbers (c. 5°) throughout the Santonian part of the sequence
at Umzamba that was examined by Dingle (1969). MS are recorded for the first
time and show a typical Cythereis arrangement of four posterior, and one
U-shape frontal scar.
Range
Santonian.
Cythereis klingeri sp. nov.
Figs 18B-F, 19A-F
Derivation of name
In honour of Dr H. C. Klinger for his recent contributions to knowledge of
the stratigraphy and palaeontology of the Cretaceous rocks of Zululand.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 35
Fig. 18. Cythereis. A. C. transkeiensis Dingle, 1969, SAM-—K5615, BH9 158,0 m, LV.
B. C. klingeri sp. nov. SAM—K 5622, BH9 157,0 m, LV. C. C. klingeri sp. nov. SAM—KS5623,
BH9 124,0 m, LV. D. C. klingeri sp. nov. SAM—K5624, BH9 118,22 m, LV. E. C. klingeri
sp. nov. SAM-K5621, BH9 115,9 m, LV. F. C. klingeri sp. nov. SAM—K5618, BH9 82,03 m,
muscle scars, RV.
Scale bars: F = 30u, others = 100p.
36 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Holotype
SAM-K5616, RV, BH-9, 82,03 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
Paratypes
SAM-K5617, LV, BH-9, 82,03 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
SAM-K5618, RV, BH-9, 82,03 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
SAM-K5619, LV, BH-9, 157,0 m, Richards Bay, Santonian
SAM-K5620, RV, BH-9, 157,0 m, Richards Bay, Santonian
SAM-K5621, LV, BH-9, 115,9 m, Richards Bay, Santonian
SAM-K5622, LV, BH-9, 157,0 m, Richards Bay, Santonian
SAM-K5623, LV, BH-9, 124,0 m, Richards Bay, Santonian
SAM-K5624, LV, BH-9, 118,22 m, Richards Bay, Santonian
Dimensions
length mm height mm
K5616 0,78 0,40
K5617 0,79 0,44
K5618 0,80 0,42
K5619 0,74 0,41
K5620 0,75 0,38
K5621 0,58 0,33
K5622 0,83 0,46
K5623 0,75 0,45
K5624 0,58 0,32
Diagnosis
Reticulate species with a prominent, flared, dorsolateral ridge.
Description
External features. In lateral view, AM rounded, DM and VM nearly
Straight, outline tapering posteriorly. Anterior cardinal angle is prominent,
particularly in the LV where it projects well above the dorsal margin. Lateral
surface bears three longitudinal ridges which are not interconnected and do not
project to the AM. The dorsal ridge is deflected anteromedianly, is flared, and
is subdivided about midlength, particularly in the LV. Weakly developed SCT,
across which median ridge is deflected anteroventrally. Whole surface strongly
reticulate, with ovate to rounded fossae and numerous mural pore cones.
Internal features. Holamphidont hinge. In RV, ATE consists of a dentate,
weakly subdivided peg with a thumb-like posterior projection, PTE is a massive,
smooth tooth, with an anterior depression to accommodate a projection of the
LV ME. Anterior socket of LV is flanked by two large teeth: one at the end of
the ME and the other anterior of it. The posterior part of the LV ME is stepped.
MS set in a shallow depression and consist of four posterior scars and a hook-
shaped frontal scar. There is a prominent fulchral point. MA moderately wide
with twelve anterior and six posterior MPC.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 37
Fig. 19. Cythereis klingeri sp. nov. A. Holotype, SAM-—K5616, BH9 82,03 m, RV. B. SAM-—
K5617, BH9 82,03 m, LV. C. SAM-K5618, BH9 82,03 m, internal RV. D. SAM-K5619, BH9
157,0 m, internal LV. E. SAM-K5620, BH9 157,0 m, hinge RV. F. SAM-K5619, BH9
157,0 m, hinge LV.
Scale bars: E-F = 30p, others = 100p.
38 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
Exterior architecture of C. klingeri resembles that of C. transkeiensis, but
differs in being more strongly reticulate, in having a flared dorsal ridge, a
tapering posterior outline, and in details of hinge and MS. In the upper part of
the Santonian C. klingeri is the dominant ostracod (up to 46 % of the population)
in what is thought to have been a quiet, shallow-water environment. A good
deal of intra-specific variation is displayed in strength of reticulation and
prominence of the lateral ridges.
Range
Santonian to Campanian II.
Genus Haughtonileberis Dingle, 1969
This genus was created to accommodate local forms that are closely
related to the Dumontina/Curfsina/Hazelina Complex, but which differ con-
sistently in details of outline, ornamentation, hingement and marginal areas.
HAUGHTONILEBERIS gy a a
radiatu
mm
haughtoni seas cu Paissilie
i Oo :
Sele
height
length we bs
Fig. 20. Scattergram of length v. height for adults of species of Haughtonileberis in southern
Africa.
Four species have been assigned to Haughtonileberis to date, all from
southern Africa (a fifth remains to be described): three from the Santonian/
Campanian at Umzamba/Richards Bay (H. haughtoni, H. fissilis, H. vanhoepeni),
and one from the Eocene of the JC—1 borehole offshore Natal (H. radiatus).
H. haughtoni and H. fissilis are well represented in the Santonian to Campanian
rocks of the Richards Bay borehole, but both species show a good deal of intra-
specific variation, possibly environmentally influenced. H. vanhoepeni is rarer
(up to 15%) and is confined to Campanian II rocks.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 39
The opportunity is taken here to supplement the original descriptions of
H. haughtoni and H. fissilis with SEM pictures.
Figure 20 shows a scattergram of length/height ratios of the four species of
Haughtonileberis so far described.
Haughtonileberis haughtoni Dingle, 1969
Fig. 21A—E.
Haughtonileberis haughtoni Dingle, 1969: 372-373, fig. 15.
Two morphotypes of this species have been recognized both at Umzamba
and Richards Bay: an elongate form which ranges across the Santonian/
Campanian boundary and occurs throughout most of the borehole, and a
squatter variety which is confined to the Santonian (shallower water) strata.
In the squat variety the dorsolateral ridge tends to be foreshortened, and the
median ridge wide throughout its length. In contrast, in some of the more
elongate forms the posterior part of the median ridge is reduced to a narrow rib.
The holotype appears to be an intermediate form.
H. haughtoni is one of the most important species in the Richards Bay
borehole, and it is particularly abundant in the Santonian sequence (assem-
blage 2) where it reaches 55 per cent and is typically >30 per cent. Its numbers
decline sharply in the more open water environments of assemblages 3 and 4
(10-15%) and the species disappears just after the establishment of the deep-
water assemblage 5.
Range
Santonian to Campanian II.
Haughtonileberis fissilis Dingle, 1969
Fig. 22A-B
Haughtonileberis fissilis Dingle, 1969: 374-375, fig. 16. Dingle, 1976: 59, fig. 3(48).
H. fissilis occurs sporadically throughout the Richards Bay borehole, and
is most abundant (up to 19%) in the Campanian I, moderate-water depth
environments. It is recorded from only four horizons in the Santonian section
(top assemblage 1, and assemblage 2), where it reaches 14 per cent. On this
evidence it would appear that H. fissilis favoured somewhat deeper water than
its close relative H. haughtoni.
As with H. haughtoni, H. fissilis is known to occur in two morphotypes:
a slim finely reticulate type, which is very rare in the Richards Bay borehole, and
a squatter, more coarsely reticulate variety. The latter variety has not been
found in the Umzamba rocks, where H. fissilis is a minor component of the
ostracod fauna (<10°%).
Range
Santonian to Campanian II.
40 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ase. .
. * “
ae ”"
Cre ry
Fig. 21. Haughtonileberis haughtoni Dingle, 1969. A. SAM—K5625, BH9 157,0 m, elongate
variety, LV. B. SAM—K5626, BH9 157,0 m, elongate variety, RV. C. SAM-—K5627, BH9
92,27 m, elongate variety, LV. D. SAM-—K5628, BH9 120,22 m, squat variety, RV. E. SAM-—
K5629, BH9 120,22 m, squat variety, LV.
Scale bars all 100p.
| MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 41
Fig. 22. A. Haughtonileberis fissilis Dingle, 1969, SAM-—K5630, BH9 115,19 m, LV.
B. Haughtonileberis fissilis Dingle, 1969, SAM—K5631, BH9 100,0 m, RV. C. Hermanites
kennedyi sp. nov. SAM-K5638, BH9 88,39 m, papillate solum, RV. D. Hermanites kennedyi
sp. nov. SAM-K5642, BH9 88,5 m, ATE dorsal view, LV. E. Hermanites kennedyi sp. nov.
SAM-K 5643, BH9 88,39 m, ATE dorsal view, RV. F. Hermanites kennedyi sp. nov. SAM-—
K5639, BH9 88,39 m, muscle scars, LV. G. Hermanites kennedyi sp. nov. SAM-K5641, BH9
88,76 m, dorsal view, carapace. H. Haughtonileberis vanhoepeni sp. nov. SAM—K5636, BH9
106,0 m, dorsal view, carapace.
Scale bars: C = 3n, F = 10n, D-E = 30p, others = 100z.
42 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Haughtonileberis vanhoepeni sp. nov.
Figs 22H, 23A-F
Derivation of name
In honour of Dr E. C. N. van Hoepen for his studies of Zululand Cretaceous
ammonites.
Holotype
SAM-K 5632, RV, BH-9, 100,00 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I.
Paratypes
SAM-K 5633, RV, BH-9, 92,27 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
SAM-K5634, RV, BH-9, 106,00 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
SAM-K 5635, LV, BH-9, 106,00 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
SAM-K 5636, Carapace, BH-9, 106,00 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
Dimensions
length mm height mm width mm
K5632 0,46 0,22
K5633 0,46 0,26
K5634 0,41 0,21
K5635 0,41 0,23
K5636 0,41 0,19
Diagnosis
Small species with an inclined median rib which is joined to the ventro-
lateral rib by a loop.
Description
External features. Small species. In lateral view, AM broadly and asym-
metrically rounded, PM bluntly pointed. VM straight, DM slopes posteriorly.
Surface bears three narrow longitudinal ribs: dorsal rib is slightly curved,
projects beyond the DM and is strongly deflected medianly at its posterior end
where it forms a prominent posterior cardinal angle; median rib inclined,
projects anterior of the SCT, but does not join the anterior rim, curves ventrally
at its posterior end to join the strongly inclined ventrolateral rib which runs
from the anteroventral corner of the valve when it joins the anterior rim.
Small, prominent eye spots lie on the anterior rim at the cardinal angles in both
valves. Intercostal areas smooth, with a few small ridges and minor reticulation.
Several prominent pustules. In dorsal view the posterior ends of the dorsal ribs
appear as small ears.
Internal features. Hinge holamphidont. In RV ATE is a stepped tooth,
and PTE a small, undivided smooth tooth. In LV ME is a smooth bar which
thickens terminally with a downward inclined tooth at its anterior end. MA
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 43
Fig. 23. Haughtonileberis vanhoepeni sp. nov. A. Holotype, SAM—K5632, BH9 100,0 m, RV.
B. SAM-K5633, BH9 92,22 m, RV. C. SAM-K5634, BH9 106,0 m, internal RV. D. SAM-—
K5635, BH9 106,0 m, internal LV. E. SAM-K5634, BH9 106,0 m, hinge RV. F. SAM-K5635,
BH9 106,0 m, hinge LV.
Scale bars: E-F = 30y, others = 100p.
44 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
moderately wide with small vestibules. MPC short and straight: 20-25 anteriorly,
c. 10 posteriorly. MS not clearly seen.
Remarks
Differs from the two other Upper Cretaceous species of the genus in ridge
disposition, intercostal ornamentation, and in being smaller. In ornamentation
and rib arrangement, H. vanhoepeni is intermediate between the more elongate
varieties of H. fissilis and an unnamed species from the Campanian at False Bay.
Preservation of this species is typically very good—specimens are clean and
semi-translucent to translucent, and mostly in the form of carapaces.
H. vanhoepeni is restricted to assemblage 4 where it locally reaches 15 per cent
of the population.
Range
Uppermost Santonian to Campanian I.
Genus Hermanites Puri, 1955
Hermanites kennedyi sp. nov.
Figs 22C-G, 24A—F
Derivation of name
In honour of Dr W. J. Kennedy for his contribution to the palaeontology
and stratigraphy of the Cretaceous rocks of south-east Africa.
Holotype
SAM-K 5637, LV, BH-9, 82,03 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
Paratypes
SAM-K 5638, RV, BH-9, 88,39 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
SAM-K5639, LV, BH-9, 88,39 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
SAM-K5640, RV, BH-9, 88,76 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
SAM-K5641, Carapace, BH-9, 88,76 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
SAM-K5642, LV, BH-9, 88,5 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
SAM-K 5643, RV, BH-9, 88,39 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
Dimensions
length mm height mm width mm
K5637 0,71 0,38
K5638 0,72 0,37
K5639 0,71 0,36
K5640 0,72 0,38 ;
K5641 0,74 0,43
K5642 0,75 0,20
K5643 0,74 0,20
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 45
Fig. 24. Hermanites kennedyi sp. nov. A. Holotype, SAM-K5637, BH9 82,03 m, LV.
B. SAM-K5638, BH9 88,39 m, RV. C. SAM-K5639, BH9 88,39 m, internal LV. D. SAM-—
K5640, BH9 88,76 m, internal RV. E. SAM-K5639, BH9 88,39 m, hinge LV. F. SAM—K5640,
BH9 88,76 m, hinge RV.
Scale bars: E-F = 30p, others = 100p.
46 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Diagnosis
Species with prominent alae and a ventrally inclined posterior outline in
the RV lateral view.
Description
External features. In lateral view, AM weakly spinose and symmetrically
rounded in RV, slightly asymmetric in LV, DM and VM converge slightly
posteriorly. PM coarsely spinose, bluntly acuminate, ventrally inclined in RV.
There are three longitudinal lateral ribs, the dorsal and ventral of which flare
posteriorly, the latter prominently. The median ridge is short and lies posterior
to, and detached from the prominent SCT. There is a prominent eye spot which
is not attached to the strong AM rim. Surface coarsely reticulate with occasional
conjunctive pustules. Fossae are polygonal, with rounded corners and papillate
sola. In dorsal view there is a prominent projection of the LV valve margin
across the hingeline anterior of the eye spot.
Internal features. Hinge holamphidont, with smooth peg-like terminal
elements in the RV, the PTE being weakly subdivided. Posterior groove of the
RV ME is seen to be weakly crenulate in well-preserved specimens. MS consist
of four posterior spots, the dorsal one of which is a deformed V-shape, and two
anterior scars—an asymmetric U and a rounded dorsal scar. MA very narrow
with twenty-three anterior and eight posterior MPC.
Remarks
H. kennedyi resembles H. sagitta from the Santonian-Campanian of
Australia (Bate 1972). They both possess an arrow-head outline in dorsal view,
and flared ventral and dorsal ribs, but A. kennedyi differs in possessing a short
median lateral rib, is more spinose posteriorly, has a different posterior outline
in RV, has a finely crenulate ME in the hinge, and possesses a more complex MS
pattern. H. volans from the Santonian of Australia (Neale 1975) possesses
prominent alae, but differs from the new species in not having a prominent
dorsal rib, nor a median rib behind the SCT.
In the Richards Bay borehole, H. kennedyi is restricted to the Campanian
section where it locally forms an important element in the fauna (c. 16%).
It appears to have a preference for the deeper-water environment.
Range
Campanian II.
Genus Oertliella Pokorny, 1964
Oertliella pennata sp. nov.
Fig. 26A—E
Acanthocythere ? aff. A. horridula (Bosquet, 1854), Dingle, 1969: 378-380, fig. 19.
Derivation of name
From the Latin penna (feather), reference to feather-like posterodorsal
spine in LV.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 47
Holotype
SAM-K 5644, LV, BH-9, 115,9 m, Richards Bay, Santonian.
Paratypes
SAM-K 5645, RV, BH-9, 115,9 m, Richards Bay, Santonian.
SAM-K 5646, LV, BH-9, 120,22 m, Richards Bay, Santonian.
Dimensions
length mm height mm
K5644 0,68 0,36
K5645 0,71 0,34
K5646 0,75 0,38
OERTLIELLA
exquisita /¥Y~"—--~.,
Voy)
We
0,4
ay bsiatelnne
_- africana
0,6 length 0,8
Fig. 25. Scattergram of length v. height for adults of Oertliella
pennata, O. africana, O. sp. A and O. exquisita Bate.
Diagnosis
Elongate species with a large, serrated spine at the posterior cardinal angle
of the LV.
Description
External features. In lateral view, elongate quadrate outline with spinose,
rounded AM and bluntly acuminate PM. DM and VM straight, tapering
slightly posteriorly. Surface coarsely reticulate with numerous conjunctive and
disjunctive spines. Fossae are polygonal (3 and 4 sided) and the main muri
radiate from the prominent SCT, which has a large verrucose spine. The most
48 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 26. Oertliella. A. O. pennata sp. nov., holotype, SAM—K5644, BH9 115,9 m, LV.
B. O. pennata sp. nov. SAM-K5645, BH9 115,9 m, RV. C. O. pennata, sp. nov. SAM-K5646,
BH9 120,22 m, internal LV. D. O. pennata sp. nov. SAM—K5646, BH9 120,22 m, muscle
scars, LV. E. O. pennata sp. nov. SAM-K5646, BH9. 120,22 m, hinge, LV. F. O. sp. A,
SAM-K 5647, BH9 115,9 m, LV. G. O. africana sp. nov. SAM—K5650, BH9 82,03 m, muscle
scars, LV.
Scale bars: D-E, G = 30p, others = 100p.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 49
prominent spines lie along the DM, a posteriorly upswinging ventrolateral clava,
and at the antero- and posteroventral corners of the valve. The spine at the
posterodorsal angle of the LV is particularly prominent—it is flattened and
serrated at its distal end, giving it a feather-like appearance. Eye spot is large,
hemispherical, situated at the anterior cardinal angle.
Internal features. Hinge holamphidont. MS situated in and on the outer
edge of a prominent pit. Four posterior scars lie in a line, the lower two are
wedge-shaped and lie close together, the 3rd scar is rounded, and lies in the
centre of the pit, whilst the dorsal scar is small and rounded. A further small
rounded impression lies posterior of this group. Anterior scar is V-shaped, but
partially subdivided. MA narrow with twenty paired, short, straight, anterior
and twelve posterior MPC.
Remarks
O. pennata differs from its relation O. africana, also from the Richards Bay
borehole, in details of ornamentation, hinge, and in possessing a prominent eye
spot. It is closest to O. exquisita from the Campanian of western Australia (Bate
1972) but the two can be separated on subtle differences in shape, reticulation
of the posterior parts of the valves, the ‘feather-like’ spine of pennata, the
generally smaller size of the African species, as well as its greater length/height
ratio:
Average values: RV—1,81 exquisita 2,05 pennata
LV—1,80 exquisita 1,98 pennata
O. pennata occurs in small numbers (up to 15%) throughout assemblages 3
and 4, and it is found at one horizon in assemblage 2.
Range
Santonian to Campanian I].
Oertliella africana sp. nov.
Figs 26G, 27A-E
Derivation of name
Location of type.
Holotype
SAM-K5648, LV, BH-9, 82,03 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
Paratypes
SAM-K 5649, RV, BH-9, 87,0 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
SAM-K 5650, LV, BH-9, 82,03 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
SAM-K5651, RV, BH-9, 97,5 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
50 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Dimensions
length mm_ height mm
K5648 0,76 0,37
K5649 0,63 0,27
K5650 0,88 0,38
K5651 0,65 0,32
Diagnosis
An elongate species with prominent posteroventral and dorsal spines, and
a weak eye spot.
Description
External features. In lateral view, elongate quadrate. AM rounded, PM
bluntly acuminate—both coarsely spinose, particularly the posteroventral area,
which carries a long pointed spine. DM straight, VM slightly convex in the LV.
Surface reticulate with small, rounded fossae. Muri not symmetrically arranged.
SCT not well developed, often only represented by a smooth, slightly raised area.
DM carries a few large, flared, blade-like spines, particularly in the LV, where
the anterior cardinal angle is surmounted by a very prominent spine. There is an
upswinging ventrolateral clava with several verrucose spines. The eye spot is
weakly developed: in the LV it is usually present below the anterior cardinal
angle, and in the RV it is frequently not distinguishable.
Internal features. Hinge paramphidont, with a large projection in front of
the ATE in the LV. MS consists of four elongate posterior scars and a V-shaped
anterior scar set in a shallow depression. The anterior scar has three 1aised
portions, suggesting incipient subdivision. MA narrow, with fifteen short
straight anterior and seven posterior MPC.
Remarks
Its closest relative is O. pennata from which it differs in possessing a weak
eye spot, rounded fossae, lacking a radiating pattern to its reticulation, and
having only a weak SCT. The two species also have different hinge structures and
slightly different length/height ratios (Fig. 25).
O. africana is most abundant (up to 4%) in assemblage 5 (quiet deep water).
Range
Campanian I and II.
Oertliella sp. A
Fig. 26F
Remarks
Three specimens resembling O. africana, but lacking the coarse spines.
Fossae are more quadrate and the valve outline somewhat plumper.
Range
Campanian I and II.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 51
.
gt =. ye Are
“a
of or te
Fig. 27. Oertliella africana sp. nov. A. Holotype, SAM-K5648, BH9 82,03 m, LV. B. SAM-—
K5649, BH9 87,0 m, RV. C. SAM-K5650, BH9 82,03 m, internal LV. D. SAM-K5651, BH9
97,5 m, internal RV. E. SAM-K5651, BH9 97,5 m, hinge RV. F. SAM-K5650, BH9 82,03 m,
hinge LV.
Scale bars: E-F = 30p, others = 100y.
$2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Genus Trachyleberis Brady, 1898
Two species are herein assigned to the genus on the basis of their shape,
hinge, and ornamentation. Whilst both are somewhat less spinose than the
genotype, their features are commensurate with some recent interpretations of
the genus (e.g. Neale 1975). The lack of distinct posteromedian spine alignment
suggests that neither belongs in the genus Actinocythereis, and whilst both
(7. minima sp. nov. in particular) are very similar exteriorly to the genotype of
Matronella Damotte, 1974, the apparently smooth ATE and PTE of the
Zululand specimens, and the fact that MS were not seen, precludes positive
assignment to this genus.
Trachyleberis zululandensis sp. nov.
Fig. 28A—C
Derivation of name
Locality of type.
Holotype
SAM-K5652, LV, BH-9, 82,03 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
Paratype
SAM-K5653, RV, BH-9, 82,03 m, Richards Bay, Campanian II
Dimensions
length mm height mm
K5652 0,82 0,40
K5653 0,78 0,36
Diagnosis
A blind species with a triangular lateral outline, and a prominent SCT.
Description
External features. Valve laterally compressed. In lateral view, spinose,
rounded AM, triangular PM. DM and VM straight, converging posteriorly to
produce a triangular lateral outline. Surface ornamented with stout spines, many
of which are perforate. Castellated spines occur along the DM, and in the
median region. There is a large spinose SCT. Under low magnification the valve
surface appears smooth, but under high magnification is seen to be finely
reticulated with hair-like muri.
Internal features. Hinge holamphidont. MS not seen. MA narrow, with
at least 20 anterior MPC.
Remarks
T. zululandensis is similar to T. schizospinosa Dingle from the Maastrichtian
of the Agulhas Bank (Dingle 19715) and T. raynerae Neale from the Santonian
of Australia (Neale 1975). It differs from the latter in not possessing an eye spot,
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 53
Fig. 28. A. Trachyleberis zululandensis sp. nov., holotype, SAM—K5652, BH9 82,03 m, RV.
B. Trachyleberis zululandensis sp. nov. SAM—K5653, BH9 82,03 m, internal RV. C. Trachy-
leberis zululandensis sp. nov. SAM—K5653, BH9 82,03 m, hinge RV. D. Trachyleberis minima
sp. nov., holotype, SAM—K 5654, BH9 110,0 m, RV. E. Rayneria nealei sp. nov. SAM-—K5656,
BH9 115,9 m, dorsal view, carapace. F. Rayneria nealei sp. nov. SAM—K5656, BH9 115,9 m,
detail anterior end, dorsal view, carapace.
Scale bars: C, F = 30pu, others = 100p.
54 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
in having less elongate spines, but in possessing a more prominent SCT. Its
closest relative is 7. schizospinosa, but this species is plumper, more quadrate in
outline, and possesses small eye spots.
T. zululandensis is rare in the Richards Bay borehole (only two samples
contain it, up to 3%) and it is confined to assemblages 4 and S. Its slightly
greater abundance in sample 82,03 and its blindness suggest that it preferred
deep-water environments.
Range
Campanian I and II.
Trachyleberis minima sp. nov.
Fig. 28D
Derivation of name
Its small size.
Holotype
SAM-K5654, RV, BH-9, 110,00 m, Richards Bay
Dimensions
length mm height mm
K5654 0,54 0,25
Diagnosis
Quadrate species with a concave ventral outline in lateral view.
Description
External features. In lateral view quadrate with rounded AM and a bluntly
rounded PM, which is directed slightly posteroventrally. Both end margins bear
numerous small, short spines. DM is straight, VM is concave—posterior to
line of maximum height. The lateral surface has several short, small spines which
are confined to the DM, a short curved ventrolateral clava, and the median area
(on the prominent SCT, and in a cluster behind the SCT). Interspinal areas are
smooth, with numerous small, low, circular pustules. There is a large globular
eye spot at the anterior cardinal angle. No internal features seen.
Remarks
Placement of this small spiney species is provisional because no internal
features were seen. The VM concavity and downturned PM make it easily
recognized. T. minima is rare in the Richards Bay borehole in one sample only
(at 3%) in Campanian I.
Range
Campanian I.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS B))
Genus Rayneria Neale, 1975
Rayneria nealei sp. nov.
Figs 28E-F, 29A-E, 30G
Cythereis ?quadrilatera (R6mer) Chapman, 1923: 5, pl.1(5).
Derivation of name
In honour of Prof. J. W. Neale who erected the genus.
Holotype
SAM-K 5652, RV, BH-9, 139,8 m, Richards Bay, Santonian
Paratypes
SAM-K5653, LV, BH-9, 106,00 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
SAM-K5654, RV, BH-9, 115,19 m, Richards Bay, Campanian I
SAM-K5655, LV, BH-9, 139,8 m, Richards Bay, Santonian
SAM-K5656, Carapace, BH-9, 115,9 m, Richards Bay, Santonian
SAM-K 5657, RV, BH-9, 118,22 m, Richards Bay, Santonian
Dimensions
length mm heightmm width mm
K5652 0,53 0,27
K5653 0,50 0,24
K5654 0,54 0,28
K5655 0,53 0,28
K5656 0,57 0,32
K5657 0,51 0,12
Diagnosis
Small, blind species with small SCT.
Description
External features. In lateral view, small, subquadrate ostracod. AM bears
short spines, symmetrically rounded in RV, extended ventrally in LV. PM
rounded in LV, asymmetric in RV, bears several stout spines posteroventrally.
DM hidden, outline is convex. VM concave. Surface bears three short longi-
tudinal ridges: the dorsal ridge is curved and slightly flared; the median ridge is
short, commences just anterior of the small, elongate SCT, and has a postero-
ventral deflection; the ventral ridge is convex. Intercostal areas heavily calcified,
with small raised pustules and scattered rounded fossae. Cardinal angles rounded
in LV, but in the RV the anterior cardinal angle is weakly developed. No eye
spots. There is a prominent ear-like overlap by the LV just in front of anterior
cardinal angle in dorsal view.
Internal features. Hinge holamphidont but with a stepped and posteriorly-
elongated ATE in RV. There is a small additional tooth in front of ATE in LV.
56 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 29. Rayneria nealei sp. nov. A. Holotype, SAM-K5652, BH9 139,8 m, RV. B. SAM-
K5653, BH9 106,0 m, LV. C. SAM-K5654, BH9 115,19 m, internal RV. D. SAM-K5655,
BH9 139,8 m, internal LV. E. SAM-K5654, BH9 115, 19 m, hinge RV. F. SAM-K5655, BH9
139,8 m, hinge LV.
Scale bars: E-F = 30, others = 100z.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 57
MS not clearly seen, but they lie in a deep central pit. MA narrow, no vestibules,
up to 18 anterior and 8 posterior MPC.
Remarks
Rayneria nealei is similar to Rayneria ginginensis Neale from the Santonian
of Australia in its surface ornamentation, but differs by not having eye spots
and by possessing a small SCT.
The possession of eyespot was considered by Neale (1975: 59) to be a
generic characteristic, but it is not thought to be desirable to create a new genus
on this criterion alone, where Neale’s is otherwise mono-specific.
R. nealei is a sporadic component of assemblages 1, 2 and 3, and occurs in
small numbers in the early range of assemblage 4. It is never common and only
locally accounts for >10 per cent of the total fauna.
Range
Santonian to lower Campanian I.
Genus Gibberleberis Dingle, 1969
Gibberleberis africanus Dingle, 1969
Figs 30A-D, 31A
Gibberleberis africanus Dingle, 1969: 370-377, fig. 17.
This species was first described from the Santonian of Umzamba cliff
section, where it occurs sparingly (up to 3%). In the Richards Bay borehole it is
also restricted to Santonian rocks and again occurs in small numbers (up to
15%). It is most common in the uppermost Santonian rocks (assemblage 3).
Some of the new material is very well preserved and SEM pictures are
included to supplement the original description. MS (previously not recorded)
are rather complex, with 5 posterior scars and two anterior scars. The edges of
individual scars are serrated. Topotypic specimens are more heavily calcified
than individuals from Richards Bay.
Range
Santonian.
Gibberleberis elongata sp. nov.
Figs 30, 31B
Derivation of name
Elongate shape in lateral view.
Holotype
SAM-K5660, RV, BH-9, 124,0 m, Richards Bay, Santonian
Paratype
SAM-K5661, RV, BH-9, 124,0 m, Richards Bay, Santonian
58 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Pe ie: :
ee ns i
5 ed, Shane
Fig. 30. A. Gibberleberis africanus Dingle, 1969, SAM-K5658, BH9 118,22 m, LV.
B. Gibberleberis africanus Dingle, 1969, SAM-K5659, BH9 118,22 m, internal LV.
C. Gibberleberis africanus Dingle, 1969, SAM-K5659, BH9 118,22 m, hinge LV.
D. Gibberleberis africanus Dingle 1969, SAM-K5659, BH9 118,22 m, muscle scars, LV.
E. Gibberleberis elongata sp. nov. Holotype, SAM—K5660, BH9 124,0 m, RV. F. Gibberleberis
elongata sp. nov. SAM-K5661, BH9 124,0 m, RV. G. Rayneria nealei sp. nov. SAM-K5657,
BH9 118,22 m, ATE and PTE of hinge, dorsal view, RV.
Scale bars: C-D, G = 30p, others = 100p.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 59
Dimensions
length mm height mm
K5660 0,6 0,25
K5661 0,6 0,30
Diagnosis
Elongate, finely reticulate species, with straight ventral outline in lateral
view.
Description
External features. In lateral view, AM symmetrically rounded, PM asym-
metrically acuminate. Dorsal outline broadly humped, ventral outline straight,
producing a posteroventral elongation. Surface finely reticulate with, in the
upper part of the valve, main muri running longitudinally, parallel to an arched,
low, dorsal rib. This accentuates the humped appearance. Valves slightly
swollen ventrally, particularly posterior of mid-length. SCT represented by a
smooth area in the reticulate pattern. Eyespot elongate and low.
No internal features seen.
Remarks
G. elongata and G. africanus are very closely related. In addition to
differences in lateral outline, the most obvious point of reference is the difference
in disposition of the reticulation ribs (Fig. 31). In G. elongata the muri on the
GIBBERLEBERIS
EM) GES
elongata africanus
Fig. 31. Sketches of Gibberleberis species showing main rib patterns. A. G. elongata
sp. nov., holotype, SAM—K 5660, BH9 124,0 m, RV. B. G. africanus Dingle, 1969,
BH9 140,0 m, RV.
Scale bars 100p.
dorsolateral area are more numerous, concentrically arranged, and less curved,
and in the anterior area are larger.
G. elongata is rare in the Richards Bay borehole (six valves only recorded
from three horizons), and occurs in both Santonian and Campanian rocks.
Range
Santonian to Campanian II.
60 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
DISCUSSION
The ostracods in BH-9 are all benthic types, and thirty-six species belonging
to seventeen genera have been recognized. There are several distinctive changes
in the composition of the ostracod populations along the length of the borehole,
and it is convenient to examine these from two viewpoints: palaeoecological and
biostratigraphical.
PALAEOECOLOGY
The regional Cretaceous geology in south Zululand, in combination with
ev dence to be presented below, indicates that the sedimentary history of the
borehole is of a marine transgression across a granitic surface followed by a
progressive increase in water depth. Temporary returns to shallower water and/or
higher energy environments at intervals up the borehole may represent minor
regressive episodes. Changes in the geometry of the depositional area caused by
the progressive increase in water depth would have constantly modified
ecological factors, such as current strengths (e.g. tidal, wave-driven, and
oceanographic), salinity, food supply, and water temperature. Because such
factors would have determined the make-up of the ostracod faunas, it ought to
be possible, by their study, to monitor the changes in the sedimentary environ-
ment. Whilst, at this stage, the influences of the more subtle factors cannot be
recognized, it is possible to express the overall sedimentary history in terms of
alterations in such generalized factors as water depth, overall energy of the
environment, and access to open water (i.e. oceanic) regimes. This can be done
by the recognition of ostracod assemblages, which can be assigned to particular
sedimentary environments on the basis of species distribution and overall
population trends.
Ostracod assemblages 1-5
The vertical distribution of each ostracod species is shown in Table 1, and
various statistical data on species and population trends are shown in Figure 32.
Five ostracod types numerically dominate the faunas (>20% of total popula-
tion), either singly or in combinations, and in successive zones up the borehole
these are (maximum % based on three point means in brackets): Brachycythere
longicaudata (51%), B. longicaudata (40%) with Haughtonileberis haughtoni
(56%), Cythereis klingeri (45°), Bairdoppilata andersoni (36%), and B. andersoni
(41%), with various species of Cytherella (32%). The level at which the
dominance of these types or combinations changes is usually clear cut (1-2 m
wide) and coincides with important changes in numbers and presence/absence of
secondary and minor taxa, as well as alterations in diversity, similarity and
overall size of the entire ostracod populations (Fig. 32, Tables 2-3). Only the
change over from the B. longicaudata/H. haughtoni to the C. klingeri-dominated
faunas is transitional and takes place with a good deal of fluctuation in all
parameters over a distance of about 4 m in the borehole. The distinctive
ostracod populations in these zones have been designated ‘ostracod assemblages’
1 to 5 and are shown in Figure 32 and Tables 2-3. Most of the secondary and
turnover &
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 61
minor taxa occur in more than one assemblage (although several are confined to
only two), but six species are restricted to only one. It is possible therefore to
characterize each assemblage in terms of its dominant types (>20%) with, in
three cases, additional specialized, but relatively rare, taxa. These associations
are summarized in Table 3. At a more general level, reference to Table 1 shows
Campanian Santonian |
11 I upper middle age
(ee hance ae gs (naa l(a assemblage
population
30 stability
% 20 4 increase
¥ decrease
10
25 z =
> sue’ < bah Hee gh
= 1 7 - ‘“+-- a rends
: ‘ 5) oe turnover <
> o
eZ
80
mostly Cytheracea ;
60 Bairdoppilata higher
taxa
Bairdiacea
= Te mostly
ae al Cytherellidae Bythocypris
Roan eee
~
60 <
Cytherella spp. C. klingeri dominant
Z = P
© 40 — Z| - =er,, =| « species
ao = “Qn, = ¥ \
20 =
| — ff Saewtont
— B.pondolandensis
@ Psulcata
A.tumida
O.pennata Baws Bea other
C.griesbachi species
H.vanhoepeni
-zujulandensis
A.zululandensis __
O.africana
X.sp
H.kennedyi
U.spp
Fig. 32. Variations in the ostracod faunas of BH9, Richards Bay. Discontinuities in the various
curves have been used to delimit ostracod assemblages 1 to 5 which are described in detail in
the text and Tables 2-3. Population stability has been measured by variations in the similarity
index between sample points up the borehole (ticks on the column marked borehole depth).
Population turnover is a measure of the number of new appearances and extinctions in each
sample, and the population diversity is calculated as number of species per hundred specimens.
Note that for most of the borehole there is an inverse relationship between population
diversity and the total number of valves per sample i.e. largest populations tend to be the least
diverse. The only large deviation from this trend is in the lower part of ostracod assemblage I.
These relationships may in part, however, be influenced by the statistical bias of dealing with
small numbers of specimens. Note that in all cases, percentage of species and higher taxa
quoted in this figure and in the text are based on three-point running mean values.
62 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
that assemblages 1, 2 and 3 are closely related both in terms of individual minor
and secondary species (e.g. Cytherelloidea newtoni, Brachycythere pondo-
landensis, and Gibberleberis africanus) and higher taxa (Cytheracean dominated,
> 60%), and that similarly, assemblages 4 and 5 have many characteristics in
common (nine species do not extend below 115,9 m, and the faunas are mainly
Bairdiacean/Cytherellid types).
It is clear that the overriding driving force behind these population altera-
tions was environmental change because such alterations were sudden but yet
did not lead to the extinction of the dominant species. Some of the appearances
and extinctions in the minor taxa may be phylogenetic, but the close corre-
TABLE 2
Make-up of faunal assemblages.
Dominant
Secondary
Minor
rare and sporadic
B. andersoni
H. haughtoni
B. longicaudata
Cytherella spp.
B. richards-
bayensis
1 2 3
aa B. longicaudata B. longicaudata
oN H. haughtoni
a C. klingeri
is)
H. haughtoni H. haughtoni
C. klingeri C. klingeri
= B. longicaudata
oN P. umzambaensis
ww
3
C. newtoni C. newtoni C. newtoni
= B. richards- B. richards-
2 bayensis bayensis
€ P. umzambaensis —_P. umzambaensis
5 P. zululandensis P. zululandensis
n R. nealei R. nealei R. nealei
iz B. sicarius B. sicarius
7) G. africanus G. africanus G. africanus
3 B. pondolandensis __B. pondolandensis
° H. fissilis
=] A. tumida
zi P. sulcata*
x O. pennata
Vv
=
g
5
<<]
x C. umzambaensis C. umzambaensis
3 C. transkeiensis
= H. fissilis
E G. elongata
8 O. pennata
= O. sp. A
3 C. griesbachi
4 B. sicarius
XN
a)
¥
* restricted to one ostracod assemblage
T —transitional
P. umzambaensis
P. zululandensis
R. nealei
B. sicarius
H. fissilis
A. tumida
O. pennata
C. umzambaensis
C. griesbachi
O. africana
A. zululandensis*
H. vanhoepeni*
O. sp. A
T. zululandensis
T. minima*
X, sp.
C. contorta*
B. andersoni
Cytherella spp.
H. kennedyi*
P. umzambaensis
P. zululandensis
B. sicarius
H. fissilis
O. pennata
C. umzambaensis
C. griesbachi
O. africana
Unicapella spp.
X. sp.
G. elongata
O. sp. A
T. zululandensis
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 63
spondence between maxima in population turnover and assemblage boundaries,
where the assemblages are defined by dominant taxa present (Fig. 32) suggests
that most are local, ecologically-related events.
Sedimentary environments
Various lines of evidence can be used to deduce the palaeosedimentary
environments from the character of the ostracod assemblages 1 to 5. Overall
conclusions are summarized in Table 3. The two most clear-cut cases are
assemblages 1 and 5. In the former, the dominant species is B. longicaudata,
which appears in the earliest sediments immediately above the basement surface
(sample 159 m). There is a rapid build-up in total size of population from an
estimated 3 600 adults/m? at the base to a maximum of about 10 000 adults/m?
higher up, coeval with a steady influx of new species colonizing the newly-
created marine environment. The latter trend is seen on Figure 32 as a high
turnover rate (dominantly appearances). Once established, the fauna has a high
diversity (>20%) and an average similarity index value of >25% (which
indicates a moderately stable population). Corroded and blackened valves near
the base of the borehole, together with the absence of Bairdoppilata and low
numbers of Cytherella suggest that ostracod assemblage 1 inhabited a shallow
water, high energy environment with restricted access to the open ocean.
Sedimentation rates were probably fairly high, but cannot be quantified. On this
evidence, B. Jongicaudata can be regarded as a ‘hardy’ species and its temporary
resurgence at intervals high up in the borehole (especially in the upper part of
assemblage 4 and between 123 and 125,5 m) may indicate temporary returns to
somewhat higher energy environments.
Assemblage 5 consists of a mixed Bairdiacea/Cytherellidae population with
relatively rare (<20°%) Cytheracean types. The combination of Bairdoppilata
with abundant Cytherella in modern environments appears to indicate
moderately deep-water (outer continental shelf) environments (e.g. Rosenfeld &
Bein 1978). A similar conclusion for assemblage 5 is supported by the presence
of four blind Cytheracean species (Unicapella (2 spp), Oertliella africana, and
Trachyleberis zululandensis), as well as Xestoleberis sp. An interesting and
significant member of this assemblage is the. unusual genus Unicapella, whose
closest relative is Paleoabyssocythere from the Campanian of the northern Rio
Grande Rise (DSDP site 21) (Benson 1977). The latter genus was the forerunner
of the psychrospheric Cainozoic genus Abyssocythere. Benson (1977) reckons
that Paleoabyssocythere cretacea lived at depths of at least 1 000 m. Assemblage 5
certainly does not suggest depths as great as this, but does indicate that the
environment was ‘oceanic’ in the sense that there were free connections to the
palaeo South Atlantic. The relative abundance of the architecturally complex
Hermanites kennedyi, as well as the low faunal diversity (<20 species/100 valves),
but high population densities (10 400 adults/m?) and stabilities (> 30%) indicate
low energy, deep (perhaps between 200 and 500 m) conditions. One surprising
absentee is the typically deep-water ‘marker’ Krithe.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
64
4
SOATBA JO “ON
oljowW arenbs Jed
S}[Npe [eNprArputr
—uonejndod jnpe
guul/
00r O1 000 ZI 000 § 000 ¢ 000 OF [eo1dAy poyeurnso
(ssorpur
ALTIUS 93BIOAP)
ysiy (%0€<) uinipeu (% Sz7>) winipout (7% $7 <) MOT (%07<) uinips (%¢67<) Ati[iqeis uonejndod
(suouiseds pT
/saiseds ony)
(Mo]) % 07> (Mol) % 07> (qsIy) %07< (uinipew) % O7~ (q3Iq) %07< AjIsIoArp yeuney
7 0E< %01<
seprforoyyAD seprforeyAD,
%o SP-OE 7% Ob-0E
eoovIpleg eoovIpleg
7% OV-07 7 09-0S 7 06-OL 7% 06-08 7% 06-09
suvedeloyyAD suvsoeioyyAD suvadeleyjAD suvsoeioyyAD suveoeioyjyAD exe} YSIY
SIJSTABJIDADYI 4daYyjo
ee ee ee ae
DJAOJUOI “D
DUI * J,
‘dds nyjadvaiuy 1uadaoyupa “Fy
1Apauuay “Ay SISUapUub]Nn]NZ “y suou DIDIINS “J euou sodA} pezijeioads
1U0]YsndY “ET
1u0s4apun “g 1uos4apuv “g 1dasuyy “Dd DIDpNDIISsUO] “g Djopnoa1sUuo] -_ WAAR
SPOID4JSO D1,S0UsDIP
a a ree Cee
(1 00-0024 ) (1 007-00) (1 00T >) (41 00T>)
(jjeys “jU09 uolenoi9 wone[non9
13jno) ‘193eM usedo 393M usdo *ABI9uS ‘19}8M Usado peldIser ‘As1oud PeloInser ‘As IouS
‘K3.10US MO] ‘dooq MO] ‘yidap s}e19poyy ABIOUS MOT ‘MOT[eEYS MOT “I}eM MOTTeYS ysiy “Joye Molpeys Juauluosauaoanjog
SS ee ee ees, Se ee ee
g v £ 4 I asp] quiass
“SJUSWIUOIAUS AleJUSUIPes PoyeUIWOp-snoUEasiie} oI [TW “(Saloey OyIO9ds 0} pa}o1I}sex souO JO $p0de.1}SO }UBUTWOp *a"1)
SpOde.soO IoxIVUI pue s}USUIUOIIAUSOSE|ed pojsessng
€ ATaV
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 65
Assemblages 2, 3 and 4 represent environments intermediate to 1 and 5.
Abundant Bairdoppilata, the increasing importance of Cytherella, and the
appearance of blind forms suggest that assemblage 4 marks the onset of
moderately deep-water conditions and probably represents a midshelf (100-200 m
depth) environment. The increasing specialization of the fauna in assemblage 4
is indicated by the low population diversity (<20%) coupled with a large
population density (12 000 adults/m?).
Through assemblages 2 and 3, the importance of B. longicaudata is in
progressive, if erratic decline, and in assemblage 3 the Cytheracean component
as a whole declines sharply (about 90% at the base to 60% at the top). Deep-
water elements are largely absent and the population stability is only low to
medium as the faunas constantly adjusted to deepening water and lower energy
environments. Both assemblages 2 and 3 suggest shallow water, low energy
environments, and the low population diversity in assemblage 2 (~20%)
probably indicates somewhat restricted conditions. Population stability (as
measured by averaging the similarity indices) is especially low at about 128 m
in the borehole, above which, for a short distance (about 3 m), rapid fluctuations
in C. klingeri/H. haughtoni/B. longicaudata numbers indicate a period of
population instability probably related to fluctuating current strengths caused
by sea-level movements (? minor regressions). Similar, but less pronounced
events, occur at the boundaries between assemblages 3 and 4, and 4 and 5.
Table 3 summarizes the conclusions on palaeoenvironments up the borehole.
Finally, the trends exhibited in the ostracod population as it adjusted to
changing environmental conditions over a period of about 5 m.y. can be
graphically expressed in Figure 33A. Here, total Cytheracea—Cytherellidae—
Bairdiacea/Cypridacea components are plotted on a triangular diagram. Each
of the ostracod assemblages occupies a well-defined field although areas of
assemblages 1, 2 and 3 overlap. An interesting feature of this diagram is that it
emphasizes the trend followed by the initial, colonizing fauna (assemblage 1) as
it rapidly develops towards Cytheracean dominance, which persists, and is more
firmly established, through the duration of assemblage 2. The field occupied by
assemblage 3 partially overlaps with that of assemblage 1, but can be dis-
tinguished from it by the presence of several moderate water depth elements in
the Cytheracean component (e.g. O. pennata, A. tumida). Fields for assem-
blages 4 and 5 are well separated, with the latter showing a progressive trend
towards the Bairdiacea/Cypridacea—Cytherellidae base line as the water depth
increases. Despite the closeness of parts of fields 4 and 5 to field 1, distinction
can easily be made by the make-up of their respective Bairdiacea/Cypridacea
components: to the ‘north’ of the divide this component is a Paracypris plus
subordinate Bythocypris population, whereas to the ‘south’ it is a Bairdoppilata
plus subordinate Paracypris and Bythocypris population.
Translating these population fields into palaeoenvironments Figure 33B is
generated. At present, its applicability to other areas has not been tested and it
can only be considered relevant to the BH—9 borehole.
66 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CYTHERACEA
BAIRDIACEA & CYTHERELLIDAE
CYPRIDACEA
os
@ OAC
SS
Evie
*
s
a
wo t
D
FNP ae
~ 77) 8
°
s ef! f evcroy
& Salsa decreasing
o
¥ oosD Fs
© oye a
“on ero
B oe axet
~ oe
& 7 Oe
© 7 ©0900
/
/
B&C
Fig. 33. A. Triangular plot of ostracod populations of all samples in the BH9 borehole in
terms of percentage of Cytheracea, Bairdiacea plus Cypridacea, and Cytherellidae. The fields
of ostracod assemblage 1 to 5 are outlined. B. Variations in the ostracod populations (expressed
in terms of Cytheracea, Bairdiacea plus Cypridacea, and Cytherellidae) with changing sedi-
mentary environments in the BH9 borehole. Arrows indicate direction of change up the bore-
hole based on movement within the fields of the various assemblages shown in Figure 33A.
In the elongate fields of assemblages 1 and 5 these trends are actually followed in successive
samples up the borehole. The square dot line separates high and low energy environments,
whilst the open circle line separates shallow and moderate/deep-water environments.
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 67
BIOSTRATIGRAPHY
The main stratigraphic horizons recognized by Klinger & Kennedy (1977,
fig. 12) in BH—-9 are the Santonian/Campanian, and Campanian I/II boundaries:
the former is marked by the appearance of Vendegiesiella cf. V. spinosa and
V. trituberculata, and the latter by the appearance of Baculites vanhoepeni.
These horizons, together with a suggested subdivision of the Santonian based
on a comparison with Madagascar ammonite faunas, are shown in Figure 32.
Both the Santonian/Campanian, and Campanian I/II boundaries fall very close
to the boundaries between ostracod assemblages 3 and 4, and 4 and 5, respec-
tively, which raises the possibility that the appearance of the different ammonite
species might also be facies-controlled and not strictly phylogenetic. Further
work on the Santonian and Campanian ostracods of Zululand will clarify this
issue.
Notwithstanding this possibility, it is desirable to see if any phylogenetic
trends can be recognized in the ostracod faunas against the dominating patterns
of environmental control. Certainly at this stage it is not possible to say, for
instance, that the appearance of Cytherelloidea griesbachi, Haughtonileberis
vanhoepeni, Trachyleberis zululandensis or Amphicytherura zululandensis is
diagnostic of the basal Campanian strata throughout south-east Africa. They
may turn out to be so, but their apparent environmentally controlled ranges in
the borehole leads one to suspect that this is not the case, unless of course they
are endemic to the Zululand area and they evolved solely because of environ-
mental stress—in which case they will be restricted to a particular facies. On the
other hand, some of the obviously less environmentally-bound species may show
phylogenetic relationships that will turn out to be biostratigraphically useful.
Amongst them may be Brachycythere pondolandensis, Gibberleberis africanus
and Cytherelloidea newtoni (mid-upper Santonian), Rayneria nealei (mid-
Santonian to Campanian I), Amphicytherura tumida (upper Santonian to
Campanian II), and Oertliella pennata (upper Santonian to Campanian I).
As might be anticipated, ostracods from the lower part of the borehole show
very close affinities with the Santonian assemblages from the lower part of the
Umzamba cliff section. According to Klinger & Kennedy (1977), the lowest 7 m
at Umzamba are a condensed equivalent of the section 159 m—115 m in the
Richards Bay borehole, but whilst the ostracod assemblages in the borehole
show considerable temporal variations, the four samples studied by Dingle
(1969, fig. 21) show little or no significant variation from the base to the top of
the Umzamba Santonian sequence. At the latter, Brachycythere longicaudata
dominates the fauna throughout (>30°%) with Cytherelloidea umzambaensis,
Haughtonileberis haughtoni and Pondoina sulcata consistently present up to about
10% each. On this evidence, the restriction of Pondoina sulcata and Cythereis
transkeiensis to assemblages 3 and 1, respectively, in the borehole can only be
explained by environmental control, whilst a similar restriction of Oertliella
pennata (originally identified as Acanthocythereis aff. A. horridula by Dingle
(1969)) to the Santonian at Umzamba has no biostratigraphic significance.
68 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 4
Santonian ostracods at Richards Bay and Umzamba.
Richards Bay Umzamba
Cythereis transkeiensis *
C. klingeri
Cytherelloidea newtoni
C. umzambaensis
C. gardeni
C. griesbachi
Brachycythere longicaudata
B. pondolandensis
B. rotunda
B. sicarius
Paracypris umzambaensis
P. zululandensis
Haughtonileberis haughtoni
A. fissilis
H. vanhoepeni
Cytherella spp.
Rayneria nealei
Gibberleberis africanus
G. elongata
Bairdoppilata andersoni
Bythocypris richardsbayensis
Pondoina sulcata
Amphicytherura tumida
Oertliella pennata
O. sp. A.
Paraphysocythere thompsoni
Veenia obesa
?Cnestocythere
28 types (Cytherella spp counted as one), 17 common. Similarity 61 %.
*
eee | eee | x | eee | ee | ee ee we | ee | we
Table 4 shows the species identified at both localities and indicates a 61 per cent
similarity at the species level. Significant differences include the restriction of
several species to either area: to Umzamba Paraphysocythere thompsoni,
Brachycythere rotunda and Veenia obesa; to Richards Bay Gibberleberis elongata,
Cytherelloidea newtoni, and the virtual substitution of Cythereis transkeiensis by
C. klingeri in the borehole. In terms of Figure 33B the Umzamba faunas fall
within the shallow water high energy environments, with one sample on the
border of the field adjacent to a somewhat lower energy environment.
Commentary on the similarity of the Richards Bay ostracods with extra-
southern African Santonian/Campanian faunas will be postponed until the
ostracods from other outcrops of a similar age in Zululand have been studied.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The author thanks Dr H. Klinger of the South African Museum for making
the borehole samples available, and for helpful discussion on the stratigraphy of
Zululand. The borehole material was originally the property of the Geological
Survey of South Africa, but has recently been donated to the South African
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN OSTRACODS 69
Museum by the Survey Director Dr W. L. van Wyk. The study was made
possible by a University of Cape Town staff research grant for which the author
is grateful. Mr G. Lowcock and Dr D. Crawford of the Electron Microscopy
Unit at the University of Cape Town are thanked for their help in the SEM
photography which was undertaken on the Unit’s instruments.
REFERENCES
ALEXANDER, C. I. 1929. Ostracoda of the Cretaceous of north Texas. Bull. Univ. Texas Bur.
econ. Geol. 2907: 1-137.
ALEXANDER, C. I. 1933. Shell structure of the ostracode genus Cytheropteron and fossil species
from the Cretaceous of Texas. J. Paleont. 7: 181-214.
APOSTOLESCU, V. 1961. Contribution a l’étude paléontologique (Ostracodes) et stratigraphique
des bassins crétacés et tertiares de l’Afrique occidentale. Revue Inst. fr. Petrole 16:
779-867.
BairD, W. 1845. Arrangement of British Entomostraca, with a list of species, particularly
noticing those which have as yet been discovered within the bounds of the Club. Hist.
Berwicksh. Nat. Club 2: 145-148.
Bairp, W. 1850. The natural history of the British Entomostraca: 1-364, London, Ray Society.
Bate, R. H. 1972. Upper Cretaceous ostracods from the Carnarvon Basin, Western Australia.
Special Papers in Palaeontology 10: 1-85.
BENSON, R. H. 1971. A new Cenozoic deep-sea genus, Abyssocythere (Crustacea: Ostracoda:
Trachyleberididae), with descriptions of five new species. Smithson. Contrib. Paleobiol.
7: 1-25.
BENSON, R. H. 1977. The Cenozoic ostracode faunas of the Sao Paulo Plateau and the Rio
Grande Rise (DSDP Leg 39, Sites 356 and 357). Initial Reports of the Deep Sea Drilling
Project 39: 869-883. Washington: United States Government Printing Office.
BosquET, J. 1854. Monographie des crustacés fossiles du terrain Crétacé du Duché Limbourg.
Mémoires de la Commission pour la description de la Carte geologique de la Neerlande
2: 53-126.
Brapy, G. S. 1880. Report on ostracoda dredged by H.M.S. Challenger during the years
1873-76. Reports on the scientific results of the voyage of H.M.S. Challenger, Zoology 1(3):
1-184.
Brapy, G. S. 1898. On new or imperfectly-known species of ostracoda, chiefly from New
Zealand. Trans. zool. Soc. Lond. 14: 429-452.
BuT er, E. A. & Jones, D. E. 1957. Cretaceous ostracoda of Prothro and Rayburn salt domes
Bienville Parish, Louisiana. Bull. geol. Surv. La. 32: 1-65.
CHAPMAN, F. 1898. On ostracoda from the ‘““Cambridge Greensand”. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist.
3: 331-346.
CHAPMAN, F. 1904. Foraminifera and ostracoda from the Cretaceous of east Pondoland, South
Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 4: 221-237.
CHAPMAN, F. 1917. Monograph of the Foraminifera and Ostracoda of the Gingin Chalk.
Bull. geol. Sury. West. Aust. 72: 1-87.
CHAPMAN, F. 1923. On some foraminifera and ostracoda from the Cretaceous of the Umzamba
River, Pondoland. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 26: 107-118.
CorYELL, H. N., SAMPLE, C. H. & JENNINGS, P. H. 1935. Bairdoppilata, a new genus of ostra-
coda, with two new species. Am. Mus. Novit. 777: 1-5.
DAMmoTrTE, R. 1974. Un noveau genre d’ostracode de |’Albien du Bassin de Paris: Matronella n.g.
Importance des empreintes musculaires dans les attributions génériques chez les Trachy-
leberidinae. Paleontographica 146: 181-189.
DINGLE, R. V. 1969. Upper Senonian ostracods from the coast of Pondoland, South Africa.
Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 38: 347-385.
DINGLE, R. V. 1971a. Cytherelloidea gardeni nom. nov. (Ostracoda). Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr.
39: 353.
DINGLE, R. V. 19716. Some Cretaceous ostracodal assemblages from the Agulhas Bank (South
African continental margin). Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 39: 393-418.
70 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
DINGLE, R. V. 1976. Palaeogene ostracods from the continental shelf off Natal, South Africa.
Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 42: 35-79.
DINGLE, R. V. 1978. South Africa. Jn: MOULLADE, M. and Nairn, A. E. M. eds. The Phanerozoic
geology of the world II, The Mesozoic A: 401-434. Amsterdam: Elsevier.
Forster, H. D. 1975. Die geologische Entwicklung von Stid-Mozambique seit der Unterkreide
und die Ammoniten-Fauna von Unterkreide und Cenoman. Geol. Jb. 12: 3-324.
Howe, H. V. & LaurencicH, L. 1958. Introduction to the study of Cretaceous Ostracoda.
Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press.
Jones, T. R. 1849. A monograph of the Entomostraca of the Cretaceous Formations of England.
London: Palaeontological Society.
Jones, T. R. 1884. Notes on the Foraminifera and Ostracoda from the deep boring at Richmond
Q. Jl geol. Soc. Lond. 40: 766-777.
Jones, T. R. & HINDE, G. J. 1890. A supplementary monograph of the Cretaceous Entomostraca
of England and Ireland. London: Palaeontographical Society.
KeEnneby, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1975. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South
Africa. Introduction, stratigraphy. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) 25: 263-315.
Kuincer, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1977. Upper Cretaceous ammonites from a borehole near
Richards Bay, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 72: 69-107.
LATREILLE, P. A. 1806. Genera Crustaceorum et Insectorum 1: 1-303. Paris.
MANDELSTAM, M. I. 1960. In: OrnLov, Y. A. ed. Elements of palaeontology. Vol. VIII.
Arthropods: 1-515, Moscow, Geological and subsurface prospecting: Scientific and
Technical Edition. (In Russian.)
Maup, R. & Orr, W. 1975. Aspects of post-Karroo geology in the Richards Bay area. Trans.
geol. Soc. S. Afr. 78: 101-109.
Moore, R. C. ed. 1961. Treatise on invertebrate paleontology. Part Q, Arthropoda 3. Lawrence:
University of Kansas Press.
MULLER, G. W. 1894. Die Ostracoden des Golfes von Neapel und der angrenzenden Meeresab-
schnitte. Fauna Flora Golf. Neapel 31: 1-404.
NEALE, J. W. 1975. The ostracod fauna from the Santonian Chalk (Upper Cretaceous) of
Gingin, Western Australia. Special Papers in Palaeontology 16: 1-81.
Puri, H. S. 1954. Contribution to the study of the Miocene of the Florida Panhandle. Part III
(Ostracoda). Bull. geol. Surv. Fla. 3: 217-309.
Puri, H. S. 1955. Hermanites, a new name for Hermania Puri 1954. J. Paleont. 29: 558.
Poxorny, V. 1964. Oertliella and Spinicythereis, new ostracod genera from the Upper
Cretaceous. Vest. ustred. Ust. geol. 39: 283-284.
Reuss, A. E. 1846. Die Versteinerungen der bohmischen Kreide Formation: 2: 59-148, Stuttgart;
Schweizerbart.
Sars, G. O. 1866. Oversigt af Norges marine ostracoden. Forh. VidenskSelsk. Krist. 7: 1-130.
Sars, G. O. 1888. Nye Bidrag til Kundskaken om Midlehavets Invertebrat fauna 4. Ostracoda
Mediterranea. Arch. Math. Natury. 12: 173-324.
Sars, G. O. 1922-1928. An account of the Crustacea of Norway 9. Ostracoda, Parts 1-16:
1-277. Bergen: Bergen Museum.
ROSENFELD, A. & BEIN, A. 1978. A preliminary note on recent ostracodes from shelf to rise
sediments off Northwest Africa. Meteor ForschErgebn. 29: 14-20.
SYLVESTER-BRADLEY, P. C. 1948. The ostracode genus Cythereis. J. Paleont. 22: 792-797.
SYLVESTER-BRADLEY, P. C. & BENSON, R. H. 1971. Terminology for surface features in ornate
ostracods. Lethaia 4: 249-286.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
‘An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name ‘(and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
’
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. DuToit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
R. V. DINGLE
MARINE SANTONIAN AND CAMPANIAN
OSTRACODS FROM A BOREHOLE AT
RICHARDS BAY, ZULULAND
MAY 1980 ISSN 0303-2515
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction :
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
‘size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 196956; Jones 1971)’
“As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton ef al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Pagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a). R
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuLLouGu, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
Fiscuer, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
Fiscuer, P.-H., DuvaL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull, Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910, Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 82 Band
May 1980 Mei
Part 2 Deel
RECORDS OF THE SUBANTARCTIC FUR SEAL
(ARCTOCEPHALUS TROPICALIS) FROM
SOUTH AFRICA WITH NOTES ON ITS BIOLOGY
AND SOME OBSERVATIONS OF
CAPTIVE ANIMALS
By
PETER D. SHAUGHNESSY
&
GRAHAM J. B. ROSS
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.—p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.—p.i.), 711-4), 8, 9(1—2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.-p.i.), 15(4—5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(S), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnayvrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 92 0
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
RECORDS OF THE SUBANTARCTIC FUR SEAL (ARCTOCEPHALUS
TROPICALIS) FROM SOUTH AFRICA WITH NOTES ON ITS
BIOLOGY AND SOME OBSERVATIONS OF CAPTIVE ANIMALS
By
PETER D. SHAUGHNESSY
Sea Fisheries Branch, Cape Town
&
GRAHAM J. B. Ross
Port Elizabeth Museum, Port Elizabeth
(With 2 figures and 7 tables)
LMS. accepted 7 February 1980]
ABSTRACT
Information is provided on 22 records of the subantarctic fur seal from South Africa
from June 1966 to June 1979. They occurred between Cape Town and Richards Bay, Natal,
principally between May and September. In the three years 1976 to 1978 an average of about
four seals per year was recorded. Suggested sources of these seals are Gough Island in the
South Atlantic Ocean and the Prince Edward Islands in the Southern Indian Ocean. External
measurements, organ masses, stomach contents and parasites are described for some of the
seals. Observations on the behaviour and feeding of captive animals are included.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction . : : j : : ae ol
Methods ; i : 2 ; ; x2
Records ‘ ; ; ; : : ee A
Stomach contents and feeding . a en Ot
Parasites : : ‘ i ‘ : ess
External body measurements . : A 85:
Discussion . ; : 3 : 5 = 85
Acknowledgements . 3 ; 3 . 88
References . ; , ; é j Erss
INTRODUCTION
The subantarctic or Amsterdam Island fur seal, Arctocephalus tropicalis,
breeds on islands in the subantarctic region: Gough and the Tristan da Cunha
Islands in the South Atlantic Ocean; the Prince Edward Islands, New Amster-
dam and St Paul Islands in the Southern Indian Ocean (Shaughnessy 1980).
One vagrant was recorded at Macquarie Island (54°S 159°E) in 1959 (Csordas
1962), five at South Georgia (54°S 38°W) between 1972 and 1976 (Payne 19795),
and one from Tramandal, southern Brazil in 1976 (Castello & Pinedo 1977);
eight in South Africa have been referred to briefly by Nel (1971) or Shaughnessy
(1980). Details of these last eight records and another fourteen in South African
71
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 82 (2), 1980: 71-89, 2 figs, 7 tables.
72 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
waters up to June 1979 are reported here. Localities where they were observed
or captured are shown in Figure 1. Catalogue numbers of specimens used in this
study that are stored in the South African and Port Elizabeth Museums are
provided in Table 1.
Nomenclature of fur seals in this paper follows that of Rice (1977).
METHODS
Live subantarctic fur seals in South African waters have been distinguished
from resident Cape fur seals, A. pusillus, primarily by the colour of their pelage,
especially by their cream-coloured chest, throat and face. In addition, the
presence of a tuft of black guard hairs on the top of the head (a crest) has been
taken as uniquely indicative of A. tropicalis bulls (Bonner 1968; Repenning et al.
1971; Condy 1978). External features of stranded fur seals have also been com-
pared with the identification guide for A. tropicalis and A. gazella prepared
by Condy (1978). The antarctic or Kerguelen fur seal, A. gazella, breeds on
islands south of the Antarctic Convergence, e.g. South Georgia (Payne 1978),
and also on Marion Island (Condy 1978).
Specimens for which skeletal material was available have been identified
by means of the following characters. A. tropicalis has simple, highly pointed
postcanine teeth which rarely have secondary cusps, whereas A. pusillus has
prominent anterior and posterior cusps (Repenning et al. 1971). The postcanines
of A. gazella also lack cusps, but their postcanines are very much reduced,
particularly the rear two (King 1959; Repenning et al. 1971; Condy 1978).
In addition, skulls of A. tropicalis can be distinguished from those of A. gazella
by their narrow arched palate. The width of the palate at the sixth postcanine
relative to the condylobasal length has been compared with measurements
provided in Table 1 of King (1959), namely 9,4 to 14,8 per cent for A. tropicalis
(the northern form) and 14,9 to 17,9 per cent for A. gazella (the southern form).
Most whole animals which were inspected were measured following the
recommendations of the American Society of Mammalogists (1967). In addition,
straight-line point-to-point measurements were taken from the snout to the
anterior insertion of fore-flipper, centre of ear, gape and eye, while circumference
of head was measured at eyes and at canine teeth. The mass of most of the seals
was measured with a spring balance; that of three vagrants at Durban Aquarium
was estimated by comparison with captive Cape fur seals of known mass. Mass
determinations of testes were made after epididymides were removed. Seals
were judged emaciated if the thickness of the blubber and skin above the
sternum was less than 20 mm or if they appeared thin with prominent scapulae
and lumbar vertebrae.
Males were classified as adult if they had a black crest on the top of their
head, and subadult if a crest could not be seen. Females were classified as
immature if they had narrow uterine cornua (each less than 10 mm) or a small
body (mass less than 15 kg).
73
PiDMpy 4404
RECORDS OF THE SUBANTARCTIC FUR SEAL
upgung
yopag
Pl9!33°4S
Ang
Spupydiy
08
“POLY YINOG UI SsUIpUeS [eOS INJ S1j91eJURQNS Jo sarjI[edo] ay} SuIMoys dey “| “SL
x4 44 Jo8L
ado} Pe°D
spbp|DWwii jo adp>
SMOIIIM, of JE
449q0z1/3 440d J8ALy JaAly apeeig pak ate gon
puojiny adb>
ABALY
sdoy)iDMs
\N
SO
74 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The ages of those specimens for which skulls were available were estimated
by three methods. Ridges were counted on the external surface of the root of an
upper canine tooth after it had been removed by boiling, and ages assigned on
the assumption that each ridge represented one year of life. This technique has
been used to age northern fur seals, Callorhinus ursinus, and antarctic fur seals
(Scheffer 1950, Payne 1978), but is only useful for animals up to about 4 years
of age. In addition, a longitudinal section of one of the upper canines was
prepared by hand-grinding on wet carborundum paper and the number of
growth layers counted in the dentine or (when the pulp cavity was closed) in
the cement. It has been assumed that each layer corresponds to one year of life
in this species, as shown for A. gazella by Payne (1978). Of the three methods,
the ridge count is considered to be most accurate for young animals and the
dentine count for older animals. As pups are born from mid-November to mid-
December at New Amsterdam (Tollu 1974) and mainly during mid-December
at Gough (Bester 1977), the age of vagrants has been calculated on the
assumption that they were born at the beginning of December.
RECORDS
Information on each of the twenty-two A. tropicalis vagrants in South Africa
is provided in chronological order. The location and date of stranding of each
animal are provided in Table 1, together with the date on which it died or
returned to the sea, the methods used to identify it as A. tropicalis and the
material and other data collected from it. Skulls were collected from twelve of
the vagrants. Data on their condylobasal length and the width of their palate
at the sixth postcanine are provided in Table 2, together with information on
the determination of their age from canine teeth. External measurements and
mass determinations of organs are provided for some of the seals in Tables 3
and 4. A typical A. tropicalis bull (seal number 19) is shown in Figure 2.
1. The first subantarctic fur seal ashore in South Africa of which we are
aware was an extremely emaciated, immature female near Port Elizabeth in
June 1966. It was taken to the Port Elizabeth Oceanarium, and was referred to
by Nel (1971). Initially it had a mass of 2,3 kg and a standard length of 57 cm.
In September 1967 it had attained a mass of 15 kg and a length of 68 cm.
It died in April 1969 after 2 years 10 months in captivity. As the number of
growth layers on a canine tooth was estimated at 44, the seal must have been
18 months old when caught.
This seal had rudimentary anterior cusps on postcanines 2 to 5; such cusps
are unusual in A. tropicalis, but have been noted by King (1959). They were also
apparent on the postcanines of seal number 21. Its fur was noticeably denser
and its eyes larger than those of Cape fur seals in the Oceanarium. A strong,
musk-like odour associated with this seal was readily distinguishable from the
odour of Cape fur seals.
ip
RECORDS OF THE SUBANTARCTIC FUR SEAL
|
++ ++ +
+ +
+
+
+ +
CAI CLA DICE CLAD)
sosseul
uesIQ [euio}xq
ueye}
s]USWOINseoyy
+ + 4
sojoud
*SUIYS POUUE} UO SIQISIA S}soI9 [[eWIS ,
*AJPAIOadsoer ‘suInasny] WJeqeZI[q Wog puv uvdiijy YINog oy) UI pasnoy sie Wad PUe WS PeyeUusisap suoutIoeds -
*4X9} 9} Ul PaplAOid oie (YISUS] PIepUL}s Sosed SWIOS UI PUL) SUOT}EUIUIIOJOp Sse ;
“4 poxIvUl s[eUTUe IO; 4X9} 94} PUL p BIQRL_ Ul PeplAOId Ie ENUIOD SUTIO}N JO YIPIM PUL So}SO} JO SUOTJBUIUIIOJOP SSEIAT 1
oF - + + TEEGE-NVS
+ ae == =F 67E6E-NVS
+ + + = IIZ6E-WVS
ot + = at 00/z7st Wad
oe = + ar OIZ6E-NVS
— + — — —
+ + = ae 98/0¢ST Wad
= == ae AP L9/I@ST Wad
+ 3 ae + 0868E-INVS
= + + + €SL8E-INVS
= = = + ¥6/07ST Wad
= = + =f Lry/9ISt Wad
== = + + 60/SIST Wad
qS9lIBAO §tCo} =) > ES
10 urs yelueio [NYAS
S$9jsoT -1s0g , Ou
onsoje}e9
P2}99][09 [else YL uswisedg
+ + = — -U 6Leung ¢ 6L Pun g
et + + + da 6L4eWS 6L ARW S
= =F a + d 6LI°W 8Z 6L IEW SZ
+ + = — UU = gL deg st SL des ST
oa ae ae ae Gi RYE GER SL 3nY TE
= + of + d_ 8L 3nvy gz 8L 3NY $7
+ + = — Ua 8 3nv Iz 8L BNV IZ
a + = — a egLdings SL Aine €
tr + — — UA LLYO LL PO 97
+ + + + d@ LL 4eg gi LL deg gt
+ ar = = @ MLGESE LL deg ¢
= ar = + 2AT}de9 LL nV LZ
+ + = + ad LLANE IT LL Aig OF
= + Se — wU LLAON £% LL Aine 8
+ + = + dad 6Lidyz OL oune ST
1938]
+ + = — dd Sskep may OL KEW ZI
vt at ate + @ sLany 92 SL 3nY £7
+ + + + dQ PL°2C Ie PL 29 67
+ + = —= al = €L API 8
== ae ar + dd €L99q-prur TL Ainge gt
19}8]
+ + = + dW — skep May OL des 9
= + + + da 691dy 99 ounfe 6f
ysouIg. Ss eSelePg «=YIPIM—s WOOL (q) peap 10
a}e/ed (a) Bes 0} e10yse
peuinje1 31eq
uo poseq UOljeoyIUepy 31eq
“BOTW YINOG JO 3SeOS OY} UO popuUeIs je) s[ees Inj d01e}URGNS UO UONeWIOJUT
J a1avL
wes pes SS Se he ea a eS ee eS
xag
IOATY SdoxIeMS
Ule}UOJpULIIS
UloyUOJpurS
mweqezia 0d
uMoy sdea
urging
weqeziq Od
ueqing ‘sxpoy uorunsy
yieqezig Od
A/87.81 S,LTobt
adoy pooy jo adep
AYTOTE $,67067
youve Pleweds
Wyeqeza Od
_ ueqing
ASOoCE S/LHo87
Aeg spivyory
ABEST SBS £E
yjeqezq 10d
ueqing
A0r.81 S/LOobé
ulo}UOJpUurIIS
ALTBI SSSofE
umMoy, sdeD
AOE SIS 067
urging
A/BEST S/TS EE
INOW! ISATY sdoyxWJeEMS
A81$T SM0vt
YINOW JSATY purse
AWEST S/E00vE
SMOTITAA
Ayyeo0T
(46
IZ
02
61
8T
Lt
oT
st
LA)
eI
(ai
NIP Ken Mt ay INO I. 08 Cy)
_
‘ou
pi0s2y
76 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Unlike the goat-like bleat of Cape fur seal pups in the Oceanarium, this seal
uttered a high-pitched wail or cry when requesting food or attention. Similarly,
its typical bark and shorter staccato sounds were also higher pitched than calls
of Cape fur seal pups. When approached closely it sometimes gave a deep
growl before lunging.
2. An adult male which came ashore near Port Elizabeth in September 1970
was also taken to the Oceanarium. It was treated for internal haemorrhaging
but died a few days later. This seal appeared to sip sea-water from its pool on
several occasions.
3. An emaciated, immature female which came ashore near Port Elizabeth in
July 1971 was kept at the Oceanarium for 2 years 5 months. Its age at death is
calculated to have been 3 or 4 years, from which it is deduced that it was
7 or 19 months old when it was captured.
4. An adult male came ashore on the beach near the Durban Aquarium in
May 1973 and remained there for two days before swimming away. Colour
transparencies of the seal were provided by J. Bass (Oceanographic Research
Institute, Durban).
5. An emaciated, adult male which came ashore at Sunset Beach; Cape Town
in December 1974 was put to death 2 days later.
TABLE 2
Skull measurements and estimated age of subantarctic fur seals that
stranded on the coast of South Africa.
Width of palate
at pe 6° Canine teeth
Record CBL*
no. mm No. No.
mm % of CBL | external dentinal
ridges layers
1 Seal no. 1 was in captivity for 2 years 10 months, no. 3 for 2 years
5 months and no. 8 for 2 years 10 months.
2 Pulp closed.
3 Seventeen cement layers counted.
4 Condylobasal length.
5 Sixth postcanine tooth.
(i
RECORDS OF THE SUBANTARCTIC FUR SEAL
*(P21"IS SSIMIOYIO ssofUN) MID jsI JO dry oy} 0} Joddiyf oy} JO UOT}IOSUI JOIIO}Ue Oy} LOI, poInseoy ,
“AJLUIOI}XO [VISIP 0} Ppoinsvour siaddipy ‘yiSue, Apog IvoUI[IAIND
“Sy €°¢ 18 poweuINss seM ASdOIOOU IOJ POAOUIOI sojOsNU pue sUvSIO JO 1eY} “SY / ‘OL SPM APO dU} JO }SOUI JO sseur oY) {YyIEOp 1V
“W €¢6‘0 JO YIIS puv UW Cg‘ JO YSUD] IvoUT[IAINS ‘By 7‘/ JO SSeU PRY [vas SIY} sIN}ded ye fYIeOpP 1V +
0c 81 Te S‘L 6 LI cS 91 LC IL‘0 671 S‘9€ W 4
v el Sc s‘¢ s‘¢ cl SE Or oI 6£°0 78‘ VL el 0c
= as aap = ae ae man 61 vE = crt 0°8S W 61
= 81 87 ss) S vl 4 el I? 9r°0 160 v6 A 81
SI Li 9¢ se) 9 el 6€ Cl 0c €v‘0 760 Vol dA Li
=, aa = +r ae = = 6 LE LOT y9'T 0°08 W SI
81 £C €£ Ol IT 81 $9 61 O€ 69°0 S7S‘I 0‘Or W el
SC ST OV Or IT 81 v9 0c ve 960 fi 0°78 W 28
9 8I 87 LE 8 el 9€ vI (G6 tr'0 60 0°8 W 9
8 LZ Ov cl el €C €L 6 LE 780 S79'T V6S W ‘S
LI oT 9¢ s‘s s‘9 el 9€ SI ve 09°0 160 s‘sI el r€
= a a ae = a re SC s8b 180 eSET =a W 4
(wu) Jeddiy
ULyS pue souruvo soko eke Jo reo Jo -O10J pulpy 3104 (u1) (uw)
qaqqn{q 91}U99 odes 9iju99 uol}JosutT ——————_—__——_——__ 18 yy3u9] (34) ‘ou
SSOUXSIY_L, ye peoy (WI) Jor19}ue (wd) Areyjixy piepurig SSP X9S pr0090yY
QOUSIOJUUNIIIS
—— ,uyjsu9] Joddi,4
0} ynous (WD) YISUNT
‘POLIFY YINOG JO }SkOS 9Y} UO papuv}s Jey} s[eas INJ o1jOIeJUeGNS JO s}udWOINSeO|y
€ a1avL,
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
*(Ul[EWIIOF Ul UONeAIEsoId Jo}Je) 3 Lp pue ZC JO SOsseU SojSo} peY (QT “OU) [ves JoyJOUY ,
‘OPIS JOYA 0} IojoI ABU SOSSeU SOU, z
“ASdO1O9U IOF ULIIVUTIO}OA & AQ POAOUWIOI SULSIO [LIOADS ,
= 60 vs SOL 69 a oT 091 csl Olt 699 OL cor C6rl S6l IZ
= = = SIE 6 90 50 Iv (64 TE 097 67 LET OTE L9 07
= = == se4 cI 60 L0 ise 0s iss S8E 07 cr OZE 08 SI
= = = S87 O£ 90 90 cv ov cE CEE 4 O€T OLE OL LI
= SE L‘€ 098 08 O€ 37 S07 €67 SEI SSI LL OLY 090T 077 €I
797 a= = = = = = an = SOE C891 SOE 18
a ST CT 0SZ 56 = = (12103) = 08 == C6 = 06 CTE SL 9
= == L‘L SIvl 07 oats SE 097 erg is4 osoc =—-—«oOST. C6L OLIZ Sor ¢
= = = — SO = = 289 20L a SLE == = OSL SII €
(Z) (1) soul} JYSI1 ne)| ISI ye, snseyd voyser (Aydure) (s}0[9 ‘ou
ulvig 289189 -soJuy + ueads -0S8O pue svoIouUeq YoeUIOIg IOAIT MOU) p10d0y
sjeucIpy skouply ssun] JIVOH
“BOLE YINOG JO SLO 9Y} UO popueIs Jey} s[eos Inj oNOIeJURQNSs Jo (8) sasseU ULSIO
p alav
RECORDS OF THE SUBANTARCTIC FUR SEAL 719
oa 4 = ee
< on ‘ . we “
By Ae aoe eas a Lee od ea
OE se a od ‘ iz ne, :
eat as : wines Fx ~ le % HK, 5.
~A& haa mm Me Pe ad no ee ~ Uh. “ey
Fig. 2. An adult male subantarctic fur seal at Port Elizabeth (seal number 19).
6. An emaciated, subadult male which came ashore at Strandfontein in False
Bay in August 1975 was put to death 3 days later.
7. An adult male captured at Durban in May 1976 was taken to the Durban
Aquarium. As it had a deep laceration on the flank, it was put to death soon
after capture. No specimens were retained from this animal but it was seen by
one of the authors (GJBR).
8. Anemaciated, adult male was caught in Port Elizabeth harbour in June 1976
and taken to the Oceanarium where its mass was determined as 59 kg. After
recovering in isolation for 13 days, it was placed with six Cape fur seals in a
pool (30 m x 10 m), where it immediately fought with the largest male (mass
250 kg) and gained control of the only island. Over the following two months,
however, the Cape fur seal bull regained control of the pool and the island.
In July 1978 this seal was transferred to another aquarium where it died on
2 April 1979, 34 months after capture. Its age at death is calculated as 18 years
and, therefore, its age at capture as 15 years.
9. A subadult male that came ashore at Richards Bay in July 1977 was taken
to the Durban Aquarium. Its mass was estimated at 20 kg. It was released
41 months later on a secluded beach at Port Edward (31°03’S 30°14’E). Colour
80 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
transparencies of the seal provided by M. Smale (Oceanographic Research
Institute, Durban) indicated that the seal was not A. pusillus and was most
likely A. tropicalis.
10. In July 1977 an emaciated, adult male came ashore at Durban. It was
taken to the Aquarium where it was put to death the next day. Its mass was
estimated at 80 kg and its standard length measured 1,37 m.
11. In August 1977 an immature female came ashore at Port Elizabeth and was
taken to the Oceanarium. Like previous young subantarctic fur seals kept there
its high-pitched vocalizations, large prominent eyes and dense fur were notice-
ably different from those of resident Cape fur seals. Five and a half months after
capture it had a mass of 15,5 kg. It was still alive at the time of writing.
This seal and number 8 were in the Oceanarium together for 11 months.
However, they had no opportunities of breeding as they were kept in different
pools, number 11 with immature Cape fur seals, and number 8 with larger ones.
12. In September 1977 an emaciated, adult male came ashore at Sheffield
Beach. It was taken to the Durban Aquarium where its mass was estimated at
60 kg. It died 4 days later. One of the authors (GJBR) inspected the skin of this
seal.
13. In September 1977 an emaciated, adult male came ashore 2 km north-west
of the Cape of Good Hope where it died on the same day.
An unusual feature of the skull of this seal is the presence of seven post-
canines on each side of the upper dental array.
14. In October 1977 an adult male came ashore at Summerstrand, Port
Elizabeth and returned to the sea on the same day. It was identified from a news-
paper photograph (Eastern Province Herald, 27 October 1977).
15. In July 1978 an adult maie came ashore at Reunion Rocks near Durban.
It was taken to the Aquarium and put to death. It was recognized by the
Aquarium staff as being similar to previous subantarctic fur seals.
16. In August 1978 an adult male came ashore in the harbour at Port Elizabeth.
Monel metal tags (Hasco size 49L) were applied to its fore-flippers (numbers
B 4006 and 4007) and it was released near by at Cape Recife on the same day.
Its mass was 73 kg.
17. In August 1978 an emaciated, immature female came ashore at Durban.
It was taken to the Aquarium where it died 4 days later. Its flippers were injured
and its left eye was damaged. The width of each uterine cornu was 7 mm.
18. In August 1978 an emaciated, immature female came ashore at Three
Anchor Bay, Cape Town. It was blind in the left eye. Four days later it died in
captivity. Inspection of its skull revealed that the left supraorbital process had
been broken. Its uterine cornua were 4 mm (left) and 3 mm wide.
19. In September 1978 an emaciated, adult male came ashore at Summerstrand,
Port Elizabeth (Fig. 2). Tags were applied to its fore-flippers (numbers B 4008
RECORDS OF THE SUBANTARCTIC FUR SEAL 81
and 4009) and it was released the same day at Cape Recife. It was still there on
the next day, but had left 2 days later.
20. In March 1979 an emaciated, immature female came ashore at Strand-
fontein, False Bay, and was put to death 3 days later. It was lacerated on the
ventral surfaces of the left fore-flipper and on the left shoulder, and had three
bite marks in the centre of the dorsum. Its uterine cornua were both 4 mm wide.
21. In May 1979 a subadult male came ashore at Strandfontein, False Bay and
was put to death the same day. Rudimentary cusps on the anterior edge of its
postcanines were better developed than those of seal number 1.
22. In June 1979 an adult male in good condition was seen on a bank of the
Swartkops River 6 km from the sea. It was tagged on the fore-flippers (num-
bers B 4012 and 4013) before being released at Cape Recife.
STOMACH CONTENTS AND FEEDING
Stomachs of eight of the seals were examined. All died within 5 days of
stranding. One was fed finely ground fish, but no fish remains were found in its
stomach. Only one of them (from number 20) contained no food items. Squid
beaks were found in the remaining seven stomachs (Table 5). They have been
identified to family level by means of the features outlined by Clarke (1962).
Their designations below family level follow the names used by Ross (1979).
Other food items were also found in two of the stomachs: seal number 6
contained two unidentified crustacean fragments, and seal number 13 contained
1,8 g of sand and 6,8 g of partly digested gladii from squid.
The squid most commonly taken were members of the family Histio-
teuthidae and particularly the neritic genus Loligo. At New Amsterdam Island,
Paulian (1964) and Tollu (1974) noted that squid were very important food of
TABLE 5
Numbers of squid identified from beaks in stomachs of seven sub-
antarctic fur seals stranded on the coast of South Africa.
Seal record no.
Squid species
Loligo reynaudi 1 1 1 8 34
Sepia sp. (large) 1
Sepia sp. (small) 4
Ommastrephes caroli 1
Onychoteuthidae:
type 2? 1 1
Histioteuthidae:
type 22 2
type 8* 1 1 3 1
1 Following the designations used by Ross (1979).
82 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
A. tropicalis, whereas at Marion Island, Rand (1956) noted that fish were more
important than squid. No fish remains were found in the stomachs of
A. tropicalis on the South African coast.
Information is available on the food fed to five of the vagrants that were
kept in captivity.
Seal number 1, an immature animal, was fed the freshwater fish Sarotherodon
mossambicus. Seal number 2, an adult, was fed fish, mainly pilchard, Sardinops
ocellata.
Most information is available for seal number 8, an adult male. It was fed
fish, mainly Pagellus natalensis, maasbanker, Trachurus trachurus, and pilchard,
as well as squid, Loligo reynaudi. For the first 6 months it consumed an average
of 5,7 kg per day, and its body mass increased from 59 kg to over 90 kg. Thus
the feeding rate was between six and ten per cent of the body mass per day. Its
food intake during summer (from November to January) averaged 2,2 and
0,7 kg per day for 1976-7 and 1977-8, respectively. This was considerably lower
than for the remainder of the year at 3,6 kg per day (Table 6) and is possibly
associated with the breeding season when bulls fast while ashore holding
territories for an average of 45 days (Bester 1977). A similar decrease in the
food intake of captive northern elephant seals Mirounga angustirostris during
breeding and moulting seasons has been reported by Bryden (1969).
Seal number 9, a subadult, was fed hake, Merluccius spp., herring, Clupea
harengus, pilchard, and Pomadasys olivaceum. When captured its mass was
estimated at 20 kg; this had decreased to 15 kg when it was released 135 days
later. It ate on 80 days and consumed fish at the rate of 0,67 kg per day over its
total time in captivity. This is equivalent to between three and four per cent of
its body mass daily. Captive seals require six to ten per cent of their body mass
TABLE 6
Average daily mass (kg) of food consumed by
seal no. 8 (PEM 1521/67) during captivity at
Port Elizabeth Oceanarium from 16 June 1976
to 26 July 1978.
1976 1977 1978
January 2,6 0,8
February 2,6 1,6
March Dei 2,0
April 2,9 4,1
May 3,6 6,0
June 5,8 Sif 5,9
July 5,4 3,6 6,0
August 5,9 3,6
September 5,6 3,6
October 5,9 2,4
November 5,7 0,8
December 2 0,4
{
(
(
|
RECORDS OF THE SUBANTARCTIC FUR SEAL 83
per day for maintenance purposes according to Keyes (1968), although adult
harp seals, Pagophilus groenlandicus, have been maintained on a daily intake of
three to four per cent of their body mass (Ronald et al. 1975). In addition to
fish, it was provided with liquid paraffin (to prevent constipation), vitamin
supplements and antibiotics.
Seal number 11, an immature animal, was fed for 2. months on an artificial
milk formula based on that recommended by Marine Mammal Biological
Laboratory (1969). Later it took solid fish (pilchards and maasbankers). For the
7 months December 1977 to June 1978 its average daily food intake was 0,72 kg
per day (range 0 to 1,0). In mid-February 1978 its mass was 15,5 kg and it was
much larger than when captured. Thus its daily feeding rate of about five per
cent of its body mass was sufficient for its mass to increase.
PARASITES
External parasites were found only on seal number 13. In its pelage were
several hundred lice identified as Proechinophthirus sp. by J. A. Ledger (South
African Institute for Medical Research). The density of these parasites was
greatest on the seal’s head and neck, and decreased posteriorly.
Nasal passages and sinuses of two seals were examined for parasites. Two
mites were found in seal number 21 and twenty-seven mites in seal number 8.
Representatives were identified as Orthohalarachne diminuata by R. Domrow
of the Queensland Institute of Medical Research. Paulian (1964) found nasal
mites, O. chabaudi (= O. diminuata) in Arctocephalus tropicalis from New
Amsterdam Island.
The blubber of nine seals was inspected for cestode cysts, Phyllobothrium sp.,
and their number counted on one side of a mid-ventral incision from chin to
anus of seals number 6 (1 cyst), 8 (2 cysts), 13 (12 cysts), 17 (none), 18 (6 cysts),
20 (4 cysts) and 21 (1 cyst). Small numbers of cestode cysts were also seen in the
blubber of numbers 3 and 5. The cyst infestation of adult males (seals number 5,
8 and 13) was less than for A. pusillus bulls (PDS, pers. obs.).
The viscera of nine of the seals were examined for parasites. None was seen
in seals number 3, 6 and 21, nor in the internal organs examined in seal number 8
(heart, lungs, trachea and oesophagus). Seal number 5 contained nematodes,
Contracaecum osculatum, in the oesophagus (sixteen individuals) and in the
stomach (75 g), and a few acanthocephalans, Corynosoma australe, in the small
intestine. Seal number 13 contained a few unidentified cestodes in its small
intestine. Its stomach contained 7 nematodes: 6 Anisakis simplex and | tenta-
tively identified as C. osculatum. These parasites were identified by D. I. Gibson
of the British Museum (Natural History). One acanthocephalan was found in the
small intestine of the seal number 17. 3 nematodes were found in the oesophagus
and 4 in the stomach of seal number 18; its small intestine contained a small
number of unidentified cestodes. The stomach of seal number 20 contained
109 nematodes.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
84
“1000 > d xxx
100 > d xx
$00 > d x
ISB PassoIdxo s[oAo] SOUP IUTIS ,
‘(Sdd) B1ep poysyqnduy .
‘OZ pure gi “LI “9 “E Joquinu s[eag ,
*AJUO Sy}BUd| Joddiy 10} 6] pue cj snjd ‘{z pure ¢q ‘g ‘¢ Joquinu sjeag ;
Tvl‘ Is Jeddig pury yy3ue7T
L7O ¢ Joddig-e103 yysue7
667 0 ¢ Soho Je QOUSIOJFUINIIID
brlo ¢ Iva 0} nous
TIVO 2 rJoddiy-o10j Jo
UOT}AOSUI IOTI9}Ue 0} jNOUg
Sivas TIVINS
OEl‘O 9 Joddig pury yysue7T
6170 19 Joddiy-o103 yi3ueT
6£7 0 v Soko ye 9OUSIOJUINIIID
L7V0 v Ike 0} nous
(464) 4 Jaddig-a103 Jo
UONIOSUI IOII9}Ue 0} jNOUS
SHIVW JOUVT
UeoW u
97 xxaVLV €610-Vrl'0 1100 ILT‘0 €7 S910-61T 0 8100
97 x€S°T $87 0-SIZ‘0 610°0 €Sc0 €7 4970-0610 L700
€7 L830 LVvE0-€97°0 8100 ZOEO OY 80€0-£87 0 0100
4 x9LT 8LI0-L71°0 S100 £910 GE PST‘0-8E1 0 900°0
ST «408°C 8L70-10r'0 L100 LEv‘0 6 Ovr‘0-€8£°0 €7Z0°0
67 xe S ZOLO-TEL‘0 L00°0 LvV‘0 ST Orl‘0-V7Z1 0 900°0
67 ¥#S € 9570-9170 0100 LETO 4 6€7 0-L61‘0 S100
LT vr 887 °0-E77'0 9100 7ST 0 c7 SS7 0-917 0 L100
EG cer Srl O-LIT‘O L00°0 TET‘O ce TI O-STT0 9710
ize Sel 8970-6070 S100 eer 6 6rr'0-£07'0 1z0°0
wopeel} UONeIASp UOI}eIAOp
jo yt osUPy piepuris ues U QsULY piepuris
$20139q
eSmpisnd “y
sypoidod “fy
“BOLIFY YINOG JO JSVOD dy} UO PapULIs ey} S[ves INJ O1O1ejUeQns
pue sjeas inj ade usemjoq (y)SUS] plepue}s Jo UONIOdo1d & se pessoidxe) s}USWOINSeeU JO uosiiedui0d
L atave
RECORDS OF THE SUBANTARCTIC FUR SEAL 85
Paulian (1964) found cestode cysts in the blubber of 11 of the 13 Arcto-
cephalus tropicalis he examined at New Amsterdam. Of the above-mentioned
parasites, he found only Contracaecum ogmorhini (= C. osculatum) in the
stomach. In addition, he observed Terranova (= Porrocaecum) decipiens in
stomachs.
The nematode Anisakis simplex and the acanthocephalan Corynosoma
australe are not listed as parasites of A. tropicalis in the comprehensive checklist
of Dailey & Brownell (1972).
EXTERNAL BODY MEASUREMENTS
An attempt has been made to distinguish between Arctocephalus tropicalis
and A. pusillus by external body measurements, so that less reliance is placed on
body colour for identifying vagrants of the former in South Africa. Five
measurements concerning the flippers and the head, expressed as proportions of
the standard body length, were compared (Table 7). Two size groups were
considered, following the availability of A. tropicalis vagrants, namely: large
males of standard length 129-165 cm, and small animals of both sexes of standard
length 85-100 cm. The A. pusillus used for the comparisons were collected at sea
between March 1977 and March 1979.
For both the large males and the small seals fore- and hind flippers are
proportionally longer in A. pusillus. Furthermore, among the small seals, the
fore-flippers are attached to the body at a more posterior position in A. pusillus
than in A. tropicalis and the head is longer. However, these measurements are of
limited value in distinguishing vagrant A. tropicalis from A. pusillus because of
overlap in their ranges.
Condy (1978) pointed out that at Marion Island flippers of A. tropicalis are
short and broad while those of A. gazella are distinctly longer. Payne (1979a)
graphed anterior lengths of flippers and tabulated mean standard lengths of
A. gazella at South Georgia from birth to 11 years of age. The fore-flipper length
(expressed as a proportion of standard length) ranged from 0,28 to 0,33. This is
considerably larger than (and does not overlap with) that of the small sample of
eleven vagrant A. tropicalis with range 0,19 to 0,26 (see Table 7). The hind
flipper length of A. gazella at South Georgia ranged from 0,22 to 0,28, which is
also larger than that of the vagrant A. tropicalis (with range 0,12 to 0,16). These
comparisons, therefore, support Condy’s statement that flippers of A. tropicalis
are shorter than those of A. gazella.
DISCUSSION
The occurrence of A. tropicalis in South Africa is decidedly seasonal, with
19 of the 22 records occurring from May through September, i.e. predominantly
in the winter and early spring. At Gough Island (Bester 1977) and Marion Island
(Condy 1978) the number of seals ashore increased during September and
86 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
October prior to the breeding season and then declined during April and May.
Thus the months when A. tropicalis most commonly occurs in South Africa
coincide with the period when they are scarce on Gough and Marion Islands.
Records of crabeater seals, Lobodon carcinophagus, and southern elephant seals,
Mirounga leonina, in South Africa are also seasonal, but occur mostly in the
summer months (Ross et al. 1978a; Ross 1969; Best 1971).
Records of A. tropicalis ashore have increased from 6 in the 10 years
between 1966 and 1975 (with no more than one per year) to 2 in 1976, 6 in 1977
and 5 in 1978. This increase most likely reflects the increased awareness of
marine mammals by the public in recent years and follows the establishment of
facilities for displaying them in Port Elizabeth and Durban. It may also be
related to population increases at breeding islands (Condy 1978).
7 of the 22 A. tropicalis hauled out on the coast of Natal, 9 in the vicinity of
Port Elizabeth and 6 near Cape Town. The areas in which these records are
grouped occur near interested biologists, which suggests that animals elsewhere
go unrecognized or unrecorded. A similar phenomenon has been noted for
crabeater seals on the South African coast (Ross et al. 1978a) and is also
apparent for records of elephant seals (Ross 1969; Best 1971) and rockhopper
penguins, Eudyptes chrysocome (Cooper et al. 1978). The distribution of
A. tropicalis records shows a greater concentration on the eastern coast than for
the other vagrant seal species. Since fur seals in general are rare east of Port
Elizabeth, the presence of a seal there would attract more attention than one on
the west coast where A. pusillus is common.
The ages of twelve of the vagrant seals can be deduced from information in
Table 2. The number of dentinal layers in the canine teeth indicates that 5 of
them (all males) were older than 10 years and one was 6 years of age. The
number of external ridges indicates that 6 of them (5 females and 1 male) were
younger than 5 years.
The last group seem small for their estimated age of 2 to 44 years. The
average mass and standard length of four of the females (omitting number |
which was extraordinarily small) was 8,5 kg and 86,8 cm, and that of the single
male was 8,0 kg and 94 cm. According to Tollu (1974), at age 10 months females
at New Amsterdam Island have an average mass of 14,4 kg and length of
85,8 cm, and males have averages of 18,0 kg and 92,7 cm, respectively. The mass
of these vagrants cannot be compared with that of seals from a colony because
they were emaciated. However, as they appear to be only slightly longer on
average than 10-month-old seals, they were either well below average size for
their age or their age estimates were inflated.
While handling the canine teeth of the six young seals it was noticed that
that of the male (number 6) was considerably larger in cross-section than those
of the five females. This suggests that there is a sexual dimorphism for size of
canine teeth in A. tropicalis (at least in juveniles) similar to that described for
northern elephant seals by Briggs & Morejohn (1975).
Palate width of the 12 vagrants measured ranged from 10,2 to 13,6 per cent
RECORDS OF THE SUBANTARCTIC FUR SEAL 87
of the skull condylobasal length. This is well within the range proposed by King
(1959) for A. tropicalis. Furthermore, none of the skulls had particularly
reduced postcanine teeth, supporting the conclusion that they were A. tropicalis.
Black crests were visible on the heads of 5 males aged 10 years or more
(numbers 2, 5, 8, 10 and 13), and on another 4 males judged to be adult on
account of their length (numbers 15 and 19) or mass (numbers 12 and 16). On
the other hand, crests could not be seen on 3 of the males. 2 of these (numbers 6
and 21) were judged to be 2 and 6 years old, respectively, and the third
(number 9), with a mass of 20 kg, was judged to be a subadult. However, small
crests were visible on the tanned skins of seals numbers 6 and 21. Thus it seems
that crest development in the male occurs between 6 and 10 years of age, but that
rudimentary crests (not usually visible in the dead, intact animal) may be present
in younger males.
The uterine cornua of three seals were measured (numbers 17, 18 and 20).
The maximum width was 7 mm, indicating that they were not pregnant. The age
of these seals was estimated at less than 4 years.
Of the 22 vagrants, 13 (59 per cent) were adult males and 3 (14 per cent)
were subadult males. Because adult females nurse their pups for 10 to 11 months
(Tollu 1974; Bester 1977) when they visit the colonies regularly, it is not
surprising that most of the vagrants were males.
The strong, musk-like odour noted for seal number 1 at the Port Elizabeth
Oceanarium was also noted by GJBR when handling other subantarctic fur seals
at Port Elizabeth (numbers 2, 3, 8, 11, 14, 16, 19 and 22), and was noticeably
different from the odour of Cape fur seals.
The source of these seals is unknown. The largest population of this species
occurs at Gough Island (Bester 1977), 3 000 km west-south-west of Cape Town.
This is a likely source of emigrants as its population is expanding rapidly.
Vagrants from there would be assisted by the West Wind Drift until they
reached the complex system of currents in the vicinity of the Cape Peninsula.
A closer breeding area is the Prince Edward Islands, 1 800 km south-east of
Port Elizabeth, where the population size is much smaller (Condy 1978).
To move north from there seals must first cross the West Wind Drift, which
flows between north-east and north in that vicinity (Hydrographic Department
1961). They could then enter the northerly flowing Agulhas Return Current and
reach the Natal coast in the Agulhas Current (Harris 1970). Such current-
assisted access between the Prince Edward Islands and the east coast of South
Africa has been suggested by Ross et al. (19786) for a macaroni penguin,
E. chrysolophus.
A local origin for the seals (from an undetected colony) is discounted
because of the marked seasonality of the records, which coincides with an
off-shore movement at their breeding islands. This conclusion is reinforced by
the fact that about half of the vagrants were in an emaciated condition when
they were reported. 5 of them died and 7 had to be killed within 4 days. 4 of these
12 were injured or damaged when caught. 5 of the vagrants were kept in captivity
88 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
for periods of between 44} and 34 months, and 1 of these is still alive. 6 of the
seals returned to the sea (one of them after 4$ months in captivity).
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We are grateful to the following for assistance with the collection of
specimens: Drs E. A. Fernhead, M. Smale and J. Bass of the Oceanographic
Research Institute, Durban; Mr H. C. V. Bell of the Cape of Good Hope
Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals; Mr J. Seal of the Snake and
Animal Park, Hartebeespoort; the South African National Foundation for the
Conservation of Coastal Birds; Mr G. Wright and Mr N. Clark of the Cape of
Good Hope Nature Reserve. We thank the Directors of the Port Elizabeth and
South African Museums and of the Oceanographic Research Institute for per-
mission to examine and publish data on specimens in their collections. Thanks
are also extended to Dr D. I. Gibson, Dr R. Domrow and Dr J. A. Ledger for
identifying parasites, and to Dr P. B. Best of the Sea Fisheries Branch and Dr
P. R. Condy of the Mammal Research Institute, University of Pretoria, for
comments on the manuscript.
REFERENCES
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MAMMALOGISTS 1967. Standard measurements of seals. J. Mammal. 48:
459-462.
Best, P. B. 1971. Stalked barnacles Conchoderma auritum on an elephant seal: occurrence of
elephant seals on South African coast. Zool. afr. 6: 181-185.
Bester, M. N. 1977. Habitat selection, seasonal population changes, and behaviour of the
Amsterdam Island fur seal Arctocephalus tropicalis on Gough Island. Unpublished
D.Sc. thesis, University of Pretoria, Pretoria.
Bonner, W. N. 1968. The fur seal of South Georgia. Br. Antarct. Surv. Sci. Repts 56: 1-81.
Briccs, K. & MOREJOHN, G. V. 1975. Sexual dimorphism in the mandibles and canine teeth
of the northern elephant seal. J. Mammal. 56: 224-231.
BrRYDEN, M. M. 1969. Growth of the southern elephant seal, Mirounga leonina (Linn.).
Growth 33: 69-82.
CASTELLO, H. P. & Pinepo, M. C. 1977. Arctocephalus tropicalis, first record for Rio Grande
do Sul coast (Pinnipedia, Otariidae). Atlantica, Rio Grande 2: 111-119.
CLARKE, M. R. 1962. The identification of cephalopod ‘beaks’ and the relationship between
beak size and total body weight. Bull. Brit. Mus. (nat. Hist.), Zool. 8: 419-480.
Conpy, P. R. 1978. Distribution, abundance, and annual cycle of fur seals (Arctocephalus spp.)
on the Prince Edward Islands. Sth. Afr. J. Wildl. Res. 8: 159-168.
Cooper, J., Ross, G. J. B. & SHAUGHNESSY, P. D. 1978. Seasonal and spatial distribution of
rockhopper penguins ashore in South Africa. Ostrich 49: 40-44.
CsorDAS, S. E. 1962. The Kerguelen fur seal on Macquarie Island. Vict. Nat. 79: 226-229.
DaiLey, M. D. & BROWNELL, R. L. Jr. 1972. A checklist of marine mammal parasites. In:
RipGway, S. H. ed. Mammals of the sea: biology and medicine: 528-589. Springfield,
Illinois: Thomas.
Harris, T. F. W. 1970. Features of the surface currents in the south west Indian Ocean.
SANCOR symposium: Oceanography in South Africa, Durban, August 1970. Paper C3.
HYDROGRAPHIC DEPARTMENT 1961. The Antarctic pilot. 3rd ed. London: Her Majesty’s
Stationery Office.
Keyes, M. C. 1968. The nutrition of pinnipeds. Jn; HARRISON, R. J., HUBBARD, R. C.,
PETERSON, R. S., Rice, C. E. & SCHUSTERMAN, R. J. eds. The behavior and physiology of
pinnipeds: 359-395. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts.
—————
RECORDS OF THE SUBANTARCTIC FUR SEAL 89
Kina, J. E. 1959. The northern and southern populations of Arctocephalus gazella. Mammalia
23: 19-40.
MARINE MAMMAL BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY 1969. Fur seal investigations, 1966. U.S. Fish
Wildl. Serv. Spec. Sci. Rep. Fish. 584: 1-123.
NEL, J. A. J. 1971. Order Pinnipedia. Jn: MEESTER, J. & SETZER, H. W. eds. The mammals of
Africa: an identification manual. Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Institution Press.
PAULIAN, P. 1964. Contribution a l’étude de l’otarie de Vile Amsterdam. Mammalia 28;
Supp! 1: 3-146.
PAYNE, M. R. 1978. Population size and age determination in the Antarctic fur seal Arcto-
cephalus gazella. Mammal. Rey. 8: 67-73.
Payne, M. R. 1979a. Growth in the Antarctic fur seal Arctocephalus gazella. J. Zool., (Lond.)
187: 1-20.
Payne, M. R. 19795. Fur seals Arctocephalus tropicalis and A. gazella crossing the Antarctic
Convergence at South Georgia. Mammalia 43: 93-98.
RAnpb, R. W. 1956. Notes on the Marion Island fur seal. Proc. zool. Soc., Lond. 126: 65-82.
REPENNING, C. A., PETERSON, R. S. & Huss, C. L. 1971. Contributions to the systematics of
the southern fur seals, with particular reference to the Juan Fernandez and Guadalupe
species. In: BuRT, W. H. ed. Antarctic Pinnipedia. Antarctic Research Series 18: 1-34.
Washington, D.C.: American Geophysical Union.
Rice, D. W. 1977. A list of the marine mammals of the world. NOAA Technical Report
NMEFS SSRF 711: 1-15.
RONALD, K., UTHE, J. F. & FREEMAN, H. 1975. Effects of methyl mercury on the harp seal.
ICES CM 1975/N:9 15 pp. (mimeo).
Ross, G. J. B. 1969. The southern elephant seal, Mirounga leonina, on South African coasts.
Ann. Cape Prov. Mus. (nat. Hist.) 6: 137-139.
Ross, G. J. B. 1979. The smaller cetaceans of the south east coast of southern Africa.
Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, University of Port Elizabeth, Port Elizabeth.
Ross, G. J. B., SHAUGHNESSY, P. D. & Best, P. B. 1978a. New records of crabeater seals
(Lobodon carcinophagus) from South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 75: 153-158.
Ross, G. J. B., VAN DER Est, R. & De Vituiers, A. F. 1978b. First record of the macaroni
penguin in South Africa. Ostrich 49: 47.
SCHEFFER, V. B. 1950. Growth layers on the teeth of Pinnipedia as an indication of age.
Science 112: 309-311.
SHAUGHNESSY, P. D. 1980. The status of the Amsterdam Island fur seal. In: Mammals in the seas.
FAO Fisheries Series 5(3).
ToLLu, B. 1974. L’otarie de l’ile Amsterdam Arctocephalus tropicalis tropicalis (Gray 1872).
Thése de doctorat de troisiéme cycle, |’Université Paris— VII, Paris.
3)
=
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51). ‘
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum fegistration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text _
e.g. ‘... the Figure depicting C. namacolus...’; ‘. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
PETER D. SHAUGHNESSY
&
GRAHAM J. B. ROSS
»
RECORDS OF THE SUBANTARCTIC FUR SEAL
(ARCTOCEPHALUS TROPICALIS) FROM
SOUTH AFRICA WITH NOTES ON ITS BIOLOGY
AND SOME OBSERVATIONS OF
CAPTIVE ANIMALS
tH
_ VOLUME 82 PART 3 JUNE 1980 ISSN 0303-2515
| CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction .
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for. illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are. not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
“Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes ...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
“As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
pagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references,
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FiscHer, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHer, P.-H., DuvaL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 82 Band
June 1980 Junie
Part 3 Deel
VATE: TERTIARY SEALS
OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
By
C. DE MUIZON
&
Q. B. HENDEY
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued jn parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
heskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 21-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4S, 8, t.—p.i.), 51-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.—p.i.), 711-4), 8, 91-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 311-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 96 3
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg,
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
By
C. DE MUIZON
Institut de Paléontologie, Paris
&
Q. B. HENDEY
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 15 figures and 2 tables)
LMS. accepted 7 February 1980]
ABSTRACT
A lectotype is designated for Prionodelphis rovereti Frenguelli, 1922 from Argentina and
it is assigned to the Cetacea, while the monachine seal ‘Prionodelphis’ capensis Hendey &
Repenning, 1972, from South Africa is assigned to the new genus, Homiphoca. A nearly
complete skull and mandible is designated as a paratype of H. capensis and this, and other,
additional material is described. H. capensis is morphologically intermediate between living
monk seals of the genus Monachus (Phocidae, Monachinae, Monachini) and the seals of
Antarctica (Phocidae, Monachinae, Lobodontini). It is here assigned to the latter group and,
contrary to earlier opinion, is suggested to be more closely related to the crabeater, Lobodon
carcinophagus, than any other living seal.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction : ; P z : : : 91
South Atlantic late Tertiary Phocidae . é 92
The Argentinian material , : : 92
The South African species : : : 94
Discussion . : ; ; ; : ‘ : 120
Summary/Résumé . : : : : DS:
Acknowledgements . : : ; : 2 126
References . ‘ E ‘ ¢ ‘ , ~. 126
INTRODUCTION
The true seals (family Phocidae), which are today widely distributed in the
oceans of the world, have a very poor fossil record, and there are many
uncertainties concerning their origin, evolution and dispersal (Ray 1976a).
Living Phocidae are generally divided into two subfamilies, the Phocinae
and the Monachinae. The Phocinae are a diverse group comprised of the seals
of northern middle and high latitudes. They include such species as the common
or harbour seal (Phoca vitulina), the ringed seal (Pusa hispida) and the grey
seal (Halichoerus grypus). The Monachinae are the subfamily to which the
fossil seals discussed in this paper belong, and they are here divided into
three groups. The first is the Monachini, which includes the monk seals of the
Mediterranean (Monachus monachus), the Caribbean (M. tropicalis), and
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 82 (3), 1980: 91-128, 15 figs, 2 tables.
91
92 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Hawaii (M. schauinslandi) (King 1956). The second group is the Lobodontini,
which comprises the seals of Antarctica, namely, the crabeater (Lobodon
carcinophagus), leopard (Hydrurga leptonyx), Weddell (Leptonychotes weddelli),
and Ross seals (Ommatophoca rossi) (Scheffer 1958). Thirdly, there are the
elephant seals (Mirounga leonina, M. angustirostris), whose relationships to other
monachines are discussed elsewhere (De Muizon 1979).
The most significant fossil Phocidae are from Miocene/Pliocene deposits in
five widely separated regions. Important material has been found in the
Paratethyan region, which extends from Austria to the southern Soviet Union.
It has been discussed by several authors since first described by Eichwald (1853),
and Grigorescu (1976) has commenced a much-needed revision. Secondly, the
Antwerp Basin in Belgium has yielded a diverse assemblage of skeletal elements
described by Van Beneden (1877). This material was recently revised by Ray
(1976a, in press), and has also been studied by the senior author. The Calvert
and Yorktown Formations in eastern North America have been the source of a
wealth of material studied by Ray (1976a, in press).
The remaining two regions are in the Southern hemisphere. The Pisco
Formation on the southern coast of Peru is the source of the most complete late
Tertiary phocids ever discovered. This material represents five new species
belonging to four new genera, and has been studied by the senior author
(De Muizon 1979). The last region is the south-western coast of South Africa,
with almost all the known material having come from a single locality, namely,
‘E’ Quarry at Langebaanweg near Cape Town. The ‘E’ Quarry material
represents a single species, which is now the best represented fossil phocid in the
world (Hendey & Repenning 1972; Hendey 1976).
Less significant material has been discovered elsewhere, including
Argentina. The Argentinian material, which consists of a few isolated teeth and
a mandible fragment, is identified as Prionodelphis rovereti (Frenguelli 1922;
Cabrera 1926). It was to the genus Prionodelphis that the South African species
(P. capensis) was referred.
It is the purpose of this paper to re-examine the status of the South African
and Argentinian material.
SOUTH ATLANTIC LATE TERTIARY PHOCIDAE
THE ARGENTINIAN MATERIAL
Frenguelli (1922) based the identification of the new genus and species,
Prionodelphis rovereti, from the late Miocene/early Pliocene of Argentina on two
isolated teeth, one of which is obviously that of a delphinoid cetacean, while the
other is a cheek tooth of a monachine seal. These two teeth are syntypes and the
first illustrated specimen, the cetacean tooth (Frenguelli 1922: 492, fig. 1a), is
here designated the lectotype of the species. P. rovereti is thus a cetacean, which
is the group to which Frenguelli believed both teeth belonged, although it should
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN 93
perhaps be regarded as a nomen vanum (Simpson 1945: 27), since a single tooth
is an inadequate basis on which to identify a cetacean. The monachine tooth
(Frenguelli 1922: 492, fig. 1b-c) is also of low diagnostic value and is here
informally identified as Monachinae A.
In the second part of his paper Frenguelli (1922) assigned to P. rovereti
three teeth which had previously been described and figured by Ameghino (1889)
as those of a ‘creodont’, Apera sanguinaria. This species was identified by
Ameghino (1886) on the basis of two teeth previously identified by Burmeister
(1885) as ‘Ferae’ close to the ‘felid’, Eutemnodus americanus. These two teeth
are not included amongst the three figured by Ameghino (1889) and Frenguelli
(1922), which undoubtedly belong to a monachine, although not necessarily
Monachinae A. They cannot be referred to either Eutemnodus or Apera. The
latter was listed as a junior synonym of the ‘creodont’ Eutemnodus by Trouessart
(1898), a view supported by Marshall (1978), although he included Eutemnodus
in the Borhyaenidae. The three additional teeth referred to P. rovereti by
Frenguelli (1922) are here identified as Monachinae B.
Cabrera (1926) realized that the P. rovereti hypodigm included phocid
material, and noted the existence of a phocid mandible with one tooth which
came from the same deposits as the two teeth described in the first part of
Frenguelli’s (1922) paper. Although Frenguelli (1926) doubted that P. rovereti
was a seal, and although the matter was never clarified by the designation of a
lectotype, this species became established in later literature as a phocid
(e.g. Kraglievich 1934; Kellogg 1942; King 1964).
Hendey & Repenning (1972: 92) referred the far superior material from
Langebaanweg, South Africa, to Prionodelphis, with the identification being
justified by the following statements: ‘In assigning the Langebaanweg phocid
to the genus Prionodelphis, it is recognized that reassessment may be required
when more material of P. rovereti is found. Generic identity is based upon the
remarkable similarity of the few fragments from Argentina to the South African
material and on the belief that the lack of greater knowledge is a stronger
argument against the establishment of a new genus than it is against tentative
assignment to the same genus.’
It is the three teeth of the Argentinian Monachinae B which are most like
their counterparts in the South African species. This applies particularly to the
M! (Frenguelli 1922: 497, fig. 2A), which resembles that of ‘Prionodelphis’
capensis in having a strongly recurved and sharp-pointed principal cusp,
although it is distinct in having a small, anterior accessory cusp closer to the
apex of the principal cusp than any of the South African specimens. The two
lower cheek teeth (Frenguelli 1922: 497, figs 2B-C) resemble their ‘P.’ capensis
homologues in being relatively narrow and with an inflation of the cingulum
posterolingually. They are, however, distinct in having less prominent accessory
cusps which are situated closer to the apices of the principal cusps.
Judging from a cast of the Monachinae A tooth, probably a P*, it differs
from its counterparts in ‘P.’ capensis by being broader, and in having the lingual
94 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
margin semicircular in occlusal view, rather than having a posterolingual
expansion of the cingulum. In both these respects the Argentinian tooth is
similar to the P* of Monachus monachus. In addition, the teeth of Monachinae A
and M. monachus are relatively high crowned, more so than those of ‘P.’ capensis
and, apparently, Monachinae B.
The situation in respect of material previously assigned to Prionodelphis
rovereti may be summarized as follows:
1. Prionodelphis rovereti is a cetacean, with the first figured specimen (Frenguelli
1922: 492, fig. 1a) here designated as a lectotype.
2. The second tooth figured by Frenguelli (1922: 492, fig. 1b-c) belongs to a
monachine, here designated Monachinae A. It apparently represents a species
closer to Monachus monachus than any other monachine. It is not conspecific,
and may not even be congeneric with ‘Prionodelphis’ capensis.
3. The three teeth of ‘Apera sanguinaria’ described and figured by Ameghino
(1889) and referred to P. rovereti by Frenguelli (1922: 497, fig. 2) also represent
a monachine, which is here designated Monachinae B, since it is not necessarily
conspecific, or even congeneric, with Monachinae A. Monachinae B is, however,
close to ‘P.” capensis, and both probably represent the same genus.
It follows that the South African seal hitherto referred to Prionodelphis
must now be assigned to a new genus.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN SPECIES
Family Phocidae
Subfamily Monachinae
Tribe Lobodontini
Diagnosis
Monachinae characterized by the simultaneous presence of the following
two features:
1. The tympanic bulla covers the petrosal posteriorly.
2. A mastoid lip overlaps the posterior wall of the bulla.
Homiphoca gen. nov.
Type species
Prionodelphis capensis Hendey & Repenning, 1972.
Amended diagnosis
A monachine phocid with a skull superficially similar to that of Monachus.
It differs from Monachus in having a relatively large rostrum, which is wide
posteriorly and narrow anteriorly. As in Monachus, but unlike Lobodontini, the
premaxillae terminate against the nasals, where they are anteroposteriorly
25)
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
‘(edkyered) 9L61E1T-Od-WVS ‘[[D4S sisuadvo vooYydUoFT JO MOIA [SIO “[ “SIT
nn iar
1
i
1 0
Wil
1
mn
os
he
7
| I ln
sittin
96 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
elongated. The premaxillae have prominent tuberosities anteriorly. The
ascending process of the maxilla is relatively high as in Lobodontini and, viewed
anteriorly, is not strongly recurved medially as in Monachus. Dental formula:
2.1.4.1/2.1.4.1. The premolars are morphologically similar to those of Monachus,
and unlike those of Lobodontini. They differ from those of Monachus in being
lower crowned, relatively narrower and in having a pronounced posterolingual
expansion of the cingulum. The accessory cusps on the premolars are small but
distinct, while the M? usually lacks such cusps and is distinct in having a strongly
recurved and sharp, pointed principal cusp. The M, is the largest of the cheek
teeth, with the principal cusp slanted posteriorly, and often with a small
accessory cusp low on the long anterior keel of the principal cusp. The inter-
orbital region is broad and tapers posteriorly as in Lobodon, but unlike all other
monachines. In the auditory region the tympanic bulla covers the petrosal, while
the mastoid forms a lip overlapping the posterior border of the bulla.
The humerus has an entepicondylar foramen, and the tibia and fibula are
fused proximally.
Etymology
From ‘/homi’ and ‘phoca’, which are respectively the Hottentot and Greek
words for ‘seal’. The Hottentots inhabited the Langebaanweg area when
Europeans first settled at the Cape of Good Hope; “/homi’ refers to Arcto-
cephalus pusillus, a member of the family Otariidae (Budack 1977).
Homiphoca capensis (Hendey & Repenning, 1972)
Holotype
SAM-PQ-L15695—an incomplete and partly restored skull with left C and P*,
and right P®.
Paratype
SAM-PQ-L31976—an almost complete skull and mandible, partly restored,
lacking right P?, P4, lower incisors, C, P, and P;, and left lower teeth except
for the lateral incisor and part of P; (Table 1, Figs 1-4).
Referred material
That described by Hendey & Repenning (1972) and many other specimens
in the South African Museum, including:
SAM-PQ-L30080—an almost complete skull, partly restored, with parts of
leit PB toy P=
SAM-PQ-L30568—an almost complete skull and right hemimandible, partly
restored, with right C, P!, P? and Mj, and left P! and P®
SAM-PQ-L32101—an almost complete skull and mandible, partly restored,
lacking left upper lateral incisor, P* and M}, right P, and P,, and left lower
incisors, P,, P, and M, (Fig. 5)
ii
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
*(edAjered) 9/61€1-Od-NVS ‘IIMS sisuadpa vr0YdnUoPT JO AMAIA [eIO}VeT
ie We lee Sie ae eee a a ae a ee et
nh i culiilt mu Hn ati il
z
1
|
WI
ll
|
|
il
|
i
i
|
|
|
t ‘SIF
8
HUI IN
98 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SAM-PQ-L32415—an almost complete skull and left hemimandible, partly
restored, with right upper incisors and P?, left P{ and P?, and parts of
left P,, P3, P, and M,
SAM-PQ-L31278—right hemimandible, partly restored, with P, to M, (Fig. 6)
SAM-PQ-L50304 and others—isolated cheek teeth (Figs 7, 8)
SAM-PQ-L40969—left humerus (Fig. 9)
SAM-PQ-L31957—right ulna lacking distal end (Fig. 10)
SAM-PQ-L40846—right radius (Fig. 11)
SAM-PQ-L30236, L31369—incomplete left innominates (Fig. 12)
SAM-PQ-L30118, L45519—right femora (Fig. 13)
SAM-PQ-L30424—left tibia and fibula, with latter lacking distal epiphysis
(Fig. 14)
Diagnosis
As for genus.
Locality and horizon
The Varswater Formation, ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg, Cape Province.
The material described by Hendey & Repenning (1972) and L40846 and
L40969 are from bed 3aS of the Pelletal Phosphorite Member, whilst most
additional material, including others listed above, are from bed 3aN of the same
member. Some material is also known from the Gravel and Quartzose Sand
Members. (References: Hendey 1976; Dingle et al. 1979; Hendey 1980.)
Age
Langebaanian (latest Miocene/early Pliocene), between 3,5 and 7 Ma.
(References: Hendey 1974, 1976, 1978a.)
Description
The descriptions which follow are confined to a few selected specimens,
mostly collected since 1975, and are intended to supplement the descriptions in
Hendey & Repenning (1972). Most of the material is from bed 3aN of the
Pelletal Phosphorite Member and is, therefore, somewhat younger than that
previously described, which is from bed 3aS. As with some other species common
to these two horizons, there are minor morphological and possibly size
differences between bed 3aS and bed 3aN representatives (Hendey 19785, 1980).
They are, however, too slight to warrant formal nomenclatural recognition, and
simply reflect temporal stages of single species. This matter, as well as a detailed
account of all the Homiphoca capensis material now available, will be the
subjects of future studies.
The skull
Except where otherwise stated the following description is based on the
paratype, L31976. This specimen is essentially similar in all observable respects
to others from bed 3aN.
99
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
|
*(edAyered) 9/61€T-Od-WYVS ‘IIMS Sisuadvo pooydiuoFy JO MIA [eIUSA *¢ “BLT
ati wn urn i | li tulad
i
100 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The skull of Homiphoca is distinct from those of all living Phocidae,
although it is unmistakably monachine and exhibits a combination of characters
found in Monachini (Monachus) and Lobodontini (Lobodon, Hydrurga,
Leptonychotes, Ommatophoca). Superficially it resembles the skulls of Monachus
and Lobodon more than any other monachines.
There are prominent anterior tuberosities on the premaxillae, and in lateral
view the anterior alveolar margin of the premaxillae recedes sharply postero-
ventrally from the apices of the tuberosities towards the crowns of the incisors
and canines. The crowns of these teeth are themselves directed posteroventrally.
A similar situation was observed during this study amongst living monachines
only in M. schauinslandi, although it is much less obvious in this species. In
addition, the premaxillary tuberosities of M. schauinslandi are more widely
separated than in Homiphoca.
The premaxilla/maxilla suture is visible along its entire length in lateral
view, aS in phocines, but unlike the monachines, excluding M. tropicalis, in
which the central part of the premaxillary ascending ramus is within the nasal
aperture. In the phocines the laterally visible part of the ascending ramus is of
constant width, but in Homiphoca that part in contact with the nasals is antero-
posteriorly elongated. The phocine condition is similar to that in all other
carnivores and is apparently the primitive one. Contact between the premaxillae
and nasals is characteristic of Monachus but not Lobodontini.
Homiphoca has two pairs of upper incisors, which is typical of monachines,
but these teeth are small compared with those of living species. They consist of a
principal cusp anteriorly, with an inflated posterior cingulum which is almost in
the form of an accessory cusp. The situation is similar in M. monachus, but not
in M. schauinslandi and living Lobodontini. The lateral incisors are slightly
larger than the medial ones, but the relative size difference is less than in other
monachines, especially the Lobodontini, in which the lateral incisors (and
canines) are enlarged, a specialization for opening breathing holes in sea ice.
The Homiphoca incisors are likely to represent the primitive condition in
monachines.
The roots (and alveoli) of the lateral incisors are oval-shaped in horizontal
cross-section as in living Lobodontini, and unlike those of Monachus, which are
circular. In L31976 the incisors are in a straight line, as in M. tropicalis and
M. schauinslandi, but in other specimens, including the holotype, the incisor row
curves posteriorly, although not as markedly as in M. monachus and the
Lobodontini. In Lobodon, Leptonychotes and Ommatophoca the curvature is less
obvious because of the procumbence of the lateral incisors.
The nasal bones of Homiphoca are elongated as in M. tropicalis and
M. schauinslandi, and, judging from L30568 and L32101, are parallel-sided
anteriorly and sharply tapering posteriorly, terminating above the orbits. The
shape of the nasals in monachines is very variable, but of the Lobodontini those
of Hydrurga are perhaps most like Homiphoca, except that the tapering
commences further anteriorly. In Homiphoca the nasals are relatively wide
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN 101
Pa nig
itt
Il
il
hl
i
ee
Fig. 4. Lateral view of Homiphoca capensis hemimandible, SAM—PQ-L31976 (paratype).
anteriorly, this being related to the overall width of the snout in this genus (see
below). They are V-shaped anteriorly as in M. tropicalis, and the ethmoid
(osseous nasal septum) is exposed between the branches of the V, unlike the
situation in other monachines.
The ethmoid is a remarkably stout bone, and resembles those in
M. tropicalis, M. schauinslandi and the Lobodontini, although that of Lobodon
is distinct in being recessed within the nasal cavity. In Homiphoca the ethmoid
extends to the posterior end of the nasal cavity. Viewed anteriorly the nasal
aperture of Homiphoca is slightly dorsoventrally elongated, and in this respect
is intermediate between Monachus, in which the aperture is circular or wider
than it is high, and the Lobodontini, in which it is much higher than it is wide.
In Monachus the rostral region is more or less parallel-sided, but in
Homiphoca it is broader posteriorly. The anterior tapering is very marked and
the anterior part of the skull from the premaxillary tuberosities to the posterior
extremity of the jugals is almost V-shaped in dorsal view. In this respect it
differs from all living monachines. This distinctive shape is due largely to
inflation of the maxillae posterolaterally above the three most posterior pairs
of cheek teeth in L31976 and other bed 3aN specimens. This characteristic has
not been observed in living monachines, nor is it found in the H. capensis
holotype. It is evidently due to a greater development of the maxilloturbinals in
the bed 3aN population of Homiphoca. The Lobodontini are also characterized
by well-developed maxilloturbinals, but these are accommodated within the
dorsoventrally expanded nasal cavity, without obvious deformation of the
maxillae externally. The Phocinae also have well-developed maxilloturbinals and
some have a posterolateral expansion of the maxillae similar to the bed 3aN
102 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Homiphoca. The possible implications of this development in H. capensis will
be discussed later (see p. 123).
The ascending branch of the Homiphoca maxilla is high and wide, having a
lengthy contact with the nasals. Its anterior margin does not recede posteriorly
as markedly as in other monachines, especially Lobodon. It is, however, more or
less vertical and relatively high as in Lobodontini. By contrast, in Monachus the
ascending branch is low and, viewed anteriorly, is strongly recurved medially,
while in lateral view the snout is flattened anteriorly. These differences are
reflected in the shape of the nasal apertures, and are due to the greater develop-
ment of the turbinals in Lobodontini.
The pre-orbital process is relatively as prominent as that of Hydrurga. In
other monachines it is small or absent. The infraorbital foramen is oval-shaped
TABLE 1
Dimensions of Homiphoca capensis paratype, SAM—PQ-L31976.
Overall length . : 5 é : : : . 270,0
Zygomatic width auenae Woe EY eos, AO SIO)
Mastoid width . ; : 3 x : : . 136,0
Width at supra-orbital processes . : ; . 101,0
Minimum interorbital width . : 5 ‘ - 44,0
Width of premaxillae anteriorly : , . e ssi)
Length of nasals . : Se eae we NN LOSES
Maximum width of nasals , . 4 3 ee0)
Length of incisor row. : PA Mam eI ech on peo 28} 50)
Length of cheek tooth row Abe Paes Belts seal ee ae (S10)
Width of palate between P’’s . 3 z 4 S228
Width of palate between P’s . . . . . 35,3
Width of palate between M?’s . : F ‘ A GBT)
Overall length of mandible wo Be Net SB SO
Height of ascending ramus of mandible. . . 71,0
Lingual
Length Breadth crown
height
Lateral I Sh 7/ 4,4 6,4
Medial I 4,7 3,4 4,8
Cc 9,1 4,4 $2
Ps 8,9 5,9 6,6
Pp? Py) 6,8 7,0
Pp 12,5 6,5 6,6
ips — 6,5 7,2
M? 8,6 Sy9) 7,7
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN 103
Fig. 5. Dorsal, lateral and ventral views of Homiphoca capensis skull, SAM—PQ-L32101.
104 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
as in Lobodon and Hydrurga, but whereas in these genera the long axis is
directed dorsomedially, in Homiphoca it is directed dorsolaterally (Hendey &
Repenning 1972).
In L31976, and other bed 3aN specimens, the palate is concave anteriorly,
but becomes convex on either side of the midline posteriorly. This is also due to
expansion of the maxilloturbinal region of the nasal cavity. Unfortunately the
posterior part of the palate in the H. capensis holotype is lost and it is not known
if it lacked the expansion of this region, as it does the posterolateral expansion
of the maxilla. In all other monachines the palate is either concave or more or
less flat along its entire length. The same apparently applies in the case of
phocines.
The dental arch of Homiphoca is not straight-sided as in Lobodontini, but
diverges posteriorly from the P?’s, making the tooth-rows concave laterally as
in M. tropicalis, and, less so, in M. monachus and M. schauinslandi. Homiphoca
is like Leptonychotes in having a distinct diastema between P* and Mt}, but in
Homiphoca the gap between these teeth is largely filled by M, when the jaws are
closed, whereas in Leptonychotes the small M, comes into contact only with P?.
The diastema between C and P! is variably developed in Homiphoca. For
example, a small diastema is present in L31976 and L32101, but it is absent in
the holotype, L30080 and L30568.
The C of Homiphoca is a relatively small and low-crowned tooth, which is
circular in cross-section and with the crown recurved. Except perhaps for the
recurvature it probably represents the primitive condition in monachines.
In terms of their basic morphology the upper premolars of Homiphoca are
similar to their homologues in Monachus, and are very different from the
specialized teeth of Lobodontini. They are, however, more slender than the
premolars of Monachus. In addition, the P? to P* are expanded posterolingually
and thus taper anteriorly, whereas in Monachus the lingual margin is more or
less semicircular in occlusal view. The P* is Monachus-like, but as with the other
premolars it is lower crowned. The premolars have a prominent principal cusp,
and accessory cusps anteriorly and posteriorly, with P* to P* usually having a
second, cingular cusp posteriorly. There is no cingulum buccally, but a well-
developed one lingually. There is sometimes a small tubercle on the expanded
posterolingual part of the cingulum (Fig. 7B). In this respect Homiphoca
resembles Lobodon and Hydrurga, which may also have a small accessory cusp
in the same position. It is not known in other monachines.
The premolars tend to wear horizontal facets on the principal cusps, which
are later obliterated by sloping facets anteriorly. A similar sloping facet is
sometimes present posteriorly. The wear on the premolars, especially P? to P*,
indicates that these teeth had a crushing function like those of Monachus, but
unlike those of Lobodontini. The premolars of Homiphoca and Monachus
evidently represent the primitive and unspecialized condition in monachines.
There are two reasons for believing that these teeth are ‘primitive’. Their
crushing function suggests that molluscs and crustaceans formed part of the diet,
105,
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
“SLCIE
T-Od-WVS ‘o[qipueunutey sisuadvo vaoyduuopzy JO MIA [eINCT 9 “317
106 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
and such prey requires a lesser swimming ability on the part of predators than
fast-swimming fishes and planktonic invertebrates. Greater swimming ability is
obviously an advanced characteristic in phocids. Secondly, molluscs and larger
crustacea occur in the littoral environment, the likely habitat of primitive
phocids which had not yet adapted to a more pelagic way of life.
The M! of Homiphoca is distinguished from the premolars by having a
strongly recurved and sharp-pointed principal cusp, and in having accessory
cusps reduced or absent. A small accessory cusp is sometimes developed
anteriorly. This tooth is ovate in occlusal view.
As in other monachines the palatines of Homiphoca become fused to the
maxillae, and are well developed, reaching anteriorly to be in line with the M?’s.
The palatine foramen, through which the maxillary artery passes, is at the
contact between the palatine and maxilla, whereas in all living monachines it is
situated further anteriorly in the maxilla. In Homiphoca there is a groove for the
maxillary artery passing anteriorly from the palatine foramen close to the
lingual alveolar margin.
The intra-orbital part of the palatine is thick and the medial wall of the
orbit is almost complete, as in Hydrurga. In other living Lobodontini this wall
has large lacunae, which are reduced with age. This is apparently an advanced
condition. The posterior border of the palatines, that is, the lower openings of
the secondary choane, are oval in shape and resemble those in Lobodon and
Hydrurga, rather than those of Leptonychotes and Ommatophoca.
The pterygoids of L31976 are poorly preserved, but it is evident that the
pterygoid apophyses were small and that the lateral walls of the choane are
nearly vertical as in Hydrurga.
The inter-orbital region is broad and tapers posteriorly, as in Lobodon, but
in marked contrast to the condition in other monachines, notably Monachus and
Leptonychotes in which the inter- and post-orbital regions are narrow and
parallel-sided. The latter condition is apparently the primitive one.
As noted by Hendey & Repenning (1972), the jugal terminates anteriorly
above the lateral border of the infra-orbital foramen in Homiphoca, above the
centre of this foramen in Monachus, and lateral to this foramen in Lobodontini.
Homiphoca is thus intermediate between the two groups of living monachines in
this respect. The posterior end of the jugal is bifurcated, with a narrow dorsal
branch and a broad ventral one, thus resembling Monachus in this respect, but
differing from the Lobodontini.
The zygomatic process of the squamosal is short, with a pronounced dorsal
inflection, while the glenoid fossa is narrow and deep. In both these respects
Homiphoca is more like Monachus than Lobodontini.
The auditory region of the paratype is virtually identical to the one described
in detail by Hendey & Repenning (1972). Other references to the ear region of
Homiphoca are to be found in Ray (1976b) and Repenning & Ray (1977). A few
additional observations are made here.
As noted by King (1966), the bulla covers the petrosal posteriorly in the
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN 107
Fig. 7. Homiphoca capensis premolars. A. Occlusal view of upper left premolar, SAM—PQ-—
L55047B. B. Occlusal and anterior views of upper right premolar, SAM—PQ-I_50304D.
C. Lingual view of upper right premolar, SAM—PQ-L55046. D-—F. Buccal views of upper right
premolars, SAM—PQ-L55047C, 50304C, 50304A. G-—I. Lingual views of lower right premolars,
SAM-—PQ-L55047A, L55047D, L50304B.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
108
"VSP0SST-Od-NVS "H “aSp0SsT-Od-WVS “D ‘OSb0SsT-Od-WVS “A
AsSpOssT-Od-WVS “A ‘SOW (H ‘A) Wer pure (D ‘d) Is Jo smola yensuryT “H-A “WrbOSST-Od-NVS ‘A ‘OPr0ssT-Od-WVS ‘OD
arrossT-Od-WVS “& ‘vL60ST-Od-WYS “V
SIN (CG) eT Pur (O-V) SIT JO SMOIA ensury “q-Vy ‘sievjour sisuadva pIOydIMoFT *g “Sty
eo Sea
wd |
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN 109
6
Il
i eit rani Wt ot
unui nnn
nn i
i
ai
Fig. 9. Anterior, lateral and posterior views of Homiphoca capensis humerus, SAM—PQ-L40969.
110 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Lobodontini, whereas in Monachus the posterior part of the petrosal is exposed
in ventral aspect. In Homiphoca the situation is intermediate, with the posterior
extension of the bulla clearly less than in Lobodontini, and not covering the
whole of the petrosal. In addition, the mastoid has a lip overlapping the
posterior wall of the bulla. This condition is typical of the Lobodontini and its
presence in Homiphoca, together with the posterior development of the bulla, is
here regarded as good evidence of its relationship to this group (Hendey &
Repenning 1972).
The bulla in Homiphoca is small and little inflated as in Monachus. The
carotid foramen is located anteriorly as in Lobodon and Ommatophoca, but less
so than in Hydrurga and Leptonychotes. The petrosal has been completely
exposed in several Homiphoca specimens, showing that the promontorium is
better developed than in Monachus, but less so than in Lobodontini. The apical
whorls of the cochlea are visible and are not completely hidden by the consider-
ably expanded basal whorls as in Lobodon and Leptonychotes. Once again the
condition is intermediate between those in Monachus and Lobodontini (see
Repenning & Ray 1977).
The basisphenoid is narrow as in Hydrurga, while the alisphenoid exhibits
a well-developed lateral process as in Monachus. The basioccipital is relatively
narrow and trapezoid in shape. In Monachus, Lobodon, and Leptonychotes the
basioccipital is of similar shape but wider, while in Hydrurga and Ommatophoca
it is narrow and sometimes rectangular.
In L31976, and some other Homiphoca specimens, there is a basioccipital
foramen situated slightly posteriorly to, and medial of, the carotid foramen. On
four of the specimens this foramen is situated at the basioccipital/bulla suture,
while in two it is in the basioccipital itself. In spite of its variable position, it is
apparently always present in Homiphoca, and may thus be characteristic of this
taxon. It was otherwise observed in the present study only in three out of five
Hydrurga skulls. In Leptonychotes there is a partially isolated basioccipital
foramen at the anteromedial corner of the posterior lacerate foramen which may
be homologous. The function of this foramen is not known. It may have accom-
modated a branch of the internal carotid artery, or, perhaps more likely, it may
represent a branch of the ventral venous petrosal sinus. This foramen may be a
primitive characteristic.
The exoccipitals carry triangular paroccipital processes which resemble
those of Monachus and Hydrurga, but differ from the low crests.observed in
Leptonychotes. In Lobodon and Ommatophoca the crest is higher, but the process
is not triangular.
The occipital condyles are similar to those of living monachines, while the
foramen magnum is oval, which is commonly the case in living Lobodontini,
whereas in Monachus it is usually circular.
The occipital crest is V-shaped as in Lobodon, Leptonychotes and Monachus,
and not U-shaped as in Hydrurga and Ommatophoca. The braincase is relatively
smaller than those of living Lobodontini, and similar to that of Monachus.
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN 111
nn a EL
| j
“a
hl
mm
mM
il
Fig. 10. Medial view of Homiphoca capensis ulna, SAM-—PQ-L31957.
ania UU LLL
qn
9 Z
nN
0 2
mm
6 1
nar
(lll
Hill
Fig. 11. Medial view of Homiphoca capensis radius, SAM—PQ-L40846.
112 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Because the interorbital region is relatively broad, the anterior limit of the
braincase is not as sharply defined as in Monachus and Leptonychotes. The
anterior curvature of the braincase in dorsal view is gradual as in living
Lobodontini. The sagittal crest is reduced as in Lobodon and Leptonychotes.
The Homiphoca skull is relatively narrow posteriorly, resembling those of
Lobodon and Hydrurga more than other monachines in this respect (Fig. 15,
Table 2).
The mandible of Homiphoca was previously described on the basis of a
specimen lacking the teeth and those parts posterior to the cheek teeth, but
largely complete specimens, many with one or more teeth in position, are now
known. In general, the mandible is similar to that of Monachus and very different
from those of the highly specialized Lobodontini.
The symphysis is short and terminates below the middle of P,. In Lobodon
and Ommatophoca it is much longer, reaching to below the anterior extremity of
P,, while in Monachus, Hydrurga and Leptonychotes it reaches to below the
posterior extremity of P,.
The horizontal ramus is low and narrow, and of constant height beneath
the cheek teeth, much as in Monachus. The ascending ramus is also Monachus-
like, with a very narrow coronoid process and large angular region, which gives
it a rather square shape in lateral view. The condition in Hydrurga and Ommato-
phoca is similar, but these genera differ in having high condyles and much
TABLE 2
Mean dimensions and ratios of Lobodontini skulls.
Lobodon Hydrurga Homiphoca Leptony- Ommato-
carcino- leptonyx capensis chotes phoca
phagus weddelli rossi
N 11 6 3 10 4
1. 292 368 258 271 239
2: 98 116 87 65 47
3h. 157 187 130 177 167
4. 87 105 72,5 86 81
PL I) (3535) 0,315 0,337 0,239 0,196
4:3 0,554 0,561 0,557 0,485 0,485
N—Number of specimens (South African Museum collections).
1.—Overall length of skull.
2.—Length of snout from anterior extremity of premaxilla to anterior end of
jugal.
3.— Height of occiput from basioccipital to top of occipital crest.
4.—Mastoid width.
“69ETET PUL 9EZOET-Od-VS ‘SoveuTUIOUUL sisuadvo voOYdUOFT JO SMOIA [eIOYET *Z] “BIA
113
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
114 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
smaller coronoid processes. The condyle is Monachus-like in being low and
narrow, while the masseteric fossa is shallow and generally similar to that in
Monachus.
Only three intact teeth remain in the paratype mandible, but other speci-
mens have more complete dentitions, and hundreds of isolated teeth are
available.
The lower incisors are small, nondescript teeth. The medial incisor is the
smaller of the two, and is slightly more posteriorly situated. It lies almost
horizontally in the mandible, whereas the lateral incisor is more vertically
inclined. Both have a small posterior cingulum, as in Monachus. The C is small,
circular in cross-section and with a slightly recurved crown. The alveoli of the
incisors and C merge with one another at the alveolar margin.
The lower premolars are morphologically similar to the uppers, having a
principal cusp, one anterior and two posterior accessory cusps. The lingual
cingula are less pronounced than in Monachus, and in this respect Homiphoca is
intermediate between Monachus and living Lobodontini. The lower premolars
are narrower than the uppers and their homologues in Monachus. The postero-
lingual cingula of P, to P, are slightly inflated.
The M, of Homiphoca is an unusual tooth, being unlike that of any
previously recorded phocid. It has a large crown which is triangular in lateral
view, and which is an elongated oval in occlusal view. The apex of the principal
cusp is directed slightly posteriorly, with the result that the anterior keel is
longer than the posterior one. Small anterior and posterior accessory cusps are
sometimes present, the anterior one being the larger and situated slightly
higher on the crown. A lingual cingulum, which may extend around the anterior
end of the tooth, is present. It is similar to the M, of Lobodon in being larger than
P,. In Monachus and in other Lobodontini the M, is smaller than P,. The
Homiphoca M, is also unlike other double-rooted teeth of this taxon, and of
living monachines, in having the roots converging towards their extremities.
The postcranial skeleton
Most elements of the postcranial skeleton of Homiphoca capensis are now
available for study. Vertebrae, ribs, scapulae and innominates are generally
incomplete, but most, if not all, limb bones are represented by several intact and
well-preserved specimens. A vast number of incomplete limb bones are known.
Curiously, in view of the large number of additional Homiphoca specimens
now available, the incomplete scapula described by Hendey & Repenning (1972)
is still one of the best specimens of this bone. A few supplementary observations
are possible. The lower half of the posterior border of the blade of the scapula is
triangular in cross-section as in Monachus, while in Lobodontini it is always
rounded. The latter is an advanced condition which is discussed in more detail
elsewhere (De Muizon 1979). The depression for the insertion of the triceps
brachii on the posterolateral part of the neck is deep, indicating that this muscle
was more powerfully developed than in living monachines
115
mn
iti
ht iil
145519.
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
Anterior and posterior views of Homiphoca capensis femora, SAM-—PQ-L30118 and
13
Fig.
116 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The previously described humerii were incomplete, but several intact
specimens are now known. In most living Lobodontini the greater trochanter is
lower than the lesser trochanter. In some Monachus specimens they are of equal
height, while in others the greater trochanter is higher, as in most carnivores.
The latter is the primitive condition and is also found in late Miocene Mono-
therium of the North Atlantic and some of the phocids from the Pisco Formation
in Peru (De Muizon 1979). In Leptonychotes and Homiphoca the development
of the trochanters is intermediate between the primitive condition and the
advanced one in other living Lobodontini.
Similarly, the lateral surface of the deltoid crest (from the greater trochanter
to the deltoid tubercle) is more elongated in Homiphoca than in Monachus, and
more like that in Monotherium and living Lobodontini. The prominent deltoid
tubercle and strong relief of the posterolateral side of the deltoid crest indicate
the existence of stronger brachialis and brachioradialis muscles in living
Lobodontini than in Monachini.
The presence of a well-developed supinator ridge and entepicondylar
foramen in the Homiphoca humerus is characteristic of phocines rather than
monachines, and they are evidently primitive features. On the other hand, the
deltoid/pectoral crest reaches the distal epiphysis in Homiphoca, and this is a
typically monachine feature. The bicipital groove appears to be deeper and
narrower than in most living monachines.
A comparison of the general morphology of the humerus of Homiphoca
with those of Monachus and Leptonychotes suggests that it represents a primitive
stage in the development towards the Leptonychotes (i.e. Lobodontini) con-
dition. Particularly significant are the curvature in lateral view (it is straight in
Monachus), size of the lesser trochanter and elongation of the muscle insertion
area on the lateral side of the deltoid crest. In all these respects Homiphoca is
closer to Leptonychotes than to Monachus.
The previously described ulnae represented the entire bone except for the
tubercle for insertion of the anconeus medialis muscle. This tubercle is preserved
in several new specimens, and, as in the Phocinae, it is very prominent. In this
respect the ulna of Homiphoca differs from those of living monachines. The ulna
of Monotherium ? wymani (Ray 19765) is similar to that of Homiphoca, and they
evidently represent the primitive condition.
Complete radii are now known. The radius is very wide distally, as in
Monachus and Lobodon. This represents a primitive condition relative to other
Lobodontini, particularly Leptonychotes (De Muizon 1979). The Homiphoca
radius differs from those of Hydrurga and Ommatophoca in that the area for
insertion of the pronator teres is very pronounced in the latter genera.
No complete innominates are known, and the best available specimen is
probably that described by Hendey & Repenning (1972). This bone is typically
monachine. The pectineal tuberosity was examined in ten specimens, and found
to be reduced in seven, as in living Lobodontini, while in the others it is very
prominent as in Monachus and the Phocinae. The psoas minor inserts on this
—
—
oa
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
il
2
4
wii
Whi
3
2
3
tyr
0
nt
9
ian Il
5
nm
Fig. 14. Anterior and posterior views of Homiphoca capensis tibia and fibula,
SAM-PQ-L30424.
118 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
tuberosity and it has the function of bending the back in the caterpillar-like
terrestrial locomotion of seals. The stronger this muscle, the more terrestrial the
species concerned is likely to be, and a prominent pectineal tuberosity may thus
be interpreted as a primitive character. Homiphoca would thus have been more
primitive than living Lobodontini in this respect, but more advanced than
Monachini.
The femur of Homiphoca was previously described on the basis of a single
distal fragment, but complete specimens are now known. This bone is short and
wide as in living Lobodontini, but the head is more spherical and the neck is
more distinct. In the latter respects it is Monachus-like. King (1966) recorded
that the phocine femur was distinct from that of monachines in having a deep
trochanteric fossa, a high trochanter and a pronounced popliteus pit. There are,
however, exceptions amongst both monachines and phocines. For example,
Lobodon has a deep trochanteric fossa, while in some Phocinae (e.g. Erignathus)
it is absent. Homiphoca also has a trochanteric fossa, and, in addition, a
well-developed popliteus pit. The trochanter is variably developed, some-
times being higher than the head as in the Phocinae, and sometimes lower as in
the Lobodontini and M. schauinslandi. Homiphoca is probably most like
M. monachus in this respect. In the Peruvian fossil monachines the trochanter is
higher than the head and the popliteus pit is marked.
The anterior surface of the Homiphoca femur shaft has a marked concavity
mediodistally. A similar concavity is often present in Lobodontini, but it is less
pronounced in Monachus. The patella facet is transversely elongated as in
Lobodontini. In the phocines this facet is dorsoventrally elongated. The area of
insertion of the peroneus longus on the lateral epicondyle is very pronounced
and visible in anterior view as in other Monachinae, whereas in Phocinae
(excluding Erignathus) it is orientated laterally.
Although the phocid femur is more variable and less diagnostic than, for
example, the humerus, the typically monachine Homiphoca femur is in some
respects intermediate between those of Monachus and living Lobodontini. Of
the latter it is perhaps closest to Lobodon because both have a deep trochanteric
fossa.
The tibia and fibula of Homiphoca are fused proximally as in almost all
living and fossil phocids. These bones are known to be articulated proximally
only in M. schauinslandi (Ray 1976a) and a small monachine from the Pisco
Formation in Peru.
The proximal tibial facets are usually markedly concave in the Phocinae and
the tibial spine is high, while in living Monachinae the facets tend to be flat and
the spine is low. The Homiphoca tibia is intermediate in these respects.
One of the most striking features of the Homiphoca tibia is the presence of
very deep tibial fossae (Hendey & Repenning 1972). The posterior one extends
along the proximal two-thirds of the shaft, and the anterior one along the
proximal half of the shaft. A deep posterior fossa in seal tibiae indicates strong
leg musculature. The Homiphoca tibia differs from those of living Lobodontini in
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN 119
0,35 06
H. c
L.c
H. | HI
H.c
0,3 L.c.
0,25 0,5
L.w. L.w. & Or
0. r. oe
015 0,4
A B
Fig. 15. Ratios of Lobodontini skull dimensions. A. Snout length:
overall length. B. Occiput height: mastoid width. Data from
Table 2. (H.c.— Homiphoca capensis, L.c.—Lobodon carcinophagus,
H.1.—Hydrurga leptonyx, L.w.—Leptonychotes weddelli, O.1.—
Ommatophoca rossi.)
being relatively short, and in terms of femur-tibia/fibula length proportions,
Homiphoca is closer to Monachus. Possibly the more powerful musculature
inserted on the tibia compensated for its relative shortness.
The anteroposteriorly flattened distal end of the tibia is similar to that of
Pliophoca of the Italian Pliocene (Ugolini 1902; Tavani 1942).
The sharply angled distal fibula facet of the tibia led Hendey & Repenning
(1972) to suggest that the fibula, which was then not known, must have been
markedly bowed. In fact, the fibula is no more bowed than that of Monachus,
although it is more so than in Lobodontini, in which the fibula is almost
straight. The Homiphoca fibula has a small lateral recurved extension to the
astragalus facet which articulates with the calcaneum. This facet is pronounced
120 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
in the Lobodontini and Mirounga, but is very reduced in Monachus and the
Phocinae.
Most, if not all, elements of the Homiphoca manus and pes are now repre-
sented by complete specimens, but they are not described here.
DISCUSSION
It is abundantly clear that Homiphoca capensis is a member of the subfamily
Monachinae, and in many respects is a morphological intermediate between
living Monachini (Monachus) and Lobodontini (Hendey & Repenning 1972).
Monachus is widely recognized as the least specialized of living Monachinae,
while the Lobodontini are amongst the most highly specialized of all phocids.
Hendey & Repenning (1972: 95) have already suggested that H. capensis is
more specialized than Monachus and that in a ‘broad sense’ its relationships lie
with ‘the Antarctic monachines’ (i.e. Lobodontini), although ‘it is not clearly
ancestral to any of the four living genera’. Subsequently it was suggested that
H. capensis is more closely related to Leptonychotes and Ommatophoca than to
Lobodon and. Hydrurga, although it was probably not directly ancestral to either
of the former (Hendey 1972). The present study has led to a revision of this
opinion.
The informal separation of the Lobodontini into two groups, namely,
Leptonychotes and Ommatophoca on the one hand, and Lobodon and Hydrurga
on the other, is based in part on the following characters:
1. The highly specialized cheek teeth with well-developed accessory cusps of
Lobodon and Hydrurga contrast with the reduced teeth of Leptonychotes and
Ommatophoca, in which accessory cusps are absent in the former, and very small
or absent in Ommatophoca.
2. The general development in Lobodon and Hydrurga of posterolingual cusps
on the upper cheek teeth, which are absent in all other living monachines.
3. The molars (Mj) are well developed in Lobodon and Hydrurga, but are
reduced in Leptonychotes and Ommatophoca.
4. The long snout in Lobodon and Hydrurga contrasts with the shortened one
in Leptonychotes and Ommatophoca (Fig. 15).
5. The relatively high occiput in Lobodon and Hydrurga contrasts with the low
occiput in Leptonychotes and Ommatophoca (Fig. 15).
The earlier opinion that Homiphoca was more closely related to
Leptonychotes/Ommatophoca was based on the belief that while it would be
possible for the teeth of the latter to evolve from those of Homiphoca, the M?
of the latter was already more advanced than those of Lobodon and Hydrurga.
The present study has suggested that this was not necessarily the case. In
addition, there is other evidence which indicates that the relationships of
Homiphoca lie rather with the Lobodon/Hydrurga group. .
The most significant characteristics which Homiphoca shares with Lobodon/
Hydrurga are as follows:
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN 121
1. The posterolingual expansion of P? to P*, sometimes with a small accessory
cusp.
2. The well-developed M,.
3. The relatively long snout (Fig. 15).
4. The relatively high occiput (Fig. 15).
At first sight the fact that the Homiphoca M? is relatively smaller than those
of Lobodon and Hydrurga suggests that the former is unlikely to be closely
related to either of these Antarctic genera. It is obvious that the M* of the most
primitive Phocidae must have been large, and that the general trend in phocid
evolution has been towards reduction of this tooth. Amongst living monachines
it is only in Lobodon and Hydrurga that M! is similar in size, or only slightly
smaller than P*.
All the teeth of Lobodon and Hydrurga are larger and more highly specialized
than those of Monachus, which, except for their breadth, may well represent
something approaching the condition typical of late Tertiary monachines. Since
the M! of Monachus is relatively small, it is possible that the large size of this
tooth in Lobodon and Hydrurga is a secondary development accompanying the
general specialization of their dentitions. In other words, the large size of M? in
these genera may be a specialized rather than primitive condition.
Another factor which suggests that the enlargement of the M! in Lobodon
and Hydrurga was secondary is the parallel enlargement of P! in these genera.
Both these teeth thus reflect a development towards homodonty, a condition
which is characteristic of many marine mammals.
If the relatively large size of M! in Lobodon and Hydrurga is indeed a
secondary specialization, then the size of this tooth in Homiphoca does not
necessarily exclude it from being closely related to Lobodon/Hydrurga.
It may also be significant that the crown of the Homiphoca M, is, as in
Lobodon, relatively higher than in any other known monachines. The fact that
the Homiphoca M, was already enlarged relative to those of monachines other
than Lobodon and Hydrurga may foreshadow the enlargement of M? in its
descendants. The M! of Lobodon and Hydrurga is the least functional tooth in
the dentitions in the sense that it alone is.in contact with only one other tooth
(M,). For this reason its enlargement may have lagged behind that of M, and P;
in the Lobodon and Hydrurga lineages.
The most striking aspect of the cheek teeth of Lobodon and Hydrurga is
their highly specialized, comb-like cusps. It is therefore of interest to consider
the manner in which monachine cheek tooth cusps might have evolved.
It was stated earlier that the cheek teeth of Monachus, a genus which is in
almost all respects the least specialized of living monachines, are likely to
resemble those of primitive members of the group. Monachus cheek teeth are
comprised of a principal cusp, and, depending on species and tooth concerned,
either no accessory cusps, one small posterior accessory cusp, or one small
accessory cusp anteriorly and posteriorly. In those genera which are supposedly
close to the origins of the Phocidae, such as Paragale and Potamotherium
122 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(Savage 1957; Tedford 1976), the premolars (excluding P*) have a principal cusp
and reduced or absent accessory cusps, with never more than one of the latter
anteriorly and posteriorly. It is, therefore, possible that primitive monachines
were characterized by reduced or absent accessory cusps on their cheek teeth.
It is worth noting in this connection that in the Otariidae accessory cusps are
interpreted as an advanced character (Repenning & Tedford 1977: 66).
Late in the Tertiary there appears to have been a general tendency amongst
phocids to develop accessory cusps, at least on the premolars, especially P? to P4.
Subsequently, amongst the monachines different lineages evolved their cheek
teeth in different ways. In Monachus there was probably little change in the
teeth, just as the rest of the skull and postcranial skeleton remained unspecialized.
In the Leptonychotes, Ommatophoca, and Mirounga lineages the cheek teeth were
reduced and the accessory cusps were often lost. In the case of Ommatophoca it
is known that during the early Pleistocene there was still the basic three-cusped
pattern on P, to P, at least (King 1973). The Lobodon and Hydrurga lineages
retained, and in the case of the former, even supplemented the three-cusped
pattern on P? to Pi, with individual cusps greatly enlarged and morphologically
modified, while P} and Mj evolved to match the characteristics of P3 to P34.
In Homiphoca the cusp number on individual teeth is variable, but the
situation may be summed up as follows:
1. P{ have a well-developed posterior accessory cusp, and sometimes a small
anterior and a second posterior accessory cusp as well. (Fig. 7C)
2. P32 to Pi have well-developed anterior and posterior accessory cusps, and
sometimes a second small posterior accessory cusp. (Figs 7D-I)
3. M, sometimes has a posterior accessory cusp, and less often an anterior
accessory cusp. (Figs 8E-H)
4. M! sometimes has a small anterior accessory cusp. (Figs 8A—D)
In addition, a small posterolingual cusp on P? to P* may be present (Fig. 7B).
Since Homiphoca cheek teeth have better developed, and sometimes also a
greater number of accessory cusps than Monachus, it is possible that it belongs
in that group of Lobodontini in which cheek tooth cusps are enlarged and well
developed, that is, Lobodon/Hydrurga. The fact that it sometimes had one more
cusp than Hydrurga, that is, the second posterior accessory cusp on P} to P34,
which is the same in some Lobodon individuals, suggests that its affinities lie
rather with the latter. However, Lobodon often has a third posterior accessory
cusp on P} to P#, as well as one or two more cusps on its molars than Homiphoca.
Presumably if Homiphoca did belong to a lineage in which cusps were being
developed, it could have achieved the Lobodon condition in the lengthy time
available.
There are other aspects of the accessory cusps in Homiphoca cheek teeth
which suggest a possible connection with Lobodon. In the latter, those accessory
cusps immediately adjacent to the principal cusp have their apices only a little
below the level of the apices of the principal cusps. The homologous cusps in
Homiphoca may also be relatively high on the keels of the principal cusps,
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN 123
although they are never separated from the principal cusps as in Lobodon. This
variation in position is particularly noticeable on M}, in which the anterior
accessory cusps, when present, vary from being low on the anterior keel, at or
near the cingulum, to a little way above it (Fig. 8). The significance of this is that
when an accessory cusp is ‘shifted’ up the keel, it is then possible for an additional
accessory cusp to develop from the cingulum anteriorly and posteriorly. It is
apparently always from these positions that the supernumerary cusps of
Lobodon cheek teeth are developed.
In addition, the supernumerary cingular cusps, like other accessory cusps
in Lobodon, are curved in the direction of the principal cusp, a tendency which
is apparent in Homiphoca. The best example of this in Homiphoca is in the
isolated upper premolar, L50304A, in which there is a very pronounced anterior
recurvature of the second posterior accessory cusp (Fig. 7F). This condition is
not known in any other monachine.
Of course, the earlier alternative hypothesis that Homiphoca is more
closely related to those Lobodontini in which teeth and accessory cusps are
reduced or absent (i.e. Leptonychotes|Ommatophoca) cannot be dismissed.
However, this alternative has no other compelling evidence to support it,
whereas there are other characteristics which suggest a close relationship
between Homiphoca and Lobodon (see p. 121). In addition, and perhaps most
significantly, Homiphoca and Lobodon are similar in having a broad inter-
orbital region, a characteristic which distinguishes them from other monachines.
In general the skulls of Homiphoca and Lobodon are similar in morphology
and that of the former is only slightly smaller. The most striking differences are
in the nasal region. In Homiphoca the nasals themselves are long, and the
chambers occupied by the maxilloturbinals are voluminous, particularly in
bed 3aN specimens in which there is deformation of the snout laterally and
ventrally (see p. 101). In Lobodon the nasals are short, and the maxilloturbinals,
although large and complex, are confined to the inter-orbital region. This
contributes at least in part to the relatively broad post-orbital region of Lobodon.
The development of the maxilloturbinals is directly related to ambient air
temperatures, since their mucosa serve to warm and moisten inspired air
(Miller et al. 1964). The apparent differences in maxilloturbinal development
between bed 3aS and bed 3aN Homiphoca populations may be related to the
initiation of, or fluctuations within the major cooling of the late Tertiary. This
cooling led to the cold upwelling within the Benguela Current System and
consequent lowering of ambient air temperatures off the west coast of South
Africa (see Siesser 1978).
It is thus likely that the maxilloturbinal development in bed 3aN Homiphoca
was in an early stage of specialization. Refinement of the arrangement of the
maxilloturbinals, perhaps by greater convolution, may have contributed to the
marked difference in the nature of this region of the Lobodon skull.
The nasal cavity of Lobodon is also distinct in having two pronounced
lateral fossae anterior to the maxilloturbinals. Their purpose is not known, but
124 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
they are presumably an advanced character related to nasal physiology. They
have not been observed in other monachines, and they too contribute to the
marked differences between the nasal regions of Homiphoca and Lobodon.
This, and other, differences between Homiphoca and Lobodon may all be
interpreted as greater specialization in the latter, with adaptations being for
different feeding habits, better aquatic locomotion, and life in a frigid climate.
There appears to be no character which would preclude Homiphoca from being
closely related to Lobodon. It does not necessarily follow that Homiphoca was
directly ancestral to Lobodon, since it could equally have belonged on a separate
lineage which paralleled that of Lobodon in some respects.
The origins of Homiphoca are obscure because of the extremely poor phocid
record earlier in the Miocene. The best known of early phocids is Monotherium.
Two late Miocene species are recorded in Belgium, namely, M. aberratum and
M. affine (= M. delognii), while a middle Miocene species from North America
is tentatively identified with this genus (M. ? wymani). The auditory region of the
latter is known, and it has the mastoid lip overlapping the posterior wall of the
bulla, a characteristic of Lobodontini. Although available evidence is slender, it
is possible that Monotherium includes an ancestor of Homiphoca.
Other middle to late Miocene phocids are either not well enough known to
be certain of their affinities, or obviously belong to groups other than the
Lobodontini. Prophoca rousseaui from the middle Miocene of Belgium was
referred by Ray (1976a) to the Phocinae, but its humerus appears to be typically
monachine, and its relationships have yet to be firmly established by the
discovery of additional material. Callophoca evidently is a monachine, but it is
not relevant here since it is related to Monachus or Mirounga (Ray 1976a).
The same applies to Pliophoca. The Paratethyan seals are very problematical,
but they, too, are probably irrelevant to the history of the Lobodontini.
In conclusion some observations are made on the past distribution and
dispersal of monachine seals.
It is almost certain that the Monachinae had their origins in the North
Atlantic Ocean, and perhaps that the ancestors of Homiphoca reached the South
Atlantic and South Africa by following the route suggested earlier by Hendey
(1972). This involved the dispersal of European monachines southwards along
the north-west coast of Africa, across the north equatorial region of the Atlantic,
down the east coast of South America, and back across the Atlantic in southern
mid-latitudes, with the oceanic crossings being facilitated by major current
systems. The latter were probably particularly significant in the case of the
southerly dispersal of seals in the South Atlantic. The west to east route from
South America to South Africa by way of subantarctic islands, which follows
the prevailing current system in southern mid-latitudes, was used first by
monachines and later by otariids. The latter must have entered the South
Atlantic from the Pacific round the southern tip of South America, since early
in their history they were confined to the Pacific Ocean.
It is possible that South Atlantic monachines took the same route followed
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN 125
later by otariids. The time when monachines first entered the Pacific is not
known, but it could have been as much as 15 m.y. ago (Repenning & Ray 1977).
The older monachines of the Pisco Formation in Peru may be of late Miocene
age and are the earliest known Pacific representatives of their subfamily. They
clearly represent taxa distinct from Homiphoca, and their age relative to the
latter is not certain.
It is also possible that South Atlantic monachines migrated along a more
direct route southwards, either along the east coasts of the Americas, or along
the west coast of Africa. The direction of major current systems does not
necessarily directly influence the movements of seals along coastlines, whereas
they are of paramount importance in oceanic crossings.
Although the last-mentioned alternative is not favoured, it, and the others,
will remain possibilities until more relevant material from the regions in question
is collected and studied.
SUMMARY
The status of recorded late Tertiary seals of the South Atlantic Ocean is
revised. Prionodelphis rovereti from the late Miocene/early Pliocene of Argentina
was identified by Frenguelli (1922) on the basis of five teeth belonging to a
cetacean and one, or possibly two, monachine seals (Phocidae, Monachinae).
P. rovereti is regarded as a cetacean. Prionodelphis capensis Hendey & Repenning,
1972, from South Africa is assigned to a new genus, Homiphoca.
A nearly complete skull and mandible, designated as a paratype of the
species H. capensis, and most of the more significant postcranial bones, are
described. These indicate that the genus is morphologically intermediate
between monk seals, Monachus (Monachinae, Monachini), and Antarctic seals
(Monachinae, Lobodontini) excluding Mirounga. The structure of the auditory
region suggests a closer relationship with the Lobodontini, which are here
informally divided into two groups, namely, Leptonychotes/Ommatophoca and
Loboden/Hydrurga. There is evidence to suggest that the affinities of Homiphoca
lie with the latter group, and that it is likely to be more closely related to
Lobodon than any other living seal. Homiphoca may have been derived from the
North Atlantic Monotherium (Monachinae, Lobodontini), but the poor fossil
record of primitive monachines makes this uncertain.
The possible migration routes followed by early monachines are examined,
and it is suggested that the South Atlantic monachines probably followed the
route suggested earlier by Hendey (1972).
RESUME
La position des Phoques du Tertiaire supérieur de l’Atlantique Sud est ici
révisée. Prionodelphis rovereti du Miocéne supérieur/Pliocéne inférieur
d’Argentine fut décrit par Frenguelli (1922) sur la base de cing dents appartenant
a un Cétacé et un ou deux Monachinés (Phocidae, Monachinae). P. rovereti est
126 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
considéré comme un Cétacé. Prionodelphis capensis, Hendey et Repenning 1972,
d’Afrique du Sud est assigné 4 un genre propre Homiphoca gen. nov.
Un crane et une mandibule presque complets, désignés comme paratype de
Vespéce H. capensis, et la plupart des éléments postcraniens les plus significatifs
sont aussi décrits. Ce matériel montre que H. capensis est morphologiquement
intermédiaire entre les Phoques moines Monachus (Monachinae, Monachini) et
les Phoques antarctiques (Monachinae, Lobodontini) excluant Mirounga.
La structure de la région auditive suggére un lien étroit avec les Lobodontini qui
sont ici divisés en deux groupes, Leptonychotes/Ommatophoca dune part et
Lobodon/Hydrurga d’autre part. Plusieurs arguments suggérent un rapproche-
ment d’Homiphoca avec le second groupe et plus précisément avec le genre
Lobodon. Homiphoca pourrait avoir son origine dans le genre Monotherium
(Monachinae, Lobodontini) de |’Atlantique Nord mais cette hypothése reste
incertaine compte tenu de la pauvreté du matériel des Monachinae fossiles.
Les routes de migration possibles, suivies par les premiers Monachinés, sont
envisagées et il est suggéré que les Monachinae de |’Atlantique Sud ont
probablement utilisé la route proposée par Hendey (1972).
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We are indebted to Mr C. A. Repenning, U.S. Geological Survey, Menlo
Park, California, and Dr C. E. Ray, National Museum of Natural History,
Washington D.C., for casts and other comparative material used in the course
of the study. We are also indebted to Drs L. Ginsburg and R. Hoffstetter of the
Institut de Paléontologie, Paris, for helpful comments on the manuscript.
We thank Miss J. Nolte, South African Museum, for the photographs.
The Langebaanweg Research Project is supported by Chemfos Ltd, the
South African Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, the South African
Museum, and the Wenner-Gren Foundation for Anthropological Research,
New York (grant no. 2752-1834), and the assistance of these organizations is
gratefully acknowledged.
REFERENCES
AMEGHINO, F. 1886. Contribucién al conocimiento de los mamiferos fosiles de los terrenos
antiguos terciaros del Parana. Boln Acad. nac. Cienc, Cordoba 9: 1-228.
AMEGHINO, F. 1889. Contribucion al conocimiento de los mamiferos fosiles de la Republica
Argentina. Actas Acad. nac. Cienc. Cordoba 6: 129-167.
Bupback, K. F. R. 1977. The 4 Aonin or Topnaar of the lower !Khuiseb valley and the sea.
Khoisan Linguistic Studies 3: 1-41.
BURMEISTER, G. 1885. Examen critico de los mamiferos y reptiles fosiles denominados por
D. Augusto Bravard y mencionados en su obra precedente. An. Mus. nac. Buenos Aires
3: 95-174.
CABRERA, A. 1926. Cetdceos fosiles del Museo de la Plata. Revta Mus. La Plata 29: 363-411.
DINGLE, R. V., Lorp, A. R. & HENDEY, Q. B. 1979. New sections in the Varswater Formation
(Neogene) of Langebaan Road, south-western Cape, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus.
78: 81-92.
LATE TERTIARY SEALS OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN 127
EIcHwALb, C. E. 1853. Lethaea Rossica, ou Paleontologie de la Russie. 3. Stuttgart:
Schweizerbart.
FRENGUELLI, J. 1922. Prionodelphis rovereti un representante de la familia ‘Squalodontidae’ en
el Paranense Superior de Entre Rios. Boln Acad. nac. Cienc. Cordoba 25: 491-500.
FRENGUELLI, J. 1926. El Entrerriense de Golfo Nuevo en el Chubut. Boln Acad. nac. Cienc.
Cérdoba 29: 191-270.
GRIGORESCU, D. 1976. Paratethyan seals. Syst. Zool. 25: 407-419.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1972. The evolution and dispersal of the Monachinae (Mammalia: Pinnipedia).
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 59: 99-113.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1974. The late Cenozoic Carnivora of the south-western Cape Province.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 63: 1-369.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1976. The Pliocene fossil occurrences in ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg, South
Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 215-247.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1978a. Late Tertiary Hyaenidae from Langebaanweg, South Africa, and their
relevance to the phylogeny of the family. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 76: 265-297.
HENDEY, Q. B. 19786. Late Tertiary Mustelidae (Mammalia, Carnivora) from Langebaanweg,
South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 76: 329-357.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1980. Agriotherium (Mammalia, Ursidae) from Langebaanweg, South Africa,
and relationships of the genus. Amn. S. Afr. Mus. 81: 1-109.
HENDEY, Q. B. & REPENNING, C. A. 1972. A Pliocene phocid from South Africa. Ann. S. Afr.
Mus. 59: 71-98.
KELLOGG, R. 1942. Tertiary, Quaternary and Recent marine mammals of South America and
the West Indies. Proc. 8th Am. Sci. Congr. (Washington) 3: 445-473.
Kina, J. E. 1956. The monk seals (genus Monachus). Bull. B. Mus. nat. Hist. (Zool.) 3: 201-256.
Kina, J. E. 1964. Seals of the world. London: British Museum (Natural History).
Kina, J. E. 1966. Relationships of the hooded and elephant seals (genera Cystophora and
Mirounga). J. Zool. 148: 385-398.
Kina, J. E. 1973. Pleistocene Ross seal (Ommatophoca rossi) from New Zealand. N. Z. J. Marine
Freshwater Res. 7: 391-397.
KRAGLIEVICH, L. 1934. La antigiiedad pliocena de las faunas de Monte Hermosa y Chapad-
malal. Siglo Ilustrado, Montevideo 938: 1-136.
MarsHALL, L. 1978. Evolution of the Borhyaenidae, extinct South American predaceous
marsupials. Univ. Calif. Publ. geol. Sc. 117: 1-89.
MILLER, M. E., CHRISTENSEN, G. C. & Evans, H. E. 1964. Anatomy of the dog. Philadelphia:
W. B. Saunders.
Muizon, C. DE 1979. Contribution a l’étude systématique, anatomique et fonctionnelle des
Phocidae Pliocénes de la Formation Pisco (Pérou). Considérations générales sur la
phylogénie et la paléobiogéographie des Phocidae. Unpublished thesis, Université Pierre
et Marie Curie, Paris 6.
Ray, C. E. 1976a. Geography of phocid evolution. Syst. Zool. 25: 391-406.
Ray, C. E. 19766. Phoca wymani and other Tertiary seals (Mammalia: Phocidae) described
from the eastern seaboard of North America. Smithsonian Contr. Paleobiol. 28: 1-36.
Ray, C. E. In press. Seals and walruses (Mammalia: Pinnipedia) of the Yorktown Formation
of Virginia and North Carolina. Smithsonian Contr. Paleobiol.
REPENNING, C. A. & RAY, C. E. 1977. The origin of the Hawaiian monk seal. Proc. Biol. Soc.
Washington 89: 667-688.
REPENNING, C. A. & TEDFORD, R. H. 1977. Otarioid seals of the Neogene. U.S. geol. Surv.
Prof. Paper 992: 1-93.
SAVAGE, R. J. G. 1957. The anatomy of Potamotherium, an Oligocene lutrine. Proc. zool. Soc.
Lond. 129: 151-244.
SCHEFFER, V. B. 1958. Seals, sea lions and walruses. Stanford: University Press.
Sesser, W. G. 1978. Aridification of the Namib Desert: Evidence from oceanic cores.
In: VAN ZINDEREN BAKKER, E. M. ed. Antarctic glacial history and world palaeoenviron-
ments: 105-113. Rotterdam: Balkema.
Simpson, G. G. 1945. The principles of classification and a classification of mammals. Bull. Am.
Mus. nat. Hist. 85: 1-350.
TAVANI, G. 1942. Revisione dei resti di pinnipedi conservato nel Museo di Geologia di Pisa.
Palaeontogr. ital. 40: 97-113.
128 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TEDFORD, R. H. 1976. Relationships of pinnipeds to other carnivores (Mammalia). Syst. Zool.
25: 363-374.
TROUESSART, E. L. 1898. Catalogus mammalium tam viventium quam fossilium. Berlin:
Friedlander.
Uco ini, R. 1902. Il Monachus albiventer Bodd. del Pliocene di Orciano. Palaeontogr. ital.
8: 1-20.
VAN BENEDEN, P. J. 1877. Description des ossements fossiles des environs d’Anvers. Ann. Mus.
r. Hist. nat. Belg. 1: 1-88.
aes
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: Bap pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861:
Leda bicuspidata: Nickles, 1950: 6s, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. *.. . the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
’ (b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. DuToit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
C. DE MUIZON
&
Q. B. HENDEY
LATE TERTIARY SEALS
OF THE SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
"OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
» CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
“Smith (1969) describes .. .”
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes. . .”
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’ >
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
Scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuLLouGu, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. —H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHer, P.-H., Duvat, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conds (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, eee masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Doin eceonee Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. Jn: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume $82 Band
June 1979 Junie
Part 4 Deel
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S
MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
PART 11
HYDROIDA
By
N. A. H. MILLARD
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1, 3, 5, 7-8), 3(1-2, 5, t—p.i.), 51-2, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.=p.i.), 771-3), 8, 911-2), 10(1),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 95 5
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape ’ Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIJRING NAUDE CRUISES
PART 11
HYDROIDA
By
N. A. H. MILLARD
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 7 figures and 2 tables)
LMS. accepted 12 February 1980]
ABSTRACT
A total of seventy-one species of hydroids is listed from the east coast of South Africa
between southern Natal and East London, from depths ranging from 80 to 900 m. Three new
species are described, namely Cryptolaria spinosa (Lafoeidae), Corhiza sociabilis (Plumulariidae,
Halopterinae) and Cladocarpus pegmatis (Plumulariidae, Aglaopheniinae); and Lovenella
corrugata is reported from South Africa for the first time. The gonosome of Zygophylax
infundibulum and Synthecium hians is described for the first time, and extra information on the
gonosome of several other species is provided. The geographical depth-range of certain species
is extended.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction : : ; : : =e 29
List of species . Se ee ee =» io)
Abbreviated station list . : ‘ E,W 38
Systematic section . ; : ; 184:
Discussion . : : : : : an ley!
Acknowledgements . ‘ : : BH cullsy?
References . £ : Z : 2 f 153
INTRODUCTION
This paper deals with the hydroids obtained during the cruises of the
Meiring Naude in 1977, 1978 and 1979. These cruises were part of a project by
the South African Museum aimed at surveying the fauna from deep water
(over 400 m) off the east coast of South Africa. Since the results from deep-water
dredging were sometimes disappointing due to the strong currents and inclement
weather, a number of dredgings were also taken from shallower water. These
records are included here, too, and the deep-water specimens are distinguished
by a dagger in the species list.
129
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 82 (4), 1980: 129-153, 7 figs, 2 tables.
130 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The hydroid material from the 1975 and 1976 cruises of the Meiring Naude,
off the north and central coasts of Natal, was described by Millard (1977). The
material from the 1977 cruise, off the south coast of Natal, was incorporated
into the analysis of geographical distribution by Millard (1978) (as was that of
the 1975 and 1976 cruises), but is included here also since it was not described or
listed separately. The 1978 cruise was off the coast of East London, Cape, and
the 1979 cruise off the Transkei coast.
The exact positions and depths of the stations are published as a separate
station list (Louw 1980), but an abbreviated list is included here as an aid to
readers.
LIST OF SPECIES
Station numbers SM 121-134 are from the 1977 cruise (south coast of
Natal), SM 162-185 from the 1978 cruise (off East London), and SM 217-255
from the 1979 cruise (off Transkei).
* Discussed further in the systematic account
{+ Deep-water records, over 400 m
Station South African
number Museum number
Family Myriothelidae
Mpriothela capensis Manton, 1940 . F : - « SM 179 SAM-H2954
Family Bougainvilliidae
Garveia crassa (Stechow, 1923). 3 ; ‘ , . TSM 121 SAM-H2933
+?9SM 174. SAM-H2952
TSM 233 SAM-H2968
tSM 234
Family Hydractiniidae
Hydrocorella africana Stechow, 1921 . . . . SM180 SAM-—-H2955 (pp)
SM 185 SAM-—H2955 (pp)
Family Campanulinidae
Egmundella amirantensis Millard & Bouillon, 1973 . SM239 SAM-—H2997
*FEgmundella ?superba Stechow, 1921 : : . SM 239 SAM-H2999
*Lovenella corrugata Thornely, 1908 : - ; - SM 180 SAM-H2960
*Opercularella sp. ; ‘ ‘ ‘ ‘ : ; . TSM 121 SAM-H2946
TSM 131 SAM-H2945
Stegolaria geniculata (Allman, 1888) : 3 : . SM 129 SAM-H2943
Family Haleciidae
Halecium beanii (Johnston, 1838) . Ate Sy ao SMalsit SAM-H2935
SM 239
Halecium dichotomum Allman, 1888 A : : . SM 226 SAM-H3011
Halecium tenellum Hincks, 1861 . . . . . tSM129 SAM-H2934
1SM 134. SAM-H2938
SM 184
SM 185
SM 239 SAM-H2995
SM 250 SAM-H3003
Family Lafoeidae
Acryptolaria conferta (Allman, 1877) _. : , . 1SM 121
{SM 131 SAM-H2941
1SM 162 SAM-H2947
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 131
Station South African
number Museum number
SM 185
1SM 226
+SM 228 SAM-H3015
tSM 232 SAM-H3021
TSM 233 SAM -—H2970
+SM 237
SM 239 SAM-H2989
SM 255
* Acryptolaria rectangularis (Jarvis, 1922) . : 5 . TSM 121 SAM-—H2929
SM 239 SAM-H2987
SM 250
Cryptolarella abyssicola (Allman, 1888) . P ; . TSM 234 SAM-—H2973
Cryptolaria pectinata (Allman, 1888) . : : . SM 239 SAM-H2985
*Cryptolaria spinosa sp.nov. . ; : : ; - SM 239 SAM-H2986
Filellum serratum (Clarke, 1879) . ; : : . TSM 131 SAM-H2936
1SM 134. SAM-H2940
SM 163/4
SM 185
1SM 226 SAM-H3012
Hebella scandens (Bale, 1888) . : 3 : 5 . SM179
SM 180 SAM-H2958
SM 185
SM 239
SM 250
Lafoea dumosa (Fleming, 1820) : : : ; . TSM 121
TSM 134
SM 163/4
SM 185
Zygophylax africana Stechow, 1923 . . . « $SM 129 SAM-—-H2944
TSM 232 SAM-—H3016
TSM 233 SAM-H2969
|
TSM 234
*Zygophylax armata (Ritchie, 1907) . ‘ See eS OS) 4:
SM 179
SM 185
SM 239 SAM-H2990
*Zygophylax inconstans Millard, 1977 _.. ‘ ; . TSM 233 SAM-H2971
*Zygophylax infundibulum Millard, 1958 . 2 F . SM 239 SAM-H2984
Zygophylax sibogae Billard, 1918 . ; P : . >sM.121 SAM-H2930
SM 250 SAM-H3002
Family Campanulariidae
Campanularia hincksii Alder, 1856 . ‘ : : - SM 239 SAM-H2996
SM 250 SAM-—H3004
Campanularia morgansi Millard,1957 . .. 3 . SM 239
Clytia gravieri (Billard, 1904) . . . . . . SM200 SAM-—H3029
SM 217 SAM-H3028
Clytia hemisphaerica (Linnaeus, 1767) . ; : . SM 180
SM 250
Obelia bidentata Clarke, 1875 . ; : ; ; . SM 255 SAM-—H3006
Obelia dichotoma (Linnaeus, 1758) . ‘ : z . $M 180
Family Syntheciidae
*Synthecium hians Millard, 1957 ie het Se ee SIML85 SAM-H2966
SM 239
Family Sertulariidae
Dictyocladium coactum Stechow, 1923 . ‘ ; . SM 239 SAM-—H2982
Dynamena crisioides Lamouroux, 1824. . . . SM 239 SAM-—H2983
132 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Station South African
number Museum number
Parascyphus simplex (Lamouroux, 1816) ; ‘ . SM 163/4 SAM-H2951
SM 239 SAM-H2998
Salacia articulata (Pallas, 1766) ‘ ‘ j : . SM 163/4
Salacia disjuncta Millard, 1964 5 : F . SM 163/4 SAM-H2949
Sertularella arbuscula (Lamouroux, 1816) _.. oa SIM289
SM 250
Sertularella capensis Millard, 1957 . . . . . SM239 SAM-H2981
Sertularella dubia magna Millard, 1958 . : : . SM 185
Sertularella flabellum (Allman, 1886) . ; : . SM 163/4
SM 185
SM 239 SAM-H2979
SM 250
Sertularella leiocarpa (Allman, 1888) . Fi ‘ . TSM 134 SAM-H2937
tSM 226 SAM-—H3009
+SM 232
+SM 233
{SM 237 SAM-—H3027
SM 239 SAM-H2980
Sertularella megista Stechow, 1923. . . . . SM 163/4
SM 179
SM 180
SM185 SAM-H2961
SM 239
SM 250 SAM-—H3000
Sertularella polyzonias xantha Stechow, 1923 . . SM179- SAM-H2953 pp
SM 180 SAM-—H2953 pp
Sertularella pulchra Stechow, 1923. . . . . SM179
SM 184
SM 185
Symplectoscyphus amphoriferus (Allman, 1877) . . 1SM 121 SAM-H2931
tSM 234 SAM-H2974
Symplectoscyphus arboriformis (Marktanner-
Turneretscher, 1890) SM 179
SM 185
SM 239
Thyroscyphus aequalis Warren, 1908 ees 2 « SM239
Family Plumulariidae, subfamily Halopterinae
Antennella quadriaurita Ritchie, 1909 . . . . SM179
SM 180
+SM 226 SAM-H3013
{SM 232
+SM 233
tSM 237. SAM-H2977
SM 239
SM 250
Antennella secundaria (Gmelin, 1791) . ys SeeSMal63/4
Corhiza bellicosa Millard, 1962 ; § 5 ; - SM185 SAM-H2965
Corhiza scotiae (Ritchie, 1907) : : : ‘ . TSM 233 SAM-—H3025
*Corhiza sociabilis sp. nov. 3 4s) = eee!) ESIME237* =eSAIM=H2978
Corhiza valdiviae (Stechow, 1923) . P 5 : - SM180 SAM-—H2959
SM 184
Halopteris gemellipara Millard, 1962 . . . . SM185 SAM-H2963
Halopteris glutinosa (Lamouroux, 1816) : 5 - 8M 239
Halopteris polymorpha (Billard, 1913) . : : . TSM 121 SAM-H2932
+SM 233 SAM-—H3024
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 133
Station South African
number Museum number
Halopteris tuba (Kirchenpauer, 1876) . . . . SM185
Monostaechas faurei Millard, 1958 . f ; ‘ . SM 163/4 SAM-H2950
Family Plumulariidae, subfamily Plumulariinae
Nemertesia ciliata Bale, 1914 . ; : é 3 . TSM 232 SAM-H3020
{SM 233
1SM 237 SAM-H2976
Nemertesia ramosa Lamouroux, 1816 . 5 % . TSM 232 SAM-H3019
Plumularia pulchella Bale, 1882 : : ; : . SM 163/4
SM 239 SAM-—H2994
Family Plumulariidae, subfamily Aglaopheniinae
Aglaophenia pluma dichotoma Kirchenpauer, 1872 . SM 180
SM 185
Cladocarpus leloupi Millard, 1962 . ; . . . SM180 SAM-H2956
SM 185 SAM-H2962
Cladocarpus natalensis Millard, 1977 _.. A ‘ . TSM 121 SAM-H2942
7SM 232) SAM-H3017
{SM 233 SAM-—H3023
*Cladocarpus pegmatissp.Nov.. . . . . . TSM 232 SAM-—H3018
1SM 233 SAM-H2972
Cladocarpus sinuosus Vervoort, 1966. ; : . TSM 162 SAM-H2948
7SM 233 SAM-H3026
Cladocarpus valdiviae Stechow, 1923 é : , . TSM 233 SAM-—H3022
7SM 237 SAM-H2975
SM 239 SAM-—H2993
Thecocarpus fiexuosus plumiferus (Kirchenpauer, 1872) SM 239 SAM-H2992
Thecocarpus flexuosus solidus (Millard, 1958) : . SM 185 SAM-H2964
Thecocarpus fiexuosus umbellatus Millard, 1962 . . SM 239 SAM-H2991
Thecocarpus formosus (Busk, 1851) . : j F . SM 163/4
STATION LIST
Station numbers SM 121-134 are from the 1977 cruise (south coast of
Natal), SM 162-185 from the 1978 cruise (off East London), and SM 217-255
from the 1979 cruise (off Transkei).
Station Co-ordinates Depth,m Date
° °z
SM 121 30°32,2’ 30°52,8’ 625-900 10.5.77
SM 129 30°53,4’ 30°31,7’ 850 1S E77
SM 131 30°43,2’ 30°40,8’ 780 iiL-Syaa/
SM 134 31°00,0’ 30°27,2’ 900 1205577,
SM 162 32°55,0’ 28°31,0’ 630 25.5.78
SM 163/4 33°04,6’ 28°06,6’ 90 26.5.78
SM 174 33°19,6’ 27°52,4’ 760 28.5.78
SM 179 33°30,3’ 27°22,1’ 80 29.5.78
SM 180 33°29,4’ PDN GH 80 29.5.78
SM 184 33°39,4’ PAP IE 86 31.5.78
SM 185 33°39,3’ 27°11,6’ 90 31.5.78
SM 200 31°41,8’ 30°03,2’ 212 20.6.79
SM 217 By 29°18,0’ 212 23.6.79
SM 226 32°28,6’ 28°58,8’ 710-775 24.6.79
SM 228 32°29,5’ 28°57,1’ 650-700 24.6.79
SM 232 32°14,9’ 29°10,4’ 560-620 25.6.79
SM 233 S2alS52n 29°09,8’ 540-580 25.6.79
134 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Station Co-ordinates Depth,m Date
° °B
SM 234 32°15,0’ 29°09,1’ 500-520 25.6.79
SM 237 32°15,4’ 29°09,7’ 600-650 25.6.79
SM 239 32°14,8’ 29°00,8’ 90 25.6.79
SM 250 31°59,3’ 29°22,5’ 150-200 27.6.79
SM 255 31°37,8’ 29°40,8’ 125 28.6.79
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT
Family Campanulinidae
Egmundella ?superba Stechow, 1921
Fig. 1A
Egmundella superba: Stechow, 1923: 126, fig. R. Vervoort, 1966: 110, fig. 10. Millard, 1977:
108, fig. 1D-G.
Material
One infertile sample from Transkei mounted on a slide (SM 239 =
SAM-H2999).
Description
A number of hydrothecae with unbranched pedicels similar to those from
the Natal coast (Millard 1977) but smaller. Some of the hydrothecae have what
appears to be a very delicate diaphragm just below the attachment of the
hydranth. All hydrothecae are very fragile and most have collapsed walls.
Only two nematothecae found, arising from hydrorhiza and containing
batteries of nematocysts.
Measurements (mm)
Hydrotheca, approx. depth . . . 0,36-0,66
maximum diameter . . . . 0,10-0,14
Nematotheca, total length . ; . 0,07-0,09
maximum diameter . ; : . 0,02-0,03
Remarks
The size of the hydrotheca is less than that of the Natal specimen, but closer
to that of the holotype measured by Vervoort (1966). The scarcity of
nematothecae in this material casts doubt on the value of these structures in
identification of some species (see also remarks on Opercularella sp., p. 138).
Lovenella corrugata Thornely, 1908
Fig. 2
Lovenella corrugata Thornely, 1908: 82, pl. 9 (fig. 4). Broch, 1914: 32, fig. 8. Jiderholm, 1920:
4, pl. 1 (fig. 5). Vervoort, 1959: 231, fig. 9.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Fig. 1. Egmundella ?superba Stechow. A. Hydrothecae and nematothecae.
Opercularella sp. B. Gonotheca. C—F. Hydrothecae. Scale in mm/10.
TN
135
136 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Material
Five stems mounted on a microscope slide from off East London
(SM 180 = SAM-H2960).
Description
Most stems unbranched and bearing a single terminal hydrotheca, but one
of them branching twice sympodially. Stem with three or four distinct annula-
tions immediately below hydrotheca and on origin of branches, smooth or
irregularly corrugated for the rest.
Hydrotheca large, deep-campanulate, very faintly corrugated in lower part,
smooth for the rest though occasionally with longitudinal striations originating
from the marginal teeth. Operculum of 8-10 triangular valves seated in
embayments of the margin and distinctly demarcated from it. Diaphragm
distinct. Several of the hydrothecae containing a second regenerating hydrotheca
within them, and one with four such supplementary hydrothecae.
Gonothecae absent.
Measurements (mm)
Stem, height to base of terminal hydrotheca . 1,8-6,4
diameter é : : : : é : . 0,11-0,16
Hydrotheca, height, base to tip of operculum .__‘1,30-1,61
diaphragm to margin : ; : : 3 1,04—-1,26
maximum diameter . . . . . . 0,40-0,46
Remarks
In spite of the absence of gonophores, this material is fairly certainly a
young colony of L. corrugata, which is said to differ from L. clausa (Lovén,
1836), the type species of the genus, only in the corrugations round the base of
the hydrotheca (Thornely 1908).
This material differs from Thornely’s type material in the stem which is
corrugated for most of its length and annulated at the nodes. However, Vervoort
(1959) has illustrated stems with two annulations at each node. The hydrothecae
are lightly corrugated, thus resembling those of Jaderholm (1920) and Vervoort
(1959) and differing from those of Broch (1914) which are strongly annulated.
Only Jaderholm (1920) and Vervoort (1959) give measurements, and their
hydrothecae are slightly shorter, though Vervoort also describes a fragment with
very large hydrothecae which are similar to the present material.
This is a new record from South Africa. The species has been reported from
the Red Sea and from the tropical west coast of Africa.
Opercularella sp.
Fig. 1B-F
Material
Two colonies, both from the Natal coast, the first (SM 121 = SAM-—H2946)
growing on a gorgonian skeleton and bearing gonophores, the second
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 12 i7/
B B-D
Ea)
Fig. 2. Lovenella corrugata Thornely. A. Stem. B—D. Hydrothecae.
Scale: A in mm; B—D in mm/10.
(SM 131 = SAM-H2945) growing on Halecium beanii and infertile. Both
colonies in poor condition.
Description
Colony stolonial. Hydrothecae borne terminally on unbranched pedicels,
and colonies reaching a total height of 4,8 mm. Pedicel slender, with 2-4
annulations at base, and the rest usually smooth, but sometimes with groups of
2-3 annulations at irregular intervals.
Hydrothecae tubular or spindle-shaped, but most of them with collapsed
walls, very variable in size. Diaphragm distinct. Operculum of fragile converging
segments not sharply demarcated from thecal margin. No nematothecae.
Gonotheca elongated, widening rapidly from a slender pedicel and then
retaining the same diameter throughout. Margin damaged in all of the four
examples present, possibly with an operculum. Contents absent.
138 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Measurements (mm)
Hydrotheca, height from diaphragm . 0,44-1,21
diameter'at margin’). =. "ONSET
Gonotheca, height (approx.) 5 ues 1,7-1,8
maximum diameter . ; : . 0,30-0,34
Remarks
In view of the poor condition of this material no definite identification has
been attempted. It was felt advisable, however, to record the presence of an
unbranched Opercularella on the South African coast, as poorly preserved
hydrothecae, probably all of the same species, have been found (but not
recorded) on a number of occasions on the east coast from Natal and as far
south as Port Elizabeth. This is the first record of a gonotheca and the only
samples described.
Branched species of Opercularella have been recorded by Millard (1975,
from Vervoort 1966) and by Millard (1977).
The hydrotheca of the present material is very like that of Egmundella
?superba (see p. 134), and since the nematothecae in the latter are not abundant
or easy to find, there is a possibility that only one species is involved. More well-
preserved material is needed before any definite conclusions can be reached.
Family Lafoeidae
Acryptolaria rectangularis (Jarvis, 1922)
Fig. 4A
Cryptolaria rectangularis Jarvis, 1922: 335, pl. 24 (fig. 3).
Acryptolaria rectangularis: Millard, 1968: 261, fig. 2. Millard, 1975: 171, fig. 5S7A—D.
Material
One fragmentary infertile sample from the south coast of Natal
(SM 121 = SAM-H2929); and two samples from off the Transkei coast
(SM 239 = SAM-H2987; SM 250), the first of these bearing a single coppinia.
Description
The trophosome of these specimens agrees entirely with those previously
described.
The coppinia, however, is of considerable interest. It is well developed and
mature, measuring 4,5 mm in length and 2,3 mm in diameter. It consists of
bottle-shaped gonothecae closely adpressed to one another up to the level of the
shoulders. Amongst these arise long tubular structures of smaller diameter,
which reach to about double the height of the gonothecae and then branch
horizontally and anastomose with each other, thus forming an outer canopy
enclosing the necks of the gonothecae and a spacious cavity distal to them.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 139
D
Fig. 3. Cryptolaria spinosa sp. nov. from holotype. A. Part of branch showing origins of
sub-branches. B. Distal part of branch. C. Hydrothecae and nematothecae. D. Gonothecae
and branching nematothecae from t.s. coppinia. Scale in mm/10.
140 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Within this cavity rest a number of planulae recently shed from the gonothecae.
The tubular structures bear no nematothecae.
Remarks
At first glance this coppinia is very different from that described by Millard
(1968, fig. 2B) for the same species, but closer study and comparison of mounted
slides shows that the earlier (1968) material had been badly eroded, and that the
shorter tubes then illustrated were gonothecae worn down to the level of the
shoulders and the longer tubes the bases of the protective tubes of the outer
canopy.
It appears that this structure has carried the protective function of the
lafoeid coppinia to a higher degree, since the early stages of the planulae can
develop within the enclosed space until such time as they escape through the
meshes of the canopy.
Cryptolaria spinosa sp. nov.
Fig. 3
Material
Holotype: SAM-H2986. Station SM 239: 32°14,8’S 29°00,8'E (off
Transkei), 90 m. One thick, rooted stem 80 mm in height, and a number of
disconnected branches, presumably all from the same colony.
Etymology
Spinosus, Latin, thorny or prickly; referring to the spiny appearance of the
stems.
Description
Stem stiff and strongly fascicled, about 4 mm in diameter at base, giving off
branches in one plane (only two branches remain on the main stem, the others
have all been broken off). No hydrothecae visible; if present completely buried
by the peripheral tubes.
Branches strongly fascicled right to end, bearing two rows of alternate
hydrothecae which are deeply embedded in the peripheral tubes and create
spiny appearance, giving off subalternate sub-branches in one plane, which arise
immediately opposite every first and sixth (or occasionally seventh or eighth)
hydrotheca.
Sub-branches similar to branches, fascicled right to end, bearing two rows
of alternate hydrothecae.
Hydrotheca tubular, adnate for about three-quarters height, this part
completely buried in the peripheral tubes, then bent outward at a right angle,
with perisarc thickened on abcauline side at bend and on base of adcauline wall.
Margin more or less parallel to axis of branch. Diaphragm distinct. Reduplica-
tions of margin common.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 141
Fig. 4. Acryptolaria rectangularis (Jarvis). A. Part of t.s. coppinia, showing protective outer
canopy with two planulae still in the meshes.
Zygophylax inconstans Millard. B. A few of the tubular protective structures from a coppinia.
Zygophylax armata (Ritchie). C. A male gonotheca and two branching nematothecae from a
coppinia.
Zygophylax infundibulum Millard. D. Part of t.s. coppinia showing three gonothecae and
several nematothecate protective structures.
Scale in mm/10.
142 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Nematothecae arising from peripheral tubes at fairly regular intervals,
borne on a slender pedicel, tubular and generally curved outwards though often
irregular, with a diaphragm usually visible.
Several coppiniae present, about 1,5 mm in diameter and covering up to
17 mm of branch, consisting of closely adpressed gonothecae and a few tubular
protective structures. Gonotheca broadly flask-shaped, with a bulging basal
part and a short, widely flared neck bearing a terminal aperture. Tubular
structures about the same height as gonothecae, branching, bearing
nematothecae.
Measurements (mm)
Distance between two hydrothecae on same side . 0,34-0,58
Hydrotheca, length abcauline, adnate part (to bend) 0,14-0,22
length abcauline, free part (beyond bend) . . 0,05-0,09
adnate part/total abcauline length . . . . 0,64-0,80
diameter at margin . : : : : : . 0,09-0,11
Nematotheca, length including pedicel . . . 0,05-0,11
Gonotheca, length . ; : ; : : : . 0,51-0,64
diameter at mouth . : : : : é . 0,17-0,26
Remarks
Ralph (1958) recognized five species of Cryptolaria and illustrated the
gonothecae of the three which occur in New Zealand, namely C. exserta Busk,
1858; C. pectinata (Allman, 1888) and C. prima Busk, 1857. All three have
gonothecae with pointed or conical hood-like structures arching over a sub-
terminal aperture, and from them the present material is immediately dis-
tinguished by its flask-shaped gonothecae. The other two species, C. filicula
(Allman, 1888) and C. chazaliei (Versluys, 1899) can probably be reduced to
synonyms. The trophosome of this new species most closely resembles C. exserta.
Zygophylax armata (Ritchie, 1907)
Fig. 4C
Brucella armata Ritchie, 1907: 533, pl. 2 (fig. 2A-C).
Zygophylax armata: Millard, 1975: 192, fig. 63A—B.
Material
Several infertile colonies from off East London (SM 163/4, 179, 185), and
one fertile colony (SM 239 = SAM-H2990) from off Transkei, all in water
under 100 m in depth.
Description
The fertile specimen bears the first coppiniae to be found in South Africa,
confirming the identification of the species and distinguishing it from Z. biarmata
Billard, 1905, which has a similar trophosome. The coppiniae are small
(3-4 x 1,5 mm) and appear to be young, with only a few (male) gonothecae
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 143
amongst the mass of branching nematothecae. The gonotheca has a short
tubular neck with a single distal aperture, as described by Ritchie (1907) for the
type from Gough Island. However, since the gonothecae are scarce and are not
packed tightly together, no clear hexagonal pattern is visible in surface view as
in Ritchie’s material.
Zygophylax inconstans Millard, 1977
Fig. 4B
Zygophylax inconstans Millard, 1977: 117, fig. 5.
Material
A rich fertile colony from the Transkei coast (SM 233 = SAM-H2971).
Description
Colony consisting of straggling stems closely entwined and adhering to the
bryozoan Bugulella australis Hayward & Cook, 1979.
Many coppiniae present, some completely unprotected as described by
Millard (1977), and some with tufts of branching tubular structures. The latter
appear to be modified stems, since they bear a few hydrothecae and many
nematothecae, but the branching is quite irregular.
Remarks
The presence of protective structures on some of the coppiniae emphasizes
the relationship between this species and Z. profunda Quelch, 1885, and Z. armata
(Ritchie, 1907) as discussed by Millard (1977). However, because of the charac-
teristic flexuous and entangled stems and the association with a bryozoan in
Z. inconstans, it is felt advisable to retain a separate species. The holotype
material was associated with the same species of bryozoan.
Zygophylax infundibulum Millard, 1958
Fig. 4D
Zygophylax infundibulum Millard, 1958: 180, fig. 4B-C. Millard, 1975: 197, fig. 65D-F.
Material
A rich sample from the Transkei coast (SM 239 = SAM-H2984) con-
sisting of fascicled stems reaching 54 mm in height, bearing one mature coppinia
and a number of immature ones.
Description
Trophosome as previously described. Mature coppinia 7 mm in length and
4 mm in diameter. Gonothecae not adpressed, narrow at base and widening
distally, then divided into two outwardly curved necks bearing the terminal
apertures. Protective tubular structures numerous, arising amongst the
gonothecae and rising above them, completely obscuring them and forming a
144 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
bristly coat to the coppinia; each branching irregularly and bearing many
nematothecae similar to those of the trophosome. Each gonotheca apparently
arising from the base of one of the tubular structures.
Remarks
The trophosome of this species is close to that of Z. sibogae Billard, 1918,
and a similar relationship occurs in the gonosome. Billard (1918) describes for
his species a coppinia with some fused and some separate gonothecae, each
with two recurved necks, and the whole surrounded by ‘dactylothecae’.
Unfortunately he gives no illustration.
This endemic South African species has previously been reported only
from the Natal coast. This record extends the distribution southwards to
Transkei. This is the first description of the coppinia.
Family Syntheciidae
Synthecium hians Millard, 1957
Fig. SA-B
Synthecium hians Millard, 1957: 204, fig. 9A—C. Millard, 1975: 238, fig. 77C_—D.
Material
A very old and large fertile colony from off East London, with a mass of
intertwined hydrorhizal tubes giving off upright stems (mostly dead) reaching
28 mm in height (SM 185 = SAM—H2966). Another infertile colony from off
Transkei (SM 239).
Description
Details of stems and hydrothecae as previously described.
Gonothecae borne directly on hydrorhiza or from within the ends of short
tubes which are probably damaged stems or hydrorhizal tubes, flattened, vase-
shaped in broad view, with a wide aperture extending right across the truncated
distal end, with 4-6 very distinct crested annulations, containing one large
gonophore.
Measurements (mm)
Height of gonotheca, = 9 5 ee 21-30
maximum diameter . ; : . 2,0-2,4
Remarks
The gonotheca is here described for the first time for this species. It differs
from that of Synthecium dentigerum Jarvis and S. elegans Allman in its flattened
shape, wide aperture and origin from the hydrorhiza.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S ME/RING NAUDE CRUISES 145
D
SS SL,
Ze
ae
ra
EY,
<=
)
S
Zz
YS
SX)
~<a)
a 25 E
Fig. 5. Synthecium hians Millard. A—B. Gonothecae.
Corhiza sociabilis sp. nov. from holotype. C. Whole stem. D. Anterior view of hydrotheca.
E. Part of hydrocladium.
Scale: A-B, D-E in mm/10; C in cm.
146 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Plumulariidae, subfamily Halopterinae
Corhiza sociabilis sp. nov.
Fig. SC-E, 6A—C
Material
Holotype: SAM-—H2978. Station SM 237: 32°15,4’S 29°09,7’E (off
Transkei), 600-650 m. Three well-developed fertile stems, 35, 41 and 42 mm in
height respectively, two of them with rootstock, and several smaller fragments.
Etymology
Sociabilis, Latin, sociable or easily united; referring to the presence of a
“companion tube’ accompanying each branch.
Description
Colony branching and tree-like, with the final ramifications very delicate
and feathery, the whole roughly in one plane. Stem strongly fascicled, 1-2 mm
in diameter at base, branching and rebranching irregularly. Hydrocladia borne
on all categories of branches.
Stem and branches composed of three kinds of tube (Fig. 6A):
1. Axial tubes, which give rise to sub-branches and/or hydrocladia.
2. A ‘companion tube’ bearing hydrothecae accompanying each branch.
3. Peripheral tubes, which do not bear hydrocladia, but which may bear
nematothecae.
Axial tube unsegmented, giving rise to hydrocladia, each from a short
apophysis, and nematothecae. Thick stems may have several axial tubes all
giving rise to hydrocladia. Hydrocladia usually alternate and forming a double
series, but irregular hydrocladia arising in any plane may interrupt the series
(Fig. 6B). Cauline nematothecae usually 3 to each hydrocladium, of which 1 is
in the axil, 1 above and 1 below.
Companion tube a modified hydrocladium and of similar composition,
arising from an axial tube in place of a hydrocladium and accompanying a
branch which arises (as far as can be seen) from a different axial tube (Fig. 6A);
closely attached to anterior surface of branch for the full length of the latter and
continued for a short distance beyond it. The hydrothecae on the companion
tube may give a superficial impression of cauline hydrothecae, but they do not
relate to the hydrocladia in any regular way. The companion tube appears to be
in cytoplasmic continuity with its accompanying axial tube through a number of
small pores.
Hydrocladium (Fig. SE, 6B) consisting of alternate athecate and thecate
internodes terminating in oblique and straight nodes respectively. Athecate
internodes bearing two median nematothecae, but 2-3 on first internode which
is slightly longer. Thecate internodes bearing one hydrotheca and five nemato-
thecae, one median inferior and two pairs lateral.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 147
Fig. 6. Corhiza sociabilis sp. nov. from holotype. A. Diagram to illustrate method of branching.
B. One of the smaller branches showing an axial tube giving rise to hydrocladia, and accompa-
nied by a companion tube. C. Gonotheca.
at—axial tube, ct—companion tube, h—hydrocladium, pt—peripheral tube.
Scale in mm/10.
148 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Hydrotheca cup-shaped, with depth approximately equal to diameter,
adnate for under half height, then free. Free part of adcauline wall slightly
concave. Margin untoothed, facing obliquely away from stem.
Nematothecae two-chambered and movable, with funnel-shaped distal
chamber. Median inferior nematotheca seated below hydrotheca and not
reaching its base. Larger lateral nematotheca seated on finger-shaped process
next to hydrotheca, not quite reaching to margin. Smaller lateral nematotheca
seated in axis of finger-shaped process.
Gonotheca (Fig. 6C) arising from hydrocladium or companion tube
immediately below and to one side of the base of the hydrotheca, with a pedicel
of two segments, curved and pear-shaped, with a wide operculate distal opening,
bearing two large nematothecae near base. Sex probably female, since there is a
single large embryo-like structure, but preservation not very good.
Measurements (mm)
Thecate internode, length . : : 0,29-0,39
Athecate internode, length (not first ane 0,30-0,42
Hydrotheca, height abcauline . . . O,11-0,21
height adcauline, adnate part . : . 0,10-0,14
free part . : ; . 0,12-0,20
adnate part/total Adonuline heen 5 . 0,39-0,50
diameter at margin . : ; i . 0,18-0,23
Gonotheca, height . : . ‘ ; . 0,45-0,52
maximum diameter . . . . . 0,29-0,32
Remarks
This species is unique in the possession of the “companion tube’. Its
relationships lie with the Halopterinae, particularly in the large hydrotheca and
the shape of the gonotheca which also bears nematothecae.
It has been placed in the genus Corhiza because of the fascicled stem, in
which more than one tube may give origin to hydrocladia, and in which one
(the companion tube) terminates as a hydrocladium.
Family Plumulariidae, subfamily Aglaopheniinae
Cladocarpus pegmatis sp. nov.
Fig. 7
Material
Holotype: SAM-H3018. Station SM 232: 32°14,9’S 29°10,4’E, 560-620 m
(off Transkei). One rooted, infertile stem and a number of fragments and
detached hydrocladia.
Paratype: SAM-H2972. Station SM 233: 32°15,2’S 29°09,8’E, 540-580 m
(off Transkei). One incomplete infertile stem 15 mm in height, bearing seven
hydrocladia.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 149
Fig. 7. Cladocarpus pegmatis sp. nov. (A—D from the holotype, E from paratype). A. Anterior
view of distal part of stem showing origins of hydrocladia. This part has an extra athecate
internode. B—E. Hydrothecae. Scale in mm/10.
Cc D
150 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Etymology
Pegma, Latin, a bookcase or shelf; referring to the horizontal shelf or
septum in the hydrotheca.
Description of holotype
Hydrorhiza forming a branching rootstock for penetration of mud. Stem
slender, moderately stiff, weakly fascicled at base, unbranched, reaching 40 mm
in height, bearing alternate hydrocladia from the axial tube. Axial tube seg-
mented in distal region, the internodes separated by oblique nodes and each
bearing one hydrocladial apophysis and two cauline nematothecae of which one
is in the axil of the apophysis and one below it. In the proximal unsegmented
region there may be three cauline nematothecae between two consecutive
hydrocladia. Rarely an extra ahydrocladiate internode bearing one nematotheca
may be present (Fig. 7A). Stem without septa.
Hydrocladium bearing hydrothecae on anterodistal surface, consisting of
thecate internodes separated by oblique nodes. Internodes straight to slightly
curved; with up to 8 septa (1 below hydrotheca, 0-6 behind it and 0-1 above it);
with 1 hydrotheca and 3 nematothecae, | median inferior and | pair laterals.
Hydrotheca moderately deep (height = 2-24 times diameter); abcauline
wall convex except for a slight concavity near distal end; widest at about the
centre and narrowing slightly to margin, with a bracket-shaped adcauline
intrathecal septum at about one-third height. Margin slightly oblique and tilted
away from hydrocladium, with one median abcauline tooth and crenulated
side-edges.
Median inferior nematotheca seated below hydrotheca and not reaching its
base, bifurcated and with two circular terminal apertures and one at base of
adcauline wall. Lateral nematotheca saccular, with 3-5 terminal apertures
overtopping thecal margin and one opening on median surface; Cauline nema-
totheca large, saccular and bifurcated; with two terminal apertures.
Gonosome absent.
Paratype exactly similar to holotype.
Measurements (mm)
Holotype Paratype
Hydrocladium, internode length . . 0,80—1,20 1,01—-1,13
diameter (at distalend) . . . 0,09-0,13 0,09-0,10
Hydrotheca, depth to tip of tooth . 0,64-0,82 0,67-0,79
diameter at margin . f ; . 0,30-0,35 0,31-0,38
depth/diameter f : : . 2,06-2,42 2,08—2,35
Remarks
This species is closely related to C. distomus Clarke, 1907, and its allies,
namely C. bathyzonatus Ritchie, 1911, C. multiapertus Billard, 1911, C. alatus
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 151
Jarvis, 1922, and C. plumularioides Jarvis, 1922. These were included as possible
synonyms for C. distomus by Millard (1975). Of them all, the closest is C. alatus,
in which the proportions of the hydrotheca and the structure of the lateral
nematotheca are similar, and in which according to Jarvis (1922) there is an
adcauline intrathecal septum. (Vervoort (1966: 153) has redescribed the type of
this species but does not mention the intrathecal septum.) There are, however,
small but significant differences. C. alatus has an unsegmented stem with more
cauline nematothecae, the hydrotheca is smaller and differently shaped, being
widest at the margin, and the median inferior nematotheca has only one
terminal aperture.
Another closely related species is C. Jeloupi Millard, 1962, in which the
proportions of the hydrotheca are close, the lateral nematotheca is similar and
the median inferior nematotheca is bifurcated. However, there are two intrathecal
septa, one adcauline and one abcauline. Millard (1975) mentions a variation
where intrathecal septa may be absent in young hydrothecae, but if one is
absent, both are absent, and the adcauline septum does not occur without the
abcauline one. Smaller differences include larger and differently shaped hydro-
thecae in C. Jeloupi, and shorter hydrocladia.
This new species is thus established mainly on the combination of the
following characters: the distinctive shape of the hydrotheca, the presence of one
(adcauline) intrathecal septum and a bifurcated median inferior nematotheca.
DISCUSSION
The species from the 1977 cruise of the Meiring Naude were included in the
analysis of geographical distribution previously published (Millard 1978). The
TABLE 1
A list of species whose geographical range is extended as compared
with the results of Millard (1978). The numbers in brackets indicate
new sectors, as defined in the above-mentioned paper.
A. Extension southwards B. Extension northwards
Acryptolaria rectangularis (22) Cladocarpus valdiviae (22)
Cladocarpus natalensis (22) Corhiza scotiae (22)
Egmundella amirantensis (22) Cryptolarella abyssicola (22)
Garveia crassa (22) Nemertesia ciliata (22)
Halopteris polymorpha (22)
Parascyphus simplex (21, 22)
Symplectoscyphus amphoriferus (22)
Zygophylax armata (20)
Zygophylax inconstans (22)
Zygophylax infundibulum (22)
152 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
results of the 1978 and 1979 cruises have supplied some additional records to the
above-mentioned analysis. Quite a number of gaps in the range of distribution
as given in Appendix 2 by Millard (1978) are satisfactorily filled in, and,
moreover, the range is extended for several species (Table 1). For four species
the range is extended from the south coast northwards into the East London/
Transkei area and for ten the range is extended from the east coast southwards
into the same area.
In addition there are three new species: Cryptolaria spinosa (*sector 22),
Corhiza sociabilis (sector 22), Cladocarpus pegmatis (sector 22); and one new
record from the country: Lovenella corrugata (sector 21).
The depth range is also extended for various species, but most interesting
of all are the records from deep water (over 400 m) which was the primary
object of the expedition. Millard (1978, table 6) gave a list of 45 species occurring
in depths of over 400 m on the South African coast. To this list 6 more species
may now be added, bringing the total to 51 (Table 2). Two of these are new
TABLE 2
Additions to the list of ‘deep water’ hydroids of South Africa (depths over 400 m).
Previously Revised Component
known depth depth
range (m) range (m)
Cladocarpus pegmatis sp. nov. a aks — 540-620 Endemic
Cladocarpus valdiviae Soe imap) 23 155-200 90-650 Endemic
Corhiza scotiae . She SEALE Sie! : 18-120 18-580 Endemic
Corhiza sociabilis sp. nov. ; : : — 600-650 Endemic
Halecium dichotomum ‘ ; 5 : 11-200 11-775 Endemic
Nemertesia ciliata . i : , s 11-392 11-650 Temperate
species, and for the other four the known depth is increased, bringing them into
the deep-water category. Records from deep water have been indicated by a
dagger in the list of species on p. 130.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The author would like to acknowledge with thanks the help of Dr P. L.
Cook of the British Museum (Natural History) in identifying the bryozoan
associated with Zygophylax inconstans.
* See legend to Table 1.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 153
REFERENCES
BILLARD, A. 1918. Notes sur quelques espéces d’hydroides de l’expédition du “Siboga’’.
Archs Zool. exp. gén. 57: 21-27.
Brocu, H. 1914. Hydrozoa benthonica. Beitr. Kennt. Meeresfauna Westafr. 1: 19-50.
JADERHOLM, E. 1920. On some exotic hydroids in the Swedish Zoological State Museum.
Ark. Zool. 13 (3): 1-11.
Jarvis, F. E. 1922. The hydroids from the Chagos, Seychelles and other islands and from the
coasts of British East Africa and Zanzibar. Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. (Zool.) 18: 331-360.
Louw, E. 1980. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude cruises. Part 10. Station data
1977, 1978, 1979. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 81: 187-205.
Miiiarp, N. A. H. 1957. The Hydrozoa of False Bay, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 43:
173-243.
Mixarp, N. A. H. 1958. Hydrozoa from the coasts of Natal and Portuguese East Africa.
Part I. Calyptoblastea. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 44: 165-226.
Muyarp, N. A. H. 1968. South African hydroids from Dr Th. Mortensen’s Java—South Africa
Expedition, 1929-1930. Vidensk. Meddr dansk naturh. Foren. 131: 251-288.
MiLiarp, N. A. H. 1975. Monograph on the Hydroida of southern Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus.
68: 1-513.
Mitiarp, N. A. H. 1977. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude cruises. Part 3.
Hydroida. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 73: 105-131.
MiLiarb, N. A. H. 1978. The geographical distribution of southern African hydroids. Ann.
S. Afr. Mus. 74: 159-200.
RAcpu, P. M. 1958. New Zealand thecate hydroids. Part II. —Families Lafoeidae, Lineolariidae,
Haleciidae and Syntheciidae. Trans. R. Soc. N.Z. 85: 301-356.
RircutE, J. 1907. The hydroids of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. Trans. R. Soc.
Edinb. 45: 519-545.
StecHow, E. 1923. Zur Kenntnis der Hydroidenfauna des Mittelmeeres, Amerikas und
anderer Gebiete. II. Teil. Zool. Jb. (System. Abt.) 47: 29-270.
THORNELY, L. R. 1908. Reports on the marine biology of the Sudanese Red Sea. —x.—Hydroida
collected by Mr C. Crossland from October 1904 to May 1905. J. Linn. Soc. Zool. 31:
80-85.
VERVOORT, W. 1959. The Hydroida of the tropical west coast of Africa. Atlantide Rep. 5:
211-325.
VERVOORT, W. 1966. Bathyal and abyssal hydroids. Galathea Rep. 8: 97-174.
ae
*
; ie
oe
a ae
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
Nnov., syn. nov., etc.
‘An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name ‘(and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-1SA
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. “... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. DuToit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
“Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
N. A. H. MILLARD
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S
MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
PART I!
HYDROIDA
| VOLUME 82 PART 5 AUGUST 1980 ISSN 0303-2515
:
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
|
|
: |
| ‘
|
|
|
_ CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction :
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are. not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969; 36, fig. 16) describes...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Pagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuULLOouGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FiscHer, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHer, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320, :
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
TueE.e, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. Jn: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
. (continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 82. Band
August 1980 Augustus
Part 5 Deel
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION,
PRINCE EDWARD, AND CROZET ISLANDS
(CRUSTACEA, ISOPODA)
By
BRIAN KENSLEY
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1=3;,'5-8); 3-2. 4-5..8) tap), S(1=3.55 7-9)
6(1, t.-p.i.), 711-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t—p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 311-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 98 X
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION, PRINCE EDWARD, AND
CROZET ISLANDS (CRUSTACEA, ISOPODA)
By
BRIAN KENSLEY
Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C.
(With 12 figures and 2 tables)
LMS. accepted 19 February 1980]
ABSTRACT
23 species of marine isopods, representing 11 families and 20 genera are recorded from
depths ranging from 30 to 930 m. Four new species are described, viz. Bathygnathia porca,
Colanthura pingouin, Paranthura possessia, and Ilyarachna crozetensis. The geographic
distribution of the isopod fauna of Prince Edward, Marion, and Crozet Islands is discussed
and the affinities with the Antarctic, South America, Kerguelen Island, and the widespread
Subantarctic Islands noted. It is concluded that the Prince Edward/Crozet isopod fauna should
be regarded as part of the Kerguelen Transitional Province.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction : : 4 : j = 21155
Species and station list . . . a LS
Systematic discussion : F ; =) 161
Zoogeographic comments. $ ; - 180
Acknowledgements . ; 3 : 83
References . : : A 3 ; = 183
INTRODUCTION
The present collection of isopods was submitted to the author by P. Arnaud
of Marseille. The collection was made during March-April 1976, in an area
embracing the Crozet Island group, and Marion and Prince Edward Islands,
with a very few stations from Kerguelen Island (Fig. 1). All the collecting was
done during Cruise MD.08 of the French research vessel Marion- Dufresne,
using Charcot dredges, king crab traps, beam trawls, Reineck corers, and
shrimp trawls.
The bulk of the material, and all holotypes, have been deposited in the
Paris Museum, while paratypes and some duplicate material have been deposited
in the South African Museum and the United States National Museum. The
Serolidae are not included in the present paper.
Brief history of isopod collecting in the Prince Edward/Crozet|
Kerguelen Island area
Although Marion, Prince Edward, Kerguelen, and the Crozet Islands have
been visited by biological collectors intermittently since the 1880s, few compre-
hensive reports on the crustacean fauna have appeared. The present report
155
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 82 (5), 1980: 155-185, 12 figs, 2 tables.
156 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
forms yet another partial contribution to the overall isopod faunule of this
group of islands. The major reports on isopods from these islands are mentioned
below more or less in chronological order. Kerguelen is included because of its
proximity and similarity of isopod fauna.
The earliest collecting at Kerguelen was done by the Royal Antarctic
Expedition in 1840. Although four species of crustaceans were collected, no
report was issued. The Challenger stopped at Prince Edward, Marion, the
Crozets, and Kerguelen during December 1874 and January 1875, on its way
to the Antarctic Continent. Beddard (1884, 1886) reported on the isopods. The
transit of Venus provoked the U.S.A., Great Britain, and Germany to send
expeditions to Kerguelen in 1874-1875. The German corvette Gazelle carried
out collecting in 1875, the isopods being reported by Studer (1879, 1882, 1884,
1889). At the same time that the Gazelle party was on Kerguelen, the United
States ship Swatara arrived, carrying the United States Transit of Venus
Expedition. J. H. Kidder did some intertidal and terrestrial collecting. The
crustaceans, including three species of isopods, were reported on by Smith
(1876). The British Transit of Venus Expedition biologist was A. E. Eaton.
Miers (1875a, 1875b, 1879) reported on the isopods he collected.
The British research ship Discovery worked in the vicinity of the Crozets,
and Hodgson (1910) also mentions material from the ‘Kerguelen Province’.
The German vessel Gauss of the Deutsches Siidpolar-Expedition visited
Kerguelen (Vanhoffen 1914), as did the British, Australian, and New Zealand
Antarctic Expedition of 1929-1931 (Hale 1946, 1952). Although R. Jeannel of
the Paris Museum collected marine organisms at Marion Island from the
French vessel Bougainville in 1939, the collection report was never published.
The Norwegian Antarctic Expedition isopods from Kerguelen and Crozet were
dealt with by Stephensen (1947), while Sheppard (1957) reported on material
collected from 1925 to 1936 by the British Discovery IT in the general vicinity of
all three island groups. Kussakin (1967, English translation 1968) dealt with the
systematics and antarctic and subantarctic isopods collected by the Soviet
Antarctic Expedition of 1955-1958, summarized much of the preceding work,
and produced a very useful zoogeographic assessment of the knowledge to that
date. Fuller (1967) presented a preliminary report on the intertidal fauna and
flora of Marion Island. From this collection, Cleret (1971) described two
asellote isopods. Fuller’s report was extensively revised and expanded by
De Villiers (1976), as part of the South African Biological/Geological Expedition
to Marion Island. The isopods listed in his report were identified by the present
writer, with a species of Jaeropsis being dealt with in a separate publication
(Kensley 1975b). Carvacho (1977) added to the knowledge of the isopod fauna
of Kerguelen, dealing with material collected by the French vessel La Japonaise.
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION, PRINCE EDWARD AND CROZET
Material
Suborder VALVIFERA
Family Arcturidae
Antarcturus aculeatus Kussakin, 1967
1g 12
23 2ovig. 2
1 ovig. 2
3 ovig. 2 48
me We W-
Oy Oy OY OY OY
1 ovig. 2
Station no.
9/CP. 64
9/CP. 65
9/CP. 66
9/CP. 74
9/CP. 75
68/CP. 275
75/CP.
303
71/DC. 314
78/CP.
319
Locality
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
SW of I. aux Cochons
Off I. de la Possession
Between Possession and
J. de l’Est
Between Possession and
{. de l’Est
Antarcturus furcatus furcatus (Studer, 1882)
9/CL. 63
9/CP. 64
9/CP. 66
9/CP. 74
9/CP. 75
13
3 ovig. 2
3 ovig. 2
7 ovig. 2
3 ovig. 2
2 ovig. 2
1
19
Os Os Os OY
4
1
2
1
—
WARN
O, O,O; 0,0; AY
1 ovig. 2
8 ovig.2 4
2 ovig.2 1
4ovig.2 1
2 ovig.2 2
6 ovig. 2
83 Tovig. 2
42/CP.
48/CP.
62/CP.
68/CP.
73/CP.
75/CP.
78/CP.
75/CP.
197
209
2511
275
295
303
319
326
Astacilla marionis Beddard, 1886
9/CP. 64
9/CP. 65
9/CP. 66
9/CP. 74
9/CP. 75
13 2ovig. 2
2 ovig. 2
1 ovig. 2
4 ovig. 2
22
23
43 3ovig. 2
NA
Oy Oy
1 ovig. 2 29
1 ovig. 2
13/CP.
16/CL.
85
95
18/DC. 107
32/DC. 162
33/DC. 164
35/DC. 170
48/CP.
209
53/DC. 233
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
Between Possession and
{. aux Cochons
Between Possession and
1. aux Cochons
W of I. aux Cochons
SW of I. aux Cochons
E of Is. des Pingouins
Off I. de la Possession
Between Possession and
{. de l’Est
Off I. de la Possession
{. de la Possession
{. de la Possession
J. de la Possession
J. de la Possession
J. de la Possession
E of Marion Is.
NE of Marion Is.
NE of Marion Is.
S of Marion Is.
Between Marion and
Prince Edward Is.
Between Marion and
Prince Edward Is.
Between Marion and
Prince Edward Is.
Between Possession and
J. aux Cochons
75/CP. 303 1. de la Possession
Co-ordinates
46°10’S 51°49’E
46°22’S 51°51’E
46°23’S 51°52’E
46°22’S 51°54’E
46°19’S 51°52’E
46°16’S 49°37’E
46°19’S 51°52’E
46°25’S 51°59’E
46°23’S 51°58’E
46°21’S 51°51’E
46°10’S 51°49’E
46°23’S 51°52’E
46°22’S 51°54’E
46°19’S 51°52’E
46°21’S 51°34’E
46°05’S 50°37’E
46°05’S 50°01’E
46°16’S 49°37’E
46°24’S 50°37’E
46°19’S 51°52’E
46°23’S 51°58’E
46°21’S 51°52’E
46°10’S 51°49’E
46°22’S 51°S1’E
46°23’S 51°52’E
46°22’S 51°54’E
46°19’S 51°52’E
46°56'S 37°5S’E
46°50’S 37°59’E
46°49’S 37°5S6’E
46°59’S 37°46’E
46°52’S 37°5S1’E
46°39’S 38°00’E
46°05’S 50°37’E
46°07’S 50°20’E
46°19’S 51°52’E
157
Depth
{m)
120-150
112
90-110
150-160
150-340
262-270
155-257
247-270
142-170
126-141
120-150
90-110
150-160
150-340
172-220
140-200
210
262-270
263-412
155-257
142-170
135-145
120-150
112
90-110
150-160
150-340
120
138-142
140
83-100
45
53
140-200
110
155-257
158
Material
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Station no.
Locality
Microarcturus hirticornis (Monod, 1926)
1 ovig. 2
2 juv.
2 ovig. 2
1 ovig. 2
1 ovig. 2
13
1 ovig. 2
ay
1 ovig. 2
a
OQ,O, Oy
1 ovig. 2
Family Pseudidotheidae
9/CP. 64
26/64
9/CP. 74
31/DC. 156
42/CP. 197
48/CP. 209
50/DC. 216
59/DC. 252
62/CP. 257
75/CP. 303
Arcturides cornutus Studer, 1882
33 2ovig.2? 22
113 19
33 S 11 ovig.2 169
22 juv.
NW
Oy Os OY
1 ovig.2 22
4 juv.
1 ovig. 2
Re
Os Os
4 ovig.2 192
12 1 juv.
19
5 ovig.2 42
1 ovig.2 72
3 juv.
1 @
Uw
fon}
OsO, OOO, AWW A AO;
1 ovig. 2
1 ovig. 2
3@
1 juv.
19
— a
3 ovig. 2
1 ovig. 2
1 ovig. 2
43 ovig. 2 172
17 juv.
22
Nn
ae ore
Oy
BSS
+0
ay
Oy OY
—
+0
2 juv.
9/CP. 65
9/CP. 66
9/CP. 74
9/CP. 75
13/CP. 85
19/DC. 110
23/DC. 129
25/CP. 134
26/CP. 135
27/DC. 136
31/DC. 156
36/CP. 173
36/CP. 175
48/CP. 209
54/DC. 234
66/CP. 270
68/CP. 275
73/CP. 295
74/DC. 296
75/CP. 303
75/CP. 326
3/11
22/58
23/59
24/61
26/63
26/64
Suborder ANTHURIDEA
Family Paranthuridae
Colanthura pingouin sp. nov.
1 ovig. 2
72/DC. 289
Off I. de la Possession
Crozet Islands
Off I. de la Possession
S of Marion Is.
Between Possession and
j. aux Cochons
Between Possession and
{. aux Cochons
Between Possession and
j. aux Cochons
W of I. aux Cochons
W of I. aux Cochons
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
E of Marion Is.
NE of Marion Is.
SE of Marion Is.
N of Marion Is.
NE of Marion Is.
N of Marion Is.
S of Marion Is.
Off Prince Edward Is.
Off Prince Edward Is.
Between Possession and
J. aux Cochons
NE of Is. des Ap6tres
W of I. aux Cochons
SW of f. aux Cochons
E of Is. des Pingouins
E of Is. des Pingouins
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
E of Kerguelen Is.
NE of Kerguelen Is.
SE of Kerguelen Is.
SE of Kerguelen Is.
Off Crozet Islands
Off Crozet Islands
E of Is. des Pingouins
Co-ordinates
46°10’S 51°49’E
46°24’S 51°59’E
46°22’S 51°54’E
46°59’S 37°46’E
46°21’S 51°34’E
46°05’S 50°37’E
45°51’S 50°37’E
45°59’S 49°59’E
46°05’S 50°01’E
46°19’S 51°52’E
46°22’S 51°51’E
46°23’S 51°52’E
46°22’S 51°54’E
46°19’S 51°52’E
46°56’S. 37°55’E
46°45’S 38°03’E
46°57’S 38°01’E
46°45’S 37°56’E
46°50’S 38°00’E
46°45’S 37°54’E
46°59’S 37°46’E
46°40’S 38°06’E
46°40’S 38°07’E
46°05’S 50°37’E
45°55’S 50°20’E
46°15’S 49°13’E
46°16’S 49°37’'E
46°24’S 50°37’E
46°17'S 50°47E
46°19’S 51°52’E
46°21’S 51°52’E
49°25’S 71°S1’E
48°58’S 70°51’E
49°59’S 70°01’E
50°10’S 69°48’E
46°21’S 51°S5’E
46°24’S 51°59’E
46°23’S 50°32’E
Depth
(m)
120-150
172-220
140-200
150
210-217
210
155-257
112
90-110
150-160
150-340
120
190
250-460
185-232
135-145
185
185
315-570
375-570
140-200
130-145
500-562
262-270
263-412
290
155-257
135-145
620-650
90-105
158
195
230
180
155-187
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION, PRINCE EDWARD AND CROZET
Material
Station no.
Paranthura possessia sp. nov.
19
1S 4ovig.2 72
19
19
2 2 juv.
9/CP. 74
46/CP. 204
68/CP. 273
75/CP. 303
78/CP. 319
Suborder FLABELLIFERA
Family Aegidae
Aega falklandica Kussakin, 1967
1 ovig. 2 4 juv.
12
25/CP. 134
68/CP. 275
Aega semicarinata Miers 1875a
Family Cirolanidae
9/CP. 63
9/CP. 64
9/CP. 74
10/CL. 76
. 42/CP. 197
72/DC. 289
75/CP. 326
Cirolana nitida Hale, 1952
1s 42
+ 100 adults and juv.
192 1 juv.
1g 12
1¢
19 1 juv.
12 1 juv.
IG?
1° 12 juv.
13
1 ovig. 2
+ 100 adults and juv.
+ 500 adults and juv.
+ 100 adults and juv.
Family Sphaeromatidae
9/CL. 61
9/CL. 63
9/CL. 66
40/DC. 186
42/CP. 197
50/DC. 216
57/DC. 241
60/DC. 248
71/DC. 283
74/DC. 296
75/CL. 305
75/CL. 306
75/CL. 307
75/CL. 308
Dynamenella eatoni (Miers, 18755)
1
2
ie) 1 juv.
18/RK. 109
21/DC. 118
22/DC. 124
24/CC. 128
75/CL. 307
Locality
Off I. de la Possession
Between Possession and
J. aux Cochons
S of {. aux Cochons
Off I. de la Possession
Between Possession and
I. de l’Est
N of Marion Is.
SW of I. aux Cochons
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
NE of Marion Is.
Between Possession and
{. aux Cochons
E of Is. des Pingouins
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
Off Crozet Islands
Between Possession and
{. aux Cochons
Between Possession and
J. aux Cochons
NW of f. aux Cochons
W of I. aux Cochons
Off I. aux Cochons
E of Is. des Pingouins
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
Off I. de la Possession
NE of Marion Is.
NE of Marion Is.
NE of Marion Is.
NE of Marion Is.
Off Crozet Islands
Euvallentinia darwini (Cunningham, 1871)
13
52/DC. 224
Between Possession and
J. aux Cochons
Co-ordinates
46°22’S 51°54’E
46°10’S 50°14’E
46°17’S 49°37’E
46°19’S 51°52’E
46°23’S 51°58’E
46°45’S 37°56’E
46°16’S 49°37’E
46°21’S 51°S1’E
46°10’S 51°49’E
46°22’S 51°54’E
46°52’S 37°52’E
46°21’S 51°34’E
46°23’S 50°32’E
46°21’S 51°52’E
46°22’S 51°50’E
46°21’S 51°51’E
46°23’S 51°52’E
46°21’S 51°33’E
46°21’S 51°34’E
45°51’S 50°38’E
45°46’S 50°05’E
46°02’S 49°48’E
46°37’S 50°39’E
46°17’S 50°47’E
46°21’S 51°50’E
46°20’S 51°53’E
46°21’S 51°52’E
46°20’S 51°52’E
46°49’S 37°56’E
46°53’S 37°52’E
46°52’S 37°5S1’E
46°52’S 37°52’E
46°21’S 51°52’E
46°06’S 50°19’E
159
Depth
(m)
150-160
375-490
275
155-257
142-170
185-252
262-270
126-141
120-150
120-160
45
172-220
155-187
135-187
75-104
126-141
90-110
190
172-220
150
195-200
245-250
268-270
290
120
145
125
150
138
50
30
52
125
50-53
160
Material Station no.
Suborder GNATHIIDEA
Family Gnathiidae
Bathygnathia porca sp. nov.
13 1 ovig. 2 60/DC. 248
Euneognathia gigas (Beddard, 1886)
29 59/DC. 252
1? 68/CP. 275
Gnathia antarctica (Studer, 1884)
19 28/DC. 143
1¢3 55/CP. 237
1g lovig.2 12 68/CP. 275
19 7T1/DC. 314
Suborder ASELLOTA
Family Dendrotionidae
Locality
W of I. aux Cochons
W of I. aux Cochons
SW of i. aux Cochons
S of Prince Edward Is.
NE of Is. des Apdtres
SW of i. aux Cochons
Between Possession and
I. de l'Est
Acanthomunna spinipes (Vanhoffen, 1914)
32 9/CP. 75
12 42/CP. 197
13 2ovig. 2 68/CP. 275
13 75/CP. 303
19 78/CP. 319
Family Ilyarachnidae
Off I. de la Possession
Between Possession and
{. aux Cochons
SW I. aux Cochons
Off I. de la Possession
Between Possession and
I. de l’Est
Echinozone cf. spicata (Hodgson, 1910)
19 48/CP. 209
12 54/DC, 234
39 59/DC. 252
13 60/DC. 248
13 68/CP. 275
19 74/DC. 296
Ilyarachna crozetensis sp. nov.
12 46/CP. 204
19 57/DC. 241
13 60/DC. 248
2® 64/DC. 268
Family Jaeropsidae
Jaeropsis marionis Beddard, 1886
19 26/64
Family Janiridae
Notasellus sarsi Pfeffer, 1887
1¢3 9/CP. 75
19 42/CP. 197
2 juv.
Between Possession and
{. aux Cochons
NE of Is. des ApGtres
W of I. aux Cochons
W of I. aux Cochons
SW of I. aux Cochons
E of Is. des Pingouins
Between Possession and
{. aux Cochons
NW of i. aux Cochons
W of I. aux Cochons
W of I. aux Cochons
Off Crozet Islands
Off I. de la Possession
Between Possession and
jf. aux Cochons
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Co-ordinates
46°02’S 49°48’E
45°59’S 49°59’E
46°16’S 49°37’E
46°43’S 37°STE
45°S7’S 50°21’E
46°16’S 49°37’E
46°25’S 51°59’E
46°19’S 51°52’E
46°21’S 51°34’E
46°16’S 49°37'E
46°19’S 51°52’E
46°23’S 51°58’E
46°05’S 50°37’E
45°55’S 50°20’E
45°59’S 49°59’E
46°02’S 49°48’E
46°16’S 49°37’E
46°17’S 50°47'E
46°10'S 50°14’E
45°46’S 50°05’E
46°02’S 49°48/E
46°02’S 49°08’E
46°24’S 51°59’E
46°19’S 51°52’E
46°21’S 51°34’E
Depth
(m)
245-250
210-217
262-270
246-285
150
262-270
247-270
150-340
172-220
262-270
155-257
142-170
140-200
130-145
210-217
245-250
262-270
290
375-490
195-200
245-250
900-930
180
150-340
172-220
——
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION, PRINCE EDWARD AND CROZET
Material
iS?
29
109 9 juy.
PE pe
2 ovig.2 22
19
1 ovig. 2
Family Munnidae
Station no.
48/CP. 209
54/DC. 234
61/DC. 255
62/CP. 257
68/CP. 275
78/CP. 319
26/64
Munna neglecta Monod, 1931
te Ug
9/CP. 75
39/DC. 178
78/CP. 319
93 4ovig.2 32 26/64
Paramunna foresti Carvacho, 1977
Locality
Between Possession and
{. aux Cochons
NE of Is. des Apdtres
W of I. aux Cochons
W of I. aux Cochons
SW of i. aux Cochons
Between Possession and
J. de ’Est
Off Crozet Islands
Off I. de la Possession
Off Crozet Islands
Between Possession and
{. de l'Est
Off Crozet Islands
Off I. de la Possession
SW of I. aux Cochons
1 ovig. 2 8/CP. 64
Paramunna kerguelensis Vanh6ffen, 1914
29 68/CP. 275
1 ovig. 2 78/CP. 319
SYSTEMATIC DISCUSSION
Between Possession and
{. de l'Est
Suborder VALVIFERA
Antarcturus aculeatus Kussakin
Family Arcturidae
Antarcturus aculeatus Kussakin, 1967: 281, figs 36-38.
Previous records
North coast of Patagonia, 400-500 m.
Remarks
Co-ordinates
46°05’S 50°37’E
45°55’S 50°20’E
46°05’S 50°08’E
46°05’S 50°01’E
46°16’S 49°37'E
46°23’S 51°58’E
46°24’S 51°59’E
46°19’S 51°52’E
46°20’S 51°32’E
46°23’S 51°58’E
46°24’S 51°59’E
46°10’S 51°49’E
46°16’S 49°37’E
46°23’S 51°58’E
161
Depth
(m)
140-200
130-145
67
201
262-270
142-170
180
150-340
330-600
142-170
180
120-150
270-262
142-170
Kussakin (1967) noted the extreme variability of this species with regard
to the spination of the cephalon, pereon, and pleon. This variability is again
noted in the present material and is apparently unrelated to sexual or geographic
differences. The specimens are consistent in the structure of appendages and
agree with the description and figures given by Kussakin. The enormous
distance between Patagonia and the Crozet Islands gives pause, yet no differences
could be detected on which to separate the two populations.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
162
o0Z
a
Spue/s/ uajanbiay
“S/ |Ned “1S
(2)
2)
‘S/ WepJajswy
909 00S
*SOI}I[PIOT PURISI SuIMOYsS dey “| ‘BLT
oF of
*s/ uolsew
0
. =A
1SF.] 8p 9/] O suoysog xne aly S$] PJeMPFZ 99Ulig
So,
700, Sep
Say
spuejs} }azo19
UB390 UeIpu] UJaYyjnos
Ko
KR
5
S255
SKK
002
50S
OP
Z
< SC
aseeatee
pecesteeeeeees
Sects
scenatee
KKK,
SONS
eetchctet
Se
QOS
x>
SRR
163
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION, PRINCE EDWARD AND CROZET
1921: 243.
2 yyy: \
SS Is
=
CELI
Fig. 2
, pl. 25 (fig. 5). Studer, 1889: 159. Tattersall,
A. Pleopod 1 male. B. Pleopod male.
1914: 523, fig. 54. Tattersall, 1921: 243. Nordenstam, 1933:
figs 5-6. Kussakin, 1967: 299.
il
Astacilla marionis Beddard
zi
SS Lic Lilie Ze
Se
Fig. 2. Astacilla marionis.
Kerguelen Island, 4-183 m; Marion Island, 200 m.
121. Hale, 1946: 172,
Astacilla kerguelenensis [sic]: Carvacho, 1977: 179.
Astacilla marionis Beddard, 1886: 107
Nordenstam, 1933: 121.
Astacilla kerguelensis Vanhoften,
Previous records
With material from Marion and Prince Edward Islands,
Tattersall (1921) suggested that Beddard’s and Vanhdéffen’s species were
perhaps identical.
Remarks
164 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Kerguelen Island, and the intervening Crozet Islands available, this suggestion
can be supported. Comparison of material reveals no differences between the
three populations. A certain variation is seen in the degree of tuberculation of
pereonite 4, with females more tuberculate than males.
Family Pseudidotheidae
Arcturides cornutus Studer
Fig. 3
Arcturides cornutus Studer, 1882: 57; 1884: 15, pl. 1 (fig. 4); 1889: 159, pl. 25 (fig. 2). Beddard,
1886: 108. Ohlin, 1901: 275. Nordenstam, 1933: 113. Hale, 1946: 169.
Arcturides tribulus Hale, 1946: 168, figs 3-4. Kussakin, 1967: 269. Carvacho, 1977: 178.
Arcturides acuminatus Sheppard, 1957: 180, figs 17-18.
Previous records
Off Kerguelen Island, 47-274 m; off Marion Island, 620 m; off Prince
Edward Island, 59 m.
Remarks
Hale (1946), in his description of A. tribulus, suggests that this species may
be regarded as a variety of A. cornutus, and that the dorsal pereonal spination
disappears with age. This dorsal spination is certainly a variable feature, but not
obviously related to age of the specimens, as in some samples juveniles as well
as mature adults are dorsally completely smooth, while in other samples the
dorsal spines may be short and barely indicated by tiny knobs in small specimens,
and well developed in mature specimens. Neither can the degree of spination be
correlated with populations from Crozet, Marion, and Kerguelen Island
groups. This mixture of smooth and spinose specimens from the same samples,
together with the completely uniform appendages, removes any doubt that
A. tribulus is a synonym of A. cornutus.
Sheppard (1957) described Arcturides acuminatus from Prince Edward
Island, based on a single male and female, and separated her species from the
cornutus-tribulus complex of Kerguelen on four features; the more apically acute
pleotelson, the less developed body spination, the raised coxal insertions, and a
different maxillipedal endite. Examination of Sheppard’s types shows that the
pleotelsonic apex is well within the range of variation seen in large samples of
A. cornutus. Variation in body spination has been discussed above. The raised
coxal insertion would seem to be a feature varying with age, becoming more
marked in larger specimens. No difference could be seen in the maxillipedal
structure between the types of A. acuminatus, and material from Kerguelen,
Crozet, Marion, and Prince Edward Islands. Sheppard supported the formation
of a new species by invoking the distance between Kerguelen and Prince Edward
Islands. As material from these localities as well as the interlying Crozet Islands
has been examined, and as the four distinguishing features of A. acuminatus are
165
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION, PRINCE EDWARD AND CROZET
o7\
i
j
;
“4
y
“YY
YZ
FZ,
AA
Y
WiZ
APE
<
Fig. 3. Arcturides cornutus. A. Right mandible. B. Left mandible. C. Maxilla 1. D. Maxilla 2.
E. Maxilliped. F. Pleopod 1 male. G. Pleopod 2 male (setae omitted).
166 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
shown to be largely due to individual variation, there can be little doubt that
there is a single species, viz. A. cornutus, spread over all three groups of sub-
antarctic islands.
The structure of the male pleopods 1 and 2 as well as the mouthparts again
raises the question of the reality of the Family Pseudidotheidae. Holidotea has
already been removed to the Arcturidae (Kensley 1975a), and a careful
evaluation of Pseudidothea and Arcturides is required to resolve this question.
Suborder ANTHURIDEA
Family Paranthuridae
Colanthura pingouin sp. nov.
Fig. 4
Description
Integument not indurate; cephalon, pereonites, and pleon with middorsal
blotch of red-brown pigment. Body proportions: C <1>2=3<4>5>6.
Cephalon with dorsolateral eyes. Pereonite 7 a tiny apodous crescent anterior to
pleonite 1, only dorsally visible. Pleonites free, 1-4 subequal, 5 twice length of 4,
6 wider than 5, with posterodorsal margin consisting of two broadly rounded
lobes. Telson ovate, distally broadly rounded.
Antennular peduncle 4-segmented; flagellum of single setose article.
Antennal peduncle 5-segmented, second segment grooved to accommodate
antennule; flagellum of single setose article. Mandible reduced, lacking palp.
Maxilla lancet-like, with thirteen distal serrations. Maxilliped elongate, of a
single segment bearing several setae distally, rami basally fused. Pereopod 1 with
fusion line of unguis set obliquely on dactylus; propodus expanded, almost
circular, palm with outer convex flange, produced proximally into triangular
process, and inner straight ridge armed with row of simple spines; row of 20
close-set fringed spines on inner proximal surface; carpus triangular, with few
setae distally. Pereopod 2 less robust than 1; propodus less expanded; palm
convex, armed with seven sensory spines. Posterior pereopods with three
sensory spines and several fringed scales on posterior margin, and two fringed
spines on distal margin; carpus about half length of propodus, anterior margin
only slightly shorter than posterior margin, latter armed with two sensory spines
and several fringed scales. Pleopod 1 exopod operculiform, endopod about
one-quarter width, and slightly shorter than exopod, with five distal plumose
setae. Uropodal exopod oval, bearing simple and plumose marginal setae;
endopod shorter than basis, reaching just beyond telsonic apex.
Material
Holotype PM Is. 1016, 1 ovigerous female TL 5,6 mm, 72/DC.289 off
fles des Pingouins, Crozet, 155-187 m.
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION, PRINCE EDWARD AND CROZET 167
Fig. 4. Colanthura pingouin. A. Holotype in dorsal view. B. Maxilliped. C. Pereopod 1.
D. Pereopod 6. E. Uropodal exopod. F. Pleopod 1. G. Pereopod 2.
Remarks
Of the seven species of Colanthura described, none possesses such a broad
almost circular propodus of pereopod 1 as does the present species. The number
of fringed spines in a comb-like formation on the inner surface of the propodus
(which is characteristic of the genus) is higher than in the other species. The
pigment pattern (apparently persistent) is also unique.
168 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Etymology
The specific name, used as a noun in apposition, is taken from the type
locality, Iles des Pingouins in the Crozet group.
Paranthura possessia sp. nov.
Fig. 5, 6
Description
Female
Integument moderately indurate, uropods and telson strongly’ indurate.
Body proportion: C<1<2=3<4>5>65>7. Cephalon with antero-
lateral corners extending beyond triangular rostrum. Eyes well pigmented,
dorsolateral. Pleonites separate; pleonite 6 longest, with middorsal slit in
posterior margin. Telson lanceolate, apex narrowly rounded, dorsally gently
convex.
Antennule with 4-segmented peduncle, first segment longest and broadest,
segment 4 short; flagellum of six articles. Antenna with 5-segmented peduncle,
segment 2 grooved to accommodate antennule; flagellum of three articles, two
distal articles very short. Mandibular palp 3-segmented, first and third segments
subequal in length, second segment twice length and broader, third segment with
row of ten to twelve spines. Maxilla slender, lancet-like, with distal barbs.
Maxilliped 2-segmented, terminal segment bearing several setae distally and on
medial margin. Pereopod 1 subchelate, propodus proximally broad, palm with
convex ridge on inner face bearing irregular double row of setae; outer face
slightly concave, with single row of setae and proximal rounded process; carpus
triangular, with several setae distally. Pereopods 2 and 3 similar, subchelate,
more slender and elongate than pereopod 1; propodal palm with eight sensory
spines. Pereopods 4—7 similar; propodus elongate/rectangular with four sensory
spines on posterior margin; carpus with anterior and posterior margins subequal
in length; posterior margin with four sensory spines. Pleopod 1 exopod
operculiform; endopod narrow, slightly shorter than exopod; basis with two
retinaculae. Uropodal exopod with outer margin slightly sinuous, apex rounded;
endopod slightly longer than wide, rounded, reaching to telsonic apex.
Male
Eyes slightly larger than in female. Antennules elongate, with whorls of
filiform aesthetascs. Pleopod 2 with copulatory stylet on endopod extending well
beyond ramus, distally narrowed and recurved, apex rounded; distal half
bearing very fine spinules.
Material
Holotype PM. Is. 1014, 1 ovig. female TL 14,0 mm.
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION, PRINCE EDWARD AND CROZET 169
Fig. 5. Paranthura possessia. A. Female in dorsal view. B. Cephalon of male. C. Antenna.
D. Maxilla. E. Maxilliped. F. Mandible. G. Antennule female.
Paratype PM. Is. 1015, 1 ovig. female TL 14,0 mm 4 female TL 13,5 14,2
14,2 15,6 mm.
Paratypes USNM 173119, 1 male TL 13,9 mm 1 ovig. female TL 15,6 mm.
2 female TL 14,1 15,6 mm
Paratypes SAM-A16771, 1 ovig. female TL 15,0 mm 1 female TL 15,5 mm.
46/CP. 204 between Ile de la Possession and Ile aux Cochons, 375-490 m.
170 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
E
Fig. 6. Paranthura possessia. A. Pereopod 1, with outer view of palm. B. Pereopod 2.
C. Pereopod 7. D. Pleopod 2 male. E. Pleopod 1 (Setae omitted).
Additional material: 2 female 2 juv. 78/CP.319, 1 female 75/CP.303,
1 female 9/CP.74, 1 female 68/CP.273
Remarks
The present material to some extent resembles two species described by
Kussakin (1967). P. argentinae, however, has a broader telson, a narrow and
non-sinuous uropodal exopod, and the proportions of the three mandibular
palpal segments also differ. P. antarctica differs from P. possessia in having fewer
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION, PRINCE EDWARD AND CROZET 171
antennular flagellar articles, a non-sinuous uropodal exopod, and in the
relative proportions of the antennal peduncle segments.
P. neglecta Beddard, (1886) was described from Kerguelen Island, but not
figured. Examination of the type has shown it to be a juvenile, with pereonite 7
very short and lacking legs. The telson of this specimen is much more broadly
oval than the present species, while the uropodal exopod is very obviously
notched.
Etymology
The specific name derives from the type locality, Ile de la Possession.
Suborder GNATHIIDEA
Family Gnathiidae
Bathygnathia porca sp. nov.
Figs 7-8
Description
Male
Body almost four times longer than wide, widest at fourth free pereonite.
Cephalon indurate, dorsally concave; lacking eyes; rostrum at base more than
half width of cephalon; rostrum and ventrolateral walls of buccal cavity fused;
rostral apex some distance posterior to rounded apex of ventrolateral walls of
buccal cavity, with subapical row of eight setae. Free pereonites 1 and 2 short,
3-5 somewhat longer, pereonite 7 very reduced, lacking free lateral margins.
Pleonites with lateral extensions acute, becoming shorter posteriorly. Telson
triangular, apically narrowly rounded.
Antennular peduncle 3-segmented, basal segment slightly curved, segment 2
shorter than 1 or 3, latter with several simple setae; flagellum of five articles,
three distal articles each with single aesthetasc. Antennal peduncle of four
segments, distal segment almost as long as three proximal segments together;
flagellum of seven articles. Mandible curved towards midline in dorsal view,
with dorsal denticle at proximal third, ventral margin slightly sinuous. Maxilli-
pedal palp 4-segmented, two basal segments much broader than two distal
segments, all with plumose setae on outer margins; endite reaching to midlength
of second palpal segment, with eight retinaculae on medial margin. Pylopod
operculiform, 5-segmented, second segment broadest and longest, with plumose
setae on median margin, terminal segment minute. Pereopods similar, 1 and 2
more slender/elongate than posterior three pairs, armed with numerous spines
and setae. Pleopods biramous, similar, rami lamellar, oval. Uropods biramous,
reaching to telsonic apex.
Female
Body swollen, cylindrical. Cephalon broadly triangular, rostrum dorsally
convex. Two anterior free pereonites short, following three pereonites broad and
172 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
long. Pleon as in male. Pereopods similar to male, but posterior three pairs not
as robust. Five pairs oostegites present, anterior pair very small.
Material
Holotype PM. Is. 1019, 1 male TL 8,0 mm; allotype PM. Is. 1020, 1 ovig.
female TL 8,2 mm, 60/DC.248 west of Ile aux Cochons, 245-250 m.
Remarks
Four species of Bathygnathia have been described, viz. B. bathybius
Beddard, 1886, from the North Atlantic, B. curvirostris Richardson, 1909, also
from the North Atlantic, B. affinis Birstein, 1963, from off the Kurile Islands,
and B. magnifica Moreira, 1977 (the only species with eyes), off southern Brazil.
The three blind species are very similar, the main differences lying in the rostrum
and appendages. The present species most closely resembles B. affinis, especially
in the overall body proportions. The main differences lie in the more rounded
distal margin of the rostrum-ventrolateral buccal walls, and the broader and
dorsally unflexed mandibles of B. porca. Birstein (1963) does not illustrate or
mention a minute terminal segment in the pylopod, while the two subterminal
segments of this appendage are relatively more slender in B. porca.
Fig. 7. Bathygnathia porca. A. Male. B. Female.
| MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION, PRINCE EDWARD AND CROZET 173
| Etymology
| The specific name ‘porca’ meaning pig, derives from the type locality,
fles aux Cochons (Island of Pigs).
Fig. 8. Bathygnathia porca. A. Antennule. B. Antenna. C. Rostrum male. D. Mandible male.
E. Pereopod 1 male. F. Pereopod 5 male. G. Maxilliped. H. Pylopod male.
174 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Suborder ASELLOTA
Family Ilyarachindae
Echinozone cf. spicata (Hodgson)
Fig. 9
Notopais spicatus Hodgson, 1910: 70, pl. 8 (fig. 1).
Pseudarachna spicata: Hale, 1937: 43, figs 18-19. Kussakin, 1967: 313, fig. 54.
Ilyarachna spicata: Wolff, 1962: 95. Amar & Roman, 1974: 579, pl. 11.
Echinozone spicata: Schultz, 1976: 8, figs 3-4.
Fig. 9. Echinozone cf. spicata. A. Uropod. B. Antennule.
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION, PRINCE EDWARD AND CROZET 175
Previous records
Numerous circum-antarctic records.
Remarks
The biramous uropod, and the lack of a mandibular palp place this material
in Echinozone.
The present material, although not coming from the Antarctic, closely
resembles the species recorded from almost the entire circumference of the
Antarctic Continent. The spination of the cephalon and the first five pereonites
and coxal plates agree with the abovementioned figures and descriptions.
Pereonites 6 and 7 possess small tubercles as Kussakin (1967) noted in his
material. Schultz (1976) and Hale (1937) do not figure or mention these.
Slight differences are apparent between the present material and the
antarctic material, but these can probably be accounted for in terms of variation
between relatively isolated populations. The outer (lower) uropodal ramus of
the Crozet material is longer than in the antarctic material, relative to the
length of the inner (upper) ramus. The antennular flagellum has eleven or twelve
articles in the Crozet specimens, thirteen in Kussakin’s material, sixteen in
Schultz’s. Schultz (1976, fig. 3D, E) shows the female pleonal operculum with a
longitudinal ridge bearing about nine spines, while the number in the Crozet
specimens varies between six and seven.
Ilyarachna crozetensis sp. nov.
Figs 10-11
Description
Cephalon with lateral flanges anteriorly rounded, laterally broadly angular;
dorsal convex areas with varying number of short spines (one or two in male,
four to ten in female); anterior margin concave, with faint rostral point.
Pereonites 1 to 3 subequal in middorsal length. Pereonite | slightly narrower than
2, with rounded lateral process bearing single spine. Pereonite 2 laterally
rounded, with single spine. Pereonites 3 and 4 with anterolateral flange appearing
as spine in dorsal view. Pereonites 5 to 7 laterally rounded. Pereonites 1 to 4
with row of fifteen to nineteen small equidistant spines on anterior margin.
Pleotelson preceded by single narrow pleonal segment, triangular, dorsally
convex, apex narrowly rounded.
Antennular basal segment broadest at base with single spine at inner distal
angle, two spines on somewhat produced outer distal angle; second segment half
length of basal segment; third segment shorter than second; flagellum of nine
articles in female, twenty-two in male. Basal antennal segment with spine on
rounded lateral process. Mandibular palp basal segment slightly curved, equal
in length to terminal segment, second segment just less than twice length of basal
176 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 10. I/yarachna crozetensis. A. Holotype in dorsal view. B. Mandible. C. Antennular base.
D. Apex of maxillipedal endite. E. Operculum female. F. Pleopod 1 male in dorsal and
lateral view. G. Apex of pleopod 1 male. H. Uropod.
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION, PRINCE EDWARD AND CROZET 177
Fig. 11. Ilyarachna crozetensis. A. Pleopod 2 male. B. Pleopod 3 male.
segment; third segment with two elongate terminal fringed spines; incisor
rounded-truncate; lacinia obliquely truncate; ten spines in spine row; molar
with three or four small distal spines and three fringed setae. Maxillipedal
endite with numerous elongate simple and fringed setae plus several expanded
fringed spines, seven coupling hooks; epipod broadly oval, reaching beyond
second palpal segment. Pereopod 1 dactylus one-quarter length of propodus;
latter tapering distally; carpus equal in length to propodus, ventral margin
slightly concave, with row of simple setae; ischium with two spines on dorsal
margin; four or five spines on distal margin of basis; carpus with spinose process.
Pereopod 5 dactylus equal in length to propodus, carpus expanded, broader
proximally than distally. Operculum in female distally rounded, median
longitudinal ridge bearing row of short spine-setae. Pleopod 1 male strongly
178 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
arched, outer lobes of apex parallel, distally rounded; inner lobes considerably
shorter than outer, bearing several short and long setae. Uropodal basis elongate-
rectangular; single ramus present.
Material
Holotype PM. Is. 1017, 1 male TL 5,6 mm, 60/DC.248 west of Ile aux
Cochons, 245-250 m.
Paratype PM. Is. 1018, 1 female damaged, 60/DC.248 west of Ile aux
Cochons, 245-250 m.
Paratype PM. Is. 1018, 1 female TL 8,0 mm, 46/CP.204 between Ile de la
Possession and fle aux Cochons, 375-440 m.
Paratype SAM-A16772, 1 female TL 8,1 mm, 57/DC.241 north-west of
Tle aux Cochons, 195-200 m.
Paratypes USNM 173120, 2 female TL 8,1 mm 8,4 mm, 64/DC.268 west of
Tle aux Cochons, 900-930 m.
Remarks
The present species from the vicinity of the Crozet Islands is a member of
the Jlyarachna antarctica-nordenstami-kermadecensis complex of species. Wolff
(1962: 103) used a series of twenty-one characters in separating these species
which previously had been regarded as the single species, [. antarctica Vanhoffen.
The present material has been examined for these twenty-one characters in an
attempt to establish its distinctness. Table 1 shows the distribution of these
characters amongst the four species involved.
From Table | it is obvious that the present species has features in common
with all three described species as well as features of its own, and for these
reasons, a new species is erected. More material from an even wider range of
localities would help to dispel the doubt that a single widespread and variable
species is involved here.
Etymology
The specific name derives from the island group in which vicinity the
specimens were collected.
Family Munnidae
Paramunna foresti Carvacho
Fig. 12
Paramunna foresti Carvacho, 1977: 180, fig. 2.
Previous records
Off Kerguelen Island, 32 m.
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION, PRINCE EDWARD AND CROZET
TABLE 1
Distribution of 21 characters amongst four species of I/yarachna.
Lateral corners of Spears 1: with rounded
process
Lateral corners of pereonite 3: ae tial
pointed process
Coxal plates of pereopods 1 aad Ds monn
process Nanae
? Operculum: keel with spines é
Dorsal surface of pleotelson: furrows
indistinct .
Pereonite 5: as broad as 2
Pereopod 1 carpus: few simple setae
@ Antennule: broadest at base
Segment 2: half length of 1 .
Segment 3: about five-twelfths of 1
Flagellum: 9 articles
6 Antennule: Flagellum 22 peace
Mandible: apex blunt
10 spines in row
Palpal segment 2 about twice length of 1 or 3
Maxillipedal epipod: eae fourth a
segment. . :
Coupling hooks: 7
Pereopod 1 ischium: 2 spines .
Pereopods 5-7: dactylus as long as opediis
Pleopod 1 ¢: outer lobes straight .
-+ denotes presence of character.
crozetensis antarctica kermade-
+H+++t+ F4++4¢4+4+4+4+4+4+4+ 44+ 4 +4
[+] + ++ 4+ +
censis
Fig. 12. Paramunna foresti, uropod.
179
norden-
stami
180 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
Carvacho (1977) shows the unusual hook-like uropods of this species in his
figure of the entire animal, but does not mention them in the description. The
uropods, which consist of a large, setiferous apically hooked ramus and a very
reduced dorsal ramus, appear to be unique in Paramunna and are figured here in
detail.
Paramunna kerguelensis Vanhoffen
Paramunna kerguelensis Vanh6ffen, 1914: 574, fig. 105. Menzies, 1962: 47, fig. 7.
Previous records
Off Kerguelen Island; southern Chile.
Remarks
The present material agrees well with both Menzies’s and Vanhdéffen’s
descriptions; however, neither author figures short spines on lateral pereonite
margins. These are part of a brittle hyaline margin and may either vary in
number, or be broken or worn off. Menzies notes the apparent lack of a
mandibular palp; a 3-segmented palp is present but appears to be easily
broken off.
Beddaid (1886) mentions five specimens of Neasellus kerguelensis in
addition to the type, taken from sponges at about 1 200 m. Examination of the
slide of these specimens (BM.89.4.27.50) shows them to be specimens of
Paramunna kerguelensis.
ZOOGEOGRAPHIC COMMENTS
The position of Marion and Prince Edward Islands, and the Crozet Islands
within the Antarctic-Subantarctic zoogeographic complex has been the subject
of some debate. With relatively sparse collecting in the area, faunal affinities tend
to be expressed in terms of separate animal groups, an inevitable situation until
comprehensive collections are made for any single area. By examining the
affinites of just the Isopoda, a partial picture emerges.
Kussakin (1967) lists sixteen species of Isopoda from the Prince Edward—
Crozet group and records these as two separate categories in a series of twelve
Antarctic-Subantarctic regions. He further suggests, in light of the high
percentage of species common to the three island groups under discussion, that
the Prince Edward—Crozet group be united with Kerguelen and Macquarie
Islands in a single biogeographic category above the ‘province’ level.
Ekman (1953), in reviewing antarctic zoogeography, mentioned that earlier
investigations grouped Prince Edward, Marion, and the Crozet Islands with
Kerguelen, Macquarie and Heard Islands, sometimes to be included in the
Antarctic Province. Ekman, however, felt it more informative to examine
Kerguelen separately. On the basis of the fish and echinoderm fauna, Ekman
(1953: 219) came to regard Kerguelen as lying in a transitional and mixed region.
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION, PRINCE EDWARD AND CROZET 181
Briggs (1974) included in his Kerguelen Province, McDonald, Heard,
Marion, Prince Edward, and Crozet Islands. This Kerguelen Province shows a
high degree of endemism (66% for shore fishes, 26% for Holothuria, 55% for
sea-urchins, 30° for ascidians). Briggs concluded that it is possible that the
Prince Edward—Marion and Crozet group constitutes a separate province
within the region.
Turning to the present collection of isopods, the number of species recorded
from Marion—Prince Edward and Crozet Islands has been increased from
22 to 38 (see Table 2). 6 species are known only from Prince Edward-Crozet,
i.e. the 4 new species described here, plus Cleret’s 2 asellote species, while 5
species are recorded from Prince Edward—Crozet and Kerguelen Islands only
(giving a 25° endemism, and admitting the probability that the four new species
could have a wider range). Of these, the pseudidotheid Arcturides cornutus
(= A. tribulus and A. acuminatus), which appears from sample size to be
abundant, is considered one of the most significant elements of the fauna.
Nineteen species are common to both island groups as well as occurring in other
areas. Eleven species (34%) occur at both Prince Edward-—Crozet and the
Antarctic; only thirteen species (36%) from Prince Edward—Crozet have a
widespread austral distribution (both in and out of the Antarctic coastal areas).
Two species (6%) are known from Prince Edward—Crozet and South America
only.
Four species, viz. Aega semicarinata, Acanthomunna spinipes, Dynamanella
huttoni, and Jais pubescens, have been recorded from South Africa. A. semi-
carinata, being an opportunist fish parasite, has a fairly wide austral distribution,
while A. spinipes has been recorded off Natal in 550-680 m, i.e. in South Indian
Ocean Central water (Kensley 1978). D. huttoni is known intertidally from
Liideritz to Natal, as well as Auckland and Campbell Islands, while J. pubescens
occurs commensally on a range of larger sphaeromatid isopods from all the
Subantarctic islands.
From this mixture of several faunal components it would seem that
Andriashev’s (1959) term Kerguelen Transitional Province, which would
include Prince Edward, Marion, Crozet, and Kerguelen Islands, is the most
accurate with regard to the isopod fauna, and is to be preferred to the simpler
Kerguelen Province of Knox (1960, 1963) and Powell (1962).
Kussakin lists 48 species of isopods from Kerguelen Islands, to which
Carvacho (1977) has added 4 more. The total number of isopod species from the
Kerguelen Transitional Province now stands at 61 and the Prince Edward—
Crozet fauna of 38 species represents 62 % of that total. In view of this relatively
even spread of the faunal components of the Prince Edward—Crozet isopods
(11 species widespread Antarctic-Subantarctic, 11 species from the Antarctic,
2 from South America, 9 species in common with Kerguelen), it would seem
unjustifiable to follow Briggs’s suggestion (1974: 177) that the Prince Edward—
Marion-—Crozet group constitutes a separate province.
182 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 2
Isopod species recorded from Crozet, Prince Edward, and Marion Islands, with distribution
in the geographic categories as given by Kussakin (1967, table 1).
Antarctica
n
Ss =
BE 2
2. 3 roy
a 0 rs €
ook eae
ppp ep deh G ey es 3 2 BOS
£23 68 8.9 2 & 2 804
ao 64453 8235 5 =F
oO cq ~ ob Ss = as
Gay 8) Ele eet pac, Bi ones ee ee
og S Bee 5 eos oe eee
A nS ke Ol Mane Som nouns
Acanthomunna spinipes x
Aega falklandica x x
Aega semicarinata AES Ke, XS x
Antarcturus aculeatus y x x
Antarcturus furcatus furcatus. . KIMI XE Ket eX
Antarcturus spinosus . : } x x
Antias bicornis . x
Arcturides cornutus . “~x xX
Astacilla marionis <x
Bathygnathia porca . 3 x
Cassidinopsis emarginata ; : STG ut EE ANKE SIS Ken CTE
Cirolana nitida . 5 : yo
Colanthura pingouin i Bore x
Coulmannia frigida . : : : Maas x
Dynamanella eatoni . 5 zy : PDS OX SGX x
Dynamanella huttoni ; x
Echinozone cf. spicata . . 5 XE x
Euneognathia gigas . : 5 , <p osiex SX
Euyallentinia darwini <x ee en atrae
Exosphaeroma gigas ; SEE ST Xe OX <x
Gnathia antarctica . ; : : 3 RARE EUS BX XI KEK
Tais pubescens . . ; ; p ah Mint OC) DOIN OX aH
Ilyarachna crozetensis x
Ilyarachna nordenstami . : ; ITE
Jaeropsis curyicornis x Kl Xe ROX
Jaeropsis marionis G 5 3 <x
Microarcturus hirticornis : ; x SX x
Munna instructa ; x
Munna neglecta : F 2 A p aaa. ani. Calla °C x
Munneurycope murrayi x
Munnopsis australis . ‘ : : x x
Notasellus sarsi : ; P ‘ SCE ca Gee CaS Go hi GA BSS SESS x
Paramunna foresti xX
Paramunna kerguelensis . a EX <
Paranthura possessia x
Serolis cornuta 4 5 : ‘ 3K ee ee
Serolis latifrons PX x
Serolis septemcarinata . . . XL XGeaew! x
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION, PRINCE EDWARD AND CROZET 183
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
My sincere thanks are due to Dr Patrick Arnaud of the Station Marine
D’Endoume et Centre D’Oceanographie Marseille, for making this collection
available to me and for supplying collection data; to Dr Roger Lincoln and Miss
Joan Ellis of the British Museum (Nat. Hist.) for the loan of Challenger types
and other material and for their hospitality while working there; and to
Dr T. E. Bowman of the Smithsonian Institution, for reading the manuscript
and for his comments and criticisms. Logistic and financial support of Terres
Australes et Antarctiques Frangaise (Paris) in the collecting of the samples is
gratefully acknowledged.
REFERENCES
Amar, R. & Roman, M. L. 1974. Invertébrés marins des XII¢ et XV° Expéditions Antarctiques
Frangaises en Terre Adélie. 14. Tanaides et Isopodes. Tethys 5: 561-599.
ANDRIASHEV, A. P. 1959. Ichthyological investigations of Soviet Antarctic Expedition (1955-
1958) and zoogeography of the Antarctic waters. Int. Oceanog. Congr. Preprints, Am. Ass.
Advmt Sci.: 129-130.
BEDDARD, F. A. 1884. Report on the Isopoda collected by H.M.S. Challenger during the years
1873-76. Part 1. The Genus Serolis. Rep. Voy. Challenger 33: 1-85.
BEDDARD, F. A. 1886. Report on the Isopoda collected by H.M.S. Challenger during the years
1873-76. Part 2. Rep. Voy. Challenger 17: 1-178.
BirsteIn, Y. A. 1963. [English translation, 1973.] Deep-water isopods (Crustacea, Isopoda) of
the north-western part of the Pacific Ocean. Moscow: Izd-vo Akademii Nauk SSSR.
BriacGs, J. C. 1974. Marine Zoogeography. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Carvacuo, A. 1977. Sur une importante collection d’isopodes des Iles Kerguelen. CNFRA,
Paris 42: 173-191.
CurreET, J. J. 1971. Deux espéces nouvelles d’isopodes asellotes a Ile Marion. Jn: VAN
ZINDEREN BAKKER, E. M., WINTERBOTTOM, J. M. & Dyer, R. A. eds. Marion and Prince
Edward Islands. Report on the South African Biological and Geological Expedition 1965-
1966. Cape Town: Balkema.
CUNNINGHAM, R. O. 1871. Notes on the reptiles, Amphibia, Fishes, Mollusca, and Crustacea
obtained during the voyage of H.M.S. Nassau in the years 1866-1869. Trans Linn. Soc.
Lond. 27: 465-502.
DE Vituiers, A. F. 1976. Littoral ecology of Marion and Prince Edward Islands (Southern
Ocean). S. Afr. J. antarct. Res. suppl. 1: 1-40.
Ekman, S. 1953. Zoogeography of the Sea. London: Sidgwick & Jackson.
FuLier, N. R. 1967. A preliminary report on the littoral ecology of Marion and Prince
Edward Islands. S. Afr. J. Sci. 63: 248-252.
Hate, H. M. 1937. Isopoda and Tanaidacea. Scient. Rep. Australas. Antarct. Exped. (C) 2 (2):
1-45.
Hatz, H. M. 1946. Isopoda—Valvifera. Rep. B.A.N.Z. antarct. Res. Exped. 1929-1931 (B) 5:
161-212.
Hate, H. M. 1952. Isopoda. Families Cymothoidae and Serolidae. Rep. B.A.N.Z. antarct.
Res. Exped. 1929-1931. (B) 6: 21-36.
Hopcson, T. V. 1910. Crustacea. IX. Isopoda. Nat. Antarct. Exped. 1901-1904. Nat. Hist.
5 (9): 1-77.
KENSLEY, B. F. 1975a. Marine Isopoda from the continental shelf of South Africa. Ann. S. Afr.
Mus. 67: 35-89.
KENSLEY, B. F. 1975b. Five species of Jaeropsis from the southern Indian Ocean. (Crustacea,
Isopoda, Asellota). Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 67: 367-380.
KENSLEY, B. F. 1978. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude Cruises. Part 7. Marine
Isopoda. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 74: 125-157.
184 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Knox, G. A. 1960. Littoral ecology and biogeography of the southern oceans. Proc. R. Soc. (B)
152: 577-624.
Knox, G. A. 1963. The biogeography and intertidal ecology of the Australasian coast.
Oceanography mar. Biol. 1: 341-404.
KussAakIN, O. G. 1967. [English translation 1968.] Fauna of Isopoda and Tanaidacea in the
coastal zones of the Antarctic and Subantarctic waters. Biol. Reps Sov. Antarct. Exped.
1955-1958. 3: 220-389.
Menzies, R. J. 1962. The zoogeography, ecology, and systematics of the Chilean marine
isopods. Acta Univ. lund. (2) 57: 1-162.
Miers, E. J. 1875a. Description of three additional species of Crustacea from Kerguelen’s
Island and Crozet Island with remarks upon the genus Paramoera. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (4)
15; 115-118.
Miers, E. J. 18755. Description of new species of Crustacea (and Pycnogonida) collected at
Kerguelen’s Island by the Rev. A. E. Eaton. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (4) 16: 73-76.
Miers, E. J. 1879. Crustacea. In: An account of the petrological botanical, and zoological
collections made in Kerguelen’s Land and Rodriguez, during the Transit of Venus
Expeditions. Phil. Trans R. Soc. 168: 200-214.
Monon, T. 1926. Tanaidaces, Isopodes et Amphipodes. Result. Voyage S.Y. Belgica 1897—
1899: 1-67.
Monon, T. 1931. Tanaidaces et Isopodes subantarctiques de la collection Kohl-Larsen du
Senckenberg Museum. Senckenbergiana 13: 10-30.
Moreira, P. S. 1977. A new deep sea species of Bathygnathia (Isopoda, Gnathiidea) from the
western south Atlantic Ocean. Bolm Inst. Oceanogr. S Paulo 26: 11-19.
NorDENSTAM, A. 1933. Marine Isopoda of the families Serolidae, Idotheidae, Pseudidotheidae,
Arcturidae, Parasellidae, and Stenetriidae mainly from the South Atlantic. Further zool.
Results Swed. Antarct. Exped. 3: 1-284.
OHLIN, A. 1901. Isopoda from Tierra del Fuego and Patagonia. Wiss. Ergebn. schwed. Exped.
Magellansland 2: 261-306.
PFEFFER, G. 1887. Die Krebse von Sud-Georgien nach des Ausbeute der Deutschen Station
1882-83. Jahrb. wiss. Anst. Hamburg 4: 1-110.
PoweELL, A. W. B. 1962. Shells of New Zealand. 4th ed. Christchurch: Whitcomb & Tombs.
RICHARDSON, H. 1909. Some new isopods of the Family Gnathiidae from the Atlantic coast of
North America. Proc. U.S. natn. Mus. 35: 483-488.
ScuuLtz, G. A. 1976. Species of asellotes (Isopoda: Paraselloidea) from Anvers Island,
Antarctica. In: Biology of the Antarctic Seas VI. Antarctic Res. Ser. Wash. 26: 1-35.
SHEPPARD, E. M. 1957. Isopoda Crustacea Part IJ. The suborder Valvifera. Families: Idoteidae,
Pseudidotheidae and Xenarcturidae Fam. N. Discovery Reps 29: 141-198.
Smitu, S. I. 1876. Crustaceans. Jn: Kipper, J. H. Contributions to the Natural History of
Kerguelen Island, made in connection with the U.S. Transit of Venus Expedition 1874—
1875. Bull. U.S. nat. Mus. 3: 57-64.
STEPHENSEN, K. 1947. Tanaidacea, Isopoda, Amphipoda, and Pycnogonida. Scient. Results
Norw. Antarct. Exped. 1927-1928 27: 1-90.
STuDER, T. 1879. Beitrage zur Kenntnis niederer Thiere von Kerguelensland. Die Arten der
Gattung Serolis von Kerguelensland. Arch. Naturgesch. 45: 19-34.
STuper, T. 1882. Uber eine neue art Arcturus und eine neue Gattung der Idotheiden. Sber.
Ges. naturf. Freunde Berl. 1882: 56-58.
STupDER, T. 1884. Isopoden gesammelt wahrend der Reise S.M.S. Gazelle um die Erde
1874-1876. Abh. preuss. Akad. Wiss. 1883: 1-28.
STupDER, T. 1889. Die Forschungsreise S.M.S. Gazelle, 1874-bis 1876. Zoologie und Geologie 3.
Berlin: E. S. Mittler u. Sohn.
TATTERSALL, W. M. 1921. Crustacea. Part 6. Tanaidacea and Isopoda. Br. Antarct. Terra
Nova Exped 1910 (zool.) 3: 191-258.
VANHOFEEN, E. 1914. Die Isopoden der Deutschen Sudpolar-Expedition 1901-1903. Dt. Siidpol.-
Exped. 14: 447-598.
Wo trtrF, T. 1962. The systematics and biology of bathyal and abyssal Isopoda Asellota.
Galathea Rep. 6: 1-320.
TL
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION, PRINCE EDWARD AND CROZET
ABBREVIATIONS
British Museum (Natural History)
cephalon
shrimp trap
king crab trap
beam trawl
Charcot dredge
juvenile(s)
ovigerous
Paris Museum
Reineck corer
South African Museum
total length
USNM United States National Museum
185
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid- tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. ‘Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. ‘... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10) .
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. DuToit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
“Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
BRIAN KENSLEY
MARINE ISOPODS FROM MARION,
PRINCE EDWARD, AND CROZET ISLANDS
(CRUSTACEA, ISOPODS)
VOLUME 82 PART 6 AUGUST 1980 ISSN 0303-2515
ay gee
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author's(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction .
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
‘size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are. not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .”
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .. .”
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuLLouGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
Fiscuer, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHeR, P.-H., DuvaL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320. j
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull, Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 82 _ Band
August 1980 Augustus
Part 6 Deel
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA
PART 4
FAMILIES GYNODIASTYLIDAE AND DIASTYLIDAE
By
JENNIFER DAY
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.—p.i.), 51-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.-p.i.), 7-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t—p.i.), 15(4—-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 99 8
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA
PART 4
FAMILIES GYNODIASTYLIDAE AND DIASTYLIDAE
By
JENNIFER DAY
Zoology Department, University of Cape Town
(With 30 figures and 3 tables)
[MS. accepted 19 March 1980]
ABSTRACT
The genera Gynodiastylis, Dicoides, Allodiastylis, Sheardia, Zimmeriana, and the new
genus Haliana are removed from the Diastylidae and placed in the reinstated family Gyno-
diastylidae Stebbing, 1912. The family is confined to shallow waters of the Indo-West-Pacific
region.
In southern Africa the Gynodiastylidae are represented by seven species in three genera.
The genus Haliana is new, as are the species Haliana eckloniae, Dicoides siphonatus, Gyno-
diastylis sulcatus, G. curvirostris, G. profundus, G. lineatus, and G. fulgidus. All are described
and figured.
The southern African Diastylidae are represented by 18 species in 6 genera. 2 further
species are known from deep waters of the Cape Basin. 16 species are described and figured.
12 of these are new, namely Dic formosae, D. platytelson. Vemakylindrus stebbingi, Makro-
kylindrus spinifer, M. deinotelson, M. mundus, M. bicornis, M. aculeatus, Diastylis namibiae,
Leptostylis gilli, L. attenuatus, and L. faurei.
Vemakylindrus is elevated from subgeneric to generic rank. Adults of Dic are described
for the first time and the males are shown to have two pairs of pleopods.
Keys are given to the southern African Gynodiastylidae and Diastylidae, the genera of
these two families, Dicoides, the species of Gynodiastylis described since 1946, Dic, Vema-
kylindrus, Makrokylindrus, and the species of Diastylis and Leptostylis from the southern
hemisphere.
The distribution of the Diastylidae is discussed; the family appears to predominate in
temperate latitudes and occurs widely at all depths below the intertidal zone. Although the
southern African Diastylidae are mainly deep-water forms, there are a few very successful
shallow-water species, including Diastylis algoae, the most abundant of all local cumaceans.
The species diversity is low and the rate of endemism appears to be 100 per cent.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction F : : : ; F , i . 188
Material and station data . : ; : p j So Me cst E188
Methods : : . 189
Key to the southern African Gynodiastylidae and Diastylidae 2 LEB)
The families Gynodiastylidae and eee Bees Sees Sul OS
Family Gynodiastylidae ; ° P : 5 194
Key to the genera of Gynodiastylidae Ae Soe ah ae eG
Dicoides : : : : F 5 2 ap 97
Key to the species of ieee : ‘ ; ; ‘ . 197
Gynodiastylis : a 201
Key to the species of Conodiastyis described | since 2 1946 5 AAU
Haliana ; : : : = 215
187
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 82 (6), 1980: 187-292, 30 figs, 3 tables.
188 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
PAGE
Distribution of the Gynodiastylidae . . Setainige 8 AG)
Distribution of the southern African Gynodiastylidae et
Family Diastylidae . : Tot) OS Laie Deemer een ao:
Key to the genera of the Diastylidae ies ial aw) Ueeoe ache eS
Dic : F ‘ a oh i ; a es)
Key to the species of Dic seagh tise WE eice, (ye ie a TR ee Tae mn
Vemakylindrus . 4 : : 5 3 237
Key to the species of Vemakylindras : i 5 ; 5 PBX
Makrokylindrus . ; 3 5 i 3 . 241
Key to the species of Makrokylindrus Re ee ns | ace es)
Diastylis 264
Key to the species ‘of Diastyis from the southern hemisphere 265
Leptostylis . : 275
Key to the species of Leptostylis | from the southern
hemisphere . ie) coal abana 9270
Distribution of the Diastylidae j sove: =287
Distribution of the southern African Diastylidae . Bal tee Aah)
Acknowledgements . . . RSE a ce WS | eeepounety 2010)
References . aed ye a 2 : : : eh 290
INTRODUCTION
This is the fourth in a series of papers on the systematics and distribution
of the Cumacea of Africa south of 20°S. The first three papers dealt with the
Vaunthompsoniinae (Day 1975), the Bodotriinae (Day 1978a) and the Lampro-
pidae and Ceratocumatidae (Day 19786), A brief discussion of the structure
and terminology of the group is included in the first paper.
References to diastylids in these waters are scanty and no gynodiastylids
have previously been reported. Nine diastylids have been described, Diastylis
algoae Zimmer, 1908, Diastylis rufescens Jones, 1955, and Dic calmani Stebbing,
1910, from depths of less than 100 m; Diastylis hexaceros Zimmer, 1908,
Makrokylindrus fragilis Stebbing, 1912, M. acanthodes (Stebbing, 1912) (as
Adiastylis acanthodes), and Leptostylis macruroides Stebbing, 1912, from depths
between 500 and 800 m; and Makrokylindrus wolffi Bacescu, 1962, and M. loma-
kinae Bacescu, 1962, from 4 885 m in the Cape Basin.
MATERIAL AND STATION DATA
Most of the shallow-water material used in this study was obtained by the
Zoology Department of the University of Cape Town (UCT) during a survey
of the benthic fauna round the South African coast, the programme being
funded by the Oceanographic Research Institute of the University and the
Council for Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR). Almost all of the deep-
water material was lent by the South African Museum (SAM), mostly collected
by the R.S. Pieter Faure between 1898 and 1907, and by the R.V. Meiring Naude
in 1976 to 1977. Valuable additional material from Natal was lent by the
National Institute for Water Research (NIWR) of the CSIR in Durban. Material
from South West Africa was lent by the Sea Fisheries Branch, Cape Town.
Because of the very large number of samples, exact station data are pro-
vided only for holotype material; in all other cases only extremities of range
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 189
and depth are given for each area and/or source of material. Both the areas
and the sources of material are designated by code letters which are shown,
together with their geographic limits, in Table 1 and Figure 1.
METHODS
Collecting: the majority of material came from benthic sampling pro-
grammes using dredges (SAM, UCT, NIWR), grabs (UCT, NIWR) or a diver-
operated suction-sampling device (a few shallow-water UCT samples). All
material provided by the Sea Fisheries Branch was collected by plankton nets
of varying mesh size.
Length measurements were made from the anterior tip of the carapace to
the posterior tip of the telson, the uropods being excluded in all cases.
KEY TO THE SOUTHERN AFRICAN GYNODIASTYLIDAE AND
DIASTYLIDAE
This key is designed for the identification of immature and damaged
animals of both sexes. It is, therefore, based on the more robust parts of animals
and is not as rigorous as the keys to individual genera and species, which
should be consulted for final identification. The key does not distinguish between
local species and those from other parts of the world.
1 One or two sharp transverse ridges on, or directly behind, frontal lobe of carapace,
continuing to ventrolateral edge (Figs 10A—B, 16A—B, K) except in some males
(Figs 11A, 13A) a Be ss x ne eB
— No transverse ridges on or behind frontal lobe of carapace es 6
2 Transverse ridges and/or their anterior extensions bearing spines or evidence of their
insertion (Figs 16B, 17B) ah Res ae ee x ats aes
Carapace entirely devoid of spines 4
3 One transverse ridge on carapace; telsonic somite hardly produced between ‘uropods
Makrokylindrus fragilis (Fig. 16)
— Two transverse ridges on carapace; telsonic somite produced between uropods for
nearly half its length Re : : .. Makrokylindrus deinotelson (Fig. 17)
4 Transverse ridges on carapace entire in dorsal view, One across and one posterior to
frontal lobe; at least a third of telson post-anal ; .. Dic platytelson (Fig. 14)
— Transverse ridges on carapace interrupted by frontal lobe i in dorsal view and none
situated posterior to it (Fig. 10B); an insignificant part of telson post-anal . 5
5 Carapace finely hairy; last pedigerous somite rounded posteriorly i in male; anal valves
directed almost ventrally; telson shorter than uropods in female
Dic calmani (Figs 10-11)
— Carapace not hairy; last pedigerous somite pointed posteriorly in male; anal valves
directed posteriorly; telson longer than uropods in female Dic formosae (Figs 12-13)
6 Integument smooth with no trace of spines, spinules, denticles or tubercles, even at
anterolateral edge of carapace (which may be minutely scalloped—Fig. 9A) ee 2d
— Integument tuberculate or with spines at least at anterolateral ate of carapace
(Fig. 21A), usually with spines or denticles elsewhere .. Me ; Le va 14
7 Carapace longitudinally concave middorsally (Fig. 4A—B) ae ae ae ato, ess
— Carapace flat or convex middorsally ae 79
8 Female without exopods on thoracic limbs; dorsolateral ‘edge of middorsal concavity
interrupted at level of eyelobe (male unknown) . #5 Haliana eckloniae (Fig. 9)
— Female with exopods on pereiopods 1 and 2; dorsolateral edge of middorsal concavity
uninterrupted in both sexes : a8 Gynodiastylis sulcatus (Figs 3-4)
9 Carapace with three or more pairs of longitudinal grooves or ridges ee be difficult
to distinguish in newly-moulted individuals) .. a a5 3 ae .. 10
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
190
uo} ;URId : orp 1ISOAA WINS
(s[tejep og soroods [enprAIpUI JO sp109eI aes) SNOIIeA
(GoZE So9Z) APE ISOM OF (ALOE STE) YNOW JoATY eunAUE}U()
(A.0€ So TE) WINOW JoArY euNAUIEWW) 0} (81 S.p£) Wlod sdeD
(A.7Z SoS€-Ho IT Sov) UW OOT—OIONS “Avg [1S
Ao8I S.pE-€£
W QO T—elous “Aeg es[ey
(A.8T Sov€) AP Ose
(ALT So€€) APG eyuLples
(AoLI SoTE-“Ao81 SoTE) UH OOS—OIOYS “Avg sjroquieT
(4.81 Sob£) WlOg edeD 0} (4.91 S.8Z) YINOUI JoarY e8uULIO
(4.9 So8Z) YNOU JoATY e8ULIQ 0} (AL.ET SIZ) Sso1D edeD
uoljisod jp214do1s0ayH
“SosUvl [eoIydvIs0eS Iisy} pue souUIeIsOId AZAINS 9} JO S19}}9] 9POD,
* ——« YOUDAT Saldoysiy vas’
* wnasnyy uvdidfp yinos'
AQAINS SIYWWSG SVOD [EVN
YyadDasay 4ajo44 dof ayny1jsuy jouoyoNy
AVAINS dIyJUSG 1SPOD YINOS
JOosueI} OIY}UEq Avg [INS
[epi4ze}uI— ejnsurueg sdeD
joosuRI] SIyjUSq Avg os[ey
ASAINS S1yUeq Aeg es[ey
AQAINS dIyJUEG Avg eyUeples
- =~‘ 4oasues} oIyjUEg Avg S,jiequiey]
ASAINS dIYZUSG JSEOD 1SOAA
AQAINS IIYJUSq BOTIFY ISOM WINS
J TEV.
uMmoy, adv fo Apisuaaiuy
uoyouojdxy
Don
ajnjijsuy
191
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4
*S19}}9] OPOD JO S[lejop 10J | B[qQVy, 99g ‘adeD UJo}sOM-YINOS -JasuT “S,OZ JO YINOS voy ‘| ‘SIZ
fausquinioy
uopuo7 jsp
(191) ADg sjsequinq ¢
a,
°
Gas (49)
DjNsulueg
Dg SIAjDM |
(a5) A>g myurpis ssoi> edn 2
192
20
21
22
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Carapace with no trace of longitudinal grooves or ridges unless on pseudorostrum .. 11
Three or four pairs of shallow longitudinal grooves on carapace; siphon more than
half as long as carapace (but may be damaged or missing); telson twice as long as wide
Dicoides siphonatus (Fig. 2)
Ten to twelve pairs of sharp longitudinal grooves on carapace; siphon less than a
quarter as long as carapace; telson no longer than wide _Gynodiastylis lineatus (Fig. 7)
Pedigerous somites 3 and 4 coalesced dorsally; telson tubular, more than twice length
of telsonic somite .. a Makrokylindrus mundus (Fig. 18)
Pedigerous somites 3 and 4 not coalesced; telson flattened and no longer than telsonic
somite (Fig.5G) .. 12
Pseudorostral lobes flanged dorsolaterally from anterior tip to eyelobe; integument
of carapace usually finely striate .. : we . Gynodiastylis profundus (Fig. 6)
Pseudorostrum not flanged ; integument of carapace not striate os Bod lS)
Pseudorostrum curving strongly downwards; setae of propodus of pereiopod 1 much
longer than basis .. oe Gynodiastylis curvirostris (Fig. 5)
Pseudorostrum roundly truncate anteriorly, not curving downwards; setae of pro-
podus of pereiopod 1 much shorter than basis .. xe Gynodiastylis fulgidus (Fig. 8)
Pseudorostrum strongly upturned and more than half as long as rest of carapace
Vemakylindrus stebbingi (Fig. 15)
Pseudorostrum hardly or not upturned and less than a third as long as rest of carapace 15
Pre-anal part of telson distinctly longer than telsonic somite; tubercles or large spines
present dorsally on pedigerous somites (Fig. 21A) and/or carapace .. : 16
Pre-anal part of telson no longer than telsonic somite; large spines absent or ‘present
in one or two rows at anterolateral edge of carapace (small scattered denticles may
occur) 22
Telson at least as long as last three abdominal somites ‘together, tubular, with very
short post-anal part; entire body densely covered with long spines
Makrokylindrus spinifer (Figs 19-20)
Telson subequal in length to last two to two and a half abdominal somites together,
with a fifth or more of its length post-anal (Fig. 21A); spines or tubercles on body
short, scattered or very sparse .. 17
Carapace with one or more pairs of large anterolateral horns ‘ig. 21B); few spines
on body, all confined to dorsal region of pedigerous and abdominal somites pa LS
Carapace without anterolateral horns; many spines or tubercles on body (many may
be damaged or lost—Fig. 22A) .. Saw)
Carapace with three pairs of large anterolateral horns: ‘half of telson post- -anal
Diastylis hexaceros
Carapace with one pair of large anterolateral horns; less than a quarter of telson
post-anal ie e Makrokylindrus bicornis (Fig. 21)
Carapace unevenly contoured with each major spine on an individual protuberance;
telson distinctly shorter than peduncle of uropods in both sexes
Makrokylindrus acanthodes (Fig. 22)
Carapace evenly contoured with many short spines (Fig. 23A) or blunt tubercles;
telson of female longer than peduncle of uropod; telson of male (where known) very
slightly shorter as 20
Pre-anal part of telson (that part proximal to ‘anterior edge of anal valves) twice
length of remaining part; first segment of antenna 1 one and a half times length of
next two together .. .. Makrokylindrus wolffi
Pre-anal part of telson hardly longer than remaining part: first segment of antenna 1
subequal in length to next two together .. : 21
Last three segments of pereiopod 2 subequal in ‘length; post- -anal part of ‘telson a a
quarter width of pre-anal part, apparently lacking lateral and terminal spines
Makrokylindrus lomakinae
Carpus of pereiopod 2 subequal in length to propodus and dactyl together; post-anal
part of telson half width of La part with 3-4 pairs of lateral and one pair of
terminal spines ae 6 Makrokylindrus aculeatus (Fig. 23)
Peduncle of uropod about ; as long. as telson: telson twice length of telsonic somite
with seven or more pairs of lateral spines; carapace about twice as long as deep
Diastylis algoae (Figs 24-25)
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 193
— Peduncle of uropod at least a third as long again as telson; telson much less than twice
length of telsonic somite (Fig. 26K) with no more than six pairs of lateral spines;
carapace usually much less than twice as long as deep 23
23 Telson slightly longer than telsonic somite and only a little shorter than peduncle of
uropod; about six pairs of lateral spines in female and two in male
Diastylis namibiae (Fig. 26)
— Telson subequal in length to or shorter than telsonic somite and about half length of
peduncle of uropod with no more than three pairs of lateral spines in male or four in
female é 24
24 Antenna | at least half as long as carapace; carpus of pereiopod 2; longer than basis
Leptostylis attenuatus (Fig. 30)
— Antenna 1 much less than half os tes of carapace; carpus of pereiopod 2 shorter than
basis .. 25
25 Crenulate ventrolateral carina present above crenulate « or serrate ventrolateral edge
of carapace .. .. Leptostylis macruroides
— No ventrolateral carina present above ventrolateral edge of carapace a 726
26 First segment of endopod of uropod nearly twice length of next two together ; carapace
often with several shallow, transverse depressions laterally Lepfostylis gilli (Figs 27-28)
First segment of endopod of uropod subequal in length to next two together; carapace
with no transverse depressions .. mi Ms ae Leptostylis faurei (Fig. 29)
THE FAMILIES GYNODIASTYLIDAE AND DIASTYLIDAE
The first attempt to group genera of Cumacea into families was made by
Sars (1879), who arranged the 18 known genera into 8 families; 3 more families
were added by 1912 (one each by Sars in 1900, Calman in 1904, and Stebbing
in 1910), by which time the number of genera had risen to 51. In 1912, ina
paper on South African Cumacea, Stebbing added 11 new genera, 6 of which
still stand, and 13 new families. In his monograph on the world Cumacea in
1913 he added another family, bringing the total to 26. Due to the fact that
17 of these contained only 1 genus (and some a single species at that) and because
of the artificial separation of closely related genera, Zimmer (1941) reduced the
number of families to 7, including 4 of those originally proposed by Sars. This
system has been generally accepted by most workers ever since.
Without wishing to advocate the return to a system as complicated and
artificial as Stebbing’s, it seems appropriate at this stage to reconsider the
familial position of the Diastylidae in the presence of a large and diverse
collection of material.
The family as it stands is far more variable than any except perhaps the
Lampropidae, where at least the spination of the telson is quite distinctive,
and the Nannastacidae (which will be considered in a later paper). There is
no distinctive character or group of characters or even a ‘diastylid facies’ by
which a member of the family may be recognized. However, within the Dia-
stylidae there is a group of six genera which are very closely related to each
other, since they have a characteristic form and are quite unlike most of the
other Diastylidae. They are Gynodiastylis Calman, 1911, Allodiastylis Hale,
1936, Sheardia Hale, 1946, Dicoides Hale, 1946, Zimmeriana Hale, 1946, and
Haliana gen. nov. It is proposed that these genera are removed from the Dia-
stylidae and that Stebbing’s (1912) family Gynodiastylidae be reinstated to
accommodate them. This becomes possible in the light of more detailed
194 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
information about Dic which is now available (p. 225). It should be pointed
out that when Zimmer revised the families of Cumacea in 1941, there were only
10 species in 2 genera, which would hardly have justified the maintenance of
a separate family. The 6 genera now known contain 56 species, which makes
the family larger than the Pseudocumatidae and the Ceratocumatidae. A further
justification is that familial boundaries are arbitrary for the most part, and
reduction of the diagnostic characters of the diastylids should assist in placing
animals in the correct family at least, which is often the most difficult step
in identification. Furthermore, the gynodiastylids appear to be a phylo-
genetically distinct group showing no more obvious affinities with the dia-
stylids than with any other family.
The majority of other genera of the diastylids do resemble each other, and
can now be seen to show the ‘diastylid facies’. They are active, rather delicate,
lightly calcified animals with quite a large cephalothorax clearly divided from
the abdomen, and generally with a well-developed telson and long, slender
uropods. There are exceptions, but the family becomes much more uniform on
exclusion of the gynodiastylids. Although still variable, the restricted family
no longer has vastly aberrant genera. Variations within the family are discussed
in the remarks on page 220.
Family Gynodiastylidae Stebbing, 1912 (comb. noy.)
Diagnosis
Antenna 1 of male without numerous sensory setae. Flagellum of antenna 2
of male very short, not reaching posterior edge of carapace; segments short
and usually less than fifteen in number. Mandibles of normal boat-shape.
Branchial filaments undivided. Exopod present on maxilliped 3 of male, absent
in female. Exopods present on first two, three or (usually) four pereiopods in
male; absent, or present only on first two pereiopods in female, or present on
first two and rudimentary on next two. Male without pleopods. Telson shorter
than telsonic somite with less than half length post-anal, or longer than telsonic
somite with an insignificant portion post-anal; usually unarmed, sometimes
with one pair of terminal spines and never more than two pairs of small lateral
spines. Endopod of uropod 1-, 2- or 3-segmented.
Type genus
Gynodiastylis Calman, 1911.
Remarks
The family consists of six genera. Three are known only from Australia,
namely Allodiastylis Hale, 1936, Sheardia Hale, 1946, and Zimmeriana Hale,
1946. Gynodiastylis Calman, 1911, is widely known from the Indo-West-Pacific,
Dicoides Hale, 1946, from Australia and South Africa, and Haliana gen. nov.
from South Africa.
The genera are morphologically similar, the main distinguishing features
being the number of uropods on the thoracic limbs of the female and the
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 195
nature of pereiopod 1. Allodiastylis (with four species) and Sheardia (with
. one) are very similar in the nature of the large first antennae, but the former
lacks exopods on all the thoracic limbs in the female and the pseudorostrum
is bent upward in the female and downward in the male. Pereiopods 1 and 2
of the females of Sheardia possess exopods and the pseudorostrum is straight.
No males of this genus were previously available, but the author has recently
received some Australian material from the Great Barrier Reef, including
two adult males which appear to belong to this genus and probably to Hale’s
species. They are typical of the family, with no pleopods and five pairs of
exopods on thoracic limbs. The pseudorostial lobes are very short and the
exhalant siphon is strongly directed dorsally. Zimmeriana (with three species)
and Dicoides (with five) are also very similar to each other in the enormous
development of the first pereiopod, but the former lacks exopods in the female
and the dactyl bears a number of long setae, while in Dicoides exopods are
present on the first four pairs of pereiopods in the female and the dactyl of
the first pereiopod lacks long setae. Gynodiastylis is by far the largest, the most
variable and the most widespread genus with forty-two species. It is charac-
terized by exopods on pereiopods 1 and 2 of the female while the propodus of
pereiopod 1 is relatively short and usually bears a number of very long setae.
One new genus is erected here for four individuals of a species which,
although very similar to a local species of Gynodiastylis, lacks exopods on all
thoracic limbs in the female; the male is unknown. It is close to Zimmeriana,
but the propodus and not the dactyl of pereiopod 1 bears long setae. Since
the two genera are clearly mutually exclusive, the species, which bears features
characteristic of both, has to be accommodated in yet another genus to avoid
a complicated overlapping of generic characters. The new genus is named
Haliana after H. M. Hale, the Australian carcinologist who has contributed
by far the most to our knowledge of this family.
Adaptive features
Most members of the family are small, compact, usually well chitinized
animals, often with bizarrely developed first pereiopods. There are a number
of interesting and unusual features about the group which suggest functional
adaptations. In most there is sufficient reduction of appendages to suggest
that they are more sedentary than the majority of cumaceans. It is usual in
this order that when pleopods are reduced in number or absent, the thoracic
exopods are particularly well developed to facilitate swimming in the male.
But in the gynodiastylids the thoracic exopods are not particularly well
developed in the male and are sometimes even reduced in number. Exopods
when present in the female are also very small. This together with the often
enormous size of the first pereiopods makes it difficult to visualize many of
these animals ever being able to leave the substrate. (There are, however,
several records of plankton samples, although in all cases the depths were
not very great (Hale 1946).) It is not only the external morphology which suggests
196 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
reduced mobility. The respiratory surfaces are small, since the branchial fila-
ments are not at all divided. This in turn suggests a rather low respiratory
rate and a consequent reduction in activity. The majority of animals are small,
the average length being about 3 mm: only three species are longer than 6 mm.
It does not seem possible on the available evidence to say whether the small
size is the cause or the effect of a small respiratory surface, or indeed whether
the two factors are directly linked; but the coincidence suggests that they may be.
One would expect the disadavantages of possessing extraordinarily large
first pereiopods to outweigh the advantages. They must therefore be of particular
functional significance, although what this may be is not readily apparent.
In some, such as Dicoides areolata, these appendages appear to be far too
cumbersome to be manipulative in function, while in many species of Gyno-
diastylis the setae of the propodus could either function as a sieve or as a brush.
Now in filter-feeding types such as Diastylis, the substrate is stirred up by
means of the exopods of the third maxillipeds. But the females of Zimmeriana,
Allodiastylis and Haliana have no thoracic exopods, although the first pereiopods
are large. It is therefore suggested that at least some of these animals use the
first pereiopods to stir up the mud and to push it towards the mouthparts where
it can be filtered or scraped clean. Haliana, living in the holdfasts of kelp, may,
in fact, employ a rather unusual method of feeding, since the amount of sand
and detritus in the holdfasts is not great. Hale (1946) further mentions that a
specimen of Zimmeriana longirostris was found in which the last two segments
of the first pereiopod were reflected backward, forming a shield covering the
mouthparts.
The uropods and telson are relatively small, robust and sparsely setose,
and the post-anal part of the telson is relatively short. Thus these parts would
appear not to be of great value in cleaning, and, indeed, there are few setose
regions requiring this; their robustness perhaps assists in anchorage in the
substrate. Generally those with unarmed telsons have at least some well-
developed spines on the uropods—perhaps for cleaning purposes.
The adult males generally display few of the secondary sexual characters
which usually distinguish such individuals from immature males or from
females. For example, the first antenna does not bear a brush of sensory setae,
the flagellum of the second antenna is very short (although setose), the exopods
of the thoracic limbs are often reduced in size or number and the pleopods are
absent. It almost appears that the males are neotenic.
KEY TO THE GENERA OF THE GYNODIASTYLIDAE
The following key is adequate for adults and most juveniles. Since the
major distinction between several of the genera depends on characters of the
first pereiopod, when this is absent or damaged it may not be possible to deter-
mine the genus.
1 Antenna 1 large, third segment subequal in length to, or longer than, first two together 2
— Antenna 1 of small or moderate size, third segment shorter than first two together .. 3
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 197
2 Female with exopods on pereiopods 1 and 2; endopod of uropod of female 3-segmented
and of male 2-segmented; pseudorostrum of female straight with exhalant siphon
anteriorly directed, of male very short with exhalant siphon dorsally directed
Sheardia Hale, 1946
— Female with exopods absent from pereiopods 1 and 2; endopod of uropod 2-segmented
in both sexes; pseudorostrum bent upwards in female and downwards in male
Allodiastylis Hale, 1936
3 Pereiopod 1 very large, propodus much more than half length of basis and never with
a brush of long setae oa 4
— Pereiopod 1 of moderate size, propodus pavalll Bone half length of basis or tess and
frequently with a brush of long setae masking the small dactyl Re 5
4 Exopods absent from thoracic limbs of female; dactyl of pereiopod 1 distally bearing
numerous setae longer than itself .. .. Zimmeriana Hale, 1946
— Exopods present on pereiopods 1-4 of female (cudimentary on 3 and 4); dactyl of
pereiopod 1 distally bearing few setae not longer than itself .. Dicoides Hale, 1946
5 Exopods absent from all thoracic limbs of female (male unknown) .. Haliana gen. nov.
— Exopods present on pereiopods 1 and 2 of female, and on at least pereiopods 1 and 2
of male (usually 1-4) ae ae ae a Re Gynodiastylis Calman, 1911
Dicoides Hale, 1946
Generic diagnosis
Antenna 1 small or moderate in size. Pereiopods 1 to 4 with exopods in
both sexes. Propodus of pereiopod 1 longer than basis in female, more than
half length of basis in male; carpus no shorter than propodus. Telson sub-
cylindrical with no distinct post-anal or lateral spines; terminal spines short or
absent. Endopod of uropod 3-segmented.
Type species
Dicoides brevidactylus (Hale, 1937a) (as Dic brevidactylum) from Australia.
Remarks
The genus is rather uniform apart from the variable nature of the first
pereiopods, which are none the less always very large. The relatively small
propodus of the first pereiopod in D. siphonatus sp. nov. has required a slight
alteration in the generic diagnosis.
Distribution of Dicoides
Four species are known from Australia at depths between 70 and 87 m
and one from South Africa at depths between 18 and 80 m.
KEY TO THE SPECIES OF DICOIDES
1 Telson longer than peduncle of uropod ;
— Telson no more than two-thirds length of peduncle of uropod :
2 Carpus, propodus and dactyl of pereiopod 1 all areolate, massive, dactyl longest:
pseudorostrum horizontal and siphon much shorter than carapace
D. areolatus Hale, 1946—Australia
— Pereiopod 1 not areolate or massive; carpus and propodus subequal in length and each
longer than dactyl; pseudorostrum slightly upturned and siphon more than half length
of carapace .. a ae a of D. brevidactylus (Hale, 1937a)— Australia
wn
198 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
3 Telson more than half as long as peduncle of uropod; siphon at least half length of
carapace (may be ene sides of carapace with three to four shallow longitudinal
grooves . D. siphonatus sp. nov.
— Telson less than half a as Jong : as s peduncle of uropod; siphon much less than half length
of carapace; sides of carapace with one shallow longitudinal depression ornone .. 4
4 Pereiopod 1 twice length of carapace in male and even longer in female, with carpus
and propodus highly setose; exopod of uropod shorter than endopod; carapace with-
out shallow lateral depression : .. D. fletti Hale, 1946—Australia
— Pereiopod 1 of male about one and a ‘half times length of carapace (female unknown),
with carpus and propodus not setose; rami of uropod subequal in length; carapace
with a shallow midlateral depression ee .. D. occidentalis Hale, 1951—Australia
Dicoides siphonatus sp. nov.
Fig. 2
Records
adult ovig. juv. & no. of
3} 3 Q manca total records
FAL 34°S 18°E 18— 54m 1 3 1
SST 34°S 21°E 80m 7 9 16 1
NIWR 30°S 30°E-33°S 25°E 20-102m 2 3 3 6 14 7
Holotype
Ovigerous female, in the South African Museum, SAM-—A15723, collected
by the University of Cape Town, 21 June 1972. Type locality: 80 m, off Still
Bay (34°40’S 21°39’E). UCT station number SST 26H.
Etymology
Sipho, siphonis (L)—a siphon, referring to the elongate exhalant siphon.
Description
Ovigerous female, holotype, length 3,4 mm. Integument calcified, trans-
lucent, and with fine, elongate reticulations, appearing crystalline in intermoult
individuals. Carapace (Fig. 2A) slightly longer than deep with three shallow
longitudinal grooves on either side. Pseudorostrum slightly produced, moulded
around extremely long, upturned siphon almost as long as carapace (this may
be damaged, as in the holotype, and is sometimes entirely missing). Antennal
notch a slight excavation. Carapace in dorsal view (Fig. 2B) with very indistinct
middorsal carina. Eyelobe small, eyeless, wider than long.
Second pedigerous somite wide and separating last three pairs of legs from
first two. Fifth pedigerous somite dorsally situated. Abdominal somites cylindri-
cal, together no longer than cephalothorax. Marsupium large and well
developed.
Antenna 1 (Fig. 2C) short, first and third segments subequal in length,
second shorter. Both flagella very short, 2-segmented; main flagellum with
one short aesthetasc.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 2D) expanded distally, nearly half as wide as
long. Ischium and merus subequal in length, as are carpus and propodus.
Dactyl long and slender.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 199
Fig. 2. Dicoides siphonatus sp. nov.
Ovigerous female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of carapace. C. Antenna 1. D. Maxilli-
ped 3. E. Pereiopod 1. F. Pereiopod 2. G. Pereiopod 3. H. Pereiopod 4. I. Pereiopod 5.
J. Uropod and telson.
Adult male. K. Lateral view. L. Antenna 2. M. Detail of flagellum of antenna 2. N. Maxilli-
ped 3. O. Pereiopod 1. P. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 1 mm for A-B, K; 0,1 mm for M; 0,5 mm for C-J, L, N-P.
200 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Basis of pereiopod 1 (Fig. 2E) less than a quarter total length of limb;
exopod small with few setae. Ischtum much wider than long; carpus longer
than three preceding segments together, slightly flattened; propodus slightly
shorter than carpus; dactyl long and slender. Pereiopod 2 (Fig. 2F) 6-segmented.
Basis large and wide, longer than rest of limb. Next three segments subequal
in length, dactyl slightly longer. Exopod with a single terminal seta. Pereiopod 3
(Fig. 2G) stout, basis longer than rest of limb. Ischium extremely small. Merus
long and parallel-sided, last two segments small. Pereiopod 4 (Fig. 2H) similar
to pereiopod 3 but basis shorter than rest of limb, ischium larger, merus much
wider and carpus slightly longer. Exopod short and 2-segmented. Pereiopod 5
short, reflexed dorsally. Merus and carpus (Fig. 2]) stout, subequal in length.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 2J) slightly longer than wide, subequal in length
to telson. Telson elongate-oval, about twice as long as wide with two small
terminal spines. Peduncle of uropod about a third as long again as telson,
wider distally and unarmed. Exopod subequal in length to peduncle with
several small spines on outer edge and three long ones terminally. Endopod
about three-quarters length of exopod, segments subequal in length.
Adult male, paratype, length 3,3 mm. As female, except as follows: siphon
longer, less upturned, with a few minute denticles below (Fig. 2K). Pseudo-
rostrum shorter and carapace longer with four shallow longitudinal grooves.
Pereion shorter, abdomen slightly stouter.
Antenna 2 (Fig. 2L) reaching to end of carapace with thirteen fairly short
segments (Fig. 2M). Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 2N) enormous in comparison
with that of female. Basis of pereiopod 1 (Fig. 20) longer than next three
segments together, carpus shorter. Basis of pereiopod 2 rectangular, merus
shorter. Basis of pereiopod 3 very wide, merus more slender. Exopods of
maxilliped 3 and pereiopods 1-3 very well developed. Basis and merus of
pereiopod 4 less stout, exopod much smaller.
Telson (Fig. 2P) slightly longer, peduncle of uropod distinctly so. Endopod
more nearly equal in length to exopod.
A single adult male from Natal has the second antenna developed to the
same extent as that described above but the exopod of pereiopod 4 is as large
as that of pereiopod 3.
Three mancas, also from Natal, have the first pereiopods relatively very
much larger than in the adults, although the proportions of the limbs are the
same as those of the adult female described above. In all other respects these
mancas agree with the adults.
In newly moulted individuals the exhalant siphon is usually much better
preserved, but the longitudinal grooves on the carapace are difficult to detect.
Length
Adult male 3,1-3,3 mm
Ovigerous female 2,5-3,4 mm
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 201
Remarks
This species clearly belongs to Diocoides, which was previously known
only from Australia. It is closest to D. brevidactylus (Hale, 1937a), in which
the dactyl of the first pereiopod is very short and the siphon long. The two are
easily distinguished, however, by the longitudinal grooves on the carapace, the
shorter telson and pseudorostrum and the much shorter stouter second
pereiopod in D. siphonatus.
Distribution
From False Bay to Durban at depths from 18 to 102 m.
Gynodiastylis Calman, 1911
Generic diagnosis
Antenna 1 small or moderate in size. Exopods present on pereiopods 1
and 2 in both sexes; always absent from pereiopods 3 and 4 of female, but
usually present in male. Propodus of pereiopod 1 short, often with a brush of
long, stiff setae. Telson seldom longer than telsonic somite, post-anal part
no more than a third of total length; not more than two pairs of articulated
lateral spines on telson although lateral edges may be incised; terminal spines
none or two. Endopod of uropod 1-, 2- or 3-segmented.
Type species
Gynodiastylis carinatus Calman, 1911, from New Zealand.
Remarks
Calman erected the genus for 4 species, 2 from New Zealand and 2 from
Malaya. 42 species are now known, 30 from Australia, 7 from Malaya and
Japan and 5 new ones from South Africa. Although morphological details
vary, the genus, which is the largest in the family, is quite a distinctive one.
In more than half the species, the propodus of the first pereiopod bears a very
characteristic brush of long, stiff setae on the expanded distal edge, while in
the rest this segment is not expanded distally and bears a few short setae. There
appear to be no other accompanying features which would satisfactorily
separate the species into two genera, particularly as the telson is very variable
(Hale 1946), but not uniformly so in the species possessing or lacking long
setae on the first pereiopod.
Distribution of Gynodiastylis
Until the discovery of the five local species described here, it seemed that
the genus was confined to a narrow band of the Indo-West-Pacific from Japan
through south-eastern Asia to Australia and New Zealand. All the species
from that area are shallow-water inhabitants occurring at depths from 0 to
120 m. Four of the South African species fall within that depth range, but
one, G. profundus, is known from 80 to 680 m, an enormous increase in the
known depth range for the genus and for the family.
202
lw i
13
the
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
KEY TO THE SPECIES OF GYNODIASTYLIS DESCRIBED SINCE 1946
Carapace quite smooth with no longitudinal ae carinae or depressions, even on
pseudorostral lobes . Ass 2
Carapace with one or more pairs of ridges, carinae or depressions on 'pseudorostrum
or elsewhere .. m ; es a ah
Endopod of uropod 3- ccemientedtt in emare Gasily asilenroycua)
G. platycarpus Gamo, 1961—Japan
Endopod of uropod 1-segmented in both sexes (where known) a, Ae Merc)
Telson half length of peduncle of uropod or less . j ..G. curvirostris sp. nov.
Telson more than two-thirds length of peduncle of uropod ae ; ‘ Ben ates
Basis of pereiopod 2 longer than rest of limb; propodus of pereiopod rl with ss 6 setae
much shorter than basis .. : G. fulgidus sp. nov.
Basis of pereiopod 2 shorter than rest of limb; - propodus of pereiopod 1 with seven or
more setae longer than basis ire a ae oe a Pome)
Three spines on inner edge of endopod of araned
G. rotundicaudatus Gamo, 1961 —Japan
Five spines on inner edge of endopod of uropod G. nitidus Harada, 1962—Japan
Irregularities of carapace confined to a single pair of carinae submedially on pseudo-
rostrum; endopod of uropod 1-segmented in both sexes 4 G. profundus sp. nov.
Carapace with carinae, ridges or depressions other than those on pseudorostrum;
endopod of uropod Spcenents in male (where known) and 1- or peers Rikon.
in female Ns ae 7
Carapace with at least five ‘oetins of wrelk denned ilonctanctioall dees or carinae, some
of which may be short 2 8
Carapace with no more than three pairs of often ill- defined oneitudinal ridges ¢ or
carinae a 11
Carapace oe concave middorally Bee a eae on Shere, neteeel dorsolateral
carinae : G. sulcatus sp. nov.
Carapace convex middorsally, with or without ; a | pair of sharp dorsolateral carinae 9
Endopod of uropod 1-segmented in female, 2-segmented in male; anterolateral part
of carapace not depressed but with several ridges in male, slightly depressed but with
a single, short dorsoventral ridge in female a G. lineatus sp. nov.
Endopod of uropod 2-segmented in both sexes; anterolateral part of carapace with a
depressed area, quite devoid of ridges, running back from antennal notch for more
than half length of carapace ae 10
Carpus of pereiopod 1 longer than basis; “sigan. as 6 wade. as lone azine a peaead
very stout .. G. anguicephalus Harada, 1962—Japan
Carpus of pereiopod 1 shorter than basis; ‘telson one and a half times as long as wide;
peduncle of uropod slender ae xe G. tubicolus Harada, 1962—Japan
Telson about one and a half times as fone as wide, subequal in length to telsonic
somite wi ee me peg 172
Telson hardly longer than wide, shorter than telsonic somite or if 5 S303
Telson less than half length of peduncle of uropod; basis of pereiopod 1 as long as
next four segments together; basis of pereiopod 2 of adult male nearly as wide as long
G. ineptus Hale, 1951—Australia
Telson more than half length of peduncle of uropod; basis of pereiopod 1 as long as
next three segments together; basis of pereiopod 2 of adult male more than twice as
long as wide . = ne G. vicarius Hale, 1951—Australia
Propodus of nartoend 1 spi a naga of one, stiff setae; first segment of endopod of
uropod twice asong as second .. ra She G Vailere Jones, 1963—New Zealand
Propodus of pereiopod 1 with one short seta; segments of endopod of uropod sub-
equal in length it NS a ae we G. mundus Hale, 1951— Australia
In 1946, Hale produced a useful key to the thirty-one species known in
genus at the time. His key has not been superseded in any way, but the
fourteen species described since 1946 are included in the key below. Consultation
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 203
of this and Hale’s key should allow identification of all known species. Possible
synonyms are not indicated here.
Gynodiastylis sulcatus sp. nov.
Figs 3-4
Records
NIWR 30°S30°E 60-86m iladult g,1d,2ovig. 29, 4 29, 1 juv. (4 records)
Holotype
Ovigerous female, in the South African Museum, SAM-A15724, collected
by the NIWR, 24 May 1973. Type locality: 74 m, off Hibberdene, near Durban
(30°37’S 30°40’E). NIWR station number ‘Coast 6/P3’.
Etymology
Sulcus (L)—a groove, referring to the grooved carapace.
Description
Ovigerous female, holotype, length 2,7 mm. Integument translucent with
small, slightly crystalline reticulations. Carapace (Fig. 3A) not much longer
than deep, concave middorsally between a pair of sharp dorsolateral carinae.
Sides of carapace slightly convex with three short longitudinal ridges on posterior
third; below these a long, sharp ventrolateral carina extending almost entire
length of carapace. Antennal notch distinct, minutely serrated behind rect-
angular anterolateral angle. Carapace in dorsal view (Fig. 3B) about one
Fig. 3. Gynodiastylis sulcatus sp. nov.
Ovigerous female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of carapace. C. Detail of anterior tip of
carapace. D. Maxilliped 3. E. Pereiopod 1. F. Pereiopod 2. G. Pereiopod 4. H. Uropod and
telson.
Scale line = 1 mm for A—-B; 0,5 mm for C-H.
204 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
and a third times as long as wide. Eyelobe small, eyeless. Pseudorostral lobes
with a pair of short, sharp carinae running from anterior edge to eyelobe.
First two pedigerous somites narrow, third very wide. Cephalothorax
slightly longer than abdomen. First three abdominal somites slightly excavate
dorsally, the rest cylindrical. Marsupium bearing one very large egg.
Antenna 1 (Fig. 3C) fairly small, basal segment largest. Flagellum
2-segmented, accessory flagellum minute and 1-segmented.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 3D) widened distally, shorter than remaining
segments together.
Basis of pereiopod 1 (Fig. 3E) angled, about half as long as remaining
segments together. Ischium wider than long; carpus very large, subequal in
length to basis and slightly flattened; propodus less than half length of carpus
with 13 long, stout curved setae on widened distal edge; dactyl small. Exopod
small with short flagellum. Basis of pereiopod 2 (Fig. 3F) large and stout,
subequal in length to rest of limb. Exopod small. Pereiopods 3, 4 (Fig. 3G) and
5 similar; basis stout, subequal in length to rest of limb; merus very large;
last three segments very short.
Fig. 4. Gynodiastylis sulcatus sp. nov.
Adult male. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsolateral view. C. Detail of tip of antenna 1. D. Antenna 2.
E. Maxilliped 3. F. Pereiopod 1. G. Pereiopod 2. H. Pereiopod 4. I. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 1 mm for A-B; 0,5 mm for C-I.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 205
Telsonic somite (Fig. 3H) wider than long, telson semicircular. Peduncle
of uropod about twice length of telson, serrated on outer edge. Exopod two-
thirds length of endopod, both with two subequal segments and one long
terminal spine.
Adult male, paratype, \ength 2,7 mm, from Natal. As female, except as
follows: carapace (Fig. 4A) longer and shallower, anterolateral angle acute.
Sides of carapace parallel in dorsal view, pseudorostrum protruding slightly
anteriorly (Fig. 4B). First pedigerous somite hardly visible, rest narrower and
carinate dorsolaterally.
Second segment of antenna 1 slightly longer, flagellum (Fig. 4C)
4-segmented and accessory flagellum 2-segmented. Antenna 2 (Fig. 4D) with
short, 12-segmented flagellum. Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 4E) longer, stouter
and less angled. Bases and exopods of pereiopods 2 (Fig. 4G) to 4 (Fig. 4H)
much wider, merus of pereiopods 3 and 4 smaller. Basis and carpus of pereiopod
4 slightly smaller than that of pereiopod 3, merus slightly stouter.
Peduncle of uropod (Fig. 41) not serrated. Exopod shorter and 1-segmented.
Length
Adult male 2,7 mm
Ovigerous female 2,7 mm
Remarks
The only other species in the genus having a distinct middorsal concavity
on the carapace is G. bicristatus Calman, 1911, from Siam and Japan.
G. sulcatus has three minor and one major longitudinal ridges on the carapace
below the dorsolateral carina whereas the sides of the carapace are quite smooth
in G. bicristatus. The uropods also differ: in G. bicristatus the exopod is
2-segmented in both sexes and the first segment is much shorter than the second.
In G. sulcatus the exopod is l-segmented in the male and the segments in the
female are subequal in length.
Distribution
Known from Natal between Port Shepstone and Hibberdene at depths
from 60 to 86 m.
Gynodiastylis curvirostris sp. nov.
Fig. 5
Records
NIWR_ 31°S 30°E-30°S 30°E _ 37-75m_ 1 adult 3, 3 ovig. 29, 2 29, 1 juv. (4 records)
Holotype
Adult male, in the South African Museum, SAM-A15725, collected by
the NIWR, 19 July 1972. Type locality: 72 m, south of Durban
(31°04’S 30°19’E). NIWR station number 2/36.
206 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Etymology
Curvus (L)—curved; rostrum (L)—a snout, referring to the curved
pseudorostrum.
Description
Adult male, holotype, length 2,6 mm. Integument smooth, translucent,
with fairly large reticulations (a patch illustrated in Fig. 5H). Carapace
(Fig. 5A) more than twice as long as deep; pseudorostrum curved strongly
downwards in a smooth arch. Anterolateral angle and antennal notch wanting.
As female (Fig. 5I) in dorsal view. Carapace distinctly longer than free pedi-
gerous somites together. Abdominal somites subcylindrical, cephalothorax and
abdomen subequal in length.
Fig. 5. Gynodiastylis curvirostris sp. nov.
Adult male. A. Lateral view. B. Antenna 1. C. Maxilliped 3. D. Pereiopod 1. E. Pereiopod 2.
F. Pereiopod 3. G. Uropod and telson.
Ovigerous female. H. Lateral view. I. Dorsal view of carapace. J. Pereiopod 1.
K. Pereiopod 3. L. Pereiopod 5. M. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 1 mm for A-B, H; 0,5 mm for C-G, I-M.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 207
Antenna 1 (Fig. 5B) small, first segment shorter than next two together;
flagellum 3-segmented and accessory flagellum 1-segmented. Segments of
antenna 2 rather long, each with two sets of long setae.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 5C) wider proximally than distally, longer than
rest of limb. Ischium short and wide, remaining segments slender.
Basis of pereiopod 1 (Fig. 5D) longer than next three segments together;
exopod large. Ischtum and merus subequal in length; carpus elongate, more
than one and a half times length of ischium and merus together with three
fine spines on lower edge; propodus half length of carpus with twelve very long
serrate setae. Pereiopod 2 (Fig. 5E) relatively large, basis stout. Ischium very
short, merus and carpus each longer than preceding segment. Propodus and
dactyl subequal in length, dactyl with a row of very small spines on lower edge.
Pereiopods 3 (Fig. 5F) and 4 similar, exopods present. Basis wide and stout,
ischium short; merus almost as long as basis; last three segments small. Pereio-
pod 5, especially basis, much narrower than pereiopod 3.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 5G) longer than wide. Telson semicircular with a
few fine hairs and one pair of small spines terminally. Peduncle of uropod
twice length of telson, stout, with two small spines and several fine hairs on inner
edge. Endopod 1-segmented. Complex spines at tip of exopod illustrated.
Ovigerous female, length 1,8 mm (NIWR station number ‘coast 4/Q3’).
As male, except as follows: carapace (Fig. 5H) shorter and deeper; pseudo-
rostrum less curved. Eyelobe (Fig. 51) very shallow; carapace in dorsal view
tapering smoothly anteriorly.
Flagellum of first antenna 2-segmented. Maxilliped 3 lacking exopod,
basis longer than rest, carpus and propodus wider. Basis of pereiopod 1
(Fig. 5J) slightly longer, carpus slightly shorter. Pereiopods 3 (Fig. 5K) to 5
(Fig. 5L) similar, basis narrower and carpus shorter and stouter; last three
segments subequal in length. Pereiopod 5 narrower.
Telsonic somite Fig. 5M about as wide as long, telson small and semi-
circular. Endopod stouter with a single terminal spine. First segment of exopod
a lot stouter than second.
Length
Adult male 2,6 mm
Ovigerous female 1,8-2,4 mm
Remarks
G. curvirostris falls in the group of species in which the carapace is very
smooth and evenly rounded and the propodus of pereiopod 1 is setose. Most
of these species have the endopod of the uropod 2- or 3-segmented, but
G. curvirostris may be distinguished from those in which this ramus is
1-segmented as follows: in G. rotundicaudatus Gamo, 1961, and in G. nitidus
Harada, 1962, the telson is longer than the peduncle of the uropod; in G. similis
Zimmer, 1914, the endopod of the uropod is 2-segmented in the female and
the uropod is very short in both sexes; in G. fulgidus sp. nov. the basis of pereio-
208 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
pod | is longer than the rest of the limb, while the setae on the propodus are
much shorter and more sparse, and the pseudorostrum is hardly bent
downwards.
Distribution
Off Durban from 37 to 75 m.
Gynodiastylis profundus sp. nov.
Fig. 6
Records
adult ovig. no. of
3 3 2 Q@ juv. total records
SST 35°S 22°E 200 m 1 1 yD) 1
SM 27-28°S 32°E 550-680m 5 1 3 5 1 15 DD
NIWR 29°S 31°E- ’
30°S 30°E 80- 94m 1 1 2 1
Holotype
Ovigerous female, in the South African Museum, SAM—A15726, collected
by the South African Museum, 22 May 1976. Type locality: 550 m, in the
southern Mozambique Channel (27°59’S 32°40’E). SAM station number
SM 86.
Etymology
Profundus (L)—deep, referring to the depth at which this species occurs.
Description
Ovigerous female, holotype, length 4,6 mm. Integument translucent, finely
and lightly striated. Carapace (Fig. 6A) twice as long as and slightly wider
than deep, smoothly arched dorsally. Anterolateral angle rounded, obtuse.
Antennal notch very shallow. Pseudorostrum (Fig. 6B) fairly long with a
single pair of transparent, keeled submedian carinae running from anterior tip
to eyelobe.
First pedigerous somite very narrow, next four subequal in length.
Abdominal somites subcylindrical, abdomen subequal in length to carapace.
Antenna | (Fig. 6C) small, first segment subequal in length to next two
together. Both flagella small and 1-segmented.
Maxilliped 3 (Fig. 6D) rather long, basis almost rectangular, shorter
than remaining segments together. Ischium and merus short, carpus and
propodus somewhat elongate, subequal in length.
Bases of pereiopod 1 (Fig. 6E) subequal in length to carpus. Transparent,
flanged lower edge of carpus with seven fine setae. Propodus stout with twelve
long, fine serrate setae reaching back beyond distal tip of basis. Pereiopod 2
(Fig. 6F) fairly small, basis longer than rest of limb. Last three segments sub-
equal in length. Pereiopods 3 (Fig. 6G) and 4 similar, merus subequal in length
to last three segments together. Pereiopod 5 (Fig. 6H) reflexed dorsally. Basis
longest, last three segments subequal in length.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 209
Fig. 6. Gynodiastylis profundus sp. nov.
Ovigerous female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of cephalothorax. C. Antenna 1.
D. Maxilliped 3. E. Pereiopod 1. F. Pereiopod 2. G. Pereiopod 3. H. Pereiopod 5. I. Uropod
and telson. J. Lateral view of carapace of specimen from Natal.
Adult male. K. Lateral view. L. Dorsal view of carapace. M. Maxilliped 3. N. Pereiopod 1.
O. Pereiopod 3. P. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 2 mm for A-B, J—L; 1 mm for C-I, M-P.
210 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Telsonic somite (Fig. 61) wider than long. Telson short, as wide as long,
with two pairs of very small teeth laterally. Uropods very short, peduncle
hardly longer than telson. Endopod slightly longer than exopod, 1-segmented
and much wider proximally than distally with several short compound setae
on inner edge.
Note: a single ovigerous female (Fig. 6J) from NIWR station 6/03 bears
two extra pairs of short, sharp carinae below the eyelobe, but in all other
respects seems to be similar to the holotype.
Adult male, paratype, length 3,7 mm. As female, except as follows: cara-
pace (Fig. 6K) shorter, slightly compressed midlaterally and below pseudo-
rostrum. Sides parallel in dorsal view. (Fig. 6L.)
Third segment of antenna 2 strongly setose, segments of flagellum about
twice as long as wide. Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 6M) larger, distal segments
relatively shorter. Basis of pereiopod 1 (Fig. 6N) longer and carpus shorter.
Bases of pereiopods 2 to 4 larger and stouter. Carpus of pereiopods 3 (Fig. 60)
and 4 longer and much wider than last two segments together.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 6P) longer, telson relatively shorter with postero-
lateral teeth more evident. Peduncle of uropods longer relative to telson. Setae
of rami complex.
Length
Adult male 3,5-4,2 mm
Ovigerous female 3,7-4,6 mm
Remarks
G. profundus is closest to G. carinirostris Hale, 1946, and to G. milleri
Jones, 1963, all having a smooth carapace and a pair of submedian carinae
on the pseudorostrum. However, the endopod of the uropod is 3-segmented
in both of the latter, while that of G. profundus is 1-segmented in both sexes.
The variation in sculpturing of the carapace in the ovigerous female
mentioned above may be a simple genetic character or may be related to the
shallower depth at which the specimen was found.
Distribution
From Still Bay to the southern Mozambique Channel, at depths from
80 to 680 m. This is by far the deepest record for any species in the family,
the previous deepest records being about 120 m for two other species of Gyno-
diastylis from New South Wales.
Gynodiastylis lineatus sp. nov.
Fig. 7
Records
adult ovig. no. of
3 3 2 @ juv. total records
SCD 33°S 27°E 84m 1 1 1
NIWR 29°S 31°E-
30°S 30°E 50-103 m 4 2 4 1 3 14 8
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 211
Fig. 7. Gynodiastylis lineatus sp. nov.
Ovigerous female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of cephalothorax. C. Antenna 1.
D. Maxilliped 3. E. Pereiopod 1. FF. Pereiopod 2. G. Pereiopod 3. H. Pereiopod 4.
J. Pereiopod 5. J. Uropod and telson.
Adult male. K. Lateral view. L. Dorsal view of cephalothorax. M. Pereiopod 1. N. Pereiopod 2.
O. Uropod and Telson.
Scale line = 1 mm for A-B, K-L; 0,5 mm for C_J, M-O.
212 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Holotype
Ovigerous female, in the South African Museum, SAM-A15727, collected
by the NIWR, 12 December 1972. Type locality: 54 m, off Tongaat, north of
Durban (29°34’S 31°17’E). NIWR station number 3/A2.
Etymology
Linea (L)—a line, referring to the corrugated carapace.
Description
Ovigerous female, holotype, length 3,1 mm. Integument slightly trans-
lucent and crystalline. Carapace (Fig. 7A) twice as long as deep with numerous
sharp, shallow longitudinal ridges, fading at extreme posterior edge. On each
side two major ridges run entire length of carapace, one dorsolaterally immedi-
ately below eyelobe and one ventrolaterally at level of anterolateral angle;
between these is a slight midlateral depression crossed anteriorly by a single
dorsoventral ridge and posteriorly by three longitudinal ones. Below major
ridge are two shorter longitudinal ones, and above the upper one are four,
none extending on to eyelobe. Antennal notch very slightly excavated anteriorly,
carapace behind this smooth for a short distance. Anterolateral angle incon-
spicuous, obtuse. Eyelobe (Fig. 7B) wider than long, eyeless. Pseudorostrum
and siphon short.
Third pedigerous somite very wide. Abdominal somites subcylindrical.
Carapace slightly longer than pereion and cephalothorax slightly longer than
abdomen. Marsupium large and transparent with eight eggs.
First segment of antenna 1 (Fig. 7C) subequal in length to next two
together; flagellum 2-segmented and accessory flagellum 1-segmented.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 7D) much narrower proximally than distally,
highly setose.
Basis of pereiopod 1 (Fig. 7E) subequal in length to next three segments
together. Carpus long and flattened and twice length of propodus with eight
stout setae on lower edge. Propodus with seven long, stout serrate setae on
expanded distal border. Exopod small. Pereiopod 2 (Fig. 7F) small, basis
subequal in length to rest of limb. Ischium very short. Merus stout, propodus
and dactyl short and very flexible. Ischium, merus and/or carpus of pereiopods 2
to 5 with brushes of very fine setae. Pereiopods 3 (Fig. 7G) and 4 (Fig. 7H)
similar; merus of pereiopod 3 larger, propodus and dactyl of both small and
of pereiopod 3 more slender. Ischium and merus of pereiopod 5 (Fig. 71) with
fine setae on lower edge; otherwise as pereiopod 4.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 7J) slightly wider than long, telson oval. Peduncle
of uropod nearly twice length of telson and slightly wider distally. Endopod
1-segmented.
Adult male, length 2,6 mm (NIWR station number 2/33). As female,
except as follows: carapace (Fig. 7K) slightly more than twice as long as deep,
anterolateral angle rounded, antennal notch much deeper. Longitudinal ridges
longer midlaterally with no obvious depression behind antennal notch. Eye-
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 213
lobe (Fig. 7L) as long as wide; pseudorostrum slightly longer with a pair of
submedian ridges. Pedigerous somites narrower and strongly flanged laterally.
Flagellum of antenna 1 slightly longer. Segments of antenna 2 short and
rounded with long setae; last basal segment visible through wall of carapace
with long setae protruding ventrally. Basis of maxilliped 3 slightly stouter.
Pereiopod 1 (Fig. 7M) relatively larger with eight setae on propodus. Ischium
of pereiopod 2 hardly distinguishable, merus longer and carpus with fine hairs
along entire length; exopod slightly larger. Pereiopods 3 (Fig. 7N) and 4 similar,
bases much larger; exopods present.
Telson (Fig. 70) narrower with a pair of rudimentary spines terminally.
Peduncle of uropod less than one and a half times length of telson. Endopod
of uropod 2-segmented.
Length
Adult male 2,6—2,9 mm
Ovigerous female 2,4-3,4 mm
Remarks
This species differs slightly from the others which bear a brush of setae
on the propodus of the first pereiopod in that it has only six or seven setae in
the brush, while most species have eight to twelve. It forms a group with a
number of other species which have the carapace bearing numerous longi-
tudinal ridges, but this is the only one in which the female is known to have the
endopod of the uropod unsegmented. Most of the species also have a very deep
depression midlaterally on the carapace in both sexes, so that the carapace
is almost square in cross-section. It is perhaps most similar to G. costatus
Calman, 1911, in which the female has a row of denticles anteriorly on the
carapace, the first antenna is much larger and the endopod of the uropod is
2-segmented in both sexes.
Distribution
East London to Natal north of Durban at depths from 50 to 103 m.
Gynodiastylis fulgidus sp. nov.
Fig. 8
Records
ovig. no. of
fe) ie) juv. total records
SST 34°S 21°E 50-80 m 1 2, 1 4 2
FAL 34°S 18°E 29-61 m 8 1 9 9
Holotype
Ovigerous female, in the South African Museum, SAM—A15728, collected
by the University of Cape Town, 21 June 1972. Type locality: 80 m on the
Still Bay transect (34°40’S 21°39’E). UCT station number SST 26G.
214 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 8. Gynodiastylis fulgidus sp. nov.
Ovigerous female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of cephalothorax.
Adult female. C. Antenna 1. D. Maxilliped 3. E. Pereiopod 1. F, Pereiopod 2.
G. Pereiopod 3. H. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 1 mm for A-B; 0,5 mm for C-H.
Etymology
Fulgidus (L)—shining, referring to the smooth carapace.
Description
Ovigerous female, holotype, length 2,6 mm. Integument thin, shiny, and
laterally with small, regularly spaced pits on carapace. Carapace (Fig. 8A)
large and smooth, as wide as deep and less than one and a half times as wide
as long. Anterolateral angle smoothly rounded, antennal notch obsolete.
Pseudorostrum short, truncate anteriorly in lateral view. Eyelobe visible
laterally above level of pseudorostrum, dorsally (Fig. 8B) very short and wide.
First pedigerous somite visible only dorsally, second to fourth wide.
Abdominal somites subcylindrical, abdomen hardly longer than carapace.
Marsupium fairly well developed.
Descriptions and figures of appendages taken from paratype adult female,
length 2,9 mm. Antenna 1 (Fig. 8C) very stout; first segment not much longer
than wide and second twice as long. Both flagella 1-segmented.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 8D) rectangular, not greatly widened distally
and shorter than remaining segments together. Ischium wider than long.
Basis of pereiopod 1 (Fig. 8E) distinctly longer than rest of limb. Exopod
fairly small. Carpus unusually short for the genus: one and a half times length
of propodus and less than half length of basis. Propodus with five shortish
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 215
serrate setae reaching back to level of ischium. Basis of pereiopod 2 (Fig. 8F)
very large, nearly twice length of rest of limb. Remaining segments short and
poorly armed. Pereiopods 3 (Fig. 8G), 4 and 5 similar. Basis longer than next
two segments together; last three segments relatively large.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 8H) not much wider than long. Telson unarmed,
slightly wider than long and two-thirds length of peduncle of uropod. Peduncle
stout, unarmed. Endopod 1-segmented, both rami with two slender terminal
spines.
The male is unknown.
Length
Ovigerous female 2,4-3,0 mm.
The brush of setae on the propodus of pereiopod | is shorter and more
sparse in this species than in any of the others in which it occurs. But since the
setae are long, this species must be placed in the group characterized by their
possession. Within this group there are three other species which have both a
1-segmented endopod of the uropod and an unsculptured carapace. In G. rotun-
dicaudatus Gamo, 1961, and in G. nitidus Harada, 1962, however, the telson is
longer than the peduncle of the uropod; and in G. curvirostris sp. nov. the
pseudorostrum is longer and strongly curved, the telson is smaller, the setae
on the propodus of pereiopod 1 are much longer and more numerous, the first
antenna is more slender and the integument is not pitted.
Distribution
From Still Bay to False Bay at depths from 29 to 80 m.
Haliana gen. nov.
Generic diagnosis
Antenna 1 of moderate size. Exopods entirely absent from thoracic limbs
of female. Propodus of pereiopod 1 with a brush of long, stiff setae. Telson
short and poorly armed with no post-anal part. Endopod of uropod
2-segmented. Male unknown.
Type species
H. eckloniae sp. nov. (by monotypy).
Etymology
This genus is named for Dr H. M. Hale in appreciation of his extensive
work on Australian Cumacea.
Remarks
Although the species for which this genus is erected is very similar to a
large number of species of Gynodiastylis (and in particular G. sulcatus sp. nov.),
the lack of exopods on all the thoracic limbs excludes it from this genus. Despite
the fact that the existence of this species throws some doubt on the validity of
216 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
using the number of exopods on the thoracic limbs in the female as a genuine
generic character, Gynodiastylis is such a well-known and discrete genus that
it would be inappropriate to place this species in it, with a consequent enlarge-
ment of the generic diagnosis. For this reason, the new genus is erected, although
the author is aware that it does not appear to be a ‘good’ one. In defence,
however, all three female individuals lack thoracic exopods, so that the genus
is not erected on the basis of a single abnormal individual.
Distribution of Haliana
The single sample was obtained from a depth of 4 m at Oudekraal on
the Cape Peninsula. It was found in the holdfast Ecklonia maxima, one of the
species of giant kelp growing in abundance around the Cape.
Haliana eckloniae sp. nov.
Fig. 9
Records
CP 34°S 18°E 4m 2 ovig. 22, 1 9, 1 juv. (1 record)
Fig. 9. Haliana eckloniae gen. et sp. nov.
Ovigerous female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view. C. Antenna 1. D. Maxilliped 3.
E. Pereiopod 1. F. Pereiopod 2. G. Pereiopod 4. H. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 1 mm for A-B; 0,55 mm for C-H.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 POI)
Holotype
Ovigerous female, in the South African Museum, SAM-A15729, collected
by C. L. Griffiths, 6 December 1974. Type locality: in the holdfast of Ecklonia
maxima, 4 m, from Oudekraal, Cape Peninsula (34°58’S 18°21’E). UCT station
number CP 837 A.
Etymology
Ecklonia is the genus of giant kelp on the holdfast of which this species
was discovered.
Description
Ovigerous female, holotype, length 2,8 mm. Integument well calcified and
slightly shiny with irregular longitudinal rugosities, especially on sides of
carapace and pedigerous somites. Carapace (Fig. 9A) little longer than deep
with three very distinct lateral carinae. The first runs dorsolaterally from pos-
terior edge for about two-thirds length of carapace; the second runs anterior
to and slightly below this from level of frontal lobe round entire anterior
margin of flattened pseudorostrum; the third runs ventrolaterally along most
of the length of the carapace. A fourth indistinct, minutely denticulate carina
runs submedially from eyelobe to anterior tip of carapace. Antennal notch
well excavated, anterolateral angle rounded with a few denticles below. Pseudo-
rostrum wider than deep. Eyelobe (Fig. 9B) rounded with two lighter, slightly
elevated areas (lenses?) but without pigment. Siphon short.
All five pedigerous somites clearly visible and widely flanged laterally,
the third widest and longest. Abdominal somites cylindrical; cephalothorax
slightly longer than abdomen. Marsupium well developed.
Antenna 1 (Fig. 9C) short, first segment longer than next two together.
Flagellum short and 2-segmented; accessory flagellum minute and 1-segmented.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 9D) wide and stout with two small incisions
distally on median edge. Ischium wider than long, merus slightly expanded.
Basis of pereiopod | (Fig. 9E) shorter than next three segments together.
Ischium short and wide; merus about as wide as long; carpus elongate and
subcylindrical; propodus about half length of carpus with 13 long, sharp,
serrate setae distally on lower edges; dactyl short. Pereiopod 2 (Fig. 9F) small,
7-segmented. Basis subequal in length to next four segments together. Ischium
very short; carpus subequal in length to ischium and merus together; dactyl
slender and longer than propodus. Pereiopods 3 and 4 (Fig. 9G) similar, with
two rows of small protuberances on basis; merus large and stout. Last three
segments very short and stout, dactyl with a hooked seta terminally. Pereiopod 5
slightly smaller.
Telson (Fig. 9H) almost semicircular in dorsal view and shorter than
telsonic somite, with one pair of very small spines subterminally. Anal valves
open in specimen figured. Peduncle of uropod nearly twice length of telson and
one and a half times as long as endopod, poorly armed. Exopod two-thirds
218 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
length of endopod, segments almost subequal in length. Endopod stouter,
2-segmented, with segments subequal in length.
The male is unknown.
Length
Ovigerous female 2,8 mm.
Remarks
See ‘Remarks’ for the genus.
Distribution
See ‘Distribution’ for the genus.
DISTRIBUTION OF THE GYNODIASTYLIDAE
The family is confined to shallow waters in the Indo-West-Pacific region,
with species extending from the southern and south-eastern coasts of South
Africa to Australia, New Zealand, south-east Asia and Japan. This pattern of
distribution is unusual for marine organisms, since many of the groups confined
to the Indo-West-Pacific are widely distributed within that region. But no
shallow-water collecting has been done off the tropical east coast of Africa,
virtually none in the Arabian Sea and not very much in India. Thus further
collecting in these areas should provide a considerable number of species, and
probably other genera, of the family. This hypothesis is supported by the fact
that Kurian (1954) referred to Gynodiastylis a single damaged specimen from
the Palk Strait between India and Ceylon.
That the family is a warm-temperate one is clear from the fact that more
than 80 per cent (47 out of 56) of species occur between 40°N and 40°S. Of the
remainder, less than 10 per cent (5 species) occur only in Tasmania or New
Zealand between 40 and 43°S, and four are found both in Tasmania and New
South Wales between 33 and 43°S. None are known from latitudes higher than
43°,
Three genera are endemic to Australia (Zimmeriana, Sheardia and Allo-
diastylis), one to South Africa (Haliana), one is known from both Australia and
South Africa (Dicoides) and one (Gynodiastylis) is widespread throughout the
range.
All but one of the species are confined to depths of 120 m or less, and
three are known intertidally. This again suggests a very strong dependence on
warm water. The single deep-water species, Gynodiastylis profundus sp. nov.,
occurs at depths from 94 to 680 m in Natal and the southern Mozambique
Channel. Possibly other species remain to be found in deeper waters where the
temperature remains reasonably high on the bottom, as in the Indian Ocean.
DISTRIBUTION OF THE SOUTHERN AFRICAN GYNODIASTYLIDAE
The fact that no species have been found on the cool west coast of southern
Africa is a further indication that the family is a warm-water one. Three of the
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 219
local species (Gynodiastylis sulcatus, G. lineatus and G. curvirostris) are known
only from Natal at depths of less than 104 m, where temperatures do not drop
much below 16°C throughout the year. Two species are found in False Bay
and eastwards, G. fulgidus as far as Still Bay and Dicoides siphonatus as far as
Durban.
The interesting fact about the distribution of G. profundus is its relatively
great depth range. It occurs fairly frequently from Still Bay at 200 m to the
southern Mozambique Channel at 550 to 680 m, and probably extends well
to the north of this region.
Haliana eckloniae is one of the few species in the family to be found in
relatively cold waters (about 10—-12°C). It is known only from the west coast
of the Cape Peninsula, from the holdfasts of kelp, which habitat is known to
support only two other species of Cumacea, probably members of the genus
Nannastacus. Haliana is monotypic and would appear to be endemic.
No species in the family is known from the west coast north of the Cape
Peninsula, not even in the warm and relatively sheltered waters of Langebaan
Lagoon and Saldanha Bay, which sometimes harbour south coast species
which apparently cannot exist in the colder open waters outside. Beyond this
it is not possible to draw general conclusions from records of depths and
distributions along the coast. Although 7 species are now known from these
waters, they are represented by only 102 individuals from 44 records. This
gives a figure of 2,3 individuals per record and a specimen : species ratio of
14,5. Thus the density of specimens is very low while the species diversity is
fairly high and comparable with the figure of 15,7 known for the Lampropidae
(Day 19785).
Family Diastylidae Bate, 1856
Diagnosis
Flagellum of antenna 2 of male with many short segments and reaching
at least to posterior end of thorax. Mandible normally boat-shaped but widened
at base in Diastyloides. Branchial filament divided into numerous leaflets.
Exopods present on maxilliped 3 and pereiopods 1 to 4 in male, present in
female on maxilliped 3 (except in Paradiastylis) and on pereiopods 1 and 2,
rudimentary on or absent from pereiopods 3 and 4. Male usually with two pairs
of pleopods, but none in Aftlantistylis; no outer process to inner ramus. Telson
variable, usually large, often with a long post-anal part, or short and poorly
armed; bearing one pair of terminal spines or none. Uropods usually long and
slender, endopod 1-, 2- or 3-segmented.
Type genus
Diastylis Say, 1818 (see discussion on page 221).
Remarks
This family, with more than 200 species, now includes Stebbing’s (1913)
families Diastyloididae, Colurostylidae, Oxyurostylidae, Ekdiastylidae, Holo-
stylidae, Dicidae and Diastylidae. A number of genera are based on one par-
220 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ticular character and are quite distinctive. These are Atlantistylis, which lacks
pleopods in the adult male, Diastyloides with the mandible broad at base,
Paradiastylis which lacks exopods on maxilliped 3 of the female, Dic with the
ischium of maxilliped 3 remarkably enlarged, Oxyurostylis which lacks terminal
spines on the telson but is otherwise similar to Diastylis, and Leptostyloides
with a peculiar dorsal outgrowth on the fifth abdominal somite.
The genera Anchistylis, Anchicolurus and Colurostylis are closely allied
and are easily distinguished by the short, unarmed telson.
Several of the remaining genera are characteristic, but others are not, and
there are many intermediate species whose generic positions are doubtful.
The majority of species have a ‘diastylid facies’, including a lightly calcified
integument, often with denticles or spines; short, fairly pointed pseudorostral
lobes; a serrate or spinose ventrolateral edge to the carapace; a short pereion;
a subcylindrical abdomen. The main generic distinctions are based on characters
of the telson, the degree of expansion of the bases of the first four pairs of
pereiopods in the adult male and the degree of separation of the second and
third pereiopods in the ovigerous female. Clearly these last two characters,
while obvious in adult specimens, are not satisfactory since many species are
based on immature individuals or those thought incorrectly to be aduit.
However, the genera based on these last characters are reasonably distinct.
Diastylopsis and Brachydiastylis are characterized by the wide separation of
pereiopods 2 and 3 in the ovigerous female, while Ekleptostylis and Dimorpho-
stylis have widely expanded bases of the first four pairs of pereiopods in the
adult male.
It is the genera Diastylis, Leptostylis and Makrokylindrus which are prob-
lematical. Whilst most species of these three genera conform to the ‘diastylid
facies’, there are exceptions, particularly in Makrokylindrus. Leptostylis has
been generally diagnosed as ‘like Diastylis but with the telson short and the
body slender’ and Makrokylindrus as ‘like Diastylis but with the telson very
large’. When these genera were erected such diagnoses were quite adequate,
but since then so many intermediate species have been found that there is now
an almost continuous series of species from Leptostylis through Diastylis to
Makrokylindrus. Cladistically this series should perhaps be considered as one
genus, but such a genus would be so large and variable as to be impracticable.
Thus, clear dividing lines are needed to separate the genera. It would be useful
to find characters other than those concerning the telson, but in practice this
is not always possible.
In Leptostylis, particularly in adult males, the third segment of the first
antenna is always very large, clubbed, highly setose and quite different from
that of the female. The flagellum of the second antenna is short and reaches no
further than the end of the thorax. Further, the telson is usually shorter than
and never more than a quarter as long again as the telsonic somite. The combi-
nation of these characters adequately diagnoses the genus, although absolute
determination is possible only in the presence of adult males, which is a common
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 221
problem in any sexually dimorphic group.
Distinction between Diastylis and Makrokylindrus is less simple. Makro-
kylindrus incorporates many of the features found in other genera and it is
only in the large, partly or wholely cylindrical, poorly armed telson that it is
distinguishable from Diastylis. It is characteristically a deep-water genus and
it is possible that for some reason a large telson is of great enough advantage
that it has been acquired by representatives of different genera as they have
descended to the depths; if so, the genus is polyphyletic. The dorsal fusion of
the third and fourth pedigerous somites was used by Bacescu (1961a) to dis-
tinguish his subgenus Coalescuma but as there are species in the subgenus
Makrokylindrus that are very similar in all other respects, it would not help to
elevate Coalescuma to generic rank. The subgenus Vemakylindrus Bacescu,
19616, has characteristically long pseudorostral lobes. Several species of Dia-
stylis share this feature and it is proposed to elevate Vemakylindrus to generic
rank, thus uniting clearly similar species from Diastylis and Makrokylindrus.
But this does not solve the problem of the identity and differentiation of
the remaining species. The telsons of some are typical of Diastylis, of others
typical of Makrokylindrus and of the rest are intermediate in nature. Stebbing
(1912, 1913) was aware of this problem, which he solved by creating three new
genera. Ekdiastylis accommodated those species of Diastylis with the endopod
of the uropod 2-segmented, Holostylis those with the endopod 1-segmented
and Adiastylis those with a telson similar to that of Makrokylindrus but with
lateral spines. None of these three genera have found acceptance, for reasons
discussed below.
Further, Say’s description of the type species of the genus Diastylis,
D. arenarius Say, 1818, is incomplete and could apply to virtually any adult
male cumacean with a telson. The type material appears to have been lost, and
D. arenarius was not described in Stebbing’s monograph of 1913. Thus the
generic characters of the telsonic region of Diastylis have never been ade-
quately defined, and in order to do this a new type species must be selected.
Cuma rathkei Kroyer, 1841, was referred by Bate (1856) to Diastylis since
the genus Cuma was preoccupied, and appears to be the first species other
than D. arenarius to have been assigned to the genus. D. /ucifer (Kroyer, 1841),
D. tumidus (Liljeborg, 1855) and D. bispinosa Danielssen, 1859 (non Stimpson,
now D. cornutus Boeck, 1864) were added by Danielssen in 1859 and D. echi-
natus by Bate and D. rugosus by Sars, both in 1865. All these early species
added to the genus are very similar to D. rathkei so that a generic diagnosis
based on this species is adequate for the genus. Further, D. rathkei is probably
the best known of all Cumacea. Finality must await the decision of the Inter-
national Commission on Zoological Nomenclature, to whom the matter has
been referred.
Makrokylindrus was erected by Stebbing (1912) for the new species
M. fragilis as well as for five previously known species, four from Diastylis
and one from Diastylopsis. At the same time he erected the genus Adiastylis
222 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
for the new A. acanthodes, as well as referring to this new genus two species
from Diastylis and one from Leptostylis. The telsonic characters of the early
species of Diastylis (for example those figured by Sars in 1900) are compared
below with those of Makrokylindrus, Adiastylis, Ekdiastylis and Holostylis
recognized by Stebbing (1912, 1913).
Makro-
Diastylis Adiastylis kylindrus Ekdiastylis Holostylis
structureof slender moderately very stout slender to slender
telson stout moderate
length of about twice about twice about three about twice about twice
telson that of that of timesthatof that of that of
telsonic telsonic telsonic telsonic telsonic
somite somite somite somite somite
length of approxi- longer or distinctly longer or shorter or
telson in mately equal shorter longer shorter equal
relation to :
peduncle of
uropod
width of less than a half to less more than less than a about a third
post-anal third than a third half third
part relative
to pre-anal
part
proportion half or less more than two-thirds halformore half or less
of telson half but less or more
pre-anal than
two-thirds
number of 3-10-+ 3-5 0 1-12 6-9
pairs of
lateral spines
number of 3 3 3 2 1
segments in
endopod of
uropod
It is evident that the only unambiguous character distinguishing Makro-
kylindrus is the absence of lateral spines on the telson, and the only one clearly
distinguishing Diastylis is the short pre-anal portion of the telson. But exami-
nation of the host of species which has been described since 1912 shows an
entire range of proportions in the pre- and post-anal parts of the telson; thus
this character is no longer diagnostic of Diastylis. Many authorities have
placed more emphasis on the size and tubular nature of the pre-anal part of the
telson in Makrokylindrus, so that it is no longer commonly distinguished by
the absence of lateral spines; then, too, the distal portion of the telson is often
lost or damaged in deep-water forms. Equally, Ekdiastylis and Holostylis
cannot be distinguished from Diastylis except by the reduced segmentation of
the endopod of the uropod, but some species more recently placed in Makro-
kylindrus also have the endopod of the uropod 2-segmented. Furthermore,
many species have been described poorly or from inadequate material, so that
without a major investigation of their types, and in the absence of more indi-
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 223
viduals, it is not possible to come to firm conclusions about their generic status.
In summary, then, it is only Holostylis which is unambiguous in that the
endopod of the uropod is unsegmented; it is proposed to reinstate this genus.
Adiastylis and Ekdiastylis should continue to be suppressed, at least for the
present.
A large collection of diastylids from the deep Atlantic has recently become
available to the author. It is hoped that this material, together with a study of
the relevant types, will allow a thorough revision of the Diastylis-like genera
in the near future. In order to prevent further delay in the publication of the
present paper, the genera Makrokylindrus and Diastylis are here distinguished
according to common usage and the South African species placed accordingly.
Adaptive features
In contrast to the gynodiastylids, the diastylids are often large, slender,
rather attenuated animals in which the reduction of appendages is minimal.
Pleopods and exopods are well developed, indicating that the animals are
relatively mobile. The respiratory surfaces are enlarged by numerous gill
filaments, allowing enhanced gas exchange and thus a larger body size. The
average length of diastylids is about four times that of the gynodiastylids and
some may be as long as 35 mm. The majority are filter-feeders (Dennell 1934,
Zimmer 1932, Kriiger 1940). In these forms the bases of the third maxillipeds
and first pereiopods are densely setose and the first pereiopods are slender and
often very long, appearing sensory rather than manipulative in function. The
uropods and telson are usually both long and well armed, presumably for
cleaning the extensive setae on the anterior limbs. Finally, sexual dimorphism
is very well developed and the males appear to be far more mobile than the
females.
KEY TO THE GENERA OF THE DIASTYLIDAE
Virtually any construction of a key to this family depends initially on
characters confined to one sex. In this key other, less rigorous, characters have
also been included to assist in the placing of single individuals. :
1 No pleopods in adult male; telson very short, as deep as long, with a single pair of
terminal spines : : Atlantistylis Reyss, 1975
— Two pairs of pleopods i in adult male; telson variable but seldom as deep aslong .. 2
2 Mandibles broad at base; basis of pereiopod 2 usually abruptly wider than ischium
with one or two large teeth at lower distal corner oP .. Diastyloides Sars, 1900
— Mandibles narrow at base; basis of pereiopod 2 narrow distally or abruptly wider
than ischium but without one or two strong teeth at lower distal corner .. 3
3 Maxilliped 3 of female without exopod .. ae si Paradiastylis Calman, 1904
— Maxilliped 3 of female with exopod ac 4
4 Third (and often fourth and fifth) pedigerous somites ‘produced posteriorly even in
male, usually much wider at ventrolateral edge than second so that in ovigerous
female pereiopods 3 and 4 are directed posteriorly and widely separated from pereio-
pod 2; fifth pedigerous somite usually dorsal to fourth ve 5)
— Third and fourth pedigerous somites not produced or directed posteriorly, ‘seldom
wider at ventrolateral edge than second; pereiopods 3 to 5 usually directed ventrally
and in ovigerous females not widely separated from pereiopod 2; fifth pedigerous
somite seldom dorsal to fourth .. oH ate ate Ne are is ., 10
224 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
10
11
12
Ischium of maxilliped 3 enormously expanded .. ae ha Dic Stebbing, 1910
Ischium of maxilliped 3 not expanded .. ; 6
Telson with at least one pair of lateral spines (usually several), always more than half
length of peduncle of uropod and usually longer than telsonic somite we 7
Telson with no lateral spines; usually less than half length of peduncle of uropod
and never longer than telsonic somite .. 8
Female with rudimentary exopods on pereiopods 3 and 4: basis of pereiopod 2 narrow
in male; pseudorostrum short and not upturned; telson usually with four or more
pairs of lateral spines cle .. Diastylopsis 8. 1. Smith, 1880
Female without exopods on pereiopods 3 and 4: basis of pereiopod 2 wide in male;
See Gone long and upturned; telson with no more than four pairs of lateral
spines : 3 Brachydiastylis Stebbing, 1912
Pleopods uniramous with stout, modified setae; peduncle of uropod less than twice
length of telsonic somite .. .. Anchistylis Hale, 1945
Pleopods biramous with normal plumose setae; "peduncle of Sie twice length of
telsonic somite or more .. 9
Endopod of uropod 3-segmented: ‘basis of maxilliped 3 more than twice ‘and of
pereiopod 1 almost twice length of remaining segments together
Anchicolurus Stebbing, 1912
Endopod of uropod 2-segmented ; basis of maxilliped 3 less than one and a half times
length of remaining segments together and of pereiopod 1 shorter than remaining
segments together .. : a Colurostylis Calman, 1911
Telson (excluding terminal spines) shorter than telsonic somite or up to a quarter as
long again as telsonic somite but with no more than three or four pairs of lateral
spines . kl
Telson (excluding ssrinchcnel ‘spines) « one and a quarter times length of telsonic somite
or more; if no longer than telsonic somite then with at least four pairs of terminal
spines 14
Flagellum of antenna 2 of adult male reaching to end of body: basis of pereiopod 2
(and usually of pereiopods 1, 3 and 4) of male very wide distally ; abdomen excluding
telson fairly stout and shorter than or subequal in length to cephalothorax; fifth
abdominal somite not much longer than fourth or sixth; female usually without
exopods on pereiopods 3 and4 .. ; 12:
Flagellum of antenna2 of male not reaching beyond end of pereion; bases of
pereiopods 2 to 4 of adult male not especially wide; abdomen excluding telson
generally slender and longer than cephalothorax; fifth abdominal somite usually
longer than fourth or sixth; female usually with exopods on pereiopods 3 and4 .. 13
Telson of female with about eleven pairs of lateral spines and of male deeply excavated
dorsally with five pairs of lateral spines; minute exopods present on pereiopods 3 and
4offemale .. : as Ekleptostylis Stebbing, 1912
No more than four pairs of lateral spines « on telson i in either sex, telson of male not
not excavated dorsally; pereiopods 3 and 4 of female without exopods
Dimorphostylis Zimmer, 1914*
Dorsal surface of 5th abdominal somite smooth; pereiopod 2 not very long with
propodus much shorter than basis i .. Leptostylis Sars, 1869
Fifth abdominal somite with a large posterodorsal protrusion; pereiopod 2 very long,
propodus longer than basis ee ee BG hae Leptostyloides Jones, 1969
Endopod of uropod 1-segmented . oh a s cere See 1912
Endopod of uropod 2- or 3- segmented He i Sete |)
Pseudorostrum much more than half as long as rest of carapace
Vemakylindrus Bacescu, 19615
Pseudorostrum much less than half as long as rest of carapace . eG
Pre-anal part of telson longer than post-anal part with lateral spines usually confined
to distal third or less : Makrokylindrus Stebbing, 19127
Pre-anal part of telson shorter than post- -anal part with lateral spines usually present
on at least distal half ae Hd os Ise an af yo
Terminal spines present on telson bi we Be ai "Diastylis Say, 1818
Terminal spines absent from telson oe : hes ‘Oxyurostylis Calman, 1912
* Pachystylis Hansen, 1920, and males of Patines key out here
t Dimorphostylis australis keys out here because of its long telson
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 225
Dic Stebbing, 1910
Generic diagnosis
Carapace with transverse ridges across frontal lobe. Flagellum of antenna 2
of adult male reaching end of body. Mandible narrow at base. Ischium of
maxilliped 3 greatly expanded. Basis of pereiopod 2 large and stout in both
sexes. Exopods on pereiopods 3 and 4 of female minute or absent. Male with
two pairs of pleopods. Third and fourth pedigerous somites wide and sometimes
coalesced. Pereiopods 2 and 3 of ovigerous female somewhat separated. Telson
longer than telsonic somite and at least as long as peduncle of uropod; pre-anal
part longer than post-anal part. Uropods slender and at least as long as last
two abdominal somites together. Endopod of uropod 3-segmented.
Type species
Dic calmani Stebbing, 1910.
Remarks
The genus was erected by Stebbing for a small number of individuals of a
single species from South Africa on ‘the unique characters of the third maxilli-
peds and telson’, the ischium of maxilliped 3 being very large and flat and the
telson of that species very long and tubular with no post-anal part. Stebbing
described and figured a young male (which no longer appears to be extant) and
it has generally been assumed since then that adult males would prove to lack
pleopods. For this reason the genus has always been placed near to Gyno-
diastylis. The finding of large numbers of males with two pairs of pleopods
denies an affinity between the two genera and places Dic quite definitely in the
Diastylidae. Should further confirmation be needed, another two species are
now available from South Africa, one of which has a distally armed telson very
similar to that of some species of Makrokylindrus. Further, the gill plate is
divided into numerous filaments, despite Stebbing’s statement to the contrary.
Variations in the nature of the telson in the species now known require
an alteration of the generic diagnosis to accommodate them, and the third
maxilliped becomes the diagnostic feature. For this reason, a fourth species
may be added to the genus. This is Diastylopsis thileniusi (Zimmer, 1902) from
New Zealand. Its telson is not tubular but the third maxilliped is very similar
to those of the other three species, and the carapace is sculptured in the same
way. The large size of the third and fourth pedigerous somites appears to be
an extreme example of the trend which is already noticeable in the other species.
Diastylis fistularis Calman, 1911, from the Gulf of Siam, is very remi-
niscent of Dic in the nature of the telson, the third maxilliped, the carapace
and the fusion of the third and fourth pedigerous somites. But it appears from
Calman’s figures of a very young animal that the basis rather than the ischium
of the third maxilliped is widely expanded. Thus, on the available evidence
the species cannot be admitted to Dic and any further decisions will have to
await the collection of more, preferably adult, material.
226 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
In his original discussion of the genus, Stebbing suggested that Diastylis
tubulicaudata should be placed in Dic. Examination of new material by Fage
(1929) showed quite clearly that the third maxilliped is not modified and that
the species belongs in Makrokylindrus.
Distribution of Dic
Three species are known from South Africa at depths from 11 to 200 m and
one from New Zealand at depths from 0 to 43 m.
KEY TO THE SPECIES OF DIC
1 Telson a long, straight tube with virtually no post-anal part and without lateral spines 2
— Telson flattened distally; at least a third of its length post-anal with two or more pairs
of strong lateral spines As ne nf Ns ee aes am as He
2 Carapace without hairs; anal valves pointing posteriorly; telson terminally without
denticles in female and with four short, rounded teeth in male D. formosae sp. nov.
— Carapace finely hairy; anal valves pointing ventrally; telson terminally with several
minute denticles in both sexes ae Se D. calmani Stebbing, 1910—South Africa
3 Pedigerous somites 3 and 4 not coalesced dorsally; telson hardly longer than telsonic
somite with 6-8 pairs of lateral spines D. thileniusi (Zimmer, 1902)—New Zealand
— Pedigerous somites 3 and 4 coalesced dorsally; telson distinctly longer than telsonic
somite with 2-5 pairs of lateral spines a aa he .. D. platytelson sp. nov
3
Dic calmani Stebbing, 1910
Figs 10-11
Dic calmani Stebbing, 1910: 416, pls 46-47; 1913: 160-161; Jones 1960a: 179.
Records
sub-
adult adult ovig. no. of
3 3S io) Q juv. total records
SST 34°S 21°R 15-20m 2 8 9 1 1 22 6
SCD 33°S 25°E-—
34°S 23°E 11-44m 11 7 3 19 5 3 48 7
NIWR = 27°S 32°E—
30°S 30°E 43-80 m 1 3 4 6 3 17 7
TON
Previous records
Algoa Bay (33°S 25°E)—44 m (Stebbing 1910: type locality). The single
ovigerous female recorded by Jones (1960a) from False Bay (34°S 18°E) appears
to have been lost. The fact that it was found in False Bay suggests that it may
have belonged to D. formosae rather than to D. calmani.
Syntypes
The young male described and figured by Stebbing (1910) as D. calmani
from 75 m off East London is no longer extant. All the other individuals in
the only sample seen by Stebbing (i.e. the ‘paratypes’ held by the British Museum
(Natural History)) to not belong to this species but to D. formosae sp. nov.
Since the two species are so similar, it is necessary to select a neotype for D. cal-
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 227
mani. This is an ovigerous female, in the South African Museum, SAM—A16794,
collected by UCT, 5 December 1962. Type locality: 44 m off Port Elizabeth
(33°53’S 25°49’E). UCT station number SCD 378K.
The remarks on page 230 discuss the reasons for believing this specimen
to belong to Stebbing’s species. The locality of the sample from which the
neotype was chosen is the closest available in both depth and position to that
of Stebbing’s material.
Description
Ovigerous female, neotype, length 7,0 mm (SCD 378K). Integument
minutely reticulate, somewhat translucent, with fine scattered hairs. Carapace
Fig. 10. Dic calmani.
Ovigerous female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of cephalothorax. C. Antenna 1.
D. Maxilliped 3. E. Pereiopod 1. F. Pereiod 2. G. Pereiopod 3. H. Tip of telson in ventral
view. I. Tip of telson in lateral view. J. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 4 mm for A-B; 2 mm for C-G, J; 0,5 mm for H-I.
228 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 11. Dic calmani.
Adult male. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of cephalothorax. C. Detail of distal tip of
antenna 1. D. Pereiopod 2. E. Pereiopod 3. F. Tip of telson in ventral view. G. Tip of telson
in lateral view. H. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 4mm for A-B; 2 mm for D-E, H; 1 mm for F—G; 0,5 mm for C.
(Fig. 10A) less than twice as long as deep and slightly wider than deep with
two transverse ridges. Posterior ridge runs from ventral edge of carapace about
a third from anterior tip to join posterior edge of frontal suture; anterior ridge
equidistant between posterior ridge and anterior tip of pseudorostrum, ending
midlaterally. Both ridges continuous on eyelobe. (A third short ridge is some-
times present behind and parallel to the first two.) Anterolateral angle not
evident, antennal notch smooth, poorly excavated. Pseudorostral lobes fairly
short, roundly pointed anteriorly. Carapace slightly produced posterolaterally,
obscuring part of first pedigerous somite. Eyelobe (Fig. 10B) short with three
small, clear lenses.
Second pedigerous somite narrow, third and fourth wide and fused dorsally;
fifth situated dorsal to fourth. Marsupium well developed. Abdominal somites
subcylindrical, abdomen subequal in length to cephalothorax.
Antenna 1 (Fig. 10C) fairly small, first segment longest. Flagellum
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 229
2-segmented with two aesthetascs; accessory flagellum small and 3-segmented.
Antenna 2 of moderate size, 5-segmented.
Maxilliped 3 (Fig. 10D) very wide distally, basis less than three times as
long as wide at widest point and slightly serrated on inner edge, proximally
much narrower. Exopod of moderate size. Ischium greatly expanded, as wide
as long and smoothly rounded distally. Last four segments subequal in length
and protected by ischium when folded in on each other.
Pereiopod 1 fairly long, basis slender with some plumose setae on lower
border. Ischium and merus short, subequal in length; carpus subequal in
length to ischium and merus together and slightly shorter than propodus.
Exopods of pereiopods 1 and 2 of moderate size. Pereiopod 2 (Fig. 10F)
6-segmented. Basis stout with numerous short plumose setae on lower edge.
Merus, carpus and dactyl subequal in length and propodus slightly shorter.
Basis and merus of pereiopod 3 (Fig. 10G) stout and subequal in length;
ischium short. Carpus subequal in length to last two segments together and
armed with many sharp setae. Armature of distal segments of pereiopods 4
and 5 differs slightly from that of pereiopod 3, limbs otherwise very similar.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 10J) slightly longer than wide; telson covered with
very small triangular denticles, twice length of telsonic somite, tubular and
tapering at tip with one pair of small terminal spines flanked by several even
smaller denticles. Anal valves pointing almost ventrally (Figs 10H, I). Peduncle
of uropod fairly slender, about two-thirds length of telson and slightly longer
than subequal rami. Endopod 3-segmented, first segment about subequal in
length to next two together.
Adult male, length 6,9 mm (SCD 378K). As female, except as follows:
carapace (Fig. 11A) slightly more than twice as long as deep, produced postero-
laterally to obscure first two and part of third pedigerous somites. Posterior
transverse ridge(s) often very faint or absent. Pseudorostrum (Fig. 11B) slightly
shorter and less pointed.
Third segment of antenna | (Fig. 11C) much shorter and stouter; flagellum
5-segmented and surrounded by many fine setae; accessory flagellum
4-segmented. Basis of maxilliped 3 as wide proximally as distally and four
times length of ischium; exopod larger. Basis of pereiopod 1 very slightly
longer than rest of limb. Basis of pereiopod 2 (Fig. 11D) very large, carpus
more than twice length of merus. Bases of pereiopods 3 (Fig. 11E) to 5 stouter,
segments distal to basis relatively more slender. Two pairs of pleopods present.
Telson (Fig. 11H) and peduncle of uropod slightly longer, anal valves
subterminal. Endopod longer than exopod by one segment and longer than
telson by two segments; last two segments together distinctly shorter than the
first.
Length
Adult male 5,6-6,9 mm
Ovigerous female 5,0—-7,1 mm
230 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
The syntypes (a young female, two juveniles and a manca) labelled ‘Dic
calmani’ and examined by the author do not belong to this species but to .
D. formosae sp. nov. But Stebbing’s (1910) figures and descriptions clearly
belong to the same species as that described above, which is, therefore, called
D. calmani. There is little resemblance between Stebbing’s figure of the carapace
and any actual specimen, but it appears that the carapace of his specimen was
flattened and damaged, so that in the figure the pseudorostral lobes are diver-
gent and there appear to be three lenses far back behind the eyelobe. The shape
is also odd. But the figures of the limbs are indistinguishable from those of the
present specimens, with a few exceptions due to the immaturity of Stebbing’s
individual. The basis of pereiopod 1 is shorter and the segments of maxilliped 3
distal to the ischium are longer than in adult males. The carpus of pereiopod 2,
the bases and exopods of pereiopods 3 and 4 and the proportions of the uropods
are as in the ovigerous females, rather than adult males.
The juvenile and manca ‘syntypes’ are in a poor state of preservation but
the large young female (length 6,9 mm) is well preserved and clearly belongs to
D. formosae rather than to D. calmani. The integument is reticulate and rugose,
the ischium of maxilliped 3 is excavate and the carpus of pereiopod 2 longer
than the merus, while the distal tips of pereiopods 3 to 5 and in particular the
uropods and telson are identical with those figured below for D. formosae.
In Stebbing’s defence, it is not at all surprising that he should have con-
sidered there to be only one species, since he had only a single male and female
of any size to work from, and the two species are very similar. In fact it was
only after examining some hundreds of specimens that the author became
aware of the presence of two species. They also overlap geographically in just
that area from which Stebbing’s material was obtained.
In both species there is considerable intraspecific variation in the sculp-
turing of the carapace, particularly in the males where the transverse ridges
may be well defined (as in the female), evanescent or wanting. Thus separation
of D. calmani and D. formosae is not easy. A comparison of the two species
follows the description of the latter.
Distribution
From Still Bay to northern Natal at depths from 11 to 62 m.
Dic formosae sp. nov.
Figs 12-13
Records sub-
adult adult ovig. no. of
3 3 ce) je) Q juv. total records
SB 33°S17°9E —_—« 26-31 m. 1 1 2
FAL/FBY 34°S 18°E 15-100 m 20 56 54 48 107 20 305 50
SST 34°S 22°E-
33°S21°E =. 30-200 m 13 9 15 Wi eee De 7 85 8
SCD 34°S 21°E-
33°S25°E —s-_: 44-183 m 7 11 7 12 10 1 48 13
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 231
Fig. 12. Dic formosae sp. nov.
Ovigerous female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of cephalothorax, C. Antenna 1.
D. Antenna 2. &E. Maxilliped 3. F. Pereiopod 1. G.Pereiopod2. H. Pereiopod 3.
I. Pereiopod 5. J. Tip of telson in lateral view. K. Tip of telson in ventral view. L. Uropod
and telson.
Scale line = 4 mm for A-B; 2 mm for C, E-I, L; 1 mm for D, J-K.
232 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 13. Dic formosae sp. nov.
Adult male. A. Lateral view. B. Antenna 1. C. Pereiopod 1. D. Pereiopod 2. E. Tip of
pereiopod 3. F. Pereiopod 3. G. Pereiopod 5. H. Pleopod 1. I. Pleopod 2. J. Uropod and
telson.
Scale line = 4 mm for A, C; 2 mm for B, D, F-J; 1 mm for E.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 233
Holotype
Ovigerous female, in the South African Museum, SAM-A15730, collected
by UCT, 21 June 1972. Type locality: 80 mm on the Still Bay transect (24°40’S
21°39’E). UCT station number SST 26J.
Etymology
Formosus (L)— beautifully formed
Description
Ovigerous female, holotype, length 8,8 mm. General form very much as
in D. calmani. Integument smooth, faintly reticulate with no hairs. Carapace
(Fig. 12A) with two transverse ridges anteriorly (and sometimes a shorter
one posteriorly). Pseudorostral lobes (Fig. 12B) fairly pointed. Eye with three
lenses. Carapace very slightly wider than deep and fractionally more than
twice as long as deep.
First pedigerous somite obscured laterally by posterior expansion of
carapace and second by anterior expansion of third. Third and fourth pedigerous
somites coalesced dorsally, fifth dorsal to fourth. Cephalothorax subequal in
length to abdomen excluding telson; abdominal somites subcylindrical.
Antenna | (Fig. 12C) of moderate length, first segment slightly longer
than next two subequal ones together. Both flagella short and 2-segmented.
Antenna 2 (Fig. 12D) 5-segmented, first segment long and last very short with
a stout spine.
Maxilliped 1 with numerous leaflike gill filaments. Maxilliped 3 (Fig. 12E)
much wider distally than proximally. Ischium wider than long, greatly expanded
on inner edge and excavated on outer edge to accommodate merus; bordered
with very fragile denticles. Last four segments subequal in length.
Basis of pereiopod 1 (Fig. 12F) very slightly shorter than rest of limb.
Carpus more than twice length of merus, slightly shorter than propodus.
Pereiopod 2 (Fig. 12G) 6-segmented; basis wide, subequal in length to rest
of limb; carpus distinctly longer than merus. Pereiopods 3 (Fig. 12H) and
4 similar: basis subequal in length to merus; carpus longer than propodus
and dactyl together; dactyl with very strong serrate spine terminally. Basis
of pereiopod 5 (Fig. 121) slightly longer than merus, carpus nearly twice length
of propodus and dactyl together.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 12L) one and a half times as long as wide. Telson
in lateral view (Fig. 12J) rounded, anal valves posterior and almost terminal;
in ventral view (Fig. 12K) with slight dorsal projection beyond anal valves.
Telson more than twice length of telsonic somite, distinctly longer than uropods
and quite cylindrical, without hairs, terminal spines or denticles. Peduncle of
uropod subequal in length to telsonic somite, half length of telson, subequal
in length to rami. First segment of endopod subequal in length to next two
together.
234 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Adult male, paratype, length 9,3 mm. As female, except as follows: cara-
pace (Fig. 13A) nearly two and a half times as long as wide, transverse ridges
(except on eyelobe) usually much less evident. Antennal notch excavated with
a short dorsoventral ridge behind. First two and part of third pedigerous
somites obscured laterally by posterior expansion of carapace, third not pro-
duced anteriorly. Fifth pedigerous somite produced to a point posteriorly.
Abdominal somites grooved ventrally to accommodate flagellum of second
antenna.
Third segment of antenna 1 (Fig. 13B) as wide as long with numerous
fine setae. Flagellum 6-segmented and accessory flagellum 3-segmented.
Flagellum of antenna 2 reaching almost to end of telson, consisting of 18 very
long, sparsely setose segments. Basis of maxilliped 3 as wide proximally as
distally. Basis of pereiopod 1 (Fig. 13C) subequal in length to rest of limb,
last three segments subequal in length. Basis of pereiopod 2 (Fig. 13D) very
wide; carpus two-thirds length of basis, nearly twice length of propodus and
dactyl together. Dactyl of pereiopod 3 (Fig. 13E) small and projecting laterally.
Basis and merus of pereiopods 3 (Fig. 13F) and 4 very stout. Basis of pereiopod 5
(Fig. 13G) excavated dorsally. Rami of pleopods (Fig. 13H) 1-segmented with
long plumose setae.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 13J) nearly twice as long as wide, less than half
length of telson. Telson with four short, blunt spines terminally on a short,
projecting posterior flange. Peduncle of uropod two-thirds length of telson,
rami extending well beyond tip of telson. Exopod very slightly longer than
endopod, subequal in length to peduncle.
Length
Adult male 6,8-9,9 mm
Ovigerous female 7,3-10,3 mm
Remarks
D. formosae and D. calmani are the only two species of Dic possessing
an almost tubular telson, and are very similar in general appearance. A number
of distinguishing features are tabled below.
D. calmani D. formosae
integument hairy, slightly translucent reticulate, often highly calcified
ischium of
maxilliped 3 rounded distally notched to accommodate merus
pereiopod 1 basis subequal in length to basis shorter than carpus plus
pereiopod2¢@ .
pereiopod 3 g .
telson
carpus plus propodus
merus and carpus subequal
merus half width of basis, carpus
a third length of basis
anal valves ventral
propodus
merus two-thirds length of
carpus
merus little narrower than basis,
carpus nearly half length of
basis
anal valves posterior
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 235
D. calmani D. formosae
telsong . . . smoothly rounded terminally slightly protruding terminally
with about eight sharp with four blunt spines
denticles
telson@ . . ._ shorter than uropods longer than uropods
uropods ¢ : . endopod longer rami subequal in length
uropods?. . . peduncle two-thirds length of peduncle half length of telson,
telson, longer than rami subequal in length to rami
Within D. formosae the carapace is variable: the integument may be almost
smooth, is usually distinctly reticulate but may occasionally be rugose. The
two major transverse ridges may extend laterally for only a short distance or
may reach the ventral edge of the carapace. A third short dorsal transverse
ridge may be present or absent.
Distribution
Saldanha Bay to Port Elizabeth at depths from 15 to 200 m. A very common
species.
Dic platytelson sp. nov.
Fig. 14
Records
NIWR 29°S 31°E-26°S 32°E 75-100 m 2 adult 99 (2 records)
Holotype
Adult female, in the South African Museum, SAM-—A15731, collected by
the NIWR, 3 September 1975. Type locality: 100 m, off the coast of Zululand
(26°S 32°E). NIWR station number MN 75/24/H3.
Etymology
Platys (G)—broad, flat; telson (G)—a headland in ploughing (cf. telos—
end), referring to the unusual configuration of the telson compared with that
of other species in the genus.
Description
Adult female, holotype, length 6,2 mm. Integument well calcified, white,
reticulate. Carapace (Fig. 14A) nearly twice as long as deep, with two transverse
ridges, the first completely encircling the carapace about a third from anterior
tip, second about midway along carapace and not reaching ventral edges.
Pseudorostral lobes moderately long, roundly pointed in lateral view with
short carinae midlaterally reaching from below eyelobe nearly to anterior
transverse ridge. Antenna notch shallow and smoothly rounded. Carapace in
dorsal view (Fig. 14B) nearly twice as long as deep, pseudorostrum narrow,
about three times length of eyelobe. Eyelobe wider than long with three clear
lenses. Carapace abruptly narrower in front of each transverse ridge.
236 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 14. Dic platytelson sp. nov.
Adult female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of carapace. C. Antenna 1. D. Maxilliped 3.
E. Pereiopod 1. F. Pereiopod 2. G. Pereiopod 3. H. Pereiopod 4. I. Pereiopod 5. J. Telson
in lateral view. K. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 2 mm for A-B; 1 mm for D-I, K; 0,5 mm for C, J.
First two pedigerous somites visible dorsally only; third and fourth fused
dorsally, third much wider laterally than fourth, fifth slightly dorsal. Abdominal
somites subcylindrical, together subequal in length to cephalothorax.
Figures and descriptions of appendages (Figs 14C-I, K) are taken from
the smaller damaged female and not the holotype.
Antenna | (Fig. 14C) moderately large, first segment subequal in length
to next two together. Flagellum 1-segmented with two’ aesthetascs; accessory
flagellum short and 2-segmented. Antenna 2 short and 3-segmented.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 237
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 14D) enormously expanded distally, wider
than length of next three segments together. Ischium widely expanded; last
four segments short and subequal in length. Exopod small.
Pereiopod 1 (Fig. 14E) very long. Basis little more than a third length of
rest of limb, serrated proximally on inner edge. Ischium wider than long, merus
twice length of ischium; carpus twice length of ischium and merus together;
propodus very slender, long, subequal in length to basis. Dactyl two-thirds
length of propodus. Pereiopod 2 (Fig. 14F) 6-segmented. Basis very large,
a third as wide as long, nearly twice length of remaining segments together.
Distal segments short, exopod very large. Pereiopods 3 and 4 (Fig. 14G—H) with-
out exopods. Basis of pereiopod 3 short, stout. Ischium very small, merus longer
than basis. Last three segments of similar length, carpus with three long, hooked
setae distally. Basis of pereiopod 5 (Fig. 141) short; ischium wide, merus long
and curved; last three segments elongate, carpus with five sharp setae distally.
Telsonic somite slightly longer than wide, protruding for a short distance
between uropods. Telson (Fig. 14J—K) less than one and a half times length of
telsonic somite, narrower for distal, post-anal third with five pairs of lateral
and one pair of terminal spines. Peduncle of uropod nearly as long as telson;
first segment of exopod a third length of second. Rami subequal in length,
first segment of endopod about as long as next two together.
The male is unknown.
Length
Female 5,4—-6,2 mm.
Remarks
With the very large ischium of the third maxilliped, this species is clearly
a member of Dic. It is easily distinguished from the other two South African
species by the long, spinose post-anal part of the telson and the very long distal
segments of pereiopod 1. It is closest to D. thileniusi (Zimmer, 1902) from
New Zealand, from which it is distinguished by its longer telson and shorter,
fused third and fourth pedigerous somites.
Distribution
Known only from two samples from 75 and 100 m off northern Natal and
Zululand.
Vemakylindrus Bacescu, 1961 (comb. nov.)
Generic diagnosis
Pseudorostrum long, approaching or exceeding length of carapace. Third
and fourth pedigerous somites not fused. Exopods absent from pereiopods 3
and 4 of female. Male with two pairs of pleopods. Telson longer than telsonic
somite, usually longer than peduncle. of uropods.
238 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Type species
V. gladiger (Bacescu, 1961b) (as Makrokylindrus (Vemakylindrus) gladiger).
Remarks
Justification for the elevation of Vemakylindrus from subgenus to genus
is presented in the remarks on the family above. The long pseudorostrum is
presumably of functional as well as of taxonomic significance, although why
the exhalant siphon should be situated so far from the mouthparts is not clear.
The telson is very variable in size, in the number of pairs of lateral spines and
the length of the post-anal part so that some species approach Diastylis in this
respect, while some are very close to Makrokylindrus.
Distribution
The genus is widely distributed, with species from the Mediterranean,
the Pacific and the Arctic as well as one from South Africa. Most are very
deep-water species, only one being known from 63 m and the rest from depths
greater than 400 m.
KEY TO THE SPECIES OF VEMAK YLINDRUS
1 In lateral view, distance from anterior tip of eyelobe to distal tip of pseudorostrum (or
siphon if longer) less than distance from anterior tip of eyelobe to posterior tip of
carapace : D
— In lateral view, distance from anterior tip of eyelobe to distal tip of pseudorostrum (or
siphon if longer) greater than distance from anterior eg of eyelobe to posterior tip of
carapace af 4
2 Distal third of telson with four pairs of lateral spines; “carapace (excluding pseudo-
rostrum) hardly longer than deep .. .. V. doryphorus (Fage, 1940)— Mediterranean
— Distal half of telson with five to nine pairs of lateral spines; carapace (excluding pseudo-
rostrum) at least one and a half times as long as deep ..
3 Post-anal part of telson very narrow (about a quarter width of pre-anal ‘part) with five
pairs of lateral spines; angle between pseudorostrum and dorsum of carapace much
more than 90° V. hastatus (Hansen, 1920)—Davis Strait
— Post-anal part of telson half width ice pre- -anal part with nine pairs of lateral spines;
angle between pseudorostrum and dorsum of carapace about 90° V. stebbingi sp. nov.
4 Angle between pseudorostrum and dorsum of carapace about 90° : 5 Pat
— Angle between pseudorostrum and dorsum of carapace more than 140° Ee : 6
5 Length from anterior tip of eyelobe to tip of pseudorostrum equal to length from
anterior tip of eyelobe to posterior edge of last pereion somite
V. vemae (Bacescu, 1961a)— Mediterranean
— Length from anterior tip of eyelobe to tip of pseudorostrum equal to length from
anterior tip of eyelobe to posterior edge of third pereion somite
V. charcoti (Reyss, 19746) — Mediterranean
6 Length of carapace posterior to anterior tip of eyelobe shorter than free pereion
somites together; telson with hardly any post-anal part
V. gladiger (Bacescu, 1961b)—Off Colombia
— Length of carapace posterior to anterior tip of eyelobe greater than free pereion
somites together; telson (where known) with at least one-fifth its length post-anal .. 7
7 Endopod of uropod ageorcntly 1-segmented and half length of peduncle
V. sp. A (Gamo, 1971)— ee
— Endopod of uropod 3-segmented and a third length of peduncle or less 8
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 239
8 Carpus of pereiopod 2 about half length of basis; distal part of telson very strongly
dentate dorsally : V. praliatus (Jones, 1969)—Kermadec Trench
— Carpus of pereiopod 2 nearly as long as basis; distal part of telson finely serrate or
smooth 9
9 Carapace dorsally with Aboue, nine pairs of spines very much larger than the majority:
last two abdominal somites strongly dentate a .. V.sp. B (Gamo, 1971)—Japan
— Carapace dorsally and laterally with many spines larger than the majority; last two
abdominal somites minutely denticulate
V. costaricanus (Bacescu, 1961b)— Pacific coast of Costa Rica
Vemakylindrus stebbingi sp. nov.
Fig. 15
Records
SAM 34°S 17°E 800 m 1 subadult 3, 1 ovig. 9, 2 29 (1 record)
SM 30°S 30°E 850m 1 2 (1 record)
Holotype
Subadult male, in the South African Museum, SAM—A15732, collected
by the R.S. Pieter Faure in about 1900. Type locality: 800 m, off the Cape
Peninsula (34°25’S 17°45’E). SAM station number SAM-A10602 (PF 17440).
Etymology
This species is named for the Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing, who contributed so
much to our knowledge of southern African Cumacea.
Description
Subadult male, holotype, length 4,7 mm. Integument thin and reticulate.
Carapace (Fig. 15A) and lower edge of siphon covered with very small denticles.
Pseudorostral lobes not as long as rest of carapace, tilted upwards at angle of
about 90° to dorsum. Entire anterior and ventral edges with very large hooked
spines. Eyelobe small and eyeless. Carapace about one and a half times as long
as wide at level of first antenna, twice length of pereion somites together.
First two pedigerous somites narrow, third and fourth slightly flanged
laterally. Abdominal somites subcylindrical, fifth longest. Cephalothorax
excluding pseudorostrum and abdomen excluding telson subequal in length.
Antenna 1 very large, protruding beyond tip of pseudorostrum. Three
basal segments subequal in length. Flagellum 3-segmented and accessory
flagellum very short and 1-segmented.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 15B) stout and much longer than remaining
segments together, with two spines at lower distal edge.
Pereiopod 1 (Fig. 15C) fairly stout, basis strongly spinose and about
two-thirds length of remaining segments together. Merus twice length of
ischium; carpus and propodus stout and subequal in length. Pereiopod 2 as in
female. Pereiopods 3 to 5 stout, basis of pereiopod 3 longer than rest of limb
and of pereiopod 5 much shorter.
240 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 15. Vemakylindrus stebbingi sp. nov.
Subadult male. A. Lateral view. B. Maxilliped 3. C. Pereiopod 1. D. Uropod and telson.
Ovigerous female. E. Lateral view. F. Dorsal view of cephalothorax. G. Maxilliped 3.
H. Pereiopod 1. I. Pereiopod 2.
Scale line = 2 mm for F; 1 mm for A, D-E; 0,5 mm for B-C, G-I.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 241
Telsonic somite (Fig. 15D) slightly wider than long, about a third length
of telson. Telson about twice as wide proximally as distally; pre-anal part
about half length of post-anal part and smooth laterally. Post-anal part with
about nine pairs of stout lateral spines. Peduncle of uropod slightly longer than
telson, fairly stout and armed with three very fine hairs. First segment of
endopod apparently long and slender; distal tips of both rami broken.
Ovigerous female, paratype, length 4,6 mm. As male except as follows:
pseudorostrum (Fig. 15E) slightly shorter and more slender, not denticulate
below. Carapace slightly longer and in dorsal view (Fig. 15F) stouter posteriorly.
Abdominal somites stouter.
Distal segments of antenna 1 longer. Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 15G)
wider distally and segments more slender. Basis of pereiopod 1 (Fig. 15H)
shorter and exopod longer. Pereiopod 2 (Fig. 15I) hardly reaching beyond
distal tip of basis of pereiopod 1. Basis short and stout, exopod large. Carpus
twice length of ischium and merus together; propodus and dactyl slender
and together shorter than carpus. Pereiopods 3 and 4 more slender, lacking
exopods. Pereiopod 5 shorter.
Telson broken immediately behind anus. Uropods missing.
Length
Subadult male 4,7 mm
Ovigerous female 4,5 mm
Remarks
This species is most similar to V. hastatus Hansen, 1920, from the Davis
Strait. There are few significant differences between the present specimens
and Hansen’s rather limited figures. V. hastatus is more slender in build and
the telson is about twice as long as the telsonic somite with five pairs of lateral
spines. In V. stebbingi the telson is three times as long as the telsonic somite
with nine pairs of lateral spines. Other minor differences include the lack of
spines on the pedigerous somites and the more sharply angled pseudorostrum
in V. stebbingi. The only other species in which the pseudorostrum is shorter
than the rest of the carapace is V. doryphora in which the carapace is even
shorter and the telson has only four pairs of lateral spines.
Distribution
Known from two records, one from 800 m off the Cape Peninsula and
one from 850 m off Durban.
Makrokylindrus Stebbing, 1912
Generic diagnosis
Pseudorostrum less than a third total length of carapace. Third and fourth
pedigerous somites coalesced (subgenus Coalescuma) or free (subgenus Makro-
kylindrus). Antenna 1 moderate to large. Bases of pereiopods 2 or 2 to 4 often
242 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
broad in adult male. Pereiopods 3 and 4 with exopods rudimentary or absent
in female. Male with two pairs of pleopods. Pre-anal part of telson cylindrical
or subcylindrical, longer and stouter than post-anal part with zero to six pairs
of lateral spines. Terminal spines present or absent. Endopod of uropod 2- or
3-segmented.
Type species
M. fragilis Stebbing, 1912 from South Africa.
Remarks
The problem of distinction between Makrokylindrus and Diastylis is
discussed on page 221 above. The author is aware that the generic diagnoses
given here are little improvement on those already available, but hopes to find
more satisfactory diagnostic characters in a future revision of these genera.
There are at present about forty-seven species in the genus. The
specimen : species ratio in the genus is very low and many species are known
from only a few individuals. Thus some forms described may be merely slight
variants of a single species. With little material available from deep water the
degree of variability is not known and in the key below no attempt has been
made to fuse previously described species which may well prove to be
synonymous.
Distribution
Four species have previously been found off the south-east coast of southern
Africa. Two of these, Makrokylindrus fragilis and M. acanthodes, are available
in the present collection, together with five new species, all from depths greater
than 500 m.
The genus is a deep-water one and includes the deepest record for a cuma-
cean, M. hadalis, from 7160 m in the Java Trench. Only three species are
known from depths of less than 350 m, and two of these are doubtful members
of the genus.
KEY TO THE SPECIES OF MAKROK YLINDRUS
Note: ‘pre-anal’ refers to the portion of the telson anterior to the beginning
of the anal valves; ‘post-anal’ refers to the portion posterior to the beginning
of the anal valves. When measuring the length of the telson in relation to the
uropods, it is assumed that they are in place in the animal and are parallel to
each other, since the peduncle is usually inserted anterior to the insertion of the
telson. Characters of the uropods and telson are of greatest value in separating
species, but since these parts are often damaged, other features are included
where possible.
M. mersus is included twice in the key because the tip of the telson is
unknown. Both it and M. fistularis are doubtful members of the genus in the
presence of inadequate information.
Pl wlni-
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 243
Pre-anal part of telson at least twice length of post-anal part . : ee D.
Pre-anal part of telson no more than one and a half times length of post- -anal part . 29
Anal valves almost terminal, less than a quarter of telson post-anal .. af nee a3
A quarter or more of telson post-anal_ .. ‘ e 3 a8 ae ney “AA
Third and fourth pedigerous somites coalesced Horeally ats Ae ae se
Third and fourth pedigerous somites not coalesced dorsally .. x 8
Integument without spines or denticles; carapace with three or four pairs os fone
tudinal ridges; telson reaching beyond tip of rami of uropods
M. fistularis (Calman, 1911)—Gulf of Siam
Spines and/or denticles present at least anteriorly on carapace; carapace without
longitudinal ridges; telson not reaching tip of rami of uropods ae : 5
Carapace less than twice as long as deep with two transverse rows of ee per
than the rest , M. cinctus Jones, 1969 —off Bali
Carapace at least twice as long as deep with spines of equal length .. xe : 6
Endopod of uropod ja saa length of peduncle; carpus of pereiopod 2 sibetur
in length to basis .. .. M. mersus Jones, 1969—Tasman Sea
Endopod of uropod no more than half length of peduncle; carpus of pereiopod 2 half
length of basis or less a8 7
Basal portion of telson laterally sqnne aioe reece! sepee distal an ot nonods
with one pair of lateral spines ats M. menziesi Bacescu, 1962— Galapagos
Basal portion of telson smooth; telson not reaching distal tip of peduncle of uropod
and lacking lateral spines (has several fine hairs)
M. reyssi Bacescu, 1972—north-west Africa
Anterolateral corner of carapace quite smooth or minutely tuberculate ais Bos D.
Anterolateral corner of carapace dentate or serrate .. ae se UO)
Integument smooth with a few fine hairs; telson shorter (han et ince abdominal
somites together, with one pair of terminal spines WM. alleni Reyss, 1974a—Canary Is.
Integument minutely denticulate, without hairs; telson distinctly longer than last
three abdominal somites together, without terminal spines
M. fagei Bacescu, 1962— Madagascar
Spines confined to dorsal and anterior parts of carapace, with one pair on some
pereion and pleon somites; telson hardly as long as last two abdominal somites
together ws .. M. myriamae Reyss, 1974a—North Atlantic
Entire integument covered with many slender spines; telson longer than last two
abdominal somites together ie ats teh LOM
Carapace a third of total length of body fechas Seerre eae ecu
M. americanus Biicescu, 1962—tropical Eastern Pacific
Carapace a quarter total length of body including telson; distal half of telson
denticulate .. : 12
Telson reaching feond distal tip oo padaped oF reeds sae of ead 1 b-
equal in length to carpus and propodus together
M. tubulicaudatus (Calman, 1904)— North Atlantic
Telson not reaching distal tip of endopod of uropod; basis of pereiopod 1 two-thirds
length of carpus and propodus together ae > 43
Carpus of pereiopod 2 longer than three preceding sarees fopeiber and nee Pee
longer than carapace; telson reaching distal tip of peduncle of uropod
M. hadalis Jones, 1969—Java Trench
Carpus of pereiopod 2 about as long as basis and entire limb shorter than carapace;
telson reaching almost to tip of endopod of uropod .. sis M. spinifer sp. nov.
Carapace entirely lacking spines, denticles or tubercles even at ventrolateral edge .. 15
Carapace with spines, denticles or tubercles at ventrolateral edge or elsewhere .. 16
Pedigerous somites 3 and 4 coalesced; telson reaching first segment of endopod of
uropod M. mundus sp. nov.
Pedigerous somites 3 and 4 not coalesced: ‘telson reaching third segment of endopod
of uropod .. SE as he M. gibraltarensis Bacescu, 1961a— Mediterranean
Carapace with one or two strong transverse ridges around entire width x LT
Carapace without transverse ridges, or those present weak and confined to dorsal part 20
31
32
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Sides of carapace smooth without scattered spines 37 ao Ae ae Beet ts)
Sides of carapace roughened by many small scattered spines . . : yee 9
Carapace with one transverse ridge; endopod of uropod longer than exopod: telsonic
somite little produced between uropods M. fragilis Stebbing, 1912—South Africa
Carapace with two transverse ridges; endopod of uropod shorter than exopod;
telsonic somite produced between uropods for nearly half its length
M. deinotelson sp. nov.
Telson as long as last two abdominal somites together with several pairs of lateral
spines j .. M. sp. Gamo—Japan
Telson subequal i in length to last three abdominal somites together with one pair of
lateral spines M. cingulatus (Calman, 19056)— Malaya
Pseudorostrum nearly a third of total length of carapace with a few denticles above:
rest of carapace unsculptured; pereion and pleon minutely denticulate above
M. baceskei Lomakina, 1968— Antarctic
Pseudorostrum distinctly less than a third of total length of carapace, denticles not
confined to pseudorostrum; pereion and pleon armed or not .. es es cert
Pedigerous somites 3 and 4 coalesced dorsally .. ue a “ie Si na ele,
Pedigerous somites 3 and 4 not coalesced dorsally £4 : 24
Basal part of telson quite smooth laterally .. MM. mersus s Jones, 1969 — Tasman Sea
Basal part of telson serrate or dentate laterally . we oes)
Telson slightly longer than last two abdominal somites together with about five pairs
of lateral spines; spines on carapace concentrated anteriorly
M. balinensis Jones, 1969 — off Bali
Telson at least as long as last three abdominal somites together with 0 to 1 pair of lateral
spines; spines scattered over entire carapace
M. josephinae (Sars, 1871)—North Atlantic
Post-anal part of telson deeply serrated and lacking lateral spines
M. serricaudus (Scott, 1912)—North Atlantic
Post-anal part of telson not serrated but with 0 to four pairs of lateral spines ne 2D)
Telson no longer than last two abdominal somites together .. xt te 25 «626
Telson longer than last two abdominal somites together aN is Bi Pepe 47/
Eyelobe, frontal lobe and pseudorostrum spinulose
M. sandersi Reyss, 1974a—North Atlantic
Eyelobe, frontal lobe and pseudorostrum not spinulose
M. hessleri Reyss, 1974a—North Atlantic
Basal segment of antenna 1 shorter than next two together; 1-4 pairs very small lateral
spines on telson Xe oA M. longipes (Sars, 1871)— —Bay of Biscay
Basal segment of antenna 1 Jonger than next two together; no lateral spines on telson 28
Carapace with a pair of anterolateral horns lateral to frontal lobes; last three pedi-
gerous somites each with a pair of large dorsolateral spines .. M. bicornis sp. nov.
Carapace without anterolateral horns; last three pedigerous somites without spines
M. wolffi Bacescu, 1962—south-eastern Africa
Carapace with two pairs of strong unserrated carinae M. bacescui Brum, 1971—Brazil
Carapace without carinae, or with one pa of unserrated or two or more pete of
serrated carinae ak . 30
Anterolateral edge of ee smooth: carapace 2 neas, plenalse wa no soins or
sculpturing .. M. inermis Fage, 1929— Azores
Anterolateral edge of carapace with spines or fine serrations; spines and/or sculp-
turing of carapace variable a aol
Telson (excluding terminal spines) no loner (can ips te pbdoanaell Romie:
together ae A Ster2
Telson (excluding terminal ‘spines) longer than last two ‘abdominal somites together 40
Front half or more of carapace with evenly distributed spines or denticles of more or
less uniform length; large spines if present confined to frontal lobe and/or pseudo-
rostrum ae A383
Front half or more of carapace without spines or ; denticles, or those present unevenly
distributed; large spines or denticles, if present, not confined to frontal lobe and/or
pseudorostrum ae ee We a ie a ah aS ays ee. ST
33
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 245
Particularly large spines absent from frontal lobe and pseudorostrum, or confined to
an anterolateral flange around pseudorostrum .. 34
One or more pairs of spines on frontal lobe and/or pseudorostrum at least twice
length of the majority 2b 36
Carapace bordered by anterolateral dentate flange or - keel: “endopod of ‘uropod
2-segmented i .. M. mystacinus (Sars, 1887)—North Atlantic
Carapace with no dentate “flange c or keel; endopod of uropod 3- (or Dee 2-)
segmented .. 35
Endopod of uropod shorter than. exopod: pleon somites without spines in "female
(male unknown) .. .. M. longicaudatus (Bonnier, 1896)—North Atlantic
Rami of uropod subequal i in n length; first three pleon somites with a pair of large
dorsolateral spines in female and none in male .. F .. M. aculeatus sp. nov.
Telson without lateral spines; pseudorostrum with two pairs of large erect spines
M. monodi Reyss, 1974a—North Atlantic
Telson with six pairs of lateral spines; frontal lobe with two pairs of large erect spines
M. peresi Reyss, 1974a—North Atlantic
Third and fourth pedigerous somites coalesced middorsally ; carapace with enormous,
sometimes bifid, spines i a M. aegaeus Reyss, 1974b—Mediterranean
Third and fourth pedigerous somites not coalesced middorsally; larger spines or
denticles not bifid .. 38
Telson shorter than peduncle of uropod; major spines of carapace situated c on n raised
protuberances : M. acanthodes (Stebbing, 1912)—South Africa
Telson longer than peduncle of uropods; major spines of carapace not thus situated 39
Carapace with several irregular transverse ridges; telson with five pairs of lateral
spines . .. M. inscriptus Jones, 1971 —Antarctic
Carapace shallowly pitted with five pairs of spines laterally on and behind pseudo-
rostrum; telson with three pairs of lateral spines | M. armatus (Norman, 1879)—Arctic
Carapace with a single pair of large, pointed lateral horns
M. insignis (Sars, 1871)—North Atlantic
Carapace without lateral horns .. ‘ .. 41
Telson with a narrowed collar behind the ; anus M. abyss Lomakina, 1955— Arctic
Telson with no narrowed collar behind anus .. i oe 42
Carapace with one or more rows of spines or fgagies. we ae se .. 43
Spines or denticles on carapace not arranged in rows .. : a .. 44
Carapace with several oblique ridges running down from soy eoe etiona line
towards anterolateral edge ea M. costatus (Bonnier, 1896)—North Atlantic
Carapace with no obvious oblique ridges; a row of small tubercles may run obliquely
upwards from posterolateral edge towards eyelobe
M. neptunius Jones, 1969—Tasman Sea
Pereion and pleon quite devoid of spines or denticles .. a ap st km 45
Pereion and pleon with spines and/or denticles .. ss ae .. 46
Denticles confined to anterior third of carapace; telson with Aye pairs of lateral spines
M. vitiasi Lomakina, 1958 —Kamchatka
Denticles scattered over entire carapace; telson apparently without lateral spines
M. Iomakinae Bacescu, 1962—south-east Africa
Carapace, pereion and pleon with some spines much larger than the rest; telson with
three pairs of lateral spines : M. anomalus (Bonnier, 1896)— North Atlantic
Carapace, pereion and pleon with spines of uniform length; telson with no more than
one pair of lateral spines .. : . 47
Tip of pereiopod 1 not reaching Bad Se carapace -s enatiottonity, basis ahaa as ieee as
rest of limb; telson with one pair of lateral spines
M. stocki Reyss, 1974a—North Atlantic
Pereiopod 1 reaching beyond anterior tip of carapace for half its length, basis sub-
equal in length to carpus and propodus together; telson without lateral spines
M. erinaceus (Sars, 1887)—North Atlantic
* A. jedsi cannot be keyed beyond this point because of the incomplete nature of the
existing specimens.
246 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Makrokylindrus fragilis Stebbing, 1912
Fig. 16
Makrokylindrus fragilis Stebbing, 1912: 150-152, pls. 54-55; 1913: 117-118, figs 72-73.
Records
SM & SAM 30°S 30°E-30°S 31°E 805-900 m 1 adult 3, 1 subadult g, 2 go,
1 ovig. 9, 9 92 (3 records, including
paratypes from SAM-—A10601)
Previous records
Syntypes only.
Syntypes
Deposited by Stebbing in the British Museum (Natural History). Type
locality: 805 m off Durban (30°33’S 30°58’E).
Description
Ovigerous female, length 10,9 mm. Integument minutely reticulate, lightly
calcified. Carapace (Fig. 16A) less than twice as long as deep with a strong
ridge running transversely around entire width and with two short longitudinal
ridges branching from the major one, one short pair ventrolaterally and the
other midlaterally, reaching posterior edge of pseudorostrum. Transverse and
upper lateral ridges with fine hairs, lateral one interspersed with several strong
teeth (which are easily damaged or lost). Pseudorostrum (Fig. 16B) short and
pointed with several small denticles. Eyelobe small, rounded, eyeless. Carapace
widest immediately behind transverse ridge. Anterolateral angle and antennal
notch wanting, anterolateral edge strongly serrated.
First pedigerous somite obscured laterally, second narrow, third and
fourth coalesced. Marsupium large. Abdominal somites subcylindrical, abdomen
including telson slightly longer than cephalothorax. Pedigerous and abdominal
somites entirely lacking spines and denticles.
Antenna 1 (Fig. 16C) long and slender, protruding beyond anterior tip of
pseudorostrum. Three basal segments subequal in length; flagellum 5-segmented
and accessory flagellum shorter and 3-segmented. Antenna 2 (Fig. 16D) short,
3-segmented; first segment very stout.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 16E) considerably produced distally, reaching
half-way along merus. Ischium short, remaining segments subequal in length.
Exopod short.
Basis of pereiopod 1 (Fig. 16F) strongly setose on both edges with a row
of spines below. Ischium and merus subequal in length. Part of carpus present,
remaining segments missing. Pereiopod 2 (Fig. 16G) slender, basis slightly
longer than next three segments together. Ischium very small; carpus longest
of remaining segments. Pereiopod 3 (Fig. 16H) and 4 similar, slender, without
exopods. Pereiopod 5 shorter and still more slender.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 247
Fig. 16. Makrokylindrus fragilis.
Ovigerous female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of carapace. C. Antenna 1. D. Antenna 2.
E. Maxilliped 3. F. Pereiopod 1. G. Pereiopod 2. H. Pereiopod 3. I. Dorsolateral view of
telson. J. Uropod and telson of younger female.
Adult male. K. Lateral view. L. Antenna 1. M. Pereiopod 2.
Scale line = 4 mm for A-B, K; 2 mm for C, E-J, L-M; 1 mm for D.
Telson (Fig. 161) elongate, subequal in length to last three abdominal
somites together, slightly keeled and serrate on lateral borders of proximal
half. About a quarter of telson post-anal, smooth, with a single pair of terminal
spines. Uropods missing from ovigerous female. Uropod (Fig. 16J) of young
female slender, peduncle reaching level of anus. Exopod about three-quarters
length of 3-segmented endopod and about half length of peduncle. First segment
of endopod subequal in length to next two together.
248 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Adult male, length 10,6 mm. As female, except as follows: carapace
(Fig. 16K) much shallower, transverse ridge more clearly interrupted by branch-
ing of longitudinal ridges. Denticles of pseudorostrum, ventrolateral edge and
transverse ridges larger. A few denticles scattered on eyelobe. Last three pedi-
gerous somites relatively larger.
Antenna 1 (Fig. 16L) stouter, first and third segments slightly shorter;
flagella surrounded by numerous short sensory setae; flagellum longer and
4-segmented. Basis of maxilliped 3 stouter. Distal segments of pereiopod 1
missing. Basis of pereiopod 2 very stout, longer relative to distal segments.
Bases of pereiopods 3 (Fig. 16M) and 4 very stout, less than twice as long as
wide, exopods rather long and slender. Basis of pereiopod 4 shorter than that
of pereiopod 3. Pleopods rather short. Uropod and telson as in female.
Length
Adult male 10,6 mm
Ovigerous female 10,9 mm
Remarks
These specimens correspond well with Stebbing’s figures except for a
few discrepancies in the figures of the whole animal. The sculpturing of the
carapace is quite distinctive and cannot be confused with that of any other
species of Makrokylindrus.
Distribution
Known from three samples from the region of the type locality: 805 to
900 m off Durban and vicinity.
Makrokylindrus deinotelson sp. nov.
Fig. 17
Records
SM 27°S 32°E 550m 1 9, 2juvs (1 record)
Holotype
Female, in the South African Museum, SAM-—A15733, collected by the
SAM, 22 May 1976. Type locality: 550 m, in the southern Mozambique Channel,
(27°59’S 32°40’E). SAM station number SM 86.
Etymology
Deinos (G)—terrible, peculiar; telson (G)—a headland in ploughing
(cf. telos—end), referring to the unusual conformation of the telson.
Description
Female, holotype, length 6,8 mm. Broken in two, but otherwise undamaged.
Integument thin, very lightly calcified, rugose posteriorly on carapace, other-
wise lightly reticulate. Carapace (Fig. 17A) about one and a half times as long
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 249
Fig. 17. Makrokylindrus deinotelson sp. nov.
Female. A. Lateral view. 3B. Dorsal view of carapace. C. Antennal. D. Antenna 2.
E. Maxilliped 3. F. Basis of pereiopod 1. G. Pereiopod 2. H. Pereiopod 3. I. Pereiopod 5.
J. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 2 mm for A-B; 1 mm for C, E-J; 0,5 mm for D.
as deep with two very strong transverse ridges meeting laterally. Posterior
ridge tuberculate, slightly posterior to middle of carapace, bearing remains of
spines and forming deepest part of carapace, turning forward below midlateral
level to meet anterior transverse ridge which encircles entire carapace about a
third from anterior edge, bears some tubercles and broken spines and forms
the widest part of the carapace. Pseudorostrum (Fig. 17B) moderately long,
with scattered denticles and spines. Eyelobe very small and triangular. No
antennal notch present, anterolateral edge minutely serrated. Posterior part
of carapace lightly rugose.
250 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
First and part of second pedigerous somites obscured laterally by postero-
lateral extension of carapace, third and fourth narrow and coalesced dorsally.
Cephalothorax and abdomen (excluding telson) subequal in length. Abdominal
somites subcylindrical.
Antenna | (Fig. 17C) fairly long, first and second segments subequal in
length, second finely setose, third slightly shorter. Accessory flagellum short
and 2-segmented, flagellum 3-segmented. Antenna 2 (Fig. 17D) fairly large,
4-segmented; last segment longest.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 17E) very large, expanded distally to reach
level of merus and much wider here with numerous plumose setae. Ischium
fairly large, last four segments subequal in lenzth.
Distal segments of pereiopod 1 missing. Basis (Fig. 17F) fairly stout with
numerous spines on lower edge. Basis of pereiopsd 2 (Fig. 17G) short and
stout, about two and a half times as long as wide, unarmed; ischium short;
carpus longest of remaining segments, subequal ia length to propodus and
dactyl together. Pereiopods 3 (Fig. 17H) and 4 with a very small, 1-segmented
exopod. Merus longest of distal segments; last three segments each shorter
than preceding one. Pereiopod 5 (Fig. 171) similar to pereiopod 4 but basis
and merus much shorter.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 17J) very long, twice as long as wide and nearly
three times as long as deep, protruding between uropods for nearly half its
length and subequal in length to telson. Telson with less than a third its length
post-anal, tapering posteriorly with one pair of spines terminally and two pairs
laterally, almost reaching posterior tip of rami of uropod. Distal tip of peduncle
of uropod reaching half-way down telson, slightly less than twice length of
endopod. Exopod slightly longer than endopod; endopod 3-segmented, first
segment subequal in length to next two together.
The male is unknown.
Length
Female 6,8 mm.
Remarks
As the specific name indicates, the telson and telsonic somite of this species
are unique in that the telsonic somite protrudes well beyond the insertion of the
uropods. Thus although the telson is no longer than the telsonic somite, the
length of the telson plus telsonic somite posterior to the insertion of the uropods
is comparable with that of many species of Makrokylindrus. The character may
prove worthy of generic distinction, but it does not seem to be sufficiently
unusual to warrant the erection of a new genus on the basis of three individuals,
none of which is adult.
M. deinotelson is easily distinguished from all other species in the genus
by this character alone. But in other respects it resembles M. fragilis, M. cinctus
Jones, 1969, and M. cingulatus (Calman, 19055), all of which have transverse
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 251
ridges on the carapace. In both M. cinctus and M. cingulatus the carapace bears
scattered spines apart from those on the transverse ridge(s) and M. fragilis has a
single transverse ridge.
Distribution
Known only from a single sample from 550 m in the southern Mozambique
Channel.
Makrokylindrus mundus sp. nov.
Fig. 18
Records
SM 27°S 32°E 800-810 m 1 21 record)
Holotype
Female, in the South African Museum, SAM-—A15734, collected by the
SAM, 19 May 1976. Type locality: 800-810 m, in the southern Mozambique
Channel (27°09’S 32°58’E).
Etymology
Mundus (L)—neat, elegant, referring to the fact that the animal is
unadorned.
E ES,
Fig. 18. Makrokylindrus mundus sp. nov.
Female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of cephalothorax. C. Antenna 1. D. Pereiopod 2.
E. Pereiopod 3. F. Pereiopod 5. G. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 2 mm for A-B; 1 mm for C-G.
252 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
Female, holotype, length 5,4 mm. Integument very lightly calcified, smooth
and faintly reticulate, with no spines or denticles but with a few hairs on the
carapace. Carapace (Fig. 18A) elongate-oval, slightly more than twice as long
as deep with no antennal notch or anterolateral angle. Pseudorostrum (Fig. 18B)
fairly short and wide; eyelobe small, triangular and eyeless.
First and part of second pedigerous somites obscured by posterolateral
expansion of carapace; third and fourth coalesced dorsally; fifth short. Abdomi-
nal somites subcylindrical, together barely longer than carapace.
Antenna | (Fig. 18C) fairly long, first segment slightly longer than second,
and twice as long as third. Flagellum long and 3-segmented, accessory flagellum
short and 2-segmented.
Antenna 2 very similar to that of M. deinotelson and maxilliped 3 similar
to that of M. fragilis, but ischium slightly longer.
Segments distal to basis of pereiopod 1 missing. Pereiopod 2 (Fig. 18D)
long and slender; exopod fairly large and elongate. Basis narrow, subequal in
length to merus and carpus together; ischium short; carpus equal in length to
propodus and dactyl together. Pereiopods 3 (Fig. 18E) and 4 similar, with
fairly large exopods. Basis fairly stout, little longer than merus. Pereiopod 5
(Fig. 18F) short, merus and carpus subequal in length.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 18G) wider than long, less than a third length of
telson. Telson longer than last three abdominal somites together, cylindrical
for most of its length. Post-anal part a third of total length, tapering to tip with
three pairs of lateral and one pair of terminal spines. Telson almost reaching
posterior tip of first segment of endopod. Endopod 3-segmented, its first
segment subequal in length to next two together. Rami subequal in length.
The male is unknown.
Length
Female 5,4 mm.
Remarks
This species is closest to M. longipes (Sars, 1871) but is distinguished by
the smooth integument without any spines or denticles, the fusion of the third
and fourth pedigerous somites, the shorter carpus of pereiopod 2 and the
relatively longer telson. Although it is rather unlike most other species of
Makrokylindrus in the unarmed integument, M. mundus is placed in the genus
because of its very characteristic telson.
Distribution
A single female known from 800-810m in the southern Mozambique
Channel.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 253
Makrokylindris spinifer sp. nov.
Figs 19-20
Records
SAM (PF 17440) 34°S 17°E 800 m 1 adult 3, 1 9 (1 record)
SM 27°S 32°E-30°S 31°E 800-900 m 1 ovig. 2, 4 29 (2 records)
Holotype
Young female, in the South African Museum, SAM—A15735, collected by
the SAM, 19 May 1976. Type locality: 800-810 m, in the southern Mozambique
Channel (27°09’S 32°58’E). South African Museum station number SM 60.
Etymology
Spina (L)—a thorn; ferre (L)—to bear, referring to the spiny exoskeleton.
Description
Young female, holotype, length 6,2 mm. Entire integument strongly spinose
and lightly calcified. Carapace (Fig. 19A) less than twice as long as deep,
shallowly arched dorsally, evenly covered with moderately large, sharp spines.
Spines at ventral edge particularly long, especially anteriorly. Pseudorostrum
(Fig. 19B) rather short, blunt; eyelobe small and eyeless.
All five pedigerous somites moderately wide and last situated somewhat
dorsally; together about half length of carapace. Abdominal somites sub-
cylindrical, spinose, fifth longest. Abdomen (excluding telson) subequal in
length to cephalothorax.
Antenna | (Fig. 19C) large; first segment slightly longer than next two
subequal, spinose segments together. Accessory flagellum short and 3-segmented,
flagellum much longer and 3-segmented.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 19D) not much wider distally than proximally
with a single row of spines on lower edge. Ischium and merus subequal in
length, carpus slightly longer. Exopod small.
Pereiopod 1 (Fig. 19E) very long and strongly spinose on all segments
except dactyl. Basis equal in length to next three segments together; carpus
and propodus subequal in length, each hardly shorter than basis; dactyl short.
Basis of pereiopod 2 (Fig. 19F) very short and stout, twice as long as wide with
very large exopod. Ischium short, merus slightly longer; carpus subequal in
length to basis, ischium and merus together and longer than propodus and
dactyl together, with small spines. Pereiopods 3 (Fig. 19G) and 4 similar,
slender and spinose. Basis of pereiopod 3 longer than rest of limb and of pereio-
pod 4 slightly shorter. Pereiopod 5 (Fig. 19H) with a few spines on basis and
merus only.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 191) about as long as wide, less than a quarter length
of telson. Telson very long, tubular and spinose, considerably longer than last
three abdominal somites together; post-anal part a small fraction of total
254 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 19. Makrokylindrus spinifer sp. nov.
Young female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of carapace (spines omitted). C. Antenna 1.
D. Maxilliped 3. E. Pereiopod 1. F. Pereiopod 2. G. Pereiopod 3. H. Pereiopod 5. I. Uropod
and telson. J. Uropod.
Scale line = 2 mm for A-B, I; 1 mm for C-H, J.
length with a single pair of terminal spines. Peduncle of uropod slender, tip
not reaching level of anus. Endopod (Fig. 19J) 3-segmented, about three-
quarters length of exopod and less than half length of peduncle; first segment
slightly longer than next two together.
Adult male, length 9,4 mm (SAM-A10602). As female except as follows:
antennal notch (Fig. 20A) visible beneath large spines at anterolateral edge.
First two pedigerous somites flanged laterally.
Third segment of antenna 1 (Fig. 20B) shorter and stouter with a large
number of sensory setae around flagella. Flagellum 4-segmented. Carpus of
maxilliped 3 shorter. Basis of pereiopod 2 less spinose. Basis of pereiopod 3
(Fig. 20C) stouter at base with a single row of spines at outer edge; exopod
long and slender. Telson excavate dorsally (Fig. 20D) anterior to anus and
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 255
Fig. 20. Makrokylindrus spinifer sp. nov.
Adult male. A. Lateral view. B. Antenna 1. C. Pereiopod 3. D. Telson in dorsolateral view.
E. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 2 mm for A; 1 mm for B-E.
much narrower at distal tip. Peduncle of uropod (Fig. 20E) considerably longer,
almost reaching distal tip of telson. First segment of endopod much longer,
second damaged and third missing.
Length
Adult male 9,4 mm
Largest female 9,6 mm
Remarks
Despite the fact that this species occurs at the relatively shallow depths
of less than 1 000 m, and M. hadalis Jones, 1969, occurs at more than 7 000 m,
256 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the two species are remarkably similar in all respects. The distinguishing
features are ones of degree rather than absolute differences, but the species
none the less appear to be distinct. In M. hadalis the spines covering the body
are longer, more slender and more numerous, the appendages (especially the
pereiopods) are longer and more slender, the carpus of pereiopod 2 in par-
ticular is longer and the uropods are longer and more slender. M. hadalis is
known only from immature males. When adults become available the nature
of the distal tip of the telson should determine whether or not these two species
are synonymous.
Distribution
Known at depths from 800 to 900 m from the southern Mozambique
Channel to the Cape Peninsula.
Makrokylindrus bicornis sp. nov.
Fig. 21
Records
SAM 34°S 17°E 800 m 2 22 (1 record)
Holotype
Female, in the South African Museum, SAM-A15739, collected by the
SAM, in about 1900. Type locality: 800 m, off the Cape Peninsula (34°25’S
17°45’E). SAM station number SAM—A10602 (PF 17440).
Etymology
Bis (L)—twice; cornu (L)—a horn, referring to the two horns on the
carapace.
Description
Female, holotype, length 8,5 mm. Integument lightly calcified, slightly
brittle, smooth. Carapace (Fig. 21A) large, rounded, well arched dorsally,
with a single pair of large pointed anterolateral horns visible in dorsal view
(Fig. 21B) with several minute tubercles between them. Anterolateral angle
wanting, ventrolateral edge spinose. Pseudorostrum moderately short and
pointed. Eyelobe small, rounded and eyeless. Carapace nearly three times length
of pereion; first somite obscured laterally by posterior protrusion of carapace,
next two very narrow. Last three pedigerous and first three abdominal somites
with a pair of short, sharp dorsolateral spines, second to fourth pedigerous
somites also with a pair of lateral spines. Abdominal somites including telson
slightly longer than cephalothorax, subcylindrical.
First segment of antenna 1 (Fig. 21C) slender, slightly shorter than next
two together. Flagellum 3-segmented, rather short; accessory flagellum
apparently 1-segmented.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 Dai),
Fig. 21. Makrokylindrus bicornis sp. nov.
Female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of carapace. C. Antenna 1. D. Mazxilliped 3.
E. Basis of pereiopod 1. F. Pereiopod 2. G. Pereiopod 3. H. Pereiopod 5. I. Uropod and
telson.
Scale line = 4 mm for A-B; 2 mm for E-I; 1 mm for C-D.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 21D) more than twice length of rest of limb,
slightly widened distally. Ischium and merus short and stout; carpus very
slightly expanded distally; last two segments subcylindrical.
Segments distal to basis of pereiopod 1 missing. Basis (Fig. 21E) curved
with a row of sharp spines on lower edge. Exopod apparently 3-segmented.
Basis of pereiopod 2 (Fig. 21F) fairly short, strongly spinose on lower edge,
subequal in length to next three segments together. Carpus slender, slightly
longer than next two segments together. Pereiopods 3 (Fig. 21G) and 4 similar,
without exopods; basis of pereiopod 3 subequal in length to rest of limb. Basis
of pereiopod 5 (Fig. 21H) rather longer than rest of limb, serrated on anterior
edge.
Telson (Fig. 211) slightly longer than last two abdominal somites together;
post-anal part less than a third total length and narrower than pre-anal part
with a single pair of terminal spines. Peduncle of uropod slightly longer than
telson, apparently unarmed. First segment of endopod slightly longer than
258 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
second, third missing. Exopod half length of peduncle.
The male is unknown.
Length
Female 6,2-8,5 mm.
Remarks
M. bicornis is close to M. inermis in the large, smooth, unsculptured
carapace, which in M. inermis, however, lacks lateral horns. M. insignis does
possess these horns but in this species the reticulate patterning of the carapace
is characteristic; also the peduncle of the uropod is much shorter and the telson
is shorter, stouter terminally and possesses a pair of lateral spines.
Distribution
A single record from 800 m off the Cape Peninsula.
Makrokylindrus acanthodes (Stebbing, 1912)
Fig. 22
Adiastylis acanthodes Stebbing, 1912: 148-149, pl. 53.
Diastylis acanthodes Jones, 1969: 169.
Makrokylindrus acanthodes Bacescu, 1962: 222.
Records
SM 2T°S 32°E-30°S 31°E 550-900 m 3 adult $3, 21 subadult gg, 2 immature gd,
10 ovig. 29, 27 29, 14 juvs (14 records)
Previous records
Holotype only.
Holotype
Adult male, deposited by Stebbing in the British Museum (Natural History).
Type locality: 805 m, off Durban (about 30°S 30°E).
Description
Ovigerous female, length 7,4 mm (from SM 151 off Durban). Integument
lightly calcified, reticulate, hairy; some hairs very fine, causing particles of
debris to adhere and thus appearing floury. Carapace with many minute,
curved spines and some larger nodules bearing long, slender delicate spines
(usually lost or damaged). Carapace (Fig. 22A) fairly deep in midportion,
inflated posterolaterally with a narrow depressed groove running around
posterior edge. Anterolateral angle wanting, anterolateral edge with several
very large spines. Pseudorostrum (Fig. 22B) fairly short and smoothly rounded;
eyelobe small, triangular and eyeless.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 259
\
(PS
Fig. 22. Makrokylindrus acanthodes.
Ovigerous female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of carapace. C. Antenna 1. D. Maxilli-
ped 3. E. Pereiopod 1 of young female. F. Pereiopod 2. G. Uropod and telson.
Adult male. H. Lateral view. I. Antenna 1. J. Pereiopod 2. K. Pereiopod 3. L. Telson and
peduncle of uropod.
Scale line = 2 mm for A-B, H; 1 mm for C-G, L-L.
260 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Pereion nearly as long as carapace; second to fourth somites slightly
flanged laterally. Cephalothorax and abdomen (excluding telson) subequal in
length, abdominal somites with few small spines and several patches of light
discoloration.
Antenna | (Fig. 22C) rather large, first segment slightly larger than each of
next two; flagellum 4-segmented and accessory flagellum 2-segmented.
Exopod of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 22D) large. Basis slightly longer than rest
of limb and somewhat produced distally. Last three segments subcylindrical
and subequal in length.
Pereiopod 1 damaged in all ovigerous females. In young female (Fig. 22E)
very long, basis less than a third total length. Last three segments elongate;
propodus as long as basis. Basis of pereiopod 2 (Fig. 22F) short, moderately
narrow, less than a third total length of limb. Merus about three times length
of ischium; carpus twice length of merus. Exopod moderately large. Pereiopods
3 and 4 without exopods; bases long and cylindrical, merus and carpus sub-
equal in length. Basis of pereiopod 5 shorter than rest of limb.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 22G) slightly wider than long with two pairs of
small spinules laterally. Telson twice length of telsonic somite, slightly shorter
than last two abdominal somites together; pre-anal part less than twice length
of post-anal part, with numerous spinules dorsally and laterally on basal part.
Post-anal part tapering evenly, with three pairs of lateral and a much longer
pair of terminal spines. Peduncle of uropod a quarter as long again as telson,
slender, with several fine spines on inner edge. Endopod longer by one segment
than exopod, 3-segmented; each segment slightly longer than succeeding one.
Exopod very slender.
Adult male, length 7,8 mm (SM 151). As female, except as follows: cara-
pace (Fig. 22H) shallower, spinose nodules less elevated. Teeth at anterolateral
edge originating slightly behind margin. First four pedigerous somites much
shallower, second to fourth strongly flanged laterally; pereion somites slightly
more hairy and spinules longer. Abdominal somites without patches of
discoloration.
Antenna 1 (Fig. 221) stouter, third segment bearing numerous sensory
setae; accessory flagellum longer. Antenna 2 short, hardly reaching beyond
end of thorax. Distal segments of pereiopod 1 missing from all adult males.
Basis of pereiopod 2 (Fig. 22J) larger and not spinose; exopod larger. Bases of
pereiopods 3 (Fig. 22K) and 4 stouter, exopods present.
Telson (Fig. 22L) shorter relative to elongate peduncle of uropod with a
short raised keel surrounding depressed middorsal area. Pre-anal part relatively
shorter. Peduncle of uropod apparently unarmed, rami missing from all
specimens.
Length
Adult male 7,1-7,8 mm
Ovigerous female 7,4-8,5 mm
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 261
Remarks
M. acanthodes was described by Stebbing (1912) on the basis of a single
adult male from South Africa placed in the new genus Adiastylis (see page 221).
The present specimens differ from Stebbing’s figures in minor respects only.
The spines on the entire body are more marked in his figures, but these spines
are extremely delicate and are usually lost. The lateral spines of the telson are
spaced more widely and the peduncle of the uropod bears numerous rather
long setae in his figure.
M. aegaeus Reyss, 19745, is closest to M. acanthodes in general appearance,
differing in the size and arrangement of spination on the body, the proportions
of pereiopods 1 and 2, the lateral spination of the telson and the proportions
of the rami of the uropods.
Distribution
Known only from the coast of Natal near Durban at depths from 550 to
900 m.
Makrokylindrus aculeatus sp. nov.
Fig. 23
Records
SAM 34°S 17°E 800m 1 subadult J, 1 2, 1 juv. (1 record)
Holotype
Female, in the South African Museum, SAM-A15741, collected by the
SAM, in about 1900. Type locality: 800 m, off the Cape Peninsula (34°25’S
17°45’E). SAM station number SAM-A10602 (PF 17440).
Etymology
Aculeatus (L)—provided with prickles or stings, referring to the spinose
exoskeleton.
Description
Female, holotype, length 8,8 mm. Integument lightly calcified, fairly brittle;
carapace densely covered with short pointed spines; pedigerous and anterior
abdominal somites with a few spinules, posterior abdominal somites smooth
and reticulate. Carapace (Fig. 23A) large, twice as long as wide, gently arched
and slightly inflated posteriorly. No antennal notch; anterolateral edge with
very slightly longer spines than elsewhere. Pseudorostrum rather sharp in
lateral view, rounded anteriorly in dorsal view (Fig. 23B) with fewer spinules.
(Most spinules omitted in Fig. 23B.) Eyelobe small, triangular and eyeless.
Pereion less than half length of carapace, first two somites poorly spinose
and last three with pairs of rather large, erect spines dorsally. Abdomen hardly
longer than carapace; somites cylindrical, first two with a pair of large spines
dorsolaterally.
262 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 23. Makrokylindrus aculeatus sp. nov.
Female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of carapace (most spines omitted). C. Antenna 1
D. Maxilliped 3. E. Basis of pereiopod 1. F. Pereiopod 2. G. Pereiopod 3. H. Pereiopod 5
I. Uropod and telson.
Subadult male. J. Lateral view. K. Antenna 1. L. Pereiopod 1. M. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 2 mm for A-B, J, M; 1 mm for C-I, K-L.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 263
Antenna 1 (Fig. 23C) rather small, first segment longer than and twice
as wide as next two together. Flagellum 3-segmented and accessory flagellum
2-segmented.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 23D) twice length of rest of limb, uniformly
wide along entire length; merus short and very slightly expanded; last three
segments cylindrical. Exopod fairly small.
Segments distal to basis of pereiopod 1 missing. Basis (Fig. 23E) strongly
spinose. Basis of pereiopod 2 (Fig. 23F) subequal in length to next four seg-
ments together, moderately wide. Carpus longer than propodus and dactyl
together. Pereiopod 3 (Fig. 23G) longer than pereiopod 2, shorter than pereio-
pod 4 with basis less than half total length of limb. Pereiopods 4 and 5 (Fig. 23H)
similar to pereiopod 3. Dactyl of pereiopod 5 missing. Pereiopods 3 and 4
without exopods.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 231) as long as wide, less than half length of telson.
Telson stout, more than a quarter as wide as long at base; pre-anal part cylin-
drical and little longer than post-anal part, slightly depressed middorsally
above anal valves. Post-anal part with three pairs of lateral spines, all situated
rather more dorsally than usual. Terminal spines slender. Peduncle of uropod
slender, shorter than telson and subequal in length to last two abdominal
somites together with two spines on inner edge (rest probably lost). Exopod
fairly short and stout; endopod represented by first two segments only, third
apparently mutilated; first slightly longer than remainder of second.
Subadult male, paratype, length 9,2 mm. As female except as follows:
integument very brittle: individual apparently in pre-moult condition with
parts of carapace having lost outer, spinose integument and being soft and
smooth underneath. Integument where whole with finer, shorter spinules.
Carapace (Fig. 23J) slightly more vaulted posterodorsally and nearly twice as
long as wide. Pereion and pleon entirely without spinules.
First segment of antenna 1 (Fig. 23K) shorter, second and third wider;
both flagella 4-segmented. Basis of pereiopod 1 (Fig. 23L) subequal in length to
next four segments together with a single row of rather small spines; ischium and
merus small and subequal in length; carpus and propodus slender and subequal
in length, each slightly longer than dactyl.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 23M) slightly depressed middorsally, slightly less
than half length of telson. Pre-anal part of telson slightly longer with no mid-
dorsal depression; distal tip of telson with four pairs of lateral spines. Pe-
duncle of uropod slender, as long as last two and a half abdominal somites
together, slightly longer than telson and armed with about 14 small spines on
inner edge. Endopod 3-segmented, half length of peduncle; second segment
slightly shorter than first or third. Endopod very slightly longer than exopod
with a stout terminal spine.
Length
Subadult male 9,2 mm Female 8,8 mm
264 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
It is not certain that the female and male described above belong to the
same species. In general appearance and structure of most of the limbs they
are very similar but the uropods and telson differ rather more than is usual in
the genus. Finality on the matter will have to await the collection of more
material
M. aculeatus is close to M. mystacinus, M. wolffi and M. lomakinae.
M. mystacinus, however, has a flattened keel anterolaterally around the carapace
and the telson bears only one or two pairs of lateral spines. The pre-anal part
of the telson is much longer and more slender in M. wolffi, the post-anal part
bears no lateral spines and the first segment of the first antenna is relatively
much larger. In M. lomakinae the basis of pereiopod 1 is longer relative to the
rest of the limb, the telson is much narrower distally and the endopod of the
uropod is 2-segmented.
Distribution
Known from a single sample from 800 m off the Cape Peninsula.
Diastylis Say, 1818
Generic diagnosis
Pseudorostrum less than a third total length of carapace. Third and fourth
pedigerous somites not coalesced, fifth usually produced posteriorly. Antenna 1
of moderate size. Basis of pereiopods not widened in male and pereiopods 2
and 3 not widely separated in ovigerous female. Pereiopods 3 and 4 with exopods
rudimentary or absent in female. Male with two pairs of pleopods. Post-anal
part of telson longer and more slender than pre-anal part with at least three
(usually more than five or six) pairs of lateral and one pair of terminal spines.
Endopod of uropod 2- or 3-segmented.
Type species
D. rathkei (Kroyer, 1841) (as Cuma rathkei) replacing D. arenarius Say,
1818 (nomen nudum) (see page 221).
Remarks
The Diastylis-Makrokylindrus group of species is discussed in detail on
page 221. There are about seventy species in the genus Diastylis, but this
number is approximate because many species have been described inadequately
or from poor material.
Distribution
The genus is cosmopolitan and the depth ranges are rather wider than is
usual in the order. Several species, particularly from the northern hemisphere,
are known from depths of less than 20 to more than 1 000 m.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 265
Only species from the southern hemisphere are included in the key below.
Since many species are strongly sexually dimorphic, it has sometimes been
necessary to key out males and females separately. Where the sex is not stated
the characters apply equally to male and female. No attempt has been made
to join apparently synonymous species.
KEY TO THE SPECIES OF DIASTYLIS FROM THE SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE
Abdomen including telson twice length of cephalothorax
2 D. tenuicaudus Lomakina, 1967—Tasman Sea
Abdomen including telson about as long as cephalothorax .. a rahe 2
Carapace smooth with three pairs of horns anteriorly below eyelobe
Q D. hexaceros Zimmer, 1908—South Africa
Carapace smooth, ridged or spinose but without horns : 3
Peduncle of uropod extending beyond tip of telson (excluding terminal spines) for 2 a
quarter its length or more .. i oe tlie ae
Peduncle of uropod extending posteriorly about a as far : as telson oe ae Sreeed ik
Carapace with no ridges or rows of spines ee ne on aD
Carapace with at least one pair of oblique or transverse ridges ¢ or rows ; of spines .. 7
Telson as long as last three abdominal somites together, post-anal part shorter than
pre-anal part with four pairs of lateral spines
2 D. exilicaudus Jones, 1969—Great Australian Bight
Telson hardly longer than telsonic somite, post-anal part longer than Pree a
with no more than three pairs of lateral spines .. 6
Basis and following three segments of maxilliped 3 widened distally with one or more
teeth; ischium, merus and carpus of pereiopod 2 together longer than propodus and
dactyl together; female with antennal notch and male without
D. pseudinornatus Ledoyer, 1977—Antarctic
Basis and following three segments of maxilliped 3 not widened distally nor bearing
teeth; ischium, merus and carpus of pereiopod 2 together shorter than propodus and
dactyl together; antennal notch absent in female, male unknown
© D. inornatus Hale, 1937b—Antarctic
Carapace with ten to twelve oblique ridges on either side
D. anderssoni Zimmer, 1907—Antarctic
Carapace with no more than five transverse or oblique ridges on either side; orna-
mentation of carapace variable
Carapace with sharp, very oblique ridge(s) delineating depressed anterodorsal area 9
Carapace with no depressed area; ridge(s) transverse .. 10
Telson no longer than telsonic somite with twelve pairs of lateral spines; telson plus
telsonic somite together equal in length to peduncle of uropod
2 D. hammoniae Zimmer, 1902—south-west Atlantic
Telson nearly half as long again as telsonic somite with about five pairs of lateral
spines; telson plus telsonic somite together about a quarter as long again as peduncle
of uropod 2 D. planifrons Calman, 1912—south-west Atlantic
Sides of carapace with three oblique ridges and no spines
D. neozealanicus Thomson, 1892—New Zealand
Sides of carapace with an oblique row of spines; rest of carapace covered with
spinules in female and smooth in male D. insularum ee sian —New Zealand
Endopod of uropod 2-segmented . Be ao sapl2
Endopod of uropod 3-segmented . an ea ee 33
Carapace with some large spines interspersed among numerous 5 smaller spinules
D. horridus Sars, 1887— Antarctic
Carapace smooth or covered with spines or spinules of uniform length a Pon IS)
Anterior part of carapace uniformly covered with spinules
D. zimmeri me 1977—Antarctic
Spinules in rows on carapace if present at all .. fe ee .. 14
Female, juvenile or young male .. bat es 2s oh a8 ae ser peli
266
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Adult male .. ; 17
Telson subequal in length to peduncle of uropods with three pairs of. lateral spines;
peduncle with spines on inner edge
Telson slightly shorter than peduncle of uropod with five to six ‘pairs of lateral spines:
peduncle unarmed .. F 9 D. argentatus Calman, 1912—Chile
Carapace with a row of tubercles around entire border, one obliquely above antero-
lateral edge and three on sides 9 D. granulatus Zimmer, 1921 —south-west Atlantic
Carapace without these rows of tubercles 2 D. fimbriatus Sars, 1873 —south-west Atlantic
Pseudorostrum with a longitudinal row of spinules; posterior tooth of fifth pedigerous
somite bifid .. ys 36 D. argentatus Calman, 1912—Chile
Pseudorostrum without spinules; posterior tooth of fifth pedigerous somite with a
single point .. re 6 D. fimbriatus Sars, 1873—south-west Atlantic
Carapace with two rows of large, curved spines laterally
subadult ¢ D. corniculatus Hee 1937b— Antarctic
Carapace without rows of large, curved spines .. mie ao 1)
Telson shorter than last one and a half abdominal somites together .. oe :. 20
Telson almost, or as long as last two abdominal somites together .. : 2
Carapace devoid of denticles but with coarse, shallow pits; basis of maxilliped 3
expanded distally and twice width of ischium 9 D. delicatus Jones, 1969—Tasman Sea
Carapace with scattered denticles anteriorly at least; basis of maxilliped 3 not or
hardly expanded distally and no more than half as wide again as ischium .. 21
Numerous spinules on carapace; anterolateral edge with two or three small teeth;
telson abruptly narrower posteriorly with eight to nine pairs of lateral spines
© D. acuminatus Jones, 1960b—Chatham Islands
A few spinules anteriorly on carapace; anterolateral edge strongly dentate; telson
tapering posteriorly with no more than six pairs of lateral spines D. namibiae sp. nov.
Fifth pedigerous somite produced to a point in both sexes; pre-anal part of telson
distinctly shorter than post-anal part
D. algoae Zimmer, 1908—South and South West Africa
Fifth pedigerous somite not produced to a point in female and hardly so in young
male (adult male unknown); pre-anal part of telson almost as long as post-anal part 23
Carapace without ridges or denticles; rami of uropod subequal in length to peduncle;
second to fourth pleon somites with a middorsal spine, fifth with a row of spines on
each side we .. @ D. gibbera Jones, 1969—Great Australian Bight
Carapace with ridges or denticles: rami of uropod about half length of peduncle;
pleon somite lacking spines ate 24
Carapace and pleon with several oblique ridges: telson with four pairs of lateral spines
@ D. mawsoni Calman, 1918— Antarctic
Carapace and pleon without ridges; telson with about seven pairs of lateral spines
D. denticulatus Jones, 1956—South West Africa
Diastylis algoae Zimmer, 1908
Figs 24-25
Diastylis algoae Zimmer, 1908: 188-189, pls 9-10; Stebbing, 1910: 418; Stebbing, 1912:
147-148; Jones, 1960a: 178.
Diastylis rufescens Jones, 1955: 288-290, figs 6—7.
Records
sub-
adult adult ovig. no. of
3 3S 3} g Q juv. total records
SWD 26°S 15°E 26m 5 22 15 15 61 38 156 1
WCD = 32°S17°E-
34°S 18°E 20-172 m 95 208 185 339 660 259 1746 28
LBT 32°S 18°E 40-100 m 4 6 7 10 1 28 5
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 267
Fig. 24. Diastylis algoae.
Adult male. FAL: A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of carapace. C. Antenna 1. D. Maxilli-
ped 3. E. Pereiopod 1. F. Pereiopod 2. G. Pereiopod 3. H. Pereiopod 5. I. Uropod and
telson. WCD: J. Lateral view of carapace. L. Uropod and telson. SWD: K. Lateral view of
carapace. M. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 4 mm for B; 2 mm for A, C-M.
268 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
sub-
adult adult ovig. no, of
3 g Q@ juv. total records
SB 33°S 17°E 11- 56m 14 26 6 45 89 180 10
FAL &
FBY 34°S 18°E 27-102 m 34 44 20 76 56 Al S271 Sit
SCD 34°S 21°E—
33°S 25°E 32-172 m 8 19 9 15 46 12 109 21
SST 34°S 21°E—
35°S 22°E 30-200 m 7 10 57 50 63 216 9
SAM 34°S 18°E-
33°S 25°E 37-110m 2 1 2 5 10 6
FISH plankton 7) 8 13 23 4
Fig. 25. Diastylis algoae.
Ovigerous female. FAL: A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of carapace. C. Antenna 1.
D. Pereiopod 3. E. Uropod and telson. WCD: F. Carapace in lateral view. G. Uropod and
telson. SWD: H. Carapace in lateral view. I. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 2 mm for A-B, D-I; 1 mm for C.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 269
Syntypes
Two females, at least one ovigerous, deposited by Zimmer in the Berlin
Zoologisches Museum. Type locality: 40 m, in Algoa Bay (Port Elizabeth)
(33°S 25°E).
Previous records
Algoa Bay (33°S 25°E)—40 m (Zimmer 1908); Still Bay (34°S 20°E)—
44 m, Algoa Bay 51-57 m, East London (32°S 28°E)—75 m (Stebbing 1910,
1912); Orange River Mouth (28°S 16°E)—plankton (Jones 1955); Lambert’s
Bay (32°S 18°E)—plankton, False Bay (34°S 18°E)—82 m (Jones 1960a).
Description
Adult male, length 10,6 mm (FBY 51G). Integument reticulate and covered
with minute spinules. Carapace (Fig. 24A) two and a half times as long as deep,
slightly arched dorsally with a pair of shallow depressions posterolaterally on
the frontal lobe and a line of small spinules ventrolaterally on the posterior half.
Pseudorostrum straight and pointed, about a fifth total length of carapace
with a few slightly larger spinules and one fairly obvious apical pair. Antero-
lateral edge finely dentate and bearing several plumose setae; antennal notch
fairly deep, anterolateral angle wanting. In dorsal view (Fig. 24B) anterolateral
corners widely bowed outwards and denticles visible. Eyelobe rounded, slightly
wider than long with three indistinct lenses.
Pereion including posterior projection of fifth pedigerous somite about
half length of carapace. First pedigerous somite very narrow and obscured
laterally by carapace; second to fourth flanged laterally; posterior projection
of fifth very long, slightly curved, with a large terminal spine. Abdomen (exclu-
ding telson) subequal in length to carapace; first abdominal somite with two pairs
of small ventral spines; second almost smooth. Third to fifth with scattered
denticles plus two rows of small sharp denticles dorsolaterally and two ventro-
laterally; second to fourth with brushes of setae posteroventrally. All abdominal
somites deeply grooved ventrally to accommodate flagellum of second antenna.
First segment of antenna 1 (Fig. 24C) slightly longer than next two sub-
equal segments together; third segment twice as long as broad with many
sensory setae. Flagellum 4-segmented and accessory flagellum 3-segmented.
Flagellum of antenna 2 reaching well beyond distal tip of uropods, segments
long.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 24D) stout, little produced distally and slightly
less than twice as long as remainder of limb. Exopod large.
Basis of pereiopod 1 (Fig. 24E) subequal in length to rest of limb; wide
proximally and strongly setose with a row of spines on outer surface; exopod
very large. Ischium and merus short, together half length of carpus; carpus
slightly longer than dactyl and slightly shorter than propodus. Basis of pereio-
pod 2 (Fig. 24F) subequal in length to next four segments together, fairly wide
270 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
and setose with a row of spines on outer surface. Ischium very short; carpus
slightly longer than propodus and dactyl together. Exopod very large. Pereio-
pods 3 (Fig. 24G) and 4 similar; basis wide, exopod large, merus and carpus
long. Pereiopod 5 (Fig. 24H) rather small. Distal three segments of last three
pereiopods bearing numerous fossorial setae.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 241) as wide as long, less than half length of telson.
Telson as long as last two and a half abdominal somites together, pre-anal
part about two-fifths total length with a depressed middorsal region bounded
by a sharp keel. Post-anal part with 15 (varies between 12 and 20) pairs of short,
sharp lateral spines. Peduncle of uropod slightly longer than telson, strongly
spinose on inner margin. Endopod slightly longer than exopod, less than half
length of peduncle and 3-segmented. First segment subequal in length to next
two together.
Adult male, length 8,6 mm (WCD 69F). As male from False Bay except:
carapace (Fig. 24J) slightly more than twice as long as deep. eyelobe slightly
protruding dorsally. Lateral line of spinules bending slightly upwards and
joining faint semicircular ridge running backwards from base of eyelobe and
turning forwards to anterolateral corner. Frontolateral edge deeper with shorter,
non-plumose setae. Telsonic somite (Fig. 24L) slightly wider than long; telson
slightly shorter, pre-anal part relatively longer, post-anal part with seven
(varies between six and nine) pairs of lateral spines.
Adult male, \ength 7,8 mm (SWD 16E). As FAL and WCD males except:
carapace (Fig. 24K) more than two and a half times as long as deep, laterally
without semicircular ridge anterolaterally; frontolateral teeth slightly larger,
not interspersed with setae. Telsonic somite (Fig. 24M) slightly less than three
times length of telson; proportions of pre- and post-anal parts of telson inter-
mediate between those of FAL and WCD specimens with 12 (varies between
10 and 13 pairs) of lateral spines. Telson subequal in length to peduncle of
uropod.
Ovigerous female, length 9,6 mm (FBY 51G). As adult male from FAL
except as follows: integument with short, scattered hairs; spinules more evident
on eyelobe; eye visible only as gaps between spinules. Carapace (Fig. 25A)
twice as long as deep, without lateral line of spinules. Pseudorostrum nearly a
quarter total length of carapace, slightly upturned; apical teeth very distinct,
but no other large ones evident. Teeth at anterolateral edge much smaller; no
plumose setae present. Carapace in dorsal view (Fig. 25B) wider posteriorly
than anteriorly; anterolateral corners not produced or visible.
Carapace almost as long as pereion; first pedigerous somite wider and all
without obvious lateral flanges; posterior projection of fifth shorter. Abdominal
somites subcylindrical and without spinules, together equal in length to carapace
and first two pedigerous somites only.
All segments of antenna 1 (Fig. 25C) longer and more slender; both
flagella 3-segmented. Antenna 2 short. Bases and exopods of pereiopods 1 and
2 smaller. Pereiopods 3 (Fig. 25D) and 4 similar, without exopods; bases very
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 271
much more slender.
Telson twice length of telsonic somite (Fig. 25E) with 14 (varies between
11 and 17 pairs) of lateral spines; pre-anal part relatively shorter, middorsal
depressed area shallower and less evident. Endopod of uropod half length of
peduncle and slightly shorter than exopod.
Ovigerous female, length 7,8 mm (WCD 69F). As FAL ovigerous female
except: carapace (Fig. 25F) less than twice as long as deep, frontal edge deeper
with setae between the spines. Posterior groove quite distinct. Pre-anal part of
telson (Fig. 25G) shorter, post-anal part with 13 (varies between 11 and 16)
pairs of lateral spines. Third segment of endopod slightly longer than second.
Ovigerous female, length 7,5 mm (SWD 16E). As ovigerous females from
FAL and WCD except: pseudorostrum (Fig. 25H) slightly shorter and more
upturned; posterior depression running further forward along ventral edge.
Anterolateral teeth extending further back with setae interspersed between the
spines. Post-anal part of telson (Fig. 251) with fifteen (varies between thirteen
and sixteen) pairs of lateral spines. Endopod of uropod less than half length of
peduncle, all three segments subequal in length.
Length
Adult male: SWD forms 7,4-8,3 mm; WCD forms 8,0-10,8 mm; FAL
forms 8,0-10,6 mm; SCD forms 7,7—9,3 mm.
Ovigerous female: SWD forms 6,7-8,6 mm; WCD forms 7,0-10,6 mm;
FAL forms 6,7—9,6 mm; SCD forms 6,7—9,0 mm.
Remarks
Two species of Diastylis, D. algoae and D. rufescens Jones, 1955 have
been described from southern African waters. D. algoae was described from
two ovigerous females from Algoa Bay on the south coast and D. rufescens
from adult males and females from plankton samples taken off the Orange
River Mouth. Comparison of the original figures of the females of the two
species suggests that they are very easily distinguished, particularly in the
relative lengths of the carapace and the whole body, the distal segments of
pereiopod 1 and the endopod of the uropod. However, on examination of
hundreds of specimens of Diastylis available in the present collection, taken
from Liideritz to East London, it has become apparent that there are not only
specimens approaching both D. algoae and D. rufescens but that there is a
range of intermediates, which appear to form a single highly variable species.
The length of the carapace in proportion to the depth varies from less than two
to almost three; the anterolateral region of the carapace is shallow in some
and deep in others; the proportions of the pre and post-anal parts of the telson
vary, as do the number of pairs of lateral spines and the relative length of the
telson and uropods. The lengths of the animals are also variable.
In short, it is apparently impossible to distinguish two species, particularly
since variable characters are not always found together in the same group of
272 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
individuals or those from a part of the geographic range. There is a tendency
for those animals from the north-west to be most elongate and for those from
the east to be rather short and stout; otherwise the variability is not constant.
Thus it is proposed to place all of the specimens in a single species. Since
Zimmer’s is the older name, the species must be called D. algoae, with
D. rufescens becoming a synonym.
One of the major characters used by Jones to distinguish his species from
D. algoae was the anterior emargination of the pseudorostrum in the female
of this species. In fact this ‘emargination’ shown by Zimmer is a poor repre-
sentation of the pair of apical spines which is present in most specimens of
both sexes, but which may be absent. The absence sometimes appears to be
due to mutilation but in other cases there is no sign that the spines were ever
present. The three distal segments of pereiopod 1 appear to be shorter in
D. rufescens than in any of the specimens seen by the author, but this single
character is not sufficient to warrant the separation of the species.
Within Diastylis, D. algoae appears to be most similar to D. laevis Norman,
1869, which however differs in the presence, in the male, of oblique folds on
the carapace and the longer telson in both sexes. Of the species from the southern
hemisphere, D. denticulatus is closest to D. algoae but is distinguished by the
longer pre-anal part of the telson, the vertical rows of spinules on the carapace
and the shorter posterior protrusion of the fifth pedigerous somite. The adult
male of D. denticulatus is unknown.
Distribution
As well as being highly variable morphologically, D. algoae is one of the
most widely distributed southern African Cumacea. It is known from Liideritz
to East London at depths from 20 to 200 m and is the most abundant species
on the coast.
Diastylis namibiae sp. nov.
Fig. 26
Records
sub-
adult ovig. no. of
3 3 io) 2 total records
SWD 26°S 15°E 26m 2 1 3 1
WCD 32-33°S17°E 78-142m 1 1 1 3 2)
LBT 32°S 17°E 200-280 m 1 2, 3 2.
Holotype
Adult female, in the South African Museum, SAM—A15740, collected by
UCT, 15 September 1970. Type locality: 280 m, off Lambert’s Bay (32°05’S
17°00’E). UCT station number LBT 24K.
Etymology
This species is named for the Namib desert, off the coast of which it is
found.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 273
Fig. 26. Diastylis namibiae sp. nov.
Adult female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of cephalothorax. C. Antenna 1. D. Maxilli-
ped 3. E. Pereiopod 1. F. Pereiopod 2. G. Pereiopod 3. H. Uropod and telson.
Subadult male. I. Lateral view. J. Pereiopod 3. K. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 2 mm for A-B, I; 1 mm for C-H, J-K.
274 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
Adult female, holotype, length 6,4 mm. Carapace (Fig. 26A) rather large,
less than twice as long as deep and slightly wider than deep. Integument yellow-
ish, well calcified, reticulate with a few small hairs and scattered spinules.
Pseudorostrum short, fairly deep. Anterolateral angle waiting, frontolateral
edge deep; this and anterolateral edge bearing numerous blunt, forward-
pointing teeth. Eyelobe (Fig. 26B) wider than long, eyeless, with a few scattered
spinules on it and on frontal lobe. Lateral to frontal suture is a row of about
six small spinules running longitudinally, ending in a pair of short protuberances
at posterior edge of frontal suture.
Pereion less than half length of carapace, first segment obscured laterally,
fifth abruptly lower than fourth and slightly protruding posteriorly with a
small spine at tip. Cephalothorax slightly shorter than abdomen; abdominal
somites narrower anteriorly, subcylindrical posteriorly, last five with several
small, clear patches.
Appendages taken from ovigerous female. Antenna 1 moderately large
(Fig. 26C), first segment longer than each of next two subequal segments.
Flagellum quite stout and 3-segmented; accessory flagellum short and
2-segmented.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 26D) stout, slightly produced distally. Exopod
narrow. Ischium short, as wide as merus. Last three segments narrow and
longer.
Basis of pereiopod 1 (Fig. 26E) subequal in length to carpus and propodus
together. Ischium and merus short; carpus and propodus long, fairly stout and
subequal in length; dactyl short. Basis of pereiopod 2 (Fig. 26F) short, little
more than half length of rest of limb. Ischium short; merus twice length of
ischium; carpus long and subequal in length to dactyl. Pereiopods 3 (Fig. 26G)
and 5 similar, without exopods. Bases with numerous fine spines as well as
setae. Distal segments stout, merus and carpus subequal in length.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 26H) about as long as wide, slightly shorter than
telson. Telson little narrower posteriorly than anteriorly, post-anal part longer
than pre-anal with six pairs of lateral spines and a pair of larger terminal ones.
Peduncle of uropod a third as long again as telson with few spines on inner edge.
Rami rather slender; endopod 3-segmented, longer than exopod and two-
thirds length of peduncle; first segment of endopod subequal in length to next
two subequal segments together.
Subadult male, length 4,8 mm (WCD). As female, except as follows:
pseudorostrum (Fig. 261) shallower and more pointed; anterolateral angle
evident; antennal notch present; anterolateral edge with longer, more numerous
pointed spines. Anterior part of carapace with more and slightly longer spinules.
Abdomen slightly longer than cephalothorax, somites cylindrical.
Second and third basal segments of antenna 1 stouter, flagellum
4-segmented. Carpus and merus of pereiopod 1 slightly shorter and propodus
a little longer. Carpus of pereiopod 2 slightly shorter. Bases of pereiopods 3
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 275
(Fig. 26J) and 4 slightly stouter, exopods well developed; distal segments much
more slender. Telson (Fig. 26K) with two pairs of spines.
Length
Subadult male 4,8 mm
Ovigerous female 5,4 mm
Remarks
This is one of the species which is accommodated in Diastylis without
being typical of the genus. It is rather stouter than is usual and the telson
approaches that of Leptostylis. However, it is nearer to Diastylis and is there-
fore placed in this genus in the absence of adult males which would confirm
the generic position. In the short length of the telson it is most similar to D. insu-
larus Calman, 1908, and D. neozeaylanicus Thomson, 1892, from New Zealand,
differing from these in the shorter peduncle of the uropod, the shorter carapace
and the stouter body as well as the arrangement of the spinules.
Distribution
Known only from the south-western coast of Africa from Liideritz to
Saldanha Bay at depths from 26 to 280 m.
Diastylis hexaceros Zimmer, 1908
Diastylis hexaceros Zimmer, 1908: 187, figs 93-95; Stebbing, 1913: 137.
Preyious records
Type locality only.
Holotype
Ovigerous female, deposited by Zimmer in the Berlin Zoologisches
Museum. Type locality: 565 m, on the Agulhas Bank (39°09’S 18°32’E).
Remarks
This species is known only from the holotype. It seems to be close to
Makrokylindrus bicornis sp. nov., but possesses three pairs of lateral horns
on the carapace rather than one. From Zimmer’s figures the telson appears
to be typical of Diastylis, but confirmation of the generic position will have
to await the availability of more material.
Leptostylis Sars, 1869
Generic diagnosis
Pseudorostrum short and body slender. Fifth pedigerous somite not
produced posteriorly. Third segment of antenna | of adult male large, clubbed
and setose, quite different from that of adult female. Flagellum of antenna 2
of adult male not reaching beyond end of thorax. Rudimentary exopods usually
276 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
present on pereiopods 3 and 4 of female. Male with two pairs of pleopods.
Telson usually shorter than and never more than a quarter as long again as
telsonic somite with no more than four pairs of lateral spines. Uropods elongate,
peduncle longer than telson and endopod 3-segmented.
Type species
Not designated. When erecting the genus, Sars (1869) included L. ampul-
laceous (Liljeborg, 1855), L. longimanus (Sars, 1865), L. villosus and L. macrurus.
Remarks
The genus is discussed in the remarks on the family on page 220 above.
The slender form, short telson and large clubbed first antenna in adult males
make it one of the more easily recognized of the Diastylis group of genera.
Some species are close to Diastylis in the length of the telson; finality on the
generic position of these species is possible only when adult males are available.
KEY TO THE SPECIES OF LEPTOSTYLIS FROM THE SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE
1 Carapace with ee dentate or smooth dorsolateral, lateral or ventrolateral
carina fe ie a ie te xe oH she ee
— Carapace with no lateral carinae .. ay ie i ie are ae Petey 5)
2 Carina ventrolateral and crenulate L. macruroides Stebbing, 1912—South Africa
— Carina dorsolateral . an eas
3 Telson less than a third length of peduncle of uropod; lateral carina ‘smooth
L. antipus Zimmer, 1909— Antarctic
— Telson more than half length of peduncle of uropod; lateral carina dentate eee
4 Peduncle of uropod with three spines and endopod unserrated on inner edge; telson
with one pair of minute lateral spines ae .. L. mancus Sars, 1873—Brazil
— Peduncle of uropod with nine spines and endopod serrated oninner edge; telson with
two pairs of slender lateral spines L. mancoides Bacescu—Mester, 1967—Brazil
5 Telson excluding terminal spines slightly longer than fifth abdominal somite and
lacking lateral spines ; integument uniformly denticulate L. vercoi Hale, 1928—Australia
— Telson excluding terminal spines much shorter than fifth abdominal somite with at
least one pair of lateral spines; integument variable but not uniformly denticulate.. 6
6 Telson with no distinct post-anal part, anus elevated and protruding
L. crassicaudus Zimmer, 1907— Antarctic
— Telson with distinct post-anal part, not elevated nor protruding a Ree!
7 Terminal third or less of telson abruptly shallower than rest and midpart carinate
dorsolaterally around a shallow concavity 3 : adult ¢ L. gilli sp. nov.
— Terminal part of telson smoothly tapering or abruptly shallower but not carinate
middorsally .. : = cn es wie as Le ete
8 Anterolateral edge of carapace crenulate ay ae ae ae ie eee,
— Anterolateral edge of carapace serrate or dentate Hi: 10
9 Telson at least as long as telsonic somite with three pairs of lateral spines: antenna 1
much less than half length of carapace
L. vemae Bacescu—Mester, 1967— Western Atlantic
— Telson distinctly shorter than telsonic somite with one pair of lateral spines; antenna 1
at least half length of carapace .. .. LL. attenuatus sp. nov.
10 Denticles present on pseudorostral lobes z as s well a as on anterolateral edge of carapace 11
— Carapace entirely without denticles except at anterolateral edge ae aan alt
11 Exopods absent from pereiopod 3; telson with four pairs of long lateral spines and
smoothly tapering from base to tip iis x ? and immature ¢ L. gilli sp. nov.
— Exopods present on pereiopod 3; telson with no more than three pairs of short
lateral spines and abruptly narrower at tip ee sh me L. faurei sp. nov.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 277
12 Telson including terminal spines about a third as long as peduncle of uropod
L. profundus Jones, 1969—Tasman Sea
— Telson including terminal spines about half as long as peduncle of uropod ormore.. 13
13 Endopod of uropod very slightly shorter than peduncle, first segment almost as long
as next two together; basis of maxilliped 3 hardly longer than rest of limb
L. chileanus Bacescu—Mester, 1967 —Chile
- Endopod of uropod no more than two-thirds length of peduncle, segments subequal
in length; basis of maxilliped 3 distinctly longer than rest of limb .. 14
14 Telson about twice as long as deep; exopods of pereiopods 3 and 4 of female about
a tenth length of basis; anterolateral edge of carapace regularly and deeply serrate
L. recalvastrus Hale, 1945—Australia
— Telson less than twice as long as deep; first segment of exopods of pereiopods 3 and 4
more than a quarter length of basis in female (male unknown); anterolateral edge of
carapace shallowly and unevenly dentate L. azaniensis Jones, 1969—off Kenya
Leptostylis gilli sp. nov.
Figs 27-28
Records
sub-
adult adult ovig. no. of
3 3 3 fe) @ total records
SWD 28°S 15°E 170m 2 2 1
WCD 33°S17°E-34°S18°E 68-200m 1 1 3 5 4
LBT 32°S 17°E-32°S 18°E 30-280m 8 42 D. 21 103 176 6
SST 34°S 21°E-35°S 22°E 50-200m 5 6 DZ 36 10 59 5
SCD 34°S 22°E-34°S25°E 106-183m 2 1 1 4 8 5
Holotype
Ovigerous female, in the South African Museum, SAM-A15736, collected
by UCT during the LBT transect, 24 September 1972. Type locality: 200 m,
on the Lambert’s Bay transect (32°04’S 17°12’E). UCT station number
LBT 67F.
Etymology
This species is named after a friend called Gilly.
Description
Ovigerous female, holotype, length 5,9 mm. Integument very thin, delicate,
somewhat reticulate and minutely denticulate with a few short hairs on cara-
pace. Carapace (Fig. 27A) about one and a half times as long as deep, slightly
furrowed laterally and covered with small denticles (difficult to see in newly
moulted animals). Antennal notch small but evident, anterolateral angle small
and rectangular, minutely serrate below. Pseudorostral lobes short and rounded,
slightly upturned, with a single row of denticles laterally. Eyelobe (Fig. 27B)
small, triangular, eyeless.
Pereion less than half length of carapace, first two somites narrow and
the third fairly wide. Abdominal somites relatively stout, subcylindrical; fifth
almost as long as peduncle of urepod. Abdomen longer than cephalothorax
by one somite.
278 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Antenna | (Fig. 27C) of moderate length, first segment subequal in length
to next two subequal segments together. Flagellum 4-segmented and accessory
flagellum 2-segmented. Antenna 2 (Fig. 27D) short and 3-segmented.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 27E) about one and a half times as long as
rest of limb; ischium, merus and carpus subequal in length; propodus and
dactyl slightly longer and more slender.
Pereiopod 1 (Fig. 27F) very long and slender, basis less than half length
of rest of limb. Ischium and merus short, subequal in length; carpus long,
propodus longer, subequal in length to merus and carpus together; dactyl
short. Basis of pereiopod 2 (Fig. 27G) fairly broad, hardly half length of rest
of limb. Ischium very short; merus plus carpus subequal in length to propodus
plus dactyl. Pereiopods 3 (Fig. 27H) and 4 similar, pereiopod 3 slightly the
longer; exopods absent. Merus and carpus subequal in length, propodus and
dactyl both small. Merus and carpus of pereiopod 5 relatively large.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 27J) slightly longer than telson (excluding terminal
spines), with two pairs of small spines dorsally. Telson evenly tapering from
base; post-anal part slightly longer than pre-anal (Fig. 271) with four pairs of
stout spines and two or three pairs of very slender spines laterally. Terminal
spines long. Peduncle of uropod slightly more than twice length of telson with
several small spines on inner edge. Endopod of uropod longer than exopod
by one segment and three-quarters length of peduncle; first segment of endopod
much longer than next two together.
Adult and subadult males, paratypes, \engths 6,2 and 5,7 mm. All adult
males are very delicate and none is undamaged. Thus the figures and descrip-
tions of the whole animal (Figs 28A-B) are of a subadult male, which as far as
can be seen differs from the adults only in the telson. Figures 28C-J are of an
adult male paratype. The males differ from the females as follows: anterolateral
angle and antennal notch (Fig. 28A) wanting; ventrolateral edge of carapace
with several large spines. Eyelobe elevated somewhat above level of pseudo-
rostral lobes (Fig. 28B). Pereion not as deep and first somite obscured laterally
by posterior expansion of carapace. Fifth abdominal somite shorter.
Antenna 1 (Fig. 28C) clubbed; third segment short and broad, bearing
numerous sensory setae. Accessory flagellum longer and 4-segmented. Flagellum
of antenna 2 not reaching end of thorax. Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 28D)
curved, slightly longer. Segments distal to basis missing from pereiopod 1 in
all cases. Basis of pereiopod 2 (Fig. 28E) longer, merus more slender. Exopod
very well developed. Pereiopods 3 (Fig. 28F) and 4 with segments distal to
basis less stout. Rami of pleopod 1 (Fig. 28G) short and 1-segmented. Only
the inner ramus of pleopod 2 (Fig. 28H) developed. Both pleopods strongly
setose.
Telson slightly longer, post-anal part (Fig. 281) much longer, shallower
and abruptly narrowed at tip with a single pair of terminal spines; keeled
dorsally around a shallow concavity. Peduncle of uropod (Fig. 28J) slightly
stouter and more strongly armed with minute denticles between the spines.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 279
Fig. 27. Leptostylis gilli sp. nov.
Ovigerous female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of cephalothorax. C. Antenna 1.
D. Antenna 2. E. Maxilliped 3. F. Pereiopod 1. G. Pereiopod 2. H. Pereiopod 3. I. Telson
in lateral view. J. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 2 mm for A-B; 1 mm for CJ.
280 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ht
KN
NY
NY
==
SS
LI IZ
xs
Fig. 28. Leptostylis gilli sp. nov.
Subadult male. A. Lateral view. B. Detail of anterior tip of carapace.
Adult male. C. Antenna 1. D. Maxilliped 3. E. Pereiopod 2. F. Pereiopod 3. G. Pleopod 1.
H. Pleopod 2. I. Telson in lateral view. J. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 2mm for A; 1 mm for B-J.
First segment of endopod longer.
Length
Adult male about 5,8-6,8 mm
Ovigerous female 4,2-6,8 mm
Remarks
In many respects, particularly in the nature of the telson in the adult male
and the denticulation of the carapace, this species shows a greater resemblance
to Dimorphostylis than to Leptostylis. But the unwidened bases of pereiopods 1
to 4 and the short flagellum of the second antenna in adult males, together
with the poorly developed pleopods, require it to be placed in Leptostylis. Also,
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 281
the third segment of antenna 1 in adult males is typical of Leptostylis, although
it should be pointed out that this character is approached in several species of
Dimorphostylis, so that the genera are obviously very close.
Within Leptostylis, L. gilli most closely approaches L. crassicaudus Zimmer,
1907, from the Antarctic, but the latter lacks denticles and folds on the cara-
pace, which is much larger and stouter and lacks an anterolateral angle. Further,
the peduncle of tHe uropod and first segment of the endopod are considerably
shorter in L. crassicaudus and the telson differs from that of L. gilli.
Distribution
Known from Liideritz to Port Elizabeth at depths from 30 to 280 m.
Leptostylis faurei sp. nov.
Fig 29.
Records
SAM 34°S 17°E 800 m 3 subadult $3, 5 33, 2 adult 99 , 4 99 (1 record)
Holotype
Subadult male, in the South African Museum, SAM-A15737, collected by
the SAM in about 1900. Type locality: 800 m, off the Cape Peninsula
(34°25’S 17°45’E). SAM station number SAM-—A10602 (PF 17440).
Etymology
This species is named for the R.S. Pieter Faure.
Description
Subadult male, holotype, \ength 8,0 mm. Integument lightly calcified and
reticulate. Carapace (Fig. 29A) slightly less than twice as long as deep, minutely
reticulate with a longitudinal row of denticles laterally on the pseudorostrum
and a few scattered on the eyelobe. Pseudorostrum short and pointed; antero-
lateral angle and antennal notch wanting; ventrolateral edge with a row of
strong, sharp spines. Eyelobe (Fig. 29B) short, rounded, eyeless.
Pereion less than half length of carapace; first somite obscured laterally
by posterior extension of carapace, the rest narrow. Abdominal somites sub-
cylindrical, together longer than cephalothorax by two somites; fifth subequal
in length to peduncle of uropod.
First segment of antenna | (Fig. 29C) shorter than next two together;
second and third short and broad, third with a few sensory setae. Flagellum
5-segmented and accessory flagellum 3-segmented.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 29D) large and stout, slightly less than twice
length of remaining segments together. Ischium small, merus slightly longer;
last three segments fairly stout and cylindrical.
Basis of pereiopod | (Fig. 29E) half as long as rest of limb with a row of
small spines on lower edge. Ischium and merus small, subequal in length.
282 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 29. Leptostylis faurei sp. nov. ;
Subadult male. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of carapace. C. Antenna 1. D. Maxilliped 3.
E. Pereiopod 1. F. Pereiopod 3. G. Uropod and telson.
Adult female. H. Lateral view. I. Antenna 1. J. Pereiopod 2. K. Pereiopod 3. L. Pereiopod 5.
M. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 2 mm for A-B, H; 1 mm for C-G, I-M.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 283
Carpus and propodus very slender, carpus slightly the shorter. Dactyl short
and slender. Distal segments of pereiopod 2 missing. Bases of pereiopods 3
(Fig. 29F) and 4 not much longer than remaining segments together, exopods
very large. Pereiopod 5 small, basis short.
Telson (Fig. 29G) subequal in length to telsonic somite with three pairs
of small spines laterally and one terminally. Peduncle of uropod nearly twice
length of telson, half as long again as endopod. Endopod slightly longer than
exopod, first segment subequal in length to next two together.
Adult female, paratype, length 7,4 mm. In two pieces, and badly damaged.
Fig. 29H is a reconstruction. As male, except as follows: pseudorostral lobes
slightly sharper, spination of ventrolateral edge of carapace continuous on to
pseudorostral lobes. Carapace apparently not produced posteriorly. Abdomen
relatively shorter and peduncle of uropod slightly longer.
Segments 2 and 3 of antenna 1 longer and more slender. Ischium of maxilli-
ped 3 shorter and wider. Distal segments of pereiopod 1 missing. Basis of
pereiopod 2 (Fig. 29J) fairly stout, half length of rest of limb; ischium very
short, merus longer and stout; carpus little shorter than basis and slightly
longer than dactyl. Exopods present on pereiopod 3 and absent from
pereiopod 4. Merus and carpus of pereiopod 5 (Fig. 29L) relatively large.
Telson (Fig. 29K) shorter than telsonic somite with one pair of lateral
spines.
Length
Subadult male 7,4-9,0 mm
Adult female 7,4 mm
Remarks
L. faurei is a typical member of the genus. It is most similar to L. azaniensis
Jones, 1969, and is also close to L. recalvastrus Hale, 1945, L. attenuatus sp. nov.
and L. gilli sp. nov. It is the only species in which an exopod is present on
pereiopod 3 but not on pereiopod 4 in the female. The presence in L. faurei of
a row of small spines on the pseudorostrum further distinguished it from
L. azaniensis and L. recalvastrus; the smooth carapace distinguishes it from
L. gilli and the much shorter abdomen distinguishes it from L. attenuatus.
Distribution
Known from a single sample from 800 m off the Cape Peninsula.
Leptostylis attenuatus sp. nov.
Fig. 30
Records
SM 27°S 32°E-30°S 30°E 800-1 000 m 3 ovig. 99 (2 records)
SAM 34°S17°E 800m 3 subadult fg (1 record)
284 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Holotype
Ovigerous female, in the South African Museum, SAM-—A15738, collected
by the SAM, 17 May 1977. Type locality: 1 000 m, off Durban (30°14’S 31°27’E).
SAM station number SM 151.
Etymology
Attenuare (L)—to make thin, referring to the elongate body.
Description
Ovigerous female, holotype, length 4,5 mm. Integument smooth and well
calcified with minute reticulations; abdomen with several extremely long and
fairly stout setae. Carapace (Fig. 30A) less than twice as long as deep, smoothly
arched dorsally; anterolateral angle and antennal notch wanting, ventrolateral
edge strongly crenellate. Pseudorostral lobes short, pointed anteriorly, bearing
four or five small denticles in a longitudinal row laterally. Eyelobe (Fig. 30B)
small, rounded and eyeless.
Pereion subequal in length to carapace; first three somites ridged trans-
versely, last two smooth. Cephalothorax hardly longer than first four abdominal
somites together. Abdominal somites elongate, with some clear patches
anteriorly; last four slightly keeled ventrolaterally.
Antenna | (Fig. 30C) extremely long, visible part more than half length
of carapace; segments subequal in length. Flagellum very long and accessory
flagellum short; both 3-segmented.
Basis of maxilliped 3 (Fig. 30D) no longer than rest of limb; remaining
segments fairly stout.
Distal segments of pereiopod 1 missing. Last three segments of pereiopod 2
and distal segments of pereiopod 3 missing from all females. Basis of pereiopod 4
slender, longer than remaining segments together. Pereiopod 5 much smaller
and more slender.
Telson and distal tips of rami missing from holotype. Uropods and telson
in Fig. 30J are from an ovigerous female from SM 60. Telson about three-
quarters length of telsonic somite with one pair each of lateral and terminal
spines. Peduncle of uropod more than twice length of telson with few spines on
inner and several long hairs on outer margin. Exopod slightly shorter than
peduncle of uropod. Tip of second segment of endopod broken and all of third
missing.
Subadult male, length 5,6 mm (SAM-A10602). The specimens of L. attenu-
atus in this sample all have very few spines and setae. This is apparently due
to the long period of preservation of very delicate animals.
As female, except as follows: integument lacking hairs but with very small
pits. Carapace (Fig. 30F) less arched dorsally and lacking denticles dorso-
laterally on pseudorostral lobes (Fig. 30G), which are slightly longer. Pedigerous
somites not ridged. Cephalothorax as long as first three and a half abdominal
somites together. Fourth and especially fifth abdominal somites very long.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 285
Fig. 30. Leptostylis attenuatus sp. nov.
Ovigerous female. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view of cephalothorax. C. Antenna 1.
D. Maxilliped 3. E. Uropod and telson.
Subadult male. F. Lateral view. G. Dorsal view of carapace. H. Antenna 1. I. Pereiopod 2.
J. Uropod and telson.
Scale line = 2 mm for B, F-G; 1 mm for A, C_-D; 0,5 mm for E, H-J.
286 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Third segment of antenna 1 shorter and rather stouter; flagellum
4-segmented. Carpus of pereiopod 2 (Fig. 301) subequal in length to basis and
ischium together; last two segments missing. Distal segments of other appen-
dages missing.
Telsonic somite (Fig. 30J) longer and peduncle of uropod slightly shorter.
Peduncle of uropod two and a half times length of telson. Distal tips of both
rami missing.
Length
Subadult male 5,6-5,9 mm
Ovigerous female 4,5-6,2 mm
Remarks
This species is characterized by the combined presence of very long first
antennae and crenellate spines on the anterolateral edge of the carapace. It is
difficult to be certain that the individuals of all three samples belong to the same
species, because some are not very well preserved or strongly calcified. How-
ever, the large first antennae and the very long abdomen indicate that the
specimens are conspecific.
L. macruroides Stebbing, 1912, known from a single adult male from
800 m off Durban, is most similar to L. attenuatus, and the two species may
prove to be synonymous. There are several species in the northern hemisphere
in which the adult males possess a ventrolateral carina but the females and
non-adult males do not. It is possible that ZL. macruroides, which possesses
such a carina, is the male of L. attenuatus, particulary since the abdomen of
both species is very long. The uropods of all individuals are damaged, but do
not appear to be very different in the two species. However Stebbing’s figures
do not indicate that the first antenna of L. macruroides is particularly large for
the genus, while this is the most distinctive feature of L. attenuatus. The telsonic
somite is relatively much longer in the subadult male of L. attenuatus than in
Stebbing’s figure of L. macruroides. It is therefore probably best to consider
the two species distinct, at least until more material becomes available.
Distribution
Known from the southern Mozambique Channel to the Cape Peninsula at
depths from 800 to 1000 m.
Leptostylis macruroides Stebbing, 1912
Leptostylis macruroides Stebbing, 1912: 153-154, pl. 56.
Previous records
Type locality only.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 287
Holotype
Adult male, deposited by Stebbing in the British Museum (Natural History).
Type locality: 800 m, off Durban (about 30°S 30°E).
Remarks
This species is known from a single adult male. It is the only member
of the genus in the southern hemisphere possessing a crenulate lateral carina
running parallel to and slightly above the crenulate anterolateral edge of the
carapace. The abdomen is very long. The possible synonymy of L. macruroides
and L. attenuatus sp. nov. is discussed in the remarks on the latter on page 286.
DISTRIBUTION OF THE DIASTYLIDAE
The distribution of diastylid genera is variable. Those predominating in
deep waters are cosmopolitan, while shallow-water genera tend to have much
narrower geographical ranges.
Of the four deep-water genera, Leptostylis predominates at depths between
200 and 2 000 m and has equal representation in northern and southern hemi-
spheres. Diastylis and Makrokylindrus predominate in the northern hemisphere,
the majority of species of Diastylis occurring at depths of less than 1000 m
while Makrokylindrus predominate at depths between 1000 and 3000 m.
The apparently larger number of species in these genera in northern waters is
at least partly the result of more intensive collecting there. The cumacean
fauna of the seas around most of Africa, South America and large parts of the
South Pacific is totally unknown.
The geographical distribution of genera predominating at depths of less
than 500 m is much narrower. Dic, Colurostylis, Anchistylis and Diastylopsis
are found mainly or exclusively in southern oceans, while Brachydiastylis is a
boreal genus. Paradiastylis and Dimorphostylis are confined to depths of less
than 100 m in the warm waters of the eastern Indo-West-Pacific (with one
doubtful species of Paradiastylis fiom 610 m in the Tasman Sea). Paradiastylis
also includes the only species in the family known to inhabit brackish waters—
P. culicoides from Chilka Lake in India.
Diastyloides has a wide bathymetric but narrow geographic range, being
known from 7 to more than 4 500 m in the central and North Atlantic and the
Mediterranean.
Four genera are monotypic. These are Ekleptostylis from 100 m in the
Bay of Biscay, Atlantistylis from 587 to 3 730 m in the mid-Atlantic, Lepto-
styloides from 4 410 to 4 540 m in the Kermadec Trench and Anchicolurus from
shallow waters off north-western America.
The world distribution of species of diastylids is shown in Table 2. None
is yet known from the intertidal zone but otherwise members of the family are
widely distributed from 5 to more than 7 000 m. The family shows a degree of
amphipolarity. Only 14 per cent of the total number of species is found in the
288 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 2
Distribution of Diastylidae according to depth and latitude.
Data mainly from Jones (1969).
0-200 <200->1000 200-2 000 >2 000 total
m m m m
no. Ye no. % no % no % no %,
INROf:7OINES oe naa Be 2 1 10 5 0 0 0 0 12 6
SOLTOONG fic 6 3 8 4 0 0 5 2 19 9
20=502Ne bene Se ee 26 12 24 11 20 9 14 i 84 39
20°N-20°S .. 16 7 D 1 6 3 6 3 30 14
20=50SS i sian casi ck 28 13 3 1 17 8 4 2 52 23
SOS/0:S= 9s) 2) ae 4 2 0 0 6 3 0 0 14 Zi
SOMO 5 oe ia 6 2 1 2 1 4 2 0 0 8 4
Lotak Qe. cin ae 4 38 49 23 53 25 29 14 215 #100
tropics between 20°N and 20°S, while 54 per cent occur north of 20°N, and
34 per cent south of 20°S, the predominance in the north once again being
partly a reflection of collecting effort.
The majority of species (62%) occurs between latitudes of 20° and 50°,
indicating a preference for temperate conditions. Nevertheless the very wide
depth ranges of many species suggests that the family is generally less depth-
(and therefore temperature-) dependent than other families (Day 1978a, 19785).
Thus the family is cosmopolitan and eurybathyal.
DISTRIBUTION OF THE SOUTHERN AFRICAN DIASTYLIDAE
Most of the eighteen species of diastylids known from southern Africa
are from deep water. The entire family may be divided into the following
faunistic groups, but the evidence is so scanty that little can be deduced from
their distribution:
1. Shallow-water, cool temperate species from the west coast only:
Diastylis namibiae
2. Shallow-water species extending along both west and south coasts:
Dic calmani
3. Shallow-water warm temperate species from both south and east coasts:
Diastylis algoae, Dic formosae, Leptostylis gilli
4. Shallow-water subtropical species from the east coast only:
Dic platytelson
5. Deep-water species from 200 m and more:
(i) Cape species: Diastylis hexaceros, Leptostylis faurei, Makrokylindrus
bicornis, M. aculeatus
(ii) Natal species: Leptostylis macruroides, Makrokylindrus acanthodes,
M. deinotelson, M. mundus, M. fragilis
(iii) Species from both Natal and the Cape: Leptostylis attenuatus, Makro-
kylindrus spinifer, Vemakylindrus stebbingi.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 289
As in the Lampropidae (Day 19786), evidence regarding the distribution
of deep-water forms (i.e. those from depths greater than 200 m) is too scanty
to merit detailed discussion. The collection has been limited to two areas, one
off the south-western Cape and one off Natal, so that faunistic boundaries
cannot be defined. One species is known only from 550 m and one from 550 to
900 m; all the rest have only been found between 800 and 1 000 m. Since little
material is available from 200 to about 500 m, and virtually nothing is known
about the fauna below 1 300 m, it is not possible to estimate the depth limits of
these species.
Not one of the species found in southern African waters has been recorded
elsewhere. However, the composition of the cumacean fauna further north is
virtually unknown. There are no species common to southern Africa and
tropical west Africa, but on the east coast, many deep-water species may be
southern outliers of a tropical Indian Ocean fauna which is as yet unstudied.
Species diversity in the southern African diastylids is low. 3 662 specimens
of 16 species in 284 records were examined, giving figures of 14 individuals per
record and a specimen : species ratio of 229 : 1. Thus the diastylids are much
less diverse than the bodotriids which give figures of 7,5 individuals per record
and 147,9 specimens per species. Comparison between the number of species
of bodotriid and diastylid suggests that the bodotriids are more successful in
shallow waters and the diastylids more successful in deeper waters.
TABLE 3
Comparison of diversity and abundance of families of Cumacea in southern Africa.
no. of no. of no. of individuals specimens
specimens records species perrecord perspecies
Bodotriidae Denies, "4090 607 31 7,5 147,9
Lampropidae . i 5 159 37 10 4,3 15,9
Ceratocumatidae s : 10 3 1 33! 10,0
Gynodiastylidae : , 102 44 7 2,3 14,6
Diastylidae. . . . 3662 284 16 12,9 228,9
A comparison with the other families so far examined (Table 3) suggests
that the diastylids are the least diverse, with the highest number of specimens
per species, but the most abundant, with the highest number of individuals per
record. This high ratio is due largely to Diastylis algoae, which accounts for
2 739 specimens or almost 75 per cent of the individuals in the family. D. algoae,
together with Dic formosae (12%) and Leptostylis gilli (nearly 7%) account for
almost 94 per cent of the individuals, and without these the diversity is of the
same order as that shown by the lampropids, ceratocumatids and gynodia-
stylids. Removal of the most common species in the bodotriids (Day 1978a)
gives very similar figures.
In conclusion, it is found that the Diastylidae are second only to the
Bodotriidae in number of individuals, but are much less diverse.
290 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I wish to thank Drs B. Kensley and P. A. Hulley of the South African
Museum and Mr T. McClurg of the National Institute for Water Research for
sorting out and sending me the diastylid material from the collections of their
various institutions, and Profs J. H. Day and G. M. Branch for their criticisms
of the manuscript. I am particularly grateful to Dr N. S. Jones for his continued
assistance, encouragement and helpful discussions.
Publication of this paper was assisted by a grant from the Editorial Board
of the University of Cape Town, which is gratefully acknowledged.
REFERENCES
BAcgscu, M. 1961a. Contributions 4 l’étude des Cumacés de la Méditerranée et particuliére-
ment des cétes d’Israel. Rapp. P.-v. Réun. Comm. int. Explor. Scient. Mer. Méditerr. 16:
495-502.
BAcgscu, M. 19616. Deux éspéces nouvelles de Makrokylindrus sous-genre Vemakylindrus
n. sg. (Crustacés Cumacés) des eaux tropicales du Pacifique (Céte Americaine). Rev.
Biol. Acad. romane. 6: 325-333.
BAcescu, M. 1962. Contribution a la connaissance du genre Makrokylindrus Stebbing (Crus-
tacea, Cumacea). In: BARNARD, J. L., MENzIES, R. J. & Bacescu, M., eds. Abyssal
Crustacea: 209-223. New York and London: Columbia University Press.
BAcescu, M. 1972. Cumella africana n. sp. and Makrokylindrus (Coalescuma) reyssi n. sp.
(Cumacea, Crustacea) from the Saharan bottom of the Atlantic. Rev. Roum. Biol.-
: Zoologie. 17: 143-151.
BAcESCU-MESTER, L. 1967. Contribution to the knowledge of the genus Lepfostylis Sars
(Cumacea): three new species collected by the Vema expedition. Crustaceana 13: 265-274.
BATE, S. 1856. On the British Diastylidae. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (2) 17: 449-465.
Bate, S. 1865. Carcinological gleanings. No. 1. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (3) 15: 81-88.
Boeck, A. 1864. Beskrivele og fremlagde Tegninger af 4 nordske Dekapoder, undersoegte af
overlaege Danielssen og ham. Forh. Selsk. Christian. 1863; 189-190.
Bonn»rER, J. 1896. Résultat scientifique de la campagne du ‘Caudan’ dans le Golfe de Gascogne.
III. Annis. Univ. Lyon. 26: 529-562.
Brum, I. DA S. 1971. Nova especie Brasiliera do genero Makrokylindrus Stebbing, 1912.
Bol. Mus. nac. Rio de J. Zool. 281: 1-7.
CaALMAN, W. T. 1904. Report on the Cumacea collected by Prof. Herdman at Ceylon in 1902.
Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fish. suppl. Rep. 12: 159-180.
CALMAN, W. T. 1905a. The marine fauna of the west coast of Ireland. Scient. Invest. Fish.
Brch. Ire. 1: 1-52.
CALMAN, W. T. 19055. The Cumacea of the Siboga Expedition. Siboga Exp. Monograph 36:
1-23.
CALMAN, W. T. 1908. Notes on a small collection of plankton from New Zealand. 1. Crustacea
(excluding Copepoda). Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (8) 1: 232-240.
CALMAN, W. T. 1911. On new or rare Cruastacea of the order Cumacea from the collection
of the Copenhagen Museum. II. The families Nannastacidae and Diastylidae. Trans.
R. Soc. Lond. 18: 341-398.
CALMAN, W. T. 1912. The Crustacea of the order Cumacea in the U.S. National Museum.
Proc. U.S. nat. Mus. 41: 603-676.
CALMAN, W. T. 1918. Cumacea and Phyllocarida. Australas. Antarct. Exped. Sci. Rep. C5 (6):
1-10.
DANIELLSEN, D. C. 1859. Beretning om en zoologisk Reise foretagen i Sommeren 1857. Nyt
Mag. Natury. 11: 1-58.
Day, J. 1975. Southern African Cumacea. Part 1. Family Bodotriidae, subfamily Vaun-
thompsoniinae. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 66: 177-220.
Day, J. 1978a. Southern African Cumacea. Part 2. Family Bodotriidae, subfamily Bodo-
triinae. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 75: 159-290.
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA: PART 4 291
Day, J. 19786. Southern African Cumacea. Part 3. Families Lampropidae and Ceratocuma-
tidae. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 76: 137-189.
DENNELL, R. 1934. The feeding mechanism of the cumacean crustacean, Diastylis bradyi.
Trans. R. Soc. Edinb. 58: 125-142.
Face, L. 1929. Cumacés et Leptostracés provenant des campagnes du Prince Albert I,, de
Monaco. Résult. Camp. scient. Prince Albert I. 77: 1-55.
FaGE, L. 1940. Les Cumacés de la Méditerranée. Remarques systématiques et biologiques.
Bull. Inst. Océanogr. Monaco. 783: 1-14.
Gamo, S. 1961. On two new species of cumacean crustacean genus Gynodiastylis (Diastylidae)
from Sagami Bay. Zool. Mag. Tokyo 70: 105-109.
Gamo, S. 1968. Studies on the Cumacea (Crustacea, Malacostraca) of Japan. Part III. Publ.
Seto mar. biol. Lab. 16: 147-192.
Gamo, S. 1971. Preliminary report on four species of Cumacea from the deep waters off Japan.
Zool. Mag. Tokyo 80: 251-255.
Hate, H. M. 1928. Australian Cumacea. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 52: 31-48.
Hatz, H. M. 1936. Cumacea from a South Australian reef. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 5: 404-438.
Hate, H. M. 1937a. Further notes on the Cumacea from South Australian reefs. Rec. S. Aust.
Mus. 6: 61-74
Hate, H. M. 1937b. Cumacea and Nebaliacea. Rep. B.A.N.Z. Antarctic Res. Exped. 4 (2):
38-56.
Hate, H. M. 1945. Australian Cumacea. No. 11. The family Diastylidae (Part I.). Trans.
R. Soc. S. Aust. 69: 173-211.
HALE, H. M. 1946. Australian Cumacea. No. 12. The family Diastylidae (Part 2.). Rec. S. Aust.
Mus. 8: 357-444.
Hate, H. M. 1951. Australian Cumacea. No. 17. The family Diastylidae (Cont.). Rec. S. Aust.
Mus. 9: 353-370.
HAnssn, H. J. 1920. Crustacea Malacostraca. IV. VI. The order Cumacea. Dan. Ingolf Exped.
3B: 1-86.
HarapA, IJ. 1962. Cumacean fauna of Japan. II. Family Diastylidae. 2. Genus Gynodiastylis.
Jap. J. Zool. 13: 293-306.
Jones, N. S. 1955. Cumacea of the Benguela Current. Discovery Rep. 27: 279-292.
Jones, N. S. 1956. Cumacea of the west coast of Africa. Atlantide Rep. 4: 183-212.
Jones, N. S. 1960a. Cumacea from South Africa. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 171-180.
JonEs, N.S. 19606. Cumacea of the Chatham Islands Expedition. Bull. N.Z. Dep. scient. ind Res.
139: 9-11.
Jones, N. S. 1963. The marine fauna of New Zealand: Crustacea of the order Cumacea.
Bull. N.Z. Dep. scient. ind. Res. 152: 1-80.
JONES, N. S. 1969. The systematics and distribution of Cumacea from depths exceeding 200 m
Galathea Rep. 10: 99-180.
Jones, N. S. 1971. The fauna of the Ross Sea. Part 8. Cumacea. Bull. N.Z. Dep. scient. ind.
Res. 206: 33-41.
Kroyer, H. 1841. Fire nye Arter af Slaegten Cuma. Naturh. Tidsskr. 3: 503-534.
KRUGER, K. 1940. Zur Lebensgeschichte der Cumacee Diastylis rathkei (Kroyer) in der
westlicken Ostsee. Kiel. Meeresforsch. 3: 374402.
KurIAN, C. V. 1954. Notes on the Cumacea (Sympoda) in the Zoological Survey of India.
Rec. Indian Mus. 52: 275-311.
Lepoyer, M. 1977. Cumacés (Crustacea) des Iles Kerguelen recueillis par le N.O. ‘La Japonaise’
en 1972 et 1974 et par le M.S. ‘Marion-Dufresne’ en 1974. C.N.F.R.A. 42: 193-213.
LILLJEBORG, S. 1855. Om Hafs-Crustaceer vid Kullaberg i Skaane. Ofv. Ak. Forh. 12: 117-138.
LomaKiInA, N. B. 1955. Cumacea from far-east seas. Trudy zool. Inst., Leningr. 18: 112-165.
LomaKkInA, N. B. 1958. Cumacea of the seas of the U.S.S.R. Opred. Faune S.S.S.R. 66: 1-301.
LoMAKINA, N. B. 1967. New species of Cumacea collected by the Soviet Antarctic expedition
at south-eastern Australia and in the north of the Indian Ocean. Trudy zool. Inst., Leningr.
43: 99-108.
Lomakina, N. B. 1968. Cumacea of the Antarctic Region. Zool. Inst. Ak. Nauk S.S.S.R. 4:
97-140.
Norman, A. M. 1879. Crustacea Cumacea of the ‘Lightning’, ‘Porcupine’ and ‘Valorous’
Expeditions. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (5) 3:.54-73.
292 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Reyss, G. 1974a. Contribution a l’etude des Cumacés de profondeur de |’Atlantique du nord:
le genre Makrokylindrus Stebbing. Crustaceana 26: 5-28.
Reyss, D. 19746. Cumacés. Résultata scientifiques de la campagne ‘Polymede II’ du N.O.
‘Jena Charcot’ en mer ionienne et en mer Egée (Avril- Mai 1972). Crustaceana 27: 216-222.
Reyss, D. 1975. Deux cumacés nouveaux de |’Atlantique tropicale: Atlantistylis chauvini n. g.,
n. sp. (Diastylidae) et Pseudodiastylis delmarei n. sp. (Lampropidae). Crustaceana 28:
168-179.
Sars, G. O. 1865. Om den aberrante Krebsdygruppe Cumacea og dens nordiske arter. Forh.
Vidensk Selsk. Krist. 1864: 128-208.
Sars, G. O. 1869. Underségelser over Christianafjordens Dybvands-fauna. Nyt. Mag. Natury.
16: 305-362.
Sars, G. O. 1871. Underségelser over Hardangerfjordens-fauna. Forh. VidensSelsk. Krist.
1871: 246-286.
Sars, G. O. 1873. Om cumaceer fra de store dybder: Nordishavet. Svenska Vet. Ak. Hand.
9 (5): 1-30.
Sars, G. O. 1879. Middelhavets Cumaceer. Pars II. Arch. Math. Natur. 4: 1-126.
Sars, G. O. 1887. Report on the Cumacea collected by H.M.S. Challenger during the years
1873-1879. Rep. scient. Results Voy. Challenger. Zool. 13 (37): 1-73.
Sars, G. O. 1900. An account of the Crustacea of Norway. III. Cumacea.
Say, T. 1818. An account of the Crustacea of the United States (continued). J. Acad. nat. Sci.
Philad. 1: 313-319.
Scott, T. 1912. Notes on some small Crustacea from the “Goldseeker’ collection. Sci. Invest.
Fish Board Scotl. 1: 1-5.
SmiTH, S. I. 1880. Notes on Crustacea collected by Dr G. M. Dawson at Vancouver and the
Queen Charlotte Island. Rep. geol. Survey Canada. 1878/1879 :206B—218B.
STEBBING, T. R. R. 1910. Sympoda. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 6: 409-419.
STEBBING, T. R. R. 1912. South African Crustacea. Part 6. The Sympoda. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 10:
129-176.
STEBBING, T. R. R. 1913. Cumacea. Tierreich 39: 1-210.
TuHomson, G. M. 1892. On the occurrence of two species of Cumacea in New Zealand. J. Linn.
Soc. Lond. (Zool.) 24: 263-271.
ZIMMER, C. 1902. Die von Prof. Dr. Thilenius gesammelten Cumaceen. Zool. Jahrb. Syst. 17:
444-456.
ZIMMER, C. 1907. Neue Cumaceen aus den Familien Diastylidae und Leuconidae von der
Deutschen und Schwedischen Siidpolar-Expedition. Zool. Anz. 31: 220-229.
ZIMMER, C. 1908. Die Cumaceen der ‘Deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition’. Wiss. Ergebn. dt. Tiefsee-
Exped. ‘Valdivia’. 8: 155-196.
ZIMMER, C. 1909. Die Cumaceen der Schwedischen Sitidpolar-Expedition. Wiss. Ergebn.
schwed. Siidpolar-Exped. 1901-1903. 6 (3): 1-31.
ZIMMER, C. 1914. Cumacea. Fauna Sudw. Australiens 5: 175-195.
ZIMMER, C. 1921. Einige neue und wenige bekannte Cumaceen des Schwedischen Reichs-
museums. Ark. Zool. Stockholm 13 (21): 1-9.
ZIMMER, C. 1932. Beobachtungen an lebenden Mysidaceen und Cumaceen. S.B. Ges. naturf.
Fr. Berlin. 1932: 326-347.
ZIMMER, C. 1941. Cumaceen. Bronn’s Kl. Ordn. Tierreichs 5 (1, Book 4): 1-222.
ZIMMER, C. 1943. Cumaceen des Stillen Ozeans. Arch. naturf. Leipzig 12: 130-174.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata could, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 6: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, tess: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861:
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: iss, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
7 “semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
4 ‘ full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names :
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
JENNIFER DAY
SOUTHERN AFRICAN CUMACEA
PART 4
FAMILIES GYNODIASTYLIDAE
AND DIASTYLIDAE
SEPTEMBER 1980 ISSN 0303-2515
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Ackno wiedgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are. not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; fosies a
“As described (Haughton & Broom De
“As described (Haughton ef al. 1927) .
Note: no comma separating name acl year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuLLouGu, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHer, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & RArry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gen. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, cee. masses and larval development in ‘Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4 5:
TureEe, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. PoncLeSoRnES Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 82 Band
September 1980 September
Rash U7 Deel
UPPER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES
AND INOCERAMIDS FROM THE OFF-SHORE
ALPHARD GROUP OF SOUTH AFRICA
By
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
ERLE G. KAUFFMAN
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.—p.i.), 51-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.—p.i.), 711-4), 8, 9(1—-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.-p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908408 00 5
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
UPPER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES AND INOCERAMIDS FROM
THE OFF-SHORE ALPHARD GROUP OF SOUTH AFRICA
By
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER*
South African Museum, Cape Town
ERLE G. KAUFFMAN
United States National Museum, Washington, D.C.
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
Geological Collections, University Museum, Oxford
(With 10 figures and 2 tables)
[MS. accepted 7 May 1980]
ABSTRACT
During dredging operations off the southern Cape coast of South Africa, concretions
containing identifiable ammonites and inoceramids were recovered from three localities. The
assemblage includes Eubaculites latecarinatus (Brunnschweiler), Gunnarites sp. cf. G. kalika
(Stoliczka), Proplacenticeras kaffrarium (Etheridge), Scaphites (Otoscaphites?) sp. indet.,
Inoceramus (I.) ernsti Heinz, and J. frechi Flegel; the first two are of Lower Maastrichtian, the
latter all of Lower Coniacian age. Apart from permitting accurate dating of parts of the off-
shore Alphard Group, four of these species are new to southern Africa. Taphonomic analysis
of the inoceramid assemblage suggests a shelf habitat with moderate bottom currents and
relatively slow rates of sedimentation, below the depth range of strong waye and current
action.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction . : : 5 : : : ; 5 F . 293
Material . j é : é : 3 ‘ ; : P . 294
Systematic palaeontology . . . . . a) eo rey 2296
Ammonites . : : ‘ ; ; 5 : 3 ‘ . 296
Bivalves. . : , , : : , : : ‘ ee O07
Environmental and ecological interpretation of Inoceramidae 316
Acknowledgements : Be Ty ra ee eae ie piers iI|7/
References . On ee : j : : : ‘ F Sess
INTRODUCTION
Over a period of several years, concretions containing identifiable inverte-
brate faunas were dredged off the southern Cape coast of South Africa by the
Marine Geoscience Unit of the University of Cape Town. The Coniacian
ammonite Yabeiceras manasoaense Collignon was previously described from
these concretions (Klinger et al. 1976). Additional material has now become
* Present address: Institut und Museum fiir Geologie und Paldontologie, Tiibingen.
293
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 82 (7), 1980: 293-320, 10 figs, 2 tables.
294 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
available, permitting precise dating of relevant parts of the off-shore Alphard
Group, and adding to our knowledge of the geographic distribution of several
taxa.
The inoceramids are a neglected faunal element of the South African
Cretaceous deposits, and are here discussed more extensively in terms of bio-
stratigraphic significance and systematics than the ammonites, which are at
present the subject of current revision by Kennedy & Klinger (1975 onwards).
Kauffman is preparing a monograph on the South African Inoceramidae.
Taphonomic study of the inoceramids described here permits partial interpe-
tration of the depositional environment prevailing during sedimentation of the
Alphard Group.
MATERIAL
Material is from three localities (A, B and C, Fig. 1). Co-ordinates and
brief descriptions of the lithologies are given below. Localities A and B are
close to each other, south to south-west of Cape Infanta, and in close proximity
to the locality yielding Yabeiceras manasoaense Collignon (Klinger et al. 1976)
(here marked as locality D; Marine Geoscience Unit, University of Cape Town,
sample no. TBD 4492). Locality C is the furthest east, situated between Cape
St Francis and Cape Recife.
Locality A
Lat. 35°11.7’S; Long. 20°30,0’E; depth, 197 m (Marine Geoscience Unit,
University of Cape Town sample no. TBD 310). The material consists of dark,
greyish green, fine-grained limestone concretions of similar lithology to that
yielding Yabeiceras manasoaense (Klinger et al. 1976). The sediment is highly
bioturbated and lacks bedding structures. The surface of the concretion is
pitted by two types of borings of Recent organisms. Faunas include rare ammo-
nites, Proplacenticeras kaffrarium and Scaphites (Otoscaphites?) sp. indet.,
abundant indeterminate juvenile bivalves, both articulated and disarticulated,
and occasional juvenile gastropods. All retain original shelly material and
show no signs of contemporaneous predation, encrustation, boring or scouring.
Age: Lower Coniacian.
Locality B
Lat. 35°02’ — 03’S; Long. 20°39’ — 40,0’E; depth, 102 m (Marine Geo-
science Unit, University of Cape Town, sample no. TBD 4510). The concretions
consist of very fine-grained, well-sorted, relatively clean and mature quartz
sand. The ubiquitous bivalve Inoceramus is a common element of the con-
cretions and occurs predominantly as uncrushed, well-preserved, single, mostly
left valves which retain most of the inner aragonitic nacreous shell layer intact,
but only isolated fragments of the calcitic outer prismatic layer. The outer
layer appears highly leached, which may imply exposure at the sediment-water
interface for some time before burial.
295
UPPER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES AND INOCERAMIDS
(¢ “89 “L :€L61 919UIC J0IZV) ‘s}uoUNpes dnoiH preydyy
JO sdo19jno ayeoIpul svore padding ‘seunvy 9}e1qQ9}J0AUI oOYs-yo Jo dew Ayyeooy *] “shy
YU
AMS,
J. sigue 1S'D
afl99y ef 9ZIE1G ISD
BUCY] “D
of
296 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Several specimens show evidence of injury and healing to the shell,
presumably caused mainly by predation attempts by fish, echinoderms, other
molluscs or arthropods. Age: Lower Coniacian.
Locality C
Lat. 34°08,5-34°08,0S; Long. 25°10,3’-25°10,6’E; depth, 75 m (Marine
Geoscience Unit, University of Cape Town, sample no. TBD 1336). Dredged
material consists of light greyish yellow, poorly sorted, fine-grained to very
fine-grained calcareous sandstone. Heavy minerals include large, rounded
grains of glauconite, rutile and ilmenite. The fauna is sparse, consisting of the
ammonites Eubaculites latecarinatus and Gunnarites sp. cf. G. kalika, ino-
ceramids and other indeterminate bivalve fragments. The specimens of Eubacu-
lites retain part of the iridescent nacreous shelly material, or occur as brown
phosphatized internal moulds. Both crushed and uncrushed specimens occur,
the former being predominantly parts of the body chamber and the latter parts
of the phragmocone. Age: Maastrichtian.
All the material is housed in the collections of the South African Museum,
Cape Town.
SYSTEMATIC PALAEONTOLOGY
AMMONITES
(By H. C. Klinger & W. J. Kennedy)
Genus Eubaculites Spath, 1926
Eubaculites latecarinatus (Brunnschweiler, 1966)
Figs 2-4, 5D
Giralites latecarinatus Brunnschweiler, 1966: 33, pl. 3 (figs 13-14), pl. 4 (figs 1-5),
text-figs 17-18.
Giralites quadrisulcatus Brunnschweiler, 1966: 35, pl. 4 (figs 11-14), text-fig. 20.
Eubaculites ambindensis Collignon, 1971: 18, pl. 646 (fig. 2393).
Eubaculites latecarinatus (Brunnschweiler): Klinger, 1976: 91, pl. 40 (figs 1-2), pl. 41 (fig. 3),
pl. 42 (figs 2a—b, 2, 6), pl. 43 (figs ?3-4), text-fig. 11d-e.
Eubachulites sp. [sic] Dingle, 1973: 10.
Type
Holotype is the specimen figured by Brunnschweiler (1966, pl. 4 (figs 2—-4))
from the Maastrichtian of the Carnarvon Basin of Western Australia.
Material
SAM-PCO5909-5914, 5916, all from locality C in the Alphard Group.
UPPER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES AND INOCERAMIDS 297
A B C
|
Fig. 2. Whorl section of Eubaculites latecarinatus (Brunnschweiler). A. SAM-—PCO5908.
B. SAM-PCO5909. C. SAM-PCO5913.
All from locality C (TBD 1336) in the Alphard Group. x 1.
Description
Virtually all ontogenetic stages of this species are present in the collection,
though it is not known if they all belong to the same individual. At the earliest
preserved stage, at Wh = 12 mm, the whorl section is ovoid, with a narrowly
rounded venter (Fig. 2C). At wh = 26 mm, however, the whorl section is
more compressed with a flattened dorsum, very weakly inflated flanks and a
broad, undulating ventral keel, separated from the flanks by weak, lateral
depressions (Fig. 2B). The only ornament at this size consists of weak undula-
tions over the ventral keel, and a poorly defined median ridge traversing the
dorsum longitudinally (Figs 3A-C, 5D). Increase in size at this stage
is rapid, 18,3 according to Matsumoto & Obata’s (1963: 4) index
— in heights
x 100.
distance )
On later parts of the phragmocone and on the body chamber, the whorl
section is distinctly pyriform, with a well-defined, crenate ventral keel, separ-
ated from the flanks by a lateral furrow on either side, and a flat dorsum with
a distinct median ridge (Fig. 2A, 3D) which is present on internal moulds and
on the preserved shell. A specimen from the Maastrichtian of Zululand (Fig. 4)
shows the adult features of the species, which still includes a total lack of
lateral ornament but a slower growth index (13,4). In this Zululand specimen
the dorsal median ridge appears slightly undulating.
The suture is very incised, and the septae closely spaced. The saddles and
lobes are low and broad (Figs 3A-C, 5D).
298 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Sa Aeias gee
Boas
ees
Fig. 3. Eubaculites latecarinatus (Brunnschweiler). A-—C. Lateral, dorsal and ventral views,
SAM-PCO5909. D. View of dorsal side, SAM—PCO5908. Note the prominent median ridge.
(See also Fig. 4B.)
All from locality C (TBD 1336) in the Alphard Group. x 1.
UPPER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES AND INOCERAMIDS 299
Discussion
This species is easily recognized in the adult stage by the pyriform whorl
section, general lack of lateral ornament and the crenate, tabulate venter.
In the very early stages of growth, before the development of a distinct
ventral keel, the species resembles Baculites anceps Lamarck and B. subanceps
Haughton. It seems possible to derive Eubaculites latecarinatus from either of
these two species near the Campanian/Maastrichtian boundary.
The systematic affinities and distribution of the genus Eubaculites were
discussed recently by Riccardi (1974) and Klinger (1976). They differ, however,
in their acceptance of Brunnschweiler’s (1966) interpretation of the genus.
The authors here follow Klinger (1976) in regarding Brunnschweiler’s genera
Eubaculiceras, Cardabites and Giralites as junior synonyms of Eubaculites.
Eubaculites latecarinatus is the dominant eubaculitid faunal element in the
Lower Maastrichtian sediments of Zululand, and may grow up to spectacular
size; incomplete specimens of c. 130 cm in length have been found in the
Charters Creek Rest Camp region of St Lucia, Zululand.
The slight dorsal ridge present in Eubaculites latecarinatus (Figs 3D, 4B)
is occasionally also found in specimens of FE. vagina (Forbes) (Fig. 5B). The
function and origin of this structure are enigmatic, but may possibly be asso-
ciated with muscular attachment of the animal to the shell. Similar dorsal
structures have not been observed in species of Baculites present in southern
Africa.
Occurrence
Eubaculites latecarinatus occurs in the Maastrichtian of Western Australia,
the Zone of Pachydiscus gollevilensis and Pachydiscus neubergicus of the Maas-
trichtian stage in Madagascar, and the first division of the Maastrichtian of
Zululand sensu Kennedy & Klinger (1975).
Gunnarites sp. cf. G. kalika (Stoliczka, 1865)
Fig. 6A-B
Compare
Ammonites kalika Stoliczka, 1865: 140(100), pl. 70 (fig. Sa—b).
Holcodiscus kalika (Stoliczka): Kossmat, 1898: 41(148).
Gunnarites kalika (Stoliczka): Kilian & Reboul, 1909: 34. Spath, 1953: 33,
pl. 10 (figs 1-6).
Material
SAM-PCO5907 from locality C in the Alphard Group.
300 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 4. Eubaculites latecarinatus (Brunnschweiler). A-C. Lateral, dorsal and ventral views,
SAS-H163D, from locality 20 in Zululand. Note the median dorsal ridge. x 1.
UPPER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES AND INOCERAMIDS- 301
Fig. 5. A-C. Eubaculites vagina (Forbes). BMNH C51141. Plaster cast of Indian specimen.
Note also the median dorsal ridge. x 1. D. Eubaculites latecarinatus (Brunnschweiler).
Lateral view, SAM-—PCO5909. (See also Fig. 3A.)
From locality C (TBD 1336) in the Alphard Group. x 1.
302 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
The specimen consists of part of an impression of approximately one
quarter of a whorl. The whorl section is distinctly compressed, higher than wide,
with virtually parallel flanks and a slightly narrower, rounded venter. Ribs are
feebly prosiradiate across the flanks, and pass straight across the venter (Fig. 6).
Fine, though distinct crenations appear on the ribs towards the ventrolateral
part of the flanks, and continue over the venter. Towards the apertural end
of the fragment a few thicker ribs occur, apparently lacking crenations, although
the material is too poorly preserved to be certain of this. A thin, sinuous but
crenate rib branches off from the first of these thickened ribs at about midflank,
presumably reflecting the presence of a constriction on the internal mould.
Discussion
The present specimen is virtually identical to Stoliczka’s figure of the holo-
type, and, were the material more complete, the authors would have no doubt
in definitely referring it to Stoliczka’s species.
The genus Gunnarites is best known from the subantarctic islands from
which Spath (1953) described a host of new species and varieties based on
slight, and often overlapping morphological differences. Howarth (1966) greatly
simplified the systematics of the species described by Spath, and reduced the
number from eight to three: Gunnarites antarcticus (Weller), G. bhavaniformis
(Kilian & Reboul), and G. kalika (Stoliczka), arranged in order of decreasing
umbilical width and coarseness of ribbing. Henderson (1970: 54) even suggested
that the latter may possibly represent only a single species with spectacular
variation. The New Zealand species of Gunnarites described by Henderson
(1970), G. zelandicus (Marshall), G. denticulatus (Marshall), G. spathi Henderson,
and G. varicostatus Henderson, however, showed no such transitional series
as in the subantarctic material.
Occurrence
Spath (1953) regarded the subantarctic Graham Land localities as being
largely of Upper Campanian age, with the possibility of basal Maastrichtian
elements occurring locally. Howarth (1966: 68), on the other hand, considered
the subantarctic Gunnarites-yielding localities to be of late Lower to Middle
Campanian age. Henderson (1970: 78) concluded that the Graham Land
fauna may in part be uppermost Campanian or possibly basal Maastrichtian,
due to the occurrence of three Graham Land kossmaticeratids above Hoplito-
placenticeras in New Zealand.
The present occurrence of Gunnarites sp. cf. G. kalika with Eubaculites
latecarinatus points to Lower Maastrichtian age in the sense of Kennedy &
Klinger (1975). On the Nibela Peninsula, Zululand, however, the authors have
recently found Gunnarites occurring with Pachydiscus gollevillensis and Sagha-
linites cala in their Campanian IV below the level of abundant Eubaculites and
UPPER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES AND INOCERAMIDS 303
Fig. 6. Gunnarites sp. aff. G. kalika (Stoliczka). SAM-PCO5907. From locality C (TBD 1336)
in the Alphard Group. A x 1, B x 2,4.
above that of Hoplitoplacenticeras and Maorites. This highlights the con-
tinuing problem of correlating the European Maastrichtian standard with the
Southern hemisphere sequence.
Proplacenticeras kaffrarium (Etheridge, 1904)
Fig. 7
Placenticeras kaffrarium Ethridge, 1904: 89, pl. 3 (fig. 16).
Placenticeras umkwelanensis Etheridge, 1904: 89, pl. 3 (figs 17-20).
Placenticeras subkaffrarium Spath, 1921: 247, pl. 21 (fig. 2).
Placenticeras whitfieldi (auctorum, non Hyatt): Besairie, 1930, pl. 46 (fig. 1); Venzo, 1936:
107 (49), pl. 11 (7) (fig. 12).
Type
The holotype is Etheridge’s original figured specimen from Umkwelane
Hill, Zululand.
Material
SAM-PCO5908 from locality A in the Alphard Group.
304 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
_——
Fig. 7. Proplacenticeras kaffrarium (Etheridge). SAM—PCOS5908.
From locality A (TBD 310) in the Alphard Group. x 1.
A-B. Lateral views. C. Ventral view.
UPPER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES AND INOCERAMIDS 305
Description
A badly corroded body chamber fragment with part of the shell preserved
shows the cypical lenticular whorl section and flat venter on both inner and
outer whorls which characterizes the ‘umkwelanensis’ variants of this species.
The sides are smooth, save for faint auricular swellings on the outer parts.
Discussion
P. umkwelanensis, P. kaffrarium and P. subkaffrarium were all originally
described from Umkwelane Hill in Zululand and, as the authors have already
suggested (Kennedy & Klinger 1975), represent no more than a single variable
species; subsequent collecting in this area revealed the presence of all inter-
mediates in the same concretion. This wide variation mirrors that now known
to characterize placenticeratids, as in Hoplitoplacenticeras plasticum Paulke
and Placenticeras syrtale (Morton) (Wolleben 1967).
P. kaffrarium ranges through the Lower Coniacian of Zululand and, as
with Wolleben’s Placenticeras, shows changing population structures with
time, compressed ‘uwmkwelanensis’ variants being commonest at low levels.
A further discussion is deferred, pending the authors’ full revision of this
rich material.
Scaphites (Otoscaphites?) sp. indet.
Figs 8-9
Material
SAM-PCO5917-5918 locality A on the Alphard Group.
Description
Coiling in the early ammonitic part is very loose, with the whorls just
touching (Fig. 9A), and a very shallow dorsal zone of impression. The whorl
section increases rapidly in size, changing in shape from initially rounded,
through ovoid depressed to laterally compressed and dome-shaped (Fig. 9A)
on the late part of the ammonitic whorl. The section, however, is rounded
throughout with no clearly defined umbilical or ventrolateral edges.
Ornament is best seen on the internal mould of SAM—PCOS5917 (Fig. 8A).
On the phragmocone this consists of strong, umbilical bullae which give rise
to groups of two or three ribs which loop over the venter, with some additional
intercalated ribs. Towards the shaft of the uncoiled body chamber, ornament
weakens considerably and the mould is nearly smooth. A small fragment of
the terminal hook (Fig. 8B) shows that all ornament weakens on the recurved
part. The aperture is not preserved.
The suture is shown in Figure 9B, and is typically quadrilobate, scaphitoid,
with a prominent incision, p, in the saddle L/U.
306 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
C
Fig. 8. Scaphites (Otoscaphites?) sp. indet. SAM—PCOS5917. From locality
A (TBD 310) in the Alphard Group. A, Silica rubber mould. x 2. B. Fragment
of recurved body chamber. x 2. C. Stereopair photograph of inner whorls.
xc. 15.
Discussion
The present specimen, although specifically indeterminate, appears to
occupy a position between the genera Otoscaphites and Pteroscaphites.
Ornament is of the type of Scaphites aequalis, as found in Pteroscaphites
minutus Moreman (see especially Wiedmann 1965, pl. 58 (fig. 5)), but the
relatively slow increase in whorl diameter and mode of coiling of the body
chamber compare better with Otoscaphites, e.g. O. puerculus (Jimbo) (see
especially Tanabe 1975, pls. 10—11)).
On the basis of the present material, erection of a new species is not advis-
able, and it seems adequate merely to record the first occurrence of a repre-
sentative of the Pteroscaphites-Otoscaphites plexus from southern Africa.
UPPER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES AND INOCERAMIDS 307
A
Fig. 9. Scaphites (Otoscaphites ?) sp. indet. From locality A (TBD 310) in the Alphard Group.
A. Whorl section, SAM—PCOS5918. B. Suture line, SAM—PCOS5917.
For a full discussion on the affinities of Pteroscaphites and Otoscaphites,
as well as the possible sexual dimorphic implications, readers are referred to
Wiedmann (1965).
Occurrence
Otoscaphites and Pteroscaphites occur mainly in the Turonian and
Coniacian, but according to Wiedmann (1965: 449, text-fig. 16) may occur
as late as the Campanian, and probably arose in the Upper Albian.
The co-occurrence with P. kaffrarium suggests a Lower Coniacian date
for this species.
BIVALVES
(By E. G. Kauffman)
Family Inoceramidae Giebel, 1852
Inoceramid bivalves have long been used in regional biostratigraphy
because of their abundance, wide facies distribution, and common co-occurrence
with ammonites in Cretaceous strata. More recently, Inoceramidae have
evolved an important role in global and intercontinental correlation, and are
now a mainstay of wide-ranging Cretaceous biostratigraphic systems. Where a
detailed radiometric scale is available, as in the Western Interior Cretaceous of
308 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
North America (Obradovich & Cobban 1975; Kauffman 1977c), it can be
demonstrated that species and subspecies of the Inoceramidae evolve at rates
that are equal to, and in some cases even more rapid than, those of co-occuring
ammonites and planktonic foraminifera—the ‘main stays’ of Cretaceous bio-
stratigraphy (Kauffman 1970, 1972, 1975, 1978a). Of equal importance has been
the recognition that the biogeographic range of Inoceramidae was normally
very broad—intercontinental in more than 75 per cent of the Cretaceous
species—and exceeded that of most other Cretaceous macrofossils, including
many ammonites. Further, inoceramid species dispersal seems to have been
‘geologically instantaneous’, and as rapid as that for any fossil group. Wide,
rapid dispersal has been attributed to a long-lived planktotrophic larval stage
—as in living Mytilus edulis Linné (Kauffman 1975). For these reasons much
attention is now being focused on the Inoceramidae in biostratigraphy.
The occurrences of two geographically widespread species of Jnoceramus
in concretions from the South African coast therefore takes on special signifi-
cance. Both species have extensive distribution in rocks of the North Temperate
Realm and provide a basis for detailed regional correlation. Neither has previ-
ously been reported from South Africa; Inoceramus (Inoceramus) ernsti Heinz
is known from the South Temperate Realm in Madagascar (Heinz 1933), but
I. frechi Flegel was previously thought to be restricted to the North Temperate
Realm, mainly northern Europe. Collectively, these inoceramids suggest a
Lower Coniacian age for the concretions, and this is compatible with the age
as determined by co-occuring ammonites.
There is no good English language description of either of the Jnoceramus
species present in the Alphard Group collections, and none anywhere that
discusses interior shell morphology in detail, warranting redescription of the
taxa here.
Genus Inoceramus Sowerby, 1814
Type species
Inoceramus cuvierii Sowerby (ICZN opinion 473, 1957, see Cox 1969:
N315).
Description
Small to moderately large; slightly to highly inequivalve, left valve largest
and most inflated; shell sub-erect (typical) to moderately prosocline.
Beaks—umbo inflated and projecting, especially left valve, normally proso-
gyrous, incurved, situated anteriorly; some species with small anterior ear
below beaks. Posterior auricle prominent, triangular and commonly flared
posteriorly, separated from disc by distinct auricular sulcus. Posteroventral
sulcus or flattened area occurs on most species, situated posterior and parallel
to rounded umbonal fold. Anterior face commonly broad, flat to slightly
UPPER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES AND INOCERAMIDS 309
concave, in some cases bounded by low ridge to form pseudolunule; some
species with shallow sulcus on anterior face.
Ornament of weak to very strong rugae, normally subequally developed
and subevenly spaced, ranging to irregular and unequal; crowded, evenly to
subevenly developed flat lamellae and/or raised growth lines commonly occur
in interrugal depressions. Shell consisting of outer prismatic layer and thinner,
inner nacreous layer. Shell thin except dorsally, where moderately to greatly
thickened (especially prismatic layer) and folded along hinge and ligamental
plate. Ligament multivincular, producing numerous, moderately excavated,
narrow, vertically elongated pits separated by rounded, narrower ridges of flat
interspaces on ligamental plate (Woods 1912, text-figs 66, 80 show typical
examples). Commissure smooth, slightly to moderately sinuous and in some
species slightly gaping on anterior face below beaks and anterior ear (where
present); forming narrow byssal slit. Muscle impressions consisting of large,
elongated posterior adductor ‘scar’ situated near posteroventral margin, a thin,
entire or nearly entire (interrupted dorsolaterally) pallial line, and commonly
a large pedal-byssal muscle insertion area beneath the small, curved but
unnotched, umbonal septum. Some species with second small pedalbyssal
retractor scar situated anterodorsally just below beak (see Kauffman & Powell
1977, fig. 3, especially fig. 3D). Thin linear tracks of accessory mantle suspender
muscles occur inside the posterior auricle of many species, outside of the
pallial line.
Discussion
The name ‘Jnoceramus’ has been broadly and inconsistently applied to a
variety of inoceramid lineages which possess suites of morphologic characters,
internal as well as external, that would be recognized in other bivalve groups as
being of generic and subgeneric grade. Kauffman & Powell (1977) discuss this
problem, and support a multigeneric taxonomy for the family such as that
proposed by Cox (1969), though more extensively incorporating interior shell
features such as musculature, ligamenture, dentition, the umbonal septum and
various internal ribs, folds, etc., which are produced in selected lineages.
Inoceramus is thus redefined here in the restricted sense to comply with
this taxonomic philosophy and the definition of Cox (1969: N315); it is expanded
to include interior shell features to the extent that they are known. The Jno-
ceramus cuvierii-I. lamarcki lineage serves as the model for this genus.
Variations in external shell morphology serve to define subgenera of
Inoceramus (Cox 1969). Inoceramus ernsti is an extension of the I. cuvierii—
I. lamarcki lineage and possesses all the characteristics of the subgenus (/no-
ceramus) Sowerby. The more prosocline shells of J. frechi, with their enlarged
posterior auricle, less truncated anterior face, more equivalve shells, non- to
poorly defined posteroventral sulcus, and more widely spaced ligament pits,
probably represent a distinct subgenus, as yet undefined. Consequently no
subgenus is listed for Inoceramus frechi Flegel in this respect.
310 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Inoceramus (Inoceramus) ernsti Heinz, 1928
Fig. 10G-P
Inoceramus ernsti Heinz, 1928: 73-74. Troger, 1967: 128-130, pl. 14 (figs 1-4, 6). Kauffman,
19776, pl. 11 (fig. 5).
Inoceramus lamarcki Parkinson: Woods, 1911: 307-327 (part), text-fig. 85 (lectotype desig-
nated by Troger, 1967: 128). ?Pergament, 1971 (part), pl. 4 (fig. 1) only.
Tethyoceramus (Proteoceramus) ernsti (Heinz), 1933: 250, pl. 19 (fig. 1a—b).
Material
Nine complete or nearly complete left valves, SAM—PCO5919A—H, some
with shell margins broken, all with nacre intact. One right valve, complete
except for posteroventral margin; nacreous layer preserved. All shells medium-
sized adults. Scattered fragments and partial valves. All from locality B in the
Alphard Group.
Description
Measurements for South African specimens are given in Table 1. Moderate
size for genus, attaining heights of 150-175 mm, lengths of 125 mm, and widths
of 45 mm (right valve) to 75 mm (left valve) on described specimens. South
African specimens smaller than average for species. Moderately biconvex;
inequivalved; left valve moderately more inflated, larger than right valve, with
markedly greater projection of beak and umbo above hinge line. Maximum infla-
tion of both valves dorsocentral, just above midshell and point where valves show
weak to moderately prominent geniculation (Fig. 1OL—M, P); average H/W 1,83
for left valve, 2,2 for right valve. Valves inequilateral, suberect, slightly prosocline,
with subrectangular to roughly ovate outline. Dorsal margin (hinge line)
straight, moderately long, equalling one-half the shell length, posteriorly
extended along auricle. Posterodorsal corner obtusely subangular, rarely acute
or forming right angle where auricle slightly flared (Fig. 101). Anterior margin
straight to slightly convex except below beak, where slightly concave. Ventral
margin moderately and asymmetrically rounded, posteroventrally flattened.
Posterior margin moderately and more evenly curved. Beaks bluntly pointed,
anterior; beaks-umbos highly inflated, projecting moderately above hinge
line of left valve and strongly incurved, slightly above hinge line of right valve.
Early umbo devoid of ornamentation; umbo weakly rugate ventrally. No
anterior auricle or marginal projection. Posterior auricle small, subtriangular,
gently sloping, moderately to poorly defined by shallow auricular sulcus;
auricle smooth dorsally, weakly rugate nearer disc.
Disc ornamentation (Fig. 10G) consisting of weakly to moderately
developed, subsymmetrical, subregular rounded rugae which become more
prominent over geniculation and irregular, much weaker or absent ventral
to geniculation. Raised growth lines absent, or sparse and irregularly developed
between rugae near midshell. Nature of fine concentric ornamentation unknown.
UPPER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES AND INOCERAMIDS 311
Fig. 10. A-F. Inoceramus frechi Flegel. A,D-E. Suberect left valve, left lateral, anterior,
dorsal views respectively, SAM-—PCO5919I. 8B. Incomplete right valve, SAM—PCO59191.
C. Typically inclined left valve, SAM—PCO5919K. F. Left valve showing typical development
and trace of rugae, SAM—PCOS5919J.
All from locality B (TBD 4510) in the Alphard Group.
A-E Xx 1, F x 2.
G-P. Inoceramus (Inoceramus) ernsti Heinz. G-—H, K. Oblique, left lateral, anterior and
dorsal views respectively, left valve lacking lateral auricle, with typical ornament, SAM-—
PCOS5919B. I, L, N. Left lateral, anterior and dorsal views respectively, left valve with
unusually large posterior auricle, PCO5919E. J, M, O. Left lateral, anterior and dorsal views
respectively, small typical left valve, PCO5919G. PP. Anterior view, largest left valve,
PCOS5919D.
All from locality B (TBD 4510) in the Alphard Group. All x 1.
312 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Growth line and rugae trace typically irregular, moderately curved anteriorly,
becoming flattened to broadly curved ventrally (Fig. 10J), with angular bend
over weakly developed umbonal fold; trace markedly straight along the flat
to very weakly sulcate posterior shell flank, forming second angular bend over
low posterior fold bounding the auricular sulcus. The lectoholotype (Tréger
1967, pl. 14 (fig. 6)) best shows growth line trace. Rugae trace variable in
population, rarely ranging to subrounded with only weakly defined postero-
ventral flattening (Fig. 10G).
Shell moderately thin (1-2 mm) over most of the disc; inner nacreous layer
only slightly thinner than outer prismatic layer; along hinge line, prismatic
layer rolled and moderately thickened to form ligamental plate. Ligament
multivincular; individual ligamental pits poorly preserved. Musculature poorly
known. Umbonal septum medium sized, curved but not notched ventrally,
containing vertical striae on inner face, marking site of a pedalbyssal muscle
insertion. Pallial line weakly impressed, thin, complete anteriorly, but unknown
elsewhere on shell. Posterior adductor insertion track marked by two weak
grooves on shell interior, slightly diverging ventrally, situated along posterior
flank at site of flattening in growth line trace. Actual adductor insertion area,
and pedalbyssal musculature of disc not preserved on known specimens.
Principal ontogenetic variation involves: (i) change in ornamentation
from smooth (juvenile) umbone, to regularly rugate adult midshell area, to
weakly and irregularly rugate (or smooth) ventral (gerontic?) shell beyond
point of geniculation; (ii) change in shell shape, as reflected in growth lines:
moderately prosocline, ovate to submytiloid in shape with rounded growth
line trace during juvenile and early adult growth, changing to suberect, slightly
prosocline subrectangular outline (mid- and late adult growth stages) with
irregular growth line trace (flattened posteroventrally and bounded by angular
bends). Adult variation mainly reflected in degree of irregularity of growth line
trace (subrounded and slightly irregular to moderately irregular), development
of rugae (weak to moderate) and degree of geniculation of the shell (none to
moderately well defined).
Discussion
Inoceramus (Inoceramus) ernsti Heinz is a cosmopolitan species which
occurs almost exclusively with Lower Coniacian strata and biotas (Oberturon
of German authors) in Europe, North America, Madagascar, north and South
Africa, and possibly on the Pacific coast of the USSR (as ?Jnoceramus lamarcki
lamarcki Parkinson, in part, Pergament, 1971, pl. 14 (fig. 1)). Troger (1967,
fig. 43) notes that /. (/.) ernsti co-occurs only with Inoceramus deformis Meek
and J. inconstans Woods in northern and central Europe, and in the upper half
of the ‘Oberturon’. Based on the co-occurrence of these last two inoceramids
with Lower Coniacian (and never older) ammonites and foraminifera elsewhere
in the world, this suite of species is now widely regarded as Lower Coniacian in
age. American occurrences of J. (/.) ernsti (Kauffman 1977b; 1975 as I. erectus
UPPER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES AND INOCERAMIDS 313
in part) range questionably from the highest ammonite zone of the Turonian
(Scaphites corvensis) and definitely through the lower half of the Lower
Coniacian to the top of the Jnoceramus erectus zone. The lectoholotype from
England lacks locality data and was only questionably referred to the latest
Turonian Holaster planus zone of the Upper Chalk (Woods 1911: 325). It could
just as well have come from younger levels, being a float specimen.
Several described species are very closely similar, and related to J. (/.) ernsti.
Primary among these are J. madagascariensis Heinz (1933, pl. 19, (fig. 2);
pl. 20 (fig. 2); Coniacian), J. inaequivalvis Schliiter (Heinz 1933, pl. 18 (fig. 1a-c);
Turonian), J. selwyni McLearn (1926, pl. 21 (figs 8-9); Middle, Upper Coni-
acian), and J. erectus Meek (Kauffman 19776, pl. 11 (figs 3-4); Meek 1877,
pl. 13 (figs 1, la); pl. 14 (fig. 3); Lower Coniacian). With large populations,
and careful study of adult variation in the species, some of these may prove to
be conspecific. [. erectus Meek, 1877, has priority among the possible con-
specific taxa. Small morphologic differences separate the species as currently
known. Compared to J. (/.) ernsti as redefined by Tréger (1967), (i) Inoceramus
inaequivalvis is smaller, narrower, and has twice the number of rugae; these
are more regularly developed and more closely spaced; there is no well-defined
growth geniculation, and the posterior auricle is smaller; most descriptions
depict J. inaequivalvis as less inequivalved than J. (/.) ernsti, with greater pro-
jection of the beak on the left valve above the hinge line; (ii) 7. madagascariensis
has similar but more strongly defined rugae with a more rounded, symmetrical
growth line trace, no growth geniculation, and with two to four strongly raised
growth lines subregularly spaced between the rugae; J. (/.) ernsti lacks these
lines; (iii) Inoceramus erectus is most closely similar to J. (I.) ernsti, but is
nearly equivalve (see Meek’s 1877 types), has a more rounded, symmetrical
growth line trace (though with a posteroventral flattening), a broader and
more rounded to ovate shell, fine juvenile ornamentation consisting of small
regular rugae and/or coarse raised growth lines, and more numerous and
closely spaced adult rugae, commonly with coarse, raised growth lines irregu-
larly spaced between them; (iv) Jnoceramus selwyni is also more equivalve with
a broader, more rounded to subquadrate shell form, a more curved growth line
trace showing only slight posteroventral flattening, and more strongly developed
rugae. This younger Coniacian form is obviously derived from J. (/.) ernsti.
Compared to the co-occuring South African specimens of J. frechi Flegel,
I. ernsti is much more erect, more inequivalve, with fewer, coarser, more
widely spaced rugae, and with a distinctive growth line trace. The small, close,
regular rugae of J. frechi are not found on the umbo of J. (/.) ernsti, which
generally lacks ornamentation.
Temporal relationships of these closely related taxa suggest an evolutionary
‘series beginning with Lower to Middle Turonian J. apicalis Woods, through
Upper Turonian J. inaequivalvis, to I. ernsti (latest Turonian?—-Lower Coni-
acian). J. erectus (Lower Coniacian), to higher Coniacian forms such as
I. madagascariensis and I. selwyni.
314 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Stratigraphic occurrence
Lower Coniacian of South Africa, possibly ranging to highest Turonian
elsewhere.
TABLE 1. Biometry of South African Inoceramus (Inoceramus) ernsti: hypotypes.
no. rugae in
valve =e
Catalogue L = left H L W AL Zi 1st 25 mm2nd 25 mm
no. R=right (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (degrees) AL AL
PCOS5919A it, 54,2 41 30,9 57,5 65 3 4
PCO5919B 1b 55 44,1 35,5 56,7 58 2 2
PCO5919C 1G S153 3451*) 36,2) 25255 68 3 3
PCOS5919D L 73 47 38,4 74,1 75 3 3
PCO5919E L 44,1 36,2 23,2 - 45,9 68 4 5
PCOS5919F L 38,7 34,8 20,5 42 65 4 3
PCO5919G L AD 35) 178i 42 79 2) 4
PCO5919H R 47,6 37,4 21,6 46,8 16 3 3
H/L H/W H/AL
Mean values . 1 1,33 1,83 0,97 68,3
3 3**
R 1278 2220) E02 76
H—height perpendicular to hinge line; L—length parallel to hinge line; W—vwidth (nflation)
of single valve; AL—length of shell along growth axis; 7 i—angle of inclination; *—partially
crushed; **—average no. rugae in 3rd 25 mm AL @G specimens) = 3; in 4th 25 mm AL
(1 specimen) = 2.
Inoceramus frechi Flegel, 1905
Fig. 1OA-F
Inoceramus frechi Flegel, 1905: 25. Scupin, 1907: 693.
Andert, 1911: 51 (19), pl. 1 (fig. 8a—b); pl. 7 (fig. 6).
Scupin, 1912, 1913: 208, pl. 11 (fig. 10), pl. 12 (fig. 2).
Andert, 1934: 120-122, pl. 5 (figs 5-8, 9a—c), pl. 6 (fig. 1).
Dobrov & Pavlova, 1959: 137, pl. 9 (fig. 4). Tsagarelli, 1963: 79, pl. 7 (fig. 3).
Inoceramus cf. frechi Flegel; Heine, 1929, pl. 6 (fig. 31).
Inoceramus sp. nov. (I. mukawaensis Otatsume MS.) Nagao & Matsumoto, 1939: 293-295,
pl. 32 (fig. la—d, non fig. 3a—b).
Mytiloides? frechi (Flegel), Kauffman, 19775: pl. 9 (fig. 21).
Material
SAM-PCO5919, I-M, three nearly complete, medium-sized left valves, most
of nacre attached; two right valves, one moderate size, the other in late juvenile
to early adult growth stage; from locality B on the Alphard Group.
Description
Moderate size, attaining height of 100 mm, length of 80 mm, width of
40-45 mm or more; measurements of South African material in Table 2,
Moderately inequivalved; left valve moderately more inflated, larger than
right valve, with somewhat greater dorsal projection of beak and umbo,
Moderately biconvex, H/W for left valve averaging 1,83, for right valve 2,29;
UPPER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES AND INOCERAMIDS 315
maximum inflation dorsocentral. Valves inequilateral, moderately prosocline
(left valve) to suberect or slightly prosocline (right valve) (Fig. 10C typical).
Angle of inclination averaging 59° on South African specimens, 66° on Andert’s
(1934) hypotypes from north Germany. Valve outline subquadrate to sub-
mytiloid; dorsal margin (hinge line) straight, moderately long, situated posterior
to beak along auricle, dorsoposterior corner normally rounded to obtusely
subangular, in some specimens flared posteriorly (Andert 1934, pl. 5 (fig. 7)).
Anterior, posterior margins slightly diverging ventrally; posterior margin
gently rounded, anterior margin straight to slightly concave below beaks;
ventral margin moderately, irregularly rounded, somewhat flattened postero-
ventrally. Anterior flank steep, slightly concave to flattened, in some specimens
bounded by low fold to form pseudolunule. No anterior auricle; dorsoanterior
margin just below beaks slightly projecting in some specimens. Subtriangular
posterior auricle well defined (Fig. 10A), gently sloping to flattened distally,
with weakened ornamentation similar to that of disc; auricle separated from
disc by shallow to moderately deep auricular sulcus. Posteroventrally directed
umbonal fold low, asymmetrical, steepest posteriorly, rugae and growth lines
make irregular bend across umbonal fold (Fig. 10C, F). Flank posterior to
umbonal fold flattened to very broadly sulcate; rugae trace straight across this
area. A low, rounded fold separates auricular sulcus from posteroventral sulcus
or flattened area.
Beaks bluntly pointed (Fig. 10A, C) anterior; beaks-umbos moderately
(left valve) to slightly (right valve) projecting above hinge line, moderately
prosogyrous, incurved. Umbonal ornamentation finer but similar to that on disc.
Ornamentation consisting of numerous, rounded to subangular, subequally
developed, subevenly spaced, asymmetrical concentric rugae with rare, irregu-
larly raised growth lines between them. Rugae somewhat irregular on older
parts of shell. Growth line trace slightly flattened on anterior face, slightly to
strongly flattened posterior to umbonal fold; with subangular bends over
umbonal and subauricular folds (Fig. 10C, F). Shell thin; hinge plate moderately
thickened. Ligamenture (known only from Andert 1934, pl. 5 (fig. 9b)) multi-
vincular, producing vertically elongated, subrectangular, moderately deep pits
along ligamental plate separated by slightly smaller, flattened to broadly
rounded interspaces. Musculature poorly preserved on known specimens;
pallial line entire, thin, but only partially observed; posterior adductor muscle
track weakly defined along posterior flank of umbonal fold. Adductor and
pedalbyssal insertion areas not yet observed.
Ontogenetic change mainly involves increase in size and spacing of rugae,
and change from erect to more inclined shells between juvenile and adult
growth stages. Principal adult morphological variation involves shell shape
(suberect to submytiloid; see Andert 1934, pl. 5 (figs 5-9), growth line trace
(subrounded with only slight posteroventral flattening to irregular, with promi-
nent posteroventral flattening and angular bends over umbonal and auricular
folds), and development of posterior auricle (rounded to flared).
316 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Discussion
This is a cosmopolitan species, and is known from North America, Japan ?,
probably eastern Russia (? as J. stantoni, part, in Pergament 1971, see pl. 60
(fig. 3a—b)), throughout northern and western Europe, sparsely in the Caribbean
and Mediterranean Tethys, and now off South Africa. Inoceramus frechi occurs
primarily in beds attributed to the Lower Coniacian.
In northern Europe, several related and/or co-occuring species are similar,
and possibly even conspecific. Inoceramus winkholdioides Andert (1934, pl. 8
(figs. la—b)) is an associated species mainly known from compressed internal
moulds; it appears to be somewhat more erect, and to have a much more angular
growth line (rugae) trace than J. frechi. Inoceramus glatziae Flegel (Andert
1934, pl. 6 (figs 2-4)) and J. multiformis Pergament (1971, pl. 33 (fig. 3)) are
similar in form but have a much more irregular ornamentation with finer,
closer rugae and raised growth lines. Some specimens of J. kleini Miiller are
remarkably similar (see Andert 1934, pl. 4 (fig. 9)); but typical J. kleini are
smaller, more prosocline and have regularly spaced growth lines between the
rugae. Descendant species which are closely similar are Jnoceramus stantoni
Sokolow (Stanton 1899, pl. 75 (figs 9-10)) and the probably conspecific species
I. uwajimensis Yehara (Nagao & Matsumoto 1939, pl. 34 (figs 1-3)), both from
Middle and/or Upper Coniacian and possibly Lower Santonian levels. These
species have a more prosogyrate beak-umbo, a more prosocline shell and a
narrower, but longer and more indistinct posterior auricle than does J. frechi.
Regular, fine growth lines are common between the rugae on J. stantoni. The
Lower Coniacian J. incurvatus Troger is broader and more strongly rugate
than J. frechi, but related.
Stratigraphic occurrence
Lower Coniacian in South Africa, in so far as known. Elsewhere the species
may range into latest Turonian in North Germany (Oberturon alpha). It is
not yet definitely reported from younger Coniacian strata.
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL INTERPRETATION OF
INOCERAMIDAE
Unlike the ammonites, which in general are ambiguous indicators of
sedimentary environment, the inoceramids from locality B permit partial
interpretation of the prevailing bathymetric current conditions, and also give
indications of their ecologies.
Complete left valves of inoceramids dominate the collection; as both
species of Inoceramus are strongly inequivalve, with the left being the largest
and the heaviest, this occurrence suggests winnowing of dead shells by moderate
bottom currents, with selective removal of the lighter right valves. The dis-
articulated but relatively complete nature of the valves supports this interpre-
UPPER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES AND INOCERAMIDS 317
tation. Preservation of the nacre and lack of significant crushing of the speci-
mens further suggest early diagenetic cementation of the concretions at or just
below the sediment—water interface, before crushing by compaction of a thick
sediment overburden.
Thus, taphonomic analysis of the inoceramid bivalves collectively suggests
a shelf habitat with moderate bottom currents and relatively slow rates of
sedimentation, below the depth range of strong wave and current action. The
matrix of the concretions, a very fine-grained, well-sorted relatively clean and
mature quartz sand, is compatible with interpretation of an inner shelf
environment.
Inoceramus (I.) ernsti Heinz, is an inflated, markedly inequivalve species
with a broad, flattened to slightly concave anterior face, a sinuous anterior
byssal slit, and two or more small pedalbyssal retractor muscle insertion areas
situated on the anterodorsal part of the shell interior and under the umbonal
septum. These characteristics suggest a wholly epifaunal mode of life with the
shell strongly attached by byssal threads along the anterior face. The inequi-
valve condition suggests that the species may have lain semi-recumbent on the
anterior face of the left valve with the commissure at an angle of 60-80 degrees
to the substrate.
Inoceramus frechi Flegel is somewhat more prosocline and mytiloid in
form, moderately inequivalve (left valve larger and more convex), has a flat to
slightly concave anterior face (smaller and less well defined than that of J. (1.)
ernsti) and has a weakly defined byssal slit and pedalbyssal musculature. The
only known byssal muscle is beneath the umbonal septum. We speculate that
this species was also wholly epifaunal, lying semi-reclined on the anterior face
of the left valve, loosely attached by a thin row of byssal threads as in living
Mytilus.
Thus, both inoceramid species show adaptation to epibyssate habitats and
the ability to withstand moderate, but not severe currents without being
uprooted. It is assumed that byssal attachment was originally to shell fragments,
and ultimately to other living Jnoceramus shells, resulting in clustered
populations.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We thank Prof. R. V. Dingle and Dr W. G. Siesser of the Marine Geo-
science Unit of the University of Cape Town and Dr P. F. Rawson (Queen
Mary College, London) for placing the material at our disposal.
Prof. Dr Jost Wiedmann (Tiibingen), Dr M. K. Howarth (British Museum,
Natural History), and Mr C. W. Wright (Oxford) assisted in many ways.
The assistance of the technical staff of the South African Museum, Cape
Town, and of the United States National Museum, Washington, in preparing
illustrations is gratefully acknowledged.
The project was completed while H. Klinger was recipient of a research
318 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
grant of the Alexander von Humboldt Foundation, which is gratefully
acknowledged.
TABLE 2. Biometry of South African Inoceramus frechi: hypotypes.
no. rugae in
valve ———EE
Catalogue L = left H L W AL Zi Ist 25 mm 2nd 25 mm
no. R=right (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (degrees) AL AL
PCOS59191 . L 40,1 292" S240" 425 57 8 5
PCOS919J . L 34,5 24,1 17 35,4 61 5 5
PCO5919K L 42,5 32,9 269 46 54 c. 9-10 6
PCO5919L R 42,55 304 164 43,5 66 7 4
PCOS5919M R 20 172 LOM 20,5 55 9 =
H/L H/W H/AL
Mean values L il-sh7/ 1,83 0,95 57,3
7,7 5,0
R 1,28 2,29 0,98 60,5
See Table 1 for key to abbreviations.
REFERENCES
ANDERT, H. 1911. Die Inoceramen des Kreibitz Zittauer Sandsteingebirges. Sond. Festschr.
Humboldtvereins, zur Feier seines 50 Jahr. Bestehens: 33-64.
ANDERT, H. 1934. Die Kreideablagerungen Zwischen Elbe und Jeschken: Teil 3: Die Fauna
der obersten Kreide in Sachsen, BOhmen und Schlesien. Abh. preuss. geol. Landesanst.:
1-477.
BESAIRIE, H. 1930. Les rapports du Crétacé Malgache avec le Crétaché de l’Afrique australe.
Bull. Soc. géol. Fr. 30: 613-643.
BRUNNSCHWEILER, R. O. 1966. Upper Cretaceous Ammonites from the Carnarvon Basin of
Western Australia. 1. The heteromorph Lytoceratina. Bull. Bur. Miner. Resour. Geol.
Geophys. Aust. 58: 1-58.
COLLIGNON, M. 1971. Atlas des fossiles caracteristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) 18.
Maastrichtien. Tananarive: Service Geologique.
Cox, L. R. 1969. Family Inoceramidae Giebel. In Moore, R. C. ed. Treatise on invertebrate
paleontology. Pt. N.V.1. Mollusca. 6 Bivalvia. Lawrence, Kansas: Geological Society of
America and University of Kansas Press.
DINGLE, R. V. 1973. Post-palaeozoic stratigraphy of the eastern Agulhas Bank, South African
continental margin. Mar. Geol. 15: 1-23.
Dosroy, S. A. A. & PAvLovA, M. M. 1959. Inoceramus. In Moskovin, M. M. ed. An atlas of
the Upper Cretaceous faunas of the North Caucasus and Crimean regions, USSR.
(In Russian.) Vsesoyuz Nauch-Issled. Inst. Prirod Gas.: 1-501.
ETHERIDGE, R. 1904. Cretaceous fossils of Natal. 1. The Umkwelane Hill deposit. Rep. geol.
Surv. Natal Zululd. 2: 71-93.
FLEGEL, K. 1905. Die Kreide an der bohmisch-schlesischen Grenze. Jb. geol. Bundesanst.,
Wien 35: 1-228.
Henge, F. 1929. Die Inoceramen des mittelwestfallischen Emschers und unteren Untersenons.
Abh, preuss. geol. Landesanst. (N.F.) 120: 1-124.
HEINZ, R. 1928. Das Inoceramen-Profil der oberen Kreide Liineburgs. Mit Anfiihrung der
neuen Formen und deren Kennzeichung. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der ober-kretazischen
Inoceramen I. Sond. 21 Jahr. Jber. niedersdchs. geol. Ver. 21: 64-81.
HEINZ, R. 1933. Inoceramen von Madagascar und ihre Bedeutung fiir die Kreide-Stratigraphie.
Z. dt geol. Ges. 85: 241-259.
HENDERSON, R. A. 1970. Ammonoidea from the Mata series (Santonian-Maastrichtian) of
New Zealand. Palaeontology, Spec. Pap. 6: 1-82.
HowartH, M. K. 1966. Ammonites from the Upper Cretaceous of the James Ross Island
Group. Bull. Br. Anarct. Sury. 10: 55-69.
UPPER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES AND INOCERAMIDS 319
KAUFFMAN, E. G. 1970. Population systematics, radiometrics, and zonation—a new bio-
stratigraphy. Proc. N. Am. paleont. Conv. 1 (F): 613-666.
KAUFFMAN, E. G. 1972. Evolutionary rates and patterns of North American Cretaceous
Mollusca. Proc. int. geol. Congr. 1972 (7): 174-189.
KAUuFEMAN, E. G. 1975. Dispersal and biostratigraphic potential of Cretaceous benthonic
Bivalvia in the Western Interion. In: CAULDWELL, W. G. E. ed. The Cretaceous System
in the Western Interior of North America. Geol. Assn. Canada, Spec. Pap. 13: 163-194.
KAUFFMAN, E. G. 1977a. Upper Cretaceous cyclothems, biotas and environments, Rock
Canyon anticline, Pueblo, Colorado. In: KAUFFMAN, E. G. Spec. ed. Cretaceous facies,
faunas and paleo-environments across the Western Interior Basin. Rocky Mt. Ass. Geol.
Mt. Geol. 14 (3, 4): 129-152.
KAUFFMAN, E. G. 19775. Illustrated guide to biostratigraphically important Cretaceous macro-
fossils. Western Interior Basin, U.S.A.: Jn: KAUFFMAN, E. G. Spec. ed. Cretaceous facies,
faunas and paleo-environments across the Western Interior Basin. Rocky Mt. Ass. Geol.,
Mt. Geol. 14 (3, 4): 225-274.
KAUFFMAN, E. G. 1977c. Geological and biological overview, Western Interior Cretaceous
Basin. In KAUFFMAN, E. G. Spec. ed. Cretaceous facies, faunas and paleoenvironments
across the Western Interior Basin. Rocky Mt. Ass. Geol., Mt. Geol. 14 (3, 4): 75-99.
KAUFFMAN, E. G. & POWELL, J. D. 1977. Paleontology: In KAUFFMAN, E. G., HatTin, D. E.
& PoweELL, J. D. Stratigraphic, Paleontologic and Paleoenvironmental analysis of the
Upper Cretaceous rocks of Cimmaron County, northwestern Oklahoma. Mem. geol.
Soc. Am. 149: 47-150.
KAUFEMAN, E. G. 1978. Evolutionary rates and patterns among Cretaceous Bivalvia. Phil.
Trans. R. Soc., B, 284: 277-304.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1975. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal. Intro-
duction, Stratigraphy. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) 25: 265-315.
Kune Er, H. C. 1976. Cretaceous heteromorph Ammonites from Zululand. Mem. geol. Surv.
Rep. S. Afr. 69: 1-142.
KLINGER, H. C., KENNEDY, W. J. & SIESSER, W. G. 1976. Yabeiceras (Coniacian Ammonite)
fro m the Alphard Group off the southern Cape Coast. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 161-168.
KILIAN, W. & REBOUL, P. 1909. Les céphalopodes néocrétacés des iles Seymour et Snow-Hill.
Wiss. Ergebn. schwed. Siid-Pol. Exp. (1901-3) 3: 1-75.
Kossmat, F. A. 1895-1898. Untersuchungen iiber die Siidindische Kreide-Formation. Beitr.
Paléont. Geol. Ost.-Ung. 9: 87-203; 11: 1-46, 80-152.
Matsumoto, T. & OBaATA, I. 1963. A monograph of the Baculitidae of Japan. Mem. Fac. Sci.,
Kyushu Univ. (D) 13: 1-116.
McLegarn, F. H. 1926. New species from the Coloradoan of lower Smoky and lower Peace
rivers, Alberta. Jn SHIMER, H. W. et al. Contributions to Canadian Paleontology. Bull.
geol. Surv. Can. 42: Geol. Ser. 45: 117-126.
MEEK, F. B. 1877. Paleontology. In: United States geological exploration of the fortieth parallel.
Report 18 (1).
Naaao, T. & Matsumoto. 1939. A monograph of the Cretaceous Jnoceramus of Japan, Pt. 1.
J. Fac. Sci. Hokkaido Univ. (4) 4: 241-299.
OBRADOVICH, J. D. & COBBAN, W. A. 1975. A time-scale for the Late Cretaceous of the
Western Interior of North America. In: CALDWELL, W. G. E. ed. The Cretaceous System
in the Western Interior of North America. Spec. Pap. Geol. Assoc. Can. 13: 31-54.
PERGAMENT, M. A. 1971. Biostratigraphy and Inoceramus of Turonian-Coniacian deposits
of the Pacific Regions of the USSR. Akad. Sc. USSR, Nauka, Trans. 212: 1-202.
Riccarpi, A. C. 1974. Eubaculites Spath (Ammonoidea) del Cretacico superior de Argentine.
Revta. asoc. paleont. argent. 11: 379-399.
Scott, G. R. & CoBBAN, W. A. 1964. Stratigraphy of the Niobrara Formation at Pueblo,
Colorado. Prof. Pap. U.S. geol. Surv. 454L: L1-L30.
ScuPIn, H. 1907. Die stratigraphischen Beziehungen der obersten Kreideschichten in Sachsen,
Schlesien und B6hmen. Neues Jb. Miner. Geol. Paldont. Beil. -Bd. 24: 676-715.
Scupin, H. 1912-13. Die Lowenberger Kreide und ihre Fauna. Palaeontographica Suppl. 6:
1-208.
SPATH, L. F, 1921. On Cretaceous Cephalopoda from Zululand. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 12: 217-321.
SpaTH, L. F. 1953. The Upper Cretaceous cephalopod fauna of Graham Land. Br. Antarc.
Sury. Sci. Rep. 3: 1-60.
320 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
STANTON, T. W. 1899. Mesozoic fossils of Yellowstone National Park. Mon. U.S. Geol. Sury
32 (2): 600-650.
STOLICZKA, F. 1863-1866. The fossil Cephalopoda of the Cretaceous rocks of southern India.
Mem. geol. Sury. India, Palaeont. indica. 1: 41-56 (1863); 3-5: 57-106 (1864); 6-9:
107-154 (1865); 10-13: 155-216 (1866).
Nase, K. 1975. Functional morphology of Otoscaphites puerculus (Jimbo), an Upper Creta-
ceous ammonite. Trans. Proc. Palaeont. Soc. Japan (N.S.) 99: 109-132.
TrOGER, K. A. 1967. Zur Palaontologie, Biostratigraphie und fazielle Ausbildung der unteren
Oberkreide (Ceoman bis Turon). Teil 7 Palaéontologie und Biostratigraphie der Ino-
ceramen des Cenomans bis Turons Mitteleuropas. AbA. Staatl. Mus. Miner. Geol. 12:
13-207.
TsAGARELLI, A. L. 1963. Upper Cretaceous fauna from Dagestan. Soobshch. Akad. Nauk.
gruz. SSR. 13 (18): 79-108. (In Russian.)
VENZO, S. 1936. Cefalopodi del Cretacea medio-superiore dello Zululand. Palaeontogr. ital. 36:
59-133.
WIEDMANN, J. 1965. Origin, limits and systematic position of Scaphites. Palaeontology 8:
397-453.
WOLLEBEN, J. A. 1967. Senonian (Cretaceous) Mollusca from Trans-Pecos Texas and north-
eastern Chihuahua, Mexico. J. Paleont. 41: 1150-1165.
Woops, H. 1911, 1912. A monograph of Cretaceous Lamellibrachia of England. Palaeontogr.
Soc. (Monogr.) 2 (7, 8): 261-340.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the Jnternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific namé must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new Species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. “... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10) .
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman’ numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
ERLE G. KAUFFMAN
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
UPPER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES
AND INOCERAMIDS FROM THE OFF-SHORE
ALPHARD GROUP OF SOUTH AFRICA
42 PART 8 SEPTEMBER 1980 ISSN 0303-2515
ANNALS
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
“Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; re ny
‘As described (Haughton & Broom ale
“As described (Haughton et al. 1927) .
Note; no comma separating name sinh: year
Pagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuLLouGu, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. —H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHer, P.-H., DvuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320,
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, eas! masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull, Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 51.
THELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Cli ee Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270. :
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 82 Band
September 1980 September
Part 8 Deel
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND
AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA
A NEW SEXTUBERCULATE TEXANITID
By
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1, 3, 5, 7-8), 3(1-2, 5, t—p.i.), 5(1-2, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.-p.i.), 7(1-3), 8, 9(1-2), 10(1),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t—p.i.), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 001 X
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL,
SOUTH AFRICA
A NEW SEXTUBERCULATE TEXANITID
By
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
South African Museum, Cape Town*
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
Geological Collections, University Museum, Oxford
(With 7 figures)
LMS. accepted 20 May 1980]
ABSTRACT
Plesiotexanites (Eutexanites) sextuberculatus sp. noy. from the Lower Santonian of
Zululand is described. Ornament and ontogeny are basically that of Plesiotexanites, except
that a sixth row of tubercles is added through division of the original umbilical row. The
sextuberculate ornament is unique amongst the ammonite subfamily Texanitinae, but appears
to have been an evolutionary cul-de-sac.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction ‘ : BR: eR VAL
Systematic description . . 322
Acknowledgements . . . 330
References. . . . . 330
INTRODUCTION
Subsequent to the authors’ (Klinger & Kennedy 1980) monographical
description of the southern African representatives of the ammonite subfamily
Texanitinae Collignon, 1948, an as yet undescribed form was discovered in the
course of routine curatorial duties and fieldwork. This new form differs from
all known texanitine material in possessing six rows of tubercles in the adult
stage, and merits description as a new subgenus and species of the genus Plesio-
texanites Matsumoto, 1970.
* Present address: Institut und Museum fiir Geologie und Paldontologie, Tiibingen.
321
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 82 (8), 1980: 321-331, 7 figs.
322 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTION
Superfamily ACANTHOCERATACEAE de Grossouvre, 1894
Family Collignoniceratidae Wright & Wright, 1951
Subfamily Texanitinae Collignon, 1948
Genus Plesiotexanites Matsumoto, 1970
Subgenus Eutexanites Klinger & Kennedy nov.
Type species
Plesiotexanites (Eutexanites) sextuberculatus Klinger & Kennedy sp. nov.,
from the Lower Santonian of Zululand.
Diagnosis
The first ornamented stage is trituberculate, with umbilical, ventrolateral
and external tubercles. In later stages the bullate ventrolateral tubercles divide
into marginal and submarginal rows. In addition, the umbilical tubercles
divide into two rows, with the ventral row strongest. With increasing diameter,
the two umbilical rows and the marginal and submarginal rows migrate further
apart, whilst at the same time, a faint lateral tubercle appears. In the final
stages of growth observed, all rows of tubercles are more or less equidistantly
spaced on the flanks. The keel is undulating. The suture is of the simple col-
lignoniceratid type.
Occurrence
Lower Santonian of Zululand only.
Plesiotexanites (Eutexanites) sextuberculatus sp. nov.
Figs 1-5, 7
Holotype
BMNH-C82427 from the St Lucia Formation, Santonian I or II at
locality 86, a line of concretions striking across the foreshore exposures 750 m
north of Picnic Point, south-western shores of False Bay, east of Hluhluwe,
Zululand, South Africa.
Material
SAM-PCZ5925-6, both from the St Lucia Formation, Santonian I at
locality 73, a degraded river cliff along the north banks of the Mzinene River,
north-north-east of Hluhluwe, Zululand, are tentatively referred to the species.
Derivation of name
Refers to the six rows of tubercles in the adult stage.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 323
Fig. 1. A-B. Plesiotexanites (Eutexanites) sextuberculatus sp. nov. Holotype, BMNH C82427,
from the St Lucia Formation, Lower Santonian, locality 86, Zululand. x 1.
Dimensions
All measurements are in millimetres. D = diameter, Wb = whorl breadth,
Wh = whorl height, U = umbilical diameter, T = number of tubercles per
whorl.
Figures in parentheses are dimensions expressed as a percentage of the
diameter.
D Wb Wh Wb: Wh U fhe
BMNH-C82427 at 37,0 15,0(40,5) 13,0(35,1) 1,15 16,0(43,2) 20
at 75,0 20,0(26,7) 25,0(33,3) 0,8 34,0(45,3) 24
at 90,0 25,0(27,8) 29,0(32,2) 0,86 41,0(45,6) 25
SAM—P.CZ5923) atinn 18.0; © 29,0G7,2).. 31,069,7). 0)93 ~ .28,0G65,9)_ 30
324 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 2. A-B. Plesiotexanites (Eutexanites) sextuberculatus sp. nov. Holotype, BMNH C82427,
from the St Lucia Formation, Lower Santonian, locality 86, Zululand. x 1.
Description
This is a widely umbilicate species, with umbilical width increasing slightly
during ontogeny from 43 to 45 per cent. Whorl overlap is minimal and in conse-
quence the dorsal zone of impression is very shallow. The whorl section varies
considerably during ontogeny, from slightly broader than high and rounded
rectangular on the innermost whorls, through rounded quadrate to subtrigonal
ovoid, higher than wide, with gently rounded flanks converging to a venter
which is narrower than the dorsum (Fig. 4A—C).
At the earliest diameter preserved (approximately 22 mm), there are
already three rows of tubercles on each flank (Fig. 4E-G), with radially pinched
umbilical, prominent ventrolateral and weak, clavate external tubercles. The
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 325
Fig. 3. Plesiotexanites (Eutexanites) sextuberculatus sp. nov. Holotype, BMNH C82427, from
the St Lucia Formation, Lower Santonian, locality 86. x 1,6.
326 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
E F G
Fig. 4. Plesiotexanites (Eutexanites) sextuberculatus sp. nov. A—C. Holotype, BMNH C82427,
before repair, to illustrate the ontogentic changes in whorl section. D. SAM-—PCZ5925
outer whorl of a specimen with indistinctly developed double umbilical tubercles, from St Lucia
Formation, Lower Santonian, locality 73, Zululand. E-G. SAM-—PCZ5926 with ‘Paratexanites’
inner whorls. Horizon and locality as for D. All x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 327
Fig. 5. Plesiotexanites (Eutexanites) sextuberculatus sp. nov. Holotype, BMNH C82427
from the St Lucia Formation, Lower Santonian, locality 86, Zululand. Part of external suture
lines.
keel, at this diameter, is already well developed and entire. At a diameter of
40 mm the ventrolateral tubercles already show distinct signs of splitting in
two, although still joined by a common base. In addition, the umbilical tubercles
move outwards from the umbilicus and also show signs of splitting in two.
At this stage the ventral half of the umbilical tubercle appears strongest. Beyond
this diameter, crenulations appear on the keel.
With increasing diameter the division of the ventrolateral and umbilical
tubercles becomes more and more marked, and at a diameter of about 75 mm
the division is completed. Also at this stage faint indications of a lateral row of
tubercles appear, situated slightly closer to the submarginal than inner umbilical
tubercle. Up to this stage all the ribs are single and more or less radial, but
beyond this, slight indications of forward curvature of the ribs develop.
The holotype is still septate at a diameter of 102 mm, and at the greatest
preserved diameter six distinct rows of tubercles are present, although the
lateral row is still weakest. Spacing of the rows of tubercles is virtually equi-
distant, each being situated on one-sixth of the flanks.
Part of the external suture is shown in Figure 5. It is of the normal col-
lignoniceratid type with little-incised elements.
Discussion
The description of the species is based mainly on the holotype (Figs 1-3,
5, 7). Paratype SAM-—PCZ5926 (Fig. 4E-G) is an immature individual, whereas
SAM-PCZ5925 (Fig. 4D) differs from the holotype in being slightly more
inflated, narrower umbilicate and does not have as distinct outer umbilical
tubercles in the adult stage.
Both sides of the holotype show the distinct progressive division of the
umbilical row of tubercles. Thus the possibility that we might here be dealing
with a pathological specimen is most unlikely.
328 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 6. A-B. Plesiotexanites (Plesiotexanites) collignoniforme Klinger & Kennedy,
SAS Z1790a, from the St Lucia Formation, Lower Santonian, locality 86, Zululand. Specimen
to illustrate similarity to P. (Eutexanites) sextuberculatus sp. nov.
Apart from the division of the umbilical row of tubercles, the ontogenetic
development of the ornament, and to a lesser extent the whorl section and
evolute coiling are characteristic of Plesiotexanites, hence it is advisable to
separate this species from Plesiotexanites s.s. at subgeneric level only. Both
Plesiotexanites s.s. and P. (Eutexanites) have an early trituberculate stage, then
pass through a ‘Paratexanites’ stage when the ventrolateral tubercle starts
dividing, and eventually acquire a lateral tubercle. The diagnostic difference is
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 329
that P. (Eutexanites) acquires an additional row of tubercles through division
of the umbilical row of tubercles at a relatively early stage of growth.
Comparison with other texanitine species is simple by virtue of the presence
of this sixth row of tubercles. All other known taxa have five or less rows.
Incipient doubling of the umbilical row of tubercles has been noted in
Plesiotexanites kawasakii (Kawada) (see Matsumoto 1959: 124; 1970: 282),
but none of the specimens shows a distinct division of the umbilical tubercles
into two clearly separated rows as in the present species.
In Zululand the closest ally in overall morphology is Plesiotexanites (P.)
collignoniforme Klinger & Kennedy, which occurs at the same biostratigraphic
level in Zululand at locality 85 (see Kennedy & Klinger 1975: 294), in close
proximity to locality 84 where the holotype of P. (£.) sextuberculatus sp. nov.
was found.
Relative proportions of the two species are virtually identical, as a com-
parison of the dimensions of the holotypes shows:
D Wb Wh Wb:Wh U it
P.(E.) sextuberculatus 90,0 25,0(27,8) 29,0(32,2) 0,86 41,0(45,6) 25
P.(P.) collignoniforme 220,0 58,0(26,1) 67,0(30,2) 0,87 103,0(46,4) 37
In P. (P.) collignoniforme the umbilical tubercle shows signs of elongation
over the umbilical wall, and also ventral migration (fig. 6), but none of the
specimens has a distinct division of this tubercle as in P. (£.) sextuberculatus.
P. (P.) collignoniforme acquires the lateral tubercle at an earlier diameter than
P. (P.) sextuberculatus, and also retains the ‘Parabevahites’ arrangement of the
submarginal and marginal tubercles to a greater diameter. The co-occurrence of
the two species at the same stratigraphic level and their great similarity suggest
genetic affinity and possible derivation from a common ancestor, probably Para-
texanites pseudotricarinatum Klinger & Kennedy. In the latter species there is
already a distinct elongation of the umbilical tubercle in some specimens.
Paratype SAM-PCZ5925 (Fig. 4D), with more inflated section, narrower
umbilicus and less clearly defined doubled umbilical tubercles, may be regarded
as intermediate between Paratexanites pseudotricarinatum and Plesiotexanites
(E.) sextuberculatus.
Judging by the lack of further sextuberculate forms in southern Africa,
it appears that this development was an evolutionary cul-de-sac.
Multiplication of umbilical tubercles is known to occur in two other
texanitine species in southern Africa; Plesiotexanites (P.) matsumotoi Klinger
& Kennedy, and Menabites (Australiella) australis (Besairie 1930), but here
multiplication occurs through intercalation rather than actual division and
there is no genetic relationship.
A minor point to note is that the sextuberculate ornament does not fit the
numerical annotation for describing the rows of tubercles in texanitid species
as employed by the authors (Klinger & Kennedy 1980, fig. 1), Young (1963: 37,
text-fig. 6), and Collignon (1948: 55(10)). Rather than change the whole system,
330 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
—5 external
—4 marginal
-3 submarginal
-2 lateral
-ib subumbilical
~la umbilical
Fig. 7. Plesiotexanites (Eutexanites) sextubereulatus sp. nov. Holotype, BMNH C82427,
from the St Lucia Formation, Lower Santonian, locality 86, Zululand. Whorl section with
annotation here employed.
it is here suggested to refer to the two umbilical rows of tubercles as umbilical
and subumbilical, or, if described numerically, as la and 1b respectively (see
Fig. 7).
Occurrence
Lower Santonian of Zululand.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We thank Dr M. K. Howarth and Mr D. Phillips of the British Museum
(Natural History), the technical staff of the South African Museum and the
Geological Collections, University Museum, Oxford. Financial aid to H. C.
Klinger from the South African Council for Scientific and Industrial Research,
and (during the tenure of a research grant) from the Alexander von Humboldt
Foundation at Tiibingen, and to W. J. Kennedy from the National Environ-
ment Research Council is gratefully acknowledged.
REFERENCES
BESAIRIE, H. 1930. Recherches Géologiques a Madagascar. Bull. Soc. Hist. nat. Toulouse 60:
1-272.
CoLLicnon, M. 1948. Ammonites neocrétacées du Menabe (Madagascar). 1. Les Texanitidae.
Annls. géol. Serv. Mines Madagascar 13: 7-115.
Grossouvre, A. DE. 1894. Recherches sur la craie supérieure. II. Paléontologie. Les ammonites
de la craie supérieure. Mem. Serv. Carte géol. Fr.: 1-264.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 331
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1975. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South
Africa. Introduction, Stratigraphy. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) 25: 263-315.
Kuincer, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1980. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South
Africa. The ammonite subfamily Texanitinae Collignon, 1948. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 80:
1-357.
Matsumoto, T. 1959. Upper Cretaceous ammonites of California. Part 2. Mem. Fac. Sci.
Kyushu. Uniy. (D) Spec. Vol. 1: 1-172.
Matsumoto, T. 1970. A monograph of the Collignoniceratidae from Hokkaido. IV. Mem.
Fac. Sci. Kyushu Uniy. (D) 20: 225-304.
WRIGHT, C. W. & WRIGHT, E. V. 1951. A survey of the cephalopoda of the Chalk of Great
Britain. Palaeontogr. Soc. (Monogr.): 1-40.
Youn, K. 1963. Upper Cretaceous ammonites from the Gulf Coast of the United States.
Bull. Univ. Tex. econ. Geol. Tech. 6304: 1-373.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., Syn. nov., etc.
‘An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name ‘(and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e-g.:
Holotype
SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. *.. . the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. DuToit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
“Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND
AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA
A NEW SEXTUBERCULATE TEXANITID
@
“mus
»
SONIAN
SJINVUGIT LIBR
NOIL'
INSTITUTION
INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI
SHLINS SSJIYVYUEIT LIBRARIES
SHLINS SAZIYVUEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
w
=
=
=
w
Oo
=
>"
2
SONIAN _INSTITUTION
ee
4 fo =
ie
ais =
Oo
z
SS
INSTITUTION
SG
SONIAN INSTITUTION
Ss
~*~
a
iuist>
SHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
SONIAN
S31YVYSIT LIBRARIES
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31Y¥vVualt
INSTITUTION
NOILN
LILSNI
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
SHLINS SSIYVYEIT_ LIBRARIES
SMITHSONIAN
SONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI
Ww ,
= Yi
zy “UY V;
t GY
S lp gl
z for Sa
="
Zz,
Uf, a
4: yA
hoes
7 =
[@)
FZ
SHUIWS S3IYvudtt
%,
TUTIO
LIBRARIES
LIBRARIES
Wud!
450A,
& aL
‘sve
\ “ 3
4 \| SY aber af 4 SY
fe) CS = rs . \
= 5 z XN
NVINOSHLIWS ~°3 IYVudl Ve LIBRARI ES_ SMITHSONIAR
° Oo eas Oo ar
h —_ w —_— {;
\. iy 20 =
Ng : : :
QO" 5 = ae
: S ” ra wo
- = n” =
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI
NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONI
NVINOSHLINS S31Y¥VusII_LIBR
SMITHSONIAN
ae,
‘Me
NVINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
Vip
NOILNLILSNI
if
LIBRARIES
NOILNLILSNI
NVINOSHLIW
no”
WwW
Ine
<x
log
mM.
<3
= oe =z — .
— fo) — ea
S) < iS) :
2 2 E 2 ON
ress > Ke Poe
a 3 e a
Z m Z m :
= — ” .
NOILNLILSNI S3JIYVUSIT_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
Z S Se
yee A ie = “— AS =
es Wi, Oo Bn (e} NY 4 SE
fff? a 2X 3
ti E z = NS 2
é = > = sate ro
(ep) = 22) ae ae
S31YVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLIWS
at a ae ul =
_ Lat 4, * 4 = 4
GS 3 < =
=“Wyiy § = :
ae = oy 2 x
NVINOSHLINS S3!YVYUGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAK
il > = Be. = ia
a We 5 = . GY
> fi SWS = > =
2 As 2 = OS
ce 2 Z
a MITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLIWS
= z Z <
= c =
: 5 \wi 5
Oo YY “AQ: e
z = \ —- =
: 5 | ee 3
_NVINOSHIINS Salav een LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
Zz z wn ;
LJ lJ
= a ZL
es WS < 2 < Uy) ap
4 NS \ y = fea ” fo?
fe) AS = ro) =a
Zz 3 a =|
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOALILSNI NVINOSHLINS
= & z =
ro) = [uSON7, Oo 5 = Ve
= “wm SN S40 wo “S
E af A 2 A i- 2 KS
= tiff, D [=z ro) fe} 7, Ad y. WS
5 Pip 2 ie -(2e 4) > QA
4 SJ LLY I, <7 ithe ty bt N 8 SJ -
ra es ie, Yi, Cas a Cas S LS C
| z a5 z
PTUTION NOILALILSNI S3JIYVUdIT LIBRARIES INSTITUTION
\
NVINOSHLIWS SMITHSONIAN
INSTITUTION
SaIuVUSIT LIBR
ye
ty x
INSTITUTION NOIL
INSTITUTION NOLL
SSIYVUSIT LIBR
S3aluvudgit
mle TIiriiTinal
S
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31YWYaIT
2 ” z w z n E
ee = < = ty < = E
= : = Zz 4 yy, Zz 4 z
re) WQ = ra Be Yl, B = C
2 AN 3 2 w hb a oH ¢
E No 2 E al glee = 2 F
oe 2 ap Sales ; :
op NONLALILSNI_NVINOSHLINS | S3 1yuvyug tT LI BRARI ES SMITHSONIAN
i) U
fad = co =A fac Ja, , =e a
< Ee . <x as < ee et <
faa} = o a m* x = o
5 g ee oo 7 = :
| a z :
PVYE!IT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOJLONLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31u¥vVugIq
} Sm z nse 2 Liz xy mas cr
= et « Y rice ‘Viage 2) -
a = 2 = D aN OE :
> 5 > =. = 3
= = =
a =e a = a - 2
om = 2 Z m a ;
ITUTION NOILNLILSNI S3IYVYAIT_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN | |
. a) z g ee g z Y
s oe = “Ee WSs = . =
= Jf tif ; oS = Ss WS Sa = z =
EN 3 =. 9 WN wo a ro) >
O Gy% x oO 4 = \N Oo 2 g
> Ql = > = . 2 = >
z 22) Fa 7) Zz Ww Zz
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
bvudit NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1YVudII
z w = i 2 Su =
= = i= = = XN = :
e a c = Cc WO = C
= a ar oc S \) a =
3 0 “G o a 3 eee C
| 2 4 z = Zz a ae 2
JTUTION | NOLLNLILSNI_NVINOSHLIWS _SAlYVY IT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION _
re) = wh e) = ce) Wy = c
= ow ; = w = Ly @D =
: 2 Xe 5 : 5 FY:
F = VANE > e GY :
. = WWE 2 SG GE r
” m Wy ah m wn mm 4
| = w ae = o z a
\WYIT_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS Saluwvyat
Ui = “y = ; = y 4 < =
y = ofl 4 =
“ So YF, Ys,
5 = 8 OG fr? 2
= ‘ Z z,
” = 2 a =
TUTION NOILNLILSNI LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
i
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31yuVuSII
z S = SO. = e = a
=. ISON, Te AASON, oO aa ~
o aS RS = ‘ w aS Dr = Say » ow o 6 <nsv » a
fer 2| > YY MY mee iS a) 5 z\ 2 en & oer:
> |e Ws] EZ ZG > se wes] & (5 4) > ag 2) 5
NOILNLILSNI
TIRRPARIFEFS SAAITHCONIAN
LIBRARIES
NOILNLILSNI
LIBRARIES
NOILNLILSNI
oe ‘i |
3 9088 0120